09-18-126-9622 - HARTING TECHNOLOGY GROUP

To our customers,

Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents

On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology

Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both

companies. Therefore, although the old company name remains in this document, it is a valid

Renesas Electronics document. We appreciate your understanding.

Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com

April 1st, 2010

Renesas Electronics Corporation

Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com)

Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry.

Notice

1. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is

subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please

confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to

additional and different information to be disclose d by Renesa s Electronics such as that disclosed through our website.

2. Renesas Electronics does not assum e any liability for inf ringement of patents, co pyrights, or other int ellectual property rights

of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Elec tronics products or technical information described in this document.

No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights

of Renesas Electronics or others.

3. You should not alter, m odify, copy, or otherw ise misappropriate an y Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part.

4. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of

semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software,

and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsi bility for any losse s incurred by

you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information.

5. When exporting the products or technol ogy described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control

laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such law s and regulations. You should not use Renesas

Electronics products or the technology described in this docum ent for any purpose rela ting to military applications or use by

the military, including but not limited to the developm ent of weapons of ma ss destruction. Renesas Electronics products and

technology may not be used for or incor porated into any products or system s whose manufac ture, use, or sale is prohibited

under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations.

6. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in prepa ring the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics

does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages

incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein.

7. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: “Standard”, “High Quality”, and

“Specific”. The recom mended applicatio ns for each Renesas Electronics prod uct depends on the produc t’s quality grade, as

indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular

application. You may not use any Renesas Elec tronics product for any application cate gorized as “Spec ific” without the prior

written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any applic ation for

which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way

liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an

application categorized as “Specific” or for which the product is not intende d where you have failed to obtain the prior written

consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is “Standard” unless otherwise

expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc.

“Standard”: Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual

equipment; home electronic appli ances; mac hine tools; personal electronic equipm ent; and industrial robots.

“High Quality”: Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anti-

crime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support.

“Specific”: Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or

systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare

intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life.

8. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics,

especially with respect to the m aximum rating , opera ting supply voltag e range, movement power voltage ra nge, heat radiation

characteristics, installation and other product characteristic s. Re nesas Electronics shall have no liabil ity for malfunctions or

damages arising out of the use of Re nesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges.

9. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliabili ty of its products, semiconductor products have

specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further,

Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation res istance design. Pleas e be sure to implement saf ety measures to

guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a

Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire

control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because

the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system

manufactured by you.

10. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental

compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable

laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substa nces, including without lim itation, the EU R oHS

Directive. Renesas Electronics assum es no liability for damage s or losses occurring as a result of your noncom pliance with

applicable laws and regulatio ns.

11. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas

Electronics.

12. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions re garding the information conta ined in this

document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries.

(Note 1) “Renesas Electronics” as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-

owned subsidiaries.

(Note 2) “Re nesas Electronics produc t(s)” means any product develope d or manufactured by or for Re nesas Electronics.

H8S/2218 Group,

H8S/2212 Group

Hardware Manual

User’s Manual

Rev.7.00 2008.12

Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer

H8S Family/H8S/2200 Series

H8S/2218 HD64F2218

HD64F2218U

HD6432217

H8S/2218C HD64F2218CU

HD64F2217CU

H8S/2212 HD64F2212

HD64F2212U

HD64F2211

HD64F2211U

HD6432211

HD6432210

HD6432210S

H8S/2212C HD64F2212CU

HD64F2211CU

HD64F2210CU

The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page.

The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and

additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the

relevant text.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page ii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate

Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the

accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any

intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in

this document.

2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising

out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts,

programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples.

3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military

applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military

use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export

control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations.

4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and

application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is

subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this

document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular

and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed

through our website. (http://www.renesas.com )

5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas

assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information

included in this document.

6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in

light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application.

Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any

particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the

information in this document or Renesas products.

7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas

products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or

malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require

especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and

traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication

transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas

sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above.

8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below:

(1) artificial life support devices or systems

(2) surgical implantations

(3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.)

(4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life

Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who

elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas

Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all

damages arising out of such applications.

9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect

to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation

characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or

damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges.

10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific

characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use

conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and

injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for

hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention,

appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the

evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or

system manufactured by you.

11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas

products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very

high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your

products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment.

12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written

approval from Renesas.

13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this

document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries.

Notes regarding these materials

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page iii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products

The following usage notes are applicable to all MPU/MCU products from Renesas. For detailed usage notes

on the products covered by this manual, refer to the relevant sections of the manual. If the descriptions under

General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products and in the body of the manual differ from each

other, the description in the body of the manual takes precedence.

1. Handling of Unused Pins

Handle unused pins in accord with the directions given under Handling of Unused Pins in

the manual.

⎯ The input pins of CMOS products are generally in the high-impedance state. In

operation with an unused pin in the open-circuit state, extra electromagnetic noise is

induced in the vicinity of LSI, an associated shoot-through current flows internally, and

malfunctions may occur due to the false recognition of the pin state as an input signal.

Unused pins should be handled as described under Handling of Unused Pins in the

manual.

2. Processing at Power-on

The state of the product is undefined at the moment when power is supplied.

⎯ The states of internal circuits in the LSI are indeterminate and the states of register

settings and pins are undefined at the moment when power is supplied.

In a finished product where the reset signal is applied to the external reset pin, the

states of pins are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the

reset process is completed.

In a similar way, the states of pins in a product that is reset by an on-chip power-on

reset function are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the

power reaches the level at which resetting has been specified.

3. Prohibition of Access to Reserved Addresses

Access to reserved addresses is prohibited.

⎯ The reserved addresses are provided for the possible future expansion of functions. Do

not access these addresses; the correct operation of LSI is not guaranteed if they are

accessed.

4. Clock Signals

After applying a reset, only release the reset line after the operating clock signal has

become stable. When switching the clock signal during program execution, wait until the

target clock signal has stabilized.

⎯ When the clock signal is generated with an external resonator (or from an external

oscillator) during a reset, ensure that the reset line is only released after full stabilization

of the clock signal. Moreover, when switching to a clock signal produced with an

external resonator (or by an external oscillator) while program execution is in progress,

wait until the target clock signal is stable.

5. Differences between Products

Before changing from one product to another, i.e. to one with a different type number,

confirm that the change will not lead to problems.

⎯ The characteristics of MPU/MCU in the same group but having different type numbers

may differ because of the differences in internal memory capacity and layout pattern.

When changing to products of different type numbers, implement a system-evaluation

test for each of the products.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page iv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Configuration of This Manual

This manual comprises the following items:

1. General Precautions on Handling of Product

2. Configuration of This Manual

3. Preface

4. Main Revisions for This Edition (only for revised versions)

The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions.

This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this

manual.

5. Contents

6. Overview

7. Description of Functional Modules

• CPU and System-Control Modules

• On-Chip Peripheral Modules

The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the

module. However, the generic style includes the following items:

i) Feature

ii) Input/Output Pin

iii) Register Description

iv) Operation

v) Usage Note

When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section

includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the

final part of each section.

8. List of Registers

9. Electrical Characteristics

10. Appendix

11. Index

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page v of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Preface

This LSI is a microcomputer (MCU) made up of the H8S/2000 CPU with Renesas Technology’s

original architecture as its core, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system.

The H8S/2000 CPU has an internal 32-bit configuration, sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a

simple and optimized instruction set for high-speed operation. The H8S/2000 CPU can handle a

16-Mbyte linear address space.

This LSI is equipped with ROM and RAM, a direct memory access controller (DMAC), a bus

master, a 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU), a watchdog timer (WDT), a realtime clock (RTC), a

universal serial bus (USB), two types of serial communication interfaces (SCIs), an A/D converter,

and I/O ports as on-chip peripheral modules for system configuration.

A single-power flash memory (F-ZTAT™*) version and masked ROM version are available for

this LSI’s ROM. The F-ZTAT version provides flexibility as it can be reprogrammed in no time to

cope with all situations from the early stages of mass production to full-scale mass production.

This is particularly applicable to application devices with specifications that will most probably

change.

This manual describes this LSI’s hardware.

Note: * F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology, Corp.

Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2218 Group and

H8S/2212 Group in the design of application systems. Target users are expected to

understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and

microcomputers.

Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical

characteristics of the H8S/2218 Group and H8S/2212 Group to the target users.

Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual for a detailed

description of the instruction set.

Notes on reading this manual:

• In order to understand the overall functions of the chip

Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts

on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics.

• In order to understand the details of the CPU’s functions

Read the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page vi of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

• In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known

Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the

List of Registers.

Examples: Register name: The following notation is used for cases when the same or a

similar function, e.g. 16-bit timer pulse unit or serial

communication, is implemented on more than one channel:

XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel

number)

Bit order: The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.

Number notation: Binary is B'xxxx, hexadecimal is H'xxxx.

Signal notation: An overbar is added to a low-active signal: xxxx

Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.

Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require.

http://www.renesas.com/

H8S/2218 Group, H8S/2212 Group Manuals:

Document Title Document No.

H8S/2218 Group, H8S/2212 Group Hardware Manual This manual

H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual REJ09B0139

User’s Manuals for Development Tools:

Document Title Document No.

H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor

Compiler Package Ver. 6.01 User’s Manual

REJ10B0161

H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger (for Windows) User’s Manual REJ10B0211

H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop,

High-performance Debugging Interface Tutorial

ADE-702-231

High-performance Embedded Workshop User’s Manual ADE-702-201

Application Notes:

Document Title Document No.

H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler Package Application Note REJ05B0464

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page vii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Main Revisions for This Edition

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

1.1 Overview

• On-chip memory

1 Table amended

H8S/2218 Group

Part No. ROM RAM Remarks

Flash memory Version HD64F2218 128 kbytes 12 kbytes SCI boot mode

HD64F2218U 128 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2218CU 128 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2217CU 64 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

Masked ROM Version HD6432217 64 kbytes 8 kbytes

ROM

2 Table amended

H8S/2212 Group

Part

No. ROM RAM Remarks

Flash memory Version HD64F2212 128 kbytes 12 kbytes SCI boot mode

HD64F2212U 128 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2212CU 128 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2211 64 kbytes 8 kbytes SCI boot mode

HD64F2211U 64 kbytes 8 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2211CU 64 kbytes 8 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2210CU 32 kbytes 8 kbytes USB boot mode

Masked ROM Version HD6432211 64 kbytes 8 kbytes

HD6432210 32 kbytes 4 kbytes

HD6432210S 32 kb ytes 4 kbytes

ROM

1.2 Internal Block

Diagram

3 Description amended

The internal block diagram of the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU and HD64F2217CU is shown in figure 1.1. The

internal block diagram of the HD6432217 is shown in figure 1.2.

The internal block diagram of the HD64F2212, HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU

and HD64F2210CU is shown in figure 1.3.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page viii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

1.2 Internal Block

Diagram

Figure 1.1 Internal

Block Diagram of

HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU

and HD642217CU

3 Title and figure amended

VCC

VSS

DrVCC

DrVSS

EMLE*

TDO*

TCK*

TMS*

TRST*

TDI*

MD2

MD1

MD0

EXTAL

XTAL

PLLVCC

PLLVSS

OSC1

OSC2

STBY

RES

NMI

FWE

USPND/TMOW

Boundary scan/H-UDI*

Interrupts controll

Main clock

pulse

generator

Sub-clock

pulse

generator

Note *1 shown below deleted

Notes: 1. The FWE pin is provided only in the HD64F2218 and

HD64F2218U.

Figure 1.2 Internal

Block Diagram of

HD6432217

4 Note amended

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version.

Figure 1.3 Internal

Block Diagram of

HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU and

HD64F2210CU

5 Title and figure amended

VCC

VSS

DrVCC

DrVSS

MD2

MD1

MD0

EXTAL

XTAL

PLLVCC

PLLVSS

OSC1

OSC2

STBY

RES

NMI

FWE

USPND/TMOW

EMLE*

TDO/P77*

TCK/P76*

TMS/P75*

TRST/NC*

TDI/PG0*

H-UDI/ports

7 and G*

Interrupts co

Main clock

pulse

generator

Sub-clock

pulse

generator

Note *1 shown below deleted

Notes: 1. The FWE pin is provided only in the HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U, HD64F2211 andHD64F2211U.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page ix of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

1.2 Internal Block

Diagram

Figure 1.4 Internal

Block Diagram of

HD6432211,

HD6432210 and

HD6432210S

6 Note amended

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version.

1.3 Pin

Arrangements

7 Description amended

The pin arrangements of the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU and HD64F2217CU are shown in figures 1.5

and 1.6. The pin arrangements of the HD6432217 are shown in

figures 1.7 and 1.8. The pin arrangements of the HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU are shown in figures 1.9

and 1.11.

Figure 1.5 Pin

Arrangements of

HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU and

HD64F2217CU (TFP-

100G, TFP-100GV)

Title and figure amended

PD4/D12

PD5/D13

PD6/D14

PD7/D15

FWE

NMI

EMLE*

TDO*

TCK*

TMS*

TRST*

TDI*

VCC

75 PD3/D11

Note *1 shown below deleted

Notes: 1. The FWE pin is provided only in the HD64F2218,

andHD64F2218U.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page x of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

Figure 1.6 Pin

Arrangements of

HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU

and HD64F2217CU

(BP-112, BP-112V)

8 Title and figure amended

NC PD3/D11

PD0/D8

PE5/D5

PD5/D13 PD4/D12

PD2/D10

PE7/D7

FWE PD7/D15

PD1/D9

TDO*EMLE*

NMI

PD6/D14

TRST*TDI*

TMS

*TCK*

PF7/φVSS

VCC

PF6/AS

ABCD

Note *1 shown below deleted

Notes: 1. The FWE pin is provided only in the HD64F2218,

andHD64F2218U.

Figure 1.7 Pin

Arrangements of

HD6432217 (TFP-

100G, TFP-100GV)

9 Note amended

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version.

Figure 1.8 Pin

Arrangements of

HD6432217 (BP-112,

BP-112V)

10 Note amended

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version.

Figure 1.9 Pin

Arrangements of

HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU and

HD64F2210CU

(FP-64E, FP-64EV)

11 Title and figure amended

PE7

FWE

NMI

EMLE*

TDO/P77*

TCK/P76*

TMS/P75*

TRST/NC*

TDI/PG0*

VCC

Note *1 shown below deleted

Notes: 1. The FWE pin is provided only in the HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U, HD64F2211 andHD64F2211U.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xi of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

1.3 Pin Arrangement

Figure 1.10 Pin

Arrangements of

HD6432211,

HD6432210 and

HD6432210S (FP-

64E, FP-64EV)

12 Note amended

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version.

Figure 1.11 Pin

Arrangements of

HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU and

HD64F2210CU

(TNP-64B, TNP-64BV)

13 Title and figure amended

PE7

FWE

NMI

EMLE*

TDO/P77*

TCK/P76*

TMS/P75*

TRST/NC*

TDI/PG0*

VCC

Note *1 shown below deleted

Notes: 1. The FWE pin is provided only in the HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U, HD64F2211 andHD64F2211U.

Figure 1.12 Pin

Arrangements of

HD6432211,

HD6432210 and

HD6432210S (TNP-

64B, TNP-64BV)

14 Note amended

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version.

1.5 Pin Functions 26 Table amended

Pin No.

Type S ymbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Func tion

TMS 85 C7 54 Input Control signal input pin for the

boundary scan

TCK 84 D7 53 Input Clock input pin for the boundary

scan

TDO 83 A8 52 Output Data output pin for the boundary

scan

TDI 87 B7 56 Input Data input pin for the boundary

scan

Boundary

scan

(Supported only

by the

HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU

and

HD64F2217CU)

TRST 86 A7 55 Input Reset pin for the TAP controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

3.4 Memory Map in

Each Operating Mode

Figure 3.1 Memory

Map in Each

Operating Mode for

HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U and

HD64F2218CU

77 Title amended

Figure 3.2 Memory

Map in Each

Operating Mode for

HD64F2217CU

78 Figure added

Figure 3.4 Memory

Map in Each

Operating Mode for

HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU,

HD64F2210CU,

HD6432211,

HD6432210 and

HD6432210S

80 Figure replaced

4.3 Reset 83 Notes amended

Notes: TRST in the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU and HD64F2217CU, which incorporate

a boundary scan function, should be brought low when

power is on.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xiii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

12.3.7 Serial Status

• Normal Serial

Communication

Interface Mode

(When SMIF in

SCMR is 0)

377 to

379

Note added

Bit Bit Name

Initial

Value R/W Description

7 TDRE 1 R/(W)*1 Transmit Data Register Empty

……

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1*2

……

6 RDRF 0 R/(W)*1 Receive Data Register Full

……

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1*2

……

5 ORER 0 R/(W)*1 Overrun Error

……

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1*2

……

4 FER 0 R/(W)*1 Framing Error

……

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1*2

……

3 PER 0 R/(W)*1 Parity Error

……

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1*2

……

Note: 1. The write value should always be 0 to clear the flag.

2. To clear the flag by the CPU on the HD6432210S,

reread the flag after writing 0 to it.

• Smart Card Interface

Mode (When SMIF in

SCMR is 1)

380 to

383

Note added

Bit Bit Name

Initial

Value R/W Description

7 TDRE 1 R/(W)*1 Transmit Data Register Empty

……

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1*2

……

6 RDRF 0 R/(W)*1 Receive Data Register Full

……

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1*2

……

5 ORER 0 R/(W)*1 Overrun Error

……

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1*2

……

4 ERS 0 R/(W)*1 Error Signal Status

……

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to ERS after reading ERS = 1*2

……

3 PER 0 R/(W)*1 Parity Error

……

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1*2

……

Note: 1. The write value should always be 0 to clear the flag.

2. To clear the flag by the CPU on the HD6432210S,

reread the flag after writing 0 to it.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xiv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

12.3.11 Bit Rate

• Table 12.6 BRR

Settings for Various

Bit Rates (Clocked

Synchronous Mode)

401 Table amended

Operating Frequency (MHz)

2 24

Bit Rate

(bps) n N n n N

110 3 70 —

250 2 124 2

500 1 249 2 — —

1 k 1 124 1 — —

2.5 k 0 199 1 2 149

5 k 0 99 0 2 74

10 k 0 49 0 1 149

25 k 0 19 0 0 239

50 k 0 9 0 0 119

100 k 0 4 0 0 59

250 k 0 1 0 0 23

500 k 0 0* 0 0 11

1 M 0 0 5

2 M 0 2

2.5 M

4 M

5 M

6 M 0 0*

......

12.4.2. Receive Data

Sampling Timing and

Reception Margin in

Asynchronous Mode

Figure 12.6 Receive

Data Sampling Timing

in Asynchronous Mode

405 Note added

Note: * In this example the value of the ABCS bit in SEMRA_0

is 0. When ABCS is set to 1, the basic clock frequency is eight

times the bit rate and the receive data is sampled at the fourth

rising edge of the basic clock.

Section 13 Boundary

Scan Function

449 Description amended

The HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and

HD64F2217CU incorporate a boundary scan function, which is

a serial I/O interface based on the JTAG (Joint Test Action

Group, IEEEStd.1149.1 and IEEE Standard Test Access Port

and Boundary Scan Architecture).

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

13.3.2 IDCODE

454 Description amended

...The HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and

HD64F2217CU output fixed codes H'002A200F from the TDO.

...

Table 13.3 IDCODE

Table amended

Bits

HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU and

HD64F2217CU codes

Contents

14.3.5 USB FIFO

Clear Register 0

(UFCLR0)

475 to

476

Bit Table amended

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7, 6 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always rea

modified.

5 EP2CLR 0 W EP2 Clear*

0: Performs no operation.

1: Clears EP2 OUT FIFO.

Note added

Note:* When DMA writes are enabled (EP2T1 set to 1 and

EP2T0 set to 0 or 1 in UDMAR), it is not possible to

clear the data in the FIFO by writing 1 to EP2CLR. To

clear the data in the FIFO, disable DMA transfers (clear

EP2T1 and EP2T0 in UDMAR to 0) and then write 1 to

EP2CLR.

14.8.16 Clearing the

FIFO when DMA

Transfer Is Enabled

533 Description added

When DMA transfer is enabled (EP2T1 = 1 and EP2T0 = 0 or 1

in UDMAR) at endpoint 2, it is not possible to clear OUTFIFO in

EP2. It is necessary to disable DMA transfer (EP2T1 = 0 and

EP2T0 = 0 in UDMAR) before clearing the FIFO.

Section 16 RAM 551 Description amended

The HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, and HD64F2218CU have 12

kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM. The HD6432217,

HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, and HD64F2211CU have 8 kbytes

of on-chip high-speed static RAM. The HD6432210 and

HD6432210S have 4 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM.

The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus,

enabling one-state access by the CPU to both byte data and

word data.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xvi of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

Section 16 RAM 551 Table amended

Product Class ROM Type RAM Size RAM Address

HD64F2218

HD64F2218U

HD64F2218CU

Flash memory Version 12 kbytes H'FFC000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

H8S/2218

Group

HD64F2217CU

HD6432217 Masked ROM Version 8 kbytes H'FFD000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

H8S/2212

Group HDF64F2212

HDF64F2212U

HDF64F2212CU

Flash memory Version 12 kbytes H'FFC000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

HD64F2211

HD64F2211U

HD64F2211CU

8 kbytes H'FFD000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

HD64F2210CU

HD6432211 Masked ROM Version 8 kbytes H'FFD000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

HD6432210

HD6432210S 4 kbytes H'FFE000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

17.1 Features

• Size:

553 Table amended

Product Class ROM Size ROM Address

H8S/2218 Group HD64F2218, HD64F2218U

HD64F2218CU 128 kbytes H'000000 to H'01FFFF

(Modes 6 and 7)

HD64F2217CU 64 kbytes H'000000 to H'00FFFF

(Modes 6 and 7)

H8S/2212 Group HD64F2212, HD64F2212U

HD64F2212CU 128 kbytes H'000000 to H'01FFFF

(Mode 7)

HD64F2211, HD64F2211U

HD64F2211CU 64 kbytes H'000000 to H'00FFFF

(Mode 7)

HD64F2210CU 32 kbytes H'000000 to H'007FFF

(Mode 7)

• Two flash memory

operating modes

Description amended

⎯ Boot mode

SCI boot mode: HD64F2218, HD64F2212, and

HD64F2211

USB boot mode: HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU,

HD64F2217CU, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xvii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

17.1 Features

Figure 17.1 Block

Diagram of Flash

Memory

554 Note amended

Note: * 128 kbytes in the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU, HD64F2212, HD64F2212U and

HD64F2212CU;

64 kbytes in the HD64F2217CU, HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U and HD64F2211CU.

32 kbytes in the HD64F2210CU

17.3 Block

Configuration

558 Description amended

Figure 17.5 shows the block configuration of 128-kbyte flash

memory in the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU,

HDHD64F2212, HD64F2212U and HD64F2212CU.

Figure 17.5 Flash

Memory Block

Configuration

(HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU,

HD64F2212,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU)

Title amended

Figure 17.6 Flash

Memory Block

Configuration

(HD64F2217CU,

HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU)

559 Description and title amended

Figure 17.6 shows the block configuration of 64-kbyte flash

memory in the HD64F2217CU, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U and

HD64F2211CU.

Figure 17.7 Flash

Memory Block

Configuration

(HD64F2210CU)

560 Figure and description added

17.4 Input/Output Pins

Table 17.2 Pin

Configuration

561 Table amended

Pin Name I/O Function

USD+, USD− Input/output USB data input/output

VBUS Input USB cable connect/cut detect

UBPM Input USB bus power mode/self power mode select

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU,

HD64F2217CU,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211U

USPND Output USB suspend output

P36 (PUPD+) Output D+ pull-up control

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xviii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

17.6 On-Board

Programming Modes

Table 17.3 Setting

On-Board

Programming Modes

567 Table amended

Mode

SCI boot mode

(HD64F2218,

HD64F2212,

HD64F2211)

USB boot mode

(HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU,

HD64F2217CU,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU,

HD64F2210CU)

17.6.1 SCI Boot Mode

(HD64F2218,

HD64F2212, and

HD64F2211)

569 Description amended

5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area (four kbytes) is

used by the boot program. The area to which the programming

control program is transferred from the host is 8 kbytes

(H'FFC000 to H'FFDFFF) in the HD64F2218 and

HD64F2212 and 4 kbytes (H'FFD000 to H'FFDFFF) in

the HD64F2211 . The boot program area cannot be used

until the execution state in boot mode switches to the

programming control program.

17.6.2 USB Boot

Mode (HD64F2218U,

HD64F2212U, and

HD64F2211U)

573 Description amended

4. In boot mode, the 4-kbyte on-chip RAM area H'FFE000 to

H'FFEFBF is used by the boot program. The programming

control program is transferred from the host stored in the 8-

kbyte area H'FFC000 to H'FFDFFF in the HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU, HD64F2212U, and HD64F2212CU and the 4-

kbyte area H'FFD000 to H'FFDFFF in the HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xix of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

22.2 Power Supply

Voltage and Operating

Frequency Range

Figure 22.1 Power

Supply Voltage and

Operating Ranges

658 Figure amended

(5) When using the on-chip USB

(4) F-ZTAT versions (H8S/2218C, H8S/2212C)

(1) Mask ROM versions (except for HD6432210S)

System clock

Sub clock

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

Power ssupply voltage Vcc, PLLVcc, DrVcc (V)

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 2.4 to 3.6V

Vref = 2.4V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 MHz

Condition A:

Condition C:

Condition B:

Condition D:

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 2.7 to 3.6V

Vref = 2.7V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 16 MHz

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 3.0 to 3.6V

Vref = 3.0V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 24 MHz

Condition D: Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 3.0 to 3.6V

Vref = 3.0V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 16 to 24 MHz

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 3.0 to 3.6V

Vref = 3.0V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 24 MHz

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

(3) F-ZTAT versions (except for H8S/2218C, H8S/2212C)

System clock

Sub clock

Power ssupply voltage Vcc, PLLVcc, DrVcc (V)

Condition A:

Condition B:

Condition C:

None

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 2.7 to 3.6V

Vref = 2.7V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 16 MHz

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 3.0 to 3.6V

Vref = 3.0V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 24 MHz

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

System clock

Sub clock

(2) Masked ROM version (HD6432210S)

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

Power ssupply voltage Vcc, PLLVcc, DrVcc (V)

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

System clock

Sub clock

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xx of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)

B. Product Model

Lineup

689 to

690

Table amended

H8S/2212

Group HD64F2211U HD64F2211UFP24 2211UFP24 64-pin LQFP

(FP-64E, FP-64EV)

Flash

memory

Version HD64F2211UNP24 F2211UNP24 64-pin VQFN

(TNP-64B, TNP-64BV)

HD64F2211CU HD64F2211CUFP24 2211CUFP24 64-pin LQFP

(FP-64EV)

HD64F2211CUNP24 F2211CUNP24 64-pin VQFN

(TNP-64BV)

HD64F2210CU HD64F2210CUFP24 2210CUFP24 64-pin LQFP

(FP-64EV)

HD64F2210CUNP24 F2210CUNP24 64-pin VQFN

(TNP-64BV)

Product Class Part No. Model Name Marking Package (code)

HD64F2218 HD64F2218TF24 F2218TF24 100-pin TQFP

(TFP-100G, TFP-100GV)

H8S/2218

Group

HD64F2218BR24 64F2218BR24 112-pin P-LFBGA

(BP-112, BP-112V)

Flash

memory

Version

HD64F2218CU HD64F2218CUTF24 F2218CUTF24 100-pin TQFP

(TFP-100GV)

HD64F2218CUBR24 64F2218CUBR24 112-pin P-LFBGA

(BP-112V)

HD64F2217CU HD64F2217CUTF24 F2217CUTF24 100-pin TQFP

(TFP-100GV)

HD64F2217CUBR24 64F2217CUBR24 112-pin P-LFBGA

(BP-112V)

HD6432217 HD6432217(***)TF 2217(***)TF 100-pin TQFP

(TFP-100G, TFP-100GV)

Masked

ROM

H8S/2212

Group HD64F2212 HD64F2212FP24 2212FP24 64-pin LQFP

(FP-64E, FP-64EV)

Flash

memory

Version HD64F2212NP24 F2212NP24 64-pin VQFN

(TNP-64B, TNP-64BV)

HD64F2212U HD64F2212UFP24 2212UFP24 64-pin LQFP

(FP-64E, FP-64EV)

HD64F2212UNP24 F2212UNP24 64-pin VQFN

(TNP-64B, TNP-64BV)

HD64F2212CU HD64F2212CUFP24 2212CUFP24 64-pin LQFP

(FP-64EV)

HD64F2212CUNP24 F2212CUNP24 64-pin VQFN

(TNP-64BV)

HD64F2211 HD64F2211FP24 2211FP24 64-pin LQFP

All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxi of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Contents

Section 1 Overview............................................................................................................. 1

1.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 3

1.3 Pin Arrangements.............................................................................................................. 7

1.4 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................ 15

1.5 Pin Functions .................................................................................................................... 21

Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 31

2.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 31

2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU .................................. 32

2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU............................................................................. 33

2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU.......................................................................... 33

2.2 CPU Operating Modes...................................................................................................... 34

2.2.1 Normal Mode ....................................................................................................... 34

2.2.2 Advanced Mode................................................................................................... 36

2.3 Address Space................................................................................................................... 38

2.4 Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 39

2.4.1 General Registers................................................................................................. 40

2.4.2 Program Counter (PC) ......................................................................................... 41

2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR) ....................................................................... 41

2.4.4 Condition-Code Register (CCR).......................................................................... 42

2.4.5 Initial Register Values.......................................................................................... 43

2.5 Data Formats..................................................................................................................... 43

2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................ 43

2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ......................................................................................... 45

2.6 Instruction Set ................................................................................................................... 45

2.6.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ....................................................... 47

2.6.2 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... 57

2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation..................................................... 58

2.7.1 Register Direct—Rn............................................................................................. 58

2.7.2 Register Indirect—@ERn .................................................................................... 58

2.7.3 Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn).............. 59

2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn .. 59

2.7.5 Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32.................................... 59

2.7.6 Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 ................................................................. 60

2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC).................................... 60

2.7.8 Memory Indirect—@@aa:8 ................................................................................ 61

2.7.9 Effective Address Calculation ............................................................................. 62

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

2.8 Processing States ............................................................................................................... 64

2.9 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 66

2.9.1 Note on TAS Instruction Usage ........................................................................... 66

2.9.2 STM/LTM Instruction Usage............................................................................... 66

2.9.3 Note on Bit Manipulation Instructions ................................................................. 66

2.9.4 Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits ................................................ 68

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes................................................................................... 71

3.1 Operating Mode Selection................................................................................................. 71

3.2 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 72

3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR).......................................................................... 72

3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 72

3.3 Operating Mode Descriptions............................................................................................ 74

3.3.1 Mode 4 (Supported Only by the H8S/2218 Group).............................................. 74

3.3.2 Mode 5 (Supported Only by the H8S/2218 Group).............................................. 74

3.3.3 Mode 6 (Supported Only by the H8S/2218 Group).............................................. 75

3.3.4 Mode 7 ................................................................................................................. 75

3.3.5 Pin Functions........................................................................................................ 76

3.4 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode............................................................................. 77

Section 4 Exception Handling.......................................................................................... 81

4.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority ............................................................................ 81

4.2 Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table................................................................ 81

4.3 Reset .................................................................................................................................. 83

4.3.1 Reset Types .......................................................................................................... 83

4.3.2 Reset Exception Handling .................................................................................... 84

4.3.3 Interrupts after Reset ............................................................................................ 86

4.3.4 State of On-Chip Peripheral Modules after Reset Release................................... 86

4.4 Traces ................................................................................................................................ 87

4.5 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 87

4.6 Trap Instruction ................................................................................................................. 88

4.7 Stack Status after Exception Handling .............................................................................. 89

4.8 Notes on Use of the Stack ................................................................................................. 90

Section 5 Interrupt Controller........................................................................................... 91

5.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 91

5.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 93

5.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 93

5.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A to G, J, K, M

(IPRA to IPRG, IPRJ, IPRK, IPRM) ................................................................... 94

5.3.2 IRQ Enable Register (IER)................................................................................... 95

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxiii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

5.3.3 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)..................................... 96

5.3.4 IRQ Status Register (ISR).................................................................................... 98

5.4 Interrupt Sources ............................................................................................................... 99

5.4.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 99

5.4.2 Internal Interrupts................................................................................................. 100

5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table...................................................................... 101

5.6 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ............................................................. 103

5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ..................................................................................... 103

5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 2 ..................................................................................... 105

5.6.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence .............................................................. 107

5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times .................................................................................... 108

5.6.5 DMAC Activation by Interrupt............................................................................ 109

5.7 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 112

5.7.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling..................................... 112

5.7.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ...................................................................... 113

5.7.3 Times when Interrupts Are Disabled ................................................................... 113

5.7.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction.......................................... 113

5.7.5 IRQ Interrupt........................................................................................................ 113

5.7.6 NMI Interrupt Usage Notes.................................................................................. 114

Section 6 Bus Controller.................................................................................................... 115

6.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 115

6.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 117

6.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 118

6.3.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)............................................................... 118

6.3.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) ............................................................. 119

6.3.3 Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL).............................................. 120

6.3.4 Bus Control Register H (BCRH).......................................................................... 124

6.3.5 Bus Control Register L (BCRL) .......................................................................... 125

6.3.6 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................ 126

6.4 Bus Control ....................................................................................................................... 127

6.4.1 Area Divisions ..................................................................................................... 127

6.4.2 Bus Specifications................................................................................................ 128

6.4.3 Bus Interface for Each Area................................................................................. 129

6.4.4 Chip Select Signals .............................................................................................. 130

6.5 Basic Timing..................................................................................................................... 131

6.5.1 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) Access Timing ................................................ 131

6.5.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Timing........................................................ 132

6.5.3 External Address Space Access Timing............................................................... 133

6.6 Basic Bus Interface ........................................................................................................... 134

6.6.1 Data Size and Data Alignment (Supported Only by the H8S/2218 Group)......... 134

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxiv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

6.6.2 Valid Strobes........................................................................................................ 135

6.6.3 Basic Timing ........................................................................................................ 136

6.6.4 Wait Control......................................................................................................... 145

6.7 Burst ROM Interface ......................................................................................................... 147

6.7.1 Basic Timing ........................................................................................................ 147

6.7.2 Wait Control......................................................................................................... 149

6.8 Idle Cycle .......................................................................................................................... 149

6.9 Bus Release ....................................................................................................................... 153

6.9.1 Bus Release Usage Note....................................................................................... 154

6.10 Bus Arbitration .................................................................................................................. 155

6.10.1 Operation.............................................................................................................. 155

6.10.2 Bus Transfer Timing ............................................................................................ 155

6.10.3 External Bus Release Usage Note ........................................................................ 156

6.11 Resets and the Bus Controller ........................................................................................... 156

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC).............................................................................. 157

7.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 157

7.2 Register Configuration ...................................................................................................... 159

7.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 161

7.3.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR)...................................................................... 161

7.3.2 I/O Address Register (IOAR)............................................................................... 161

7.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Register (ETCR)............................................................ 162

7.3.4 DMA Control Register (DMACR)....................................................................... 163

7.3.5 DMA Band Control Register (DMABCR)........................................................... 169

7.4 Operation........................................................................................................................... 177

7.4.1 Transfer Modes .................................................................................................... 177

7.4.2 Sequential Mode................................................................................................... 178

7.4.3 Idle Mode ............................................................................................................. 181

7.4.4 Repeat Mode ........................................................................................................ 183

7.4.5 Normal Mode ....................................................................................................... 186

7.4.6 Block Transfer Mode............................................................................................ 189

7.4.7 DMAC Activation Sources .................................................................................. 194

7.4.8 Basic DMAC Bus Cycles ..................................................................................... 196

7.4.9 DMAC Bus Cycles (Dual Address Mode) ........................................................... 197

7.4.10 DMAC Multi-Channel Operation......................................................................... 202

7.4.11 Relation between the DMAC and External Bus Requests.................................... 203

7.4.12 NMI Interrupts and DMAC.................................................................................. 203

7.4.13 Forced Termination of DMAC Operation............................................................ 204

7.4.14 Clearing Full Address Mode ................................................................................ 205

7.5 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 206

7.6 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 207

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

7.6.1 DMAC Register Access during Operation........................................................... 207

7.6.2 Module Stop......................................................................................................... 208

7.6.3 Medium-Speed Mode........................................................................................... 208

7.6.4 Activation Source Acceptance ............................................................................. 209

7.6.5 Internal Interrupt after End of Transfer................................................................ 209

7.6.6 Channel Re-Setting .............................................................................................. 209

Section 8 I/O Ports .............................................................................................................. 211

8.1 Port 1................................................................................................................................. 216

8.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)............................................................. 216

8.1.2 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)................................................................................ 217

8.1.3 Port 1 Register (PORT1)...................................................................................... 217

8.1.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 218

8.2 Port 3................................................................................................................................. 223

8.2.1 Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)............................................................. 223

8.2.2 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)................................................................................ 224

8.2.3 Port 3 Register (PORT3)...................................................................................... 224

8.2.4 Port 3 Open-Drain Control Register (P3ODR) .................................................... 225

8.2.5 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 225

8.3 Port 4................................................................................................................................. 227

8.3.1 Port 4 Register (PORT4)...................................................................................... 227

8.3.2 Pin Function......................................................................................................... 227

8.4 Port 7................................................................................................................................. 228

8.4.1 Port 7 Data Direction Register (P7DDR)............................................................. 228

8.4.2 Port 7 Data Register (P7DR)................................................................................ 229

8.4.3 Port 7 Register (PORT7)...................................................................................... 230

8.4.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 231

8.5 Port 9................................................................................................................................. 232

8.5.1 Port 9 Register (PORT9)...................................................................................... 232

8.5.2 Pin Function......................................................................................................... 232

8.6 Port A................................................................................................................................ 233

8.6.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) ........................................................... 233

8.6.2 Port A Data Register (PADR).............................................................................. 234

8.6.3 Port A Register (PORTA).................................................................................... 234

8.6.4 Port A Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PAPCR) ................................................ 235

8.6.5 Port A Open-Drain Control Register (PAODR) .................................................. 235

8.6.6 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 236

8.6.7 Port A Input Pull-Up MOS States........................................................................ 238

8.7 Port B (H8S/2218 Group Only) ........................................................................................ 239

8.7.1 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)............................................................ 239

8.7.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) .............................................................................. 240

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxvi of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

8.7.3 Port B Register (PORTB)..................................................................................... 240

8.7.4 Port B Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PBPCR)................................................. 241

8.7.5 Pin Functions........................................................................................................ 242

8.7.6 Port B Input Pull-Up MOS States ........................................................................ 244

8.8 Port C (H8S/2218 Group Only)......................................................................................... 245

8.8.1 Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR)............................................................ 245

8.8.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR)............................................................................... 246

8.8.3 Port C Register (PORTC)..................................................................................... 246

8.8.4 Port C Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PCPCR)................................................. 247

8.8.5 Pin Functions........................................................................................................ 247

8.8.6 Port C Input Pull-Up MOS States ........................................................................ 249

8.9 Port D (H8S/2218 Group Only)......................................................................................... 250

8.9.1 Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR) ........................................................... 250

8.9.2 Port D Data Register (PDDR) .............................................................................. 251

8.9.3 Port D Register (PORTD) .................................................................................... 251

8.9.4 Port D Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PDPCR)................................................. 252

8.9.5 Pin Functions........................................................................................................ 252

8.9.6 Port D Input Pull-Up MOS States ........................................................................ 254

8.10 Port E................................................................................................................................. 255

8.10.1 Port E Data Direction Register (PEDDR) ............................................................ 255

8.10.2 Port E Data Register (PEDR) ............................................................................... 256

8.10.3 Port E Register (PORTE) ..................................................................................... 256

8.10.4 Port E Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PEPCR) ................................................. 257

8.10.5 Pin Functions........................................................................................................ 257

8.10.6 Port E Input Pull-Up MOS States......................................................................... 260

8.11 Port F................................................................................................................................. 261

8.11.1 Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR)............................................................. 262

8.11.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR)................................................................................ 263

8.11.3 Port F Register (PORTF)...................................................................................... 263

8.11.4 Clock Output Control Register (OUTCR)............................................................ 264

8.11.5 Pin Functions........................................................................................................ 264

8.12 Port G ................................................................................................................................ 267

8.12.1 Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR) ........................................................... 268

8.12.2 Port G Data Register (PGDR) .............................................................................. 269

8.12.3 Port G Register (PORTG) .................................................................................... 269

8.12.4 Pin Functions........................................................................................................ 270

8.13 Handling of Unused Pins................................................................................................... 271

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)..................................................................... 273

9.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 273

9.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 277

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxvii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

9.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 278

9.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR)............................................................................. 279

9.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) ............................................................................ 282

9.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) ..................................................................... 284

9.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) .............................................................. 293

9.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................ 294

9.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 297

9.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................ 297

9.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR)................................................................................ 297

9.3.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) ......................................................................... 298

9.4 Interface to Bus Master ..................................................................................................... 299

9.4.1 16-Bit Registers ................................................................................................... 299

9.4.2 8-Bit Registers ..................................................................................................... 299

9.5 Operation........................................................................................................................... 301

9.5.1 Basic Functions.................................................................................................... 301

9.5.2 Synchronous Operation........................................................................................ 307

9.5.3 Buffer Operation .................................................................................................. 309

9.5.4 PWM Modes ........................................................................................................ 313

9.5.5 Phase Counting Mode .......................................................................................... 317

9.6 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 322

9.6.1 Interrupt Source and Priority................................................................................ 322

9.6.2 DMAC Activation................................................................................................ 323

9.6.3 A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................... 323

9.7 Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 324

9.7.1 Input/Output Timing ............................................................................................ 324

9.7.2 Interrupt Signal Timing........................................................................................ 327

9.8 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 331

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT).............................................................................. 339

10.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 339

10.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 340

10.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 340

10.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 340

10.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)............................................................ 342

10.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 343

10.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode ........................................................................................ 343

10.3.2 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF) ......................... 344

10.3.3 Interval Timer Mode............................................................................................ 344

10.3.4 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)......................................................... 345

10.4 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 345

10.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 346

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxviii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

10.5.1 Notes on Register Access ..................................................................................... 346

10.5.2 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment...................... 347

10.5.3 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0 ...................................................................... 348

10.5.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode ................ 348

10.5.5 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode ............................................................. 348

10.5.6 OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode......................................................... 348

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC) .................................................................................. 349

11.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 349

11.2 Input/Output Pin ................................................................................................................ 350

11.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 350

11.3.1 Second Data Register (RSECDR) ........................................................................ 350

11.3.2 Minute Data Register (RMINDR)........................................................................ 351

11.3.3 Hour Data Register (RHRDR).............................................................................. 352

11.3.4 Day-of-Week Data Register (RWKDR)............................................................... 353

11.3.5 RTC Control Register 1 (RTCCR1)..................................................................... 354

11.3.6 RTC Control Register 2 (RTCCR2)..................................................................... 355

11.3.7 Clock Source Select Register (RTCCSR) ............................................................ 356

11.3.8 Extended Module Stop Register (EXMDLSTP) .................................................. 357

11.4 Operation........................................................................................................................... 358

11.4.1 Initial Settings of Registers after Power-On and Resetting Procedure................. 358

11.4.2 Time Data Reading Procedure.............................................................................. 359

11.5 Interrupt Source................................................................................................................. 360

11.6 Operating State in Each Mode........................................................................................... 361

11.7 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 362

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface................................................................. 363

12.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 363

12.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 365

12.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 367

12.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 367

12.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)............................................................................... 368

12.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) .............................................................................. 368

12.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR) ............................................................................. 368

12.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR).............................................................................. 368

12.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)................................................................................ 369

12.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR).............................................................................. 373

12.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)................................................................................. 377

12.3.8 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) .................................................................... 383

12.3.9 Serial Extended Mode Register A_0 (SEMRA_0)............................................... 384

12.3.10 Serial Extended Mode Register B_0 (SEMRB_0) ............................................... 386

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxix of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

12.3.11 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 395

12.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode .................................................................................... 403

12.4.1 Data Transfer Format........................................................................................... 404

12.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode 405

12.4.3 Clock.................................................................................................................... 406

12.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode)............................................................. 407

12.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)........................................................... 408

12.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)...................................................... 410

12.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function......................................................................... 413

12.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ............................................................ 415

12.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception ................................................................. 416

12.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ........................................................................ 419

12.6.1 Clock.................................................................................................................... 419

12.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ................................................. 420

12.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .................................... 421

12.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode).......................................... 424

12.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception

(Clocked Synchronous Mode) ............................................................................. 425

12.7 Operation in Smart Card Interface .................................................................................... 427

12.7.1 Pin Connection Example...................................................................................... 427

12.7.2 Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode).................................................. 428

12.7.3 Clock.................................................................................................................... 429

12.7.4 Block Transfer Mode ........................................................................................... 429

12.7.5 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin....................................... 430

12.7.6 Initialization ......................................................................................................... 431

12.7.7 Serial Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode).............................. 432

12.7.8 Serial Data Reception (Except for Block Transfer Mode) ................................... 435

12.7.9 Clock Output Control........................................................................................... 436

12.8 SCI Select Function (Clocked Synchronous Mode).......................................................... 438

12.9 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 440

12.9.1 Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode............................... 440

12.9.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode ............................................................. 441

12.10 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 441

12.10.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 441

12.10.2 Break Detection and Processing (Asynchronous Mode Only)............................. 441

12.10.3 Mark State and Break Detection (Asynchronous Mode Only) ............................ 442

12.10.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations

(Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)..................................................................... 442

12.10.5 Restrictions on Use of DMAC............................................................................. 442

12.10.6 Operation in Case of Mode Transition................................................................. 443

12.10.7 Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function: .................................... 447

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxx of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function .............................................................................. 449

13.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 449

13.2 Pin Configuration .............................................................................................................. 451

13.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 452

13.3.1 Instruction Register (INSTR) ............................................................................... 452

13.3.2 IDCODE Register (IDCODE).............................................................................. 454

13.3.3 BYPASS Register (BYPASS).............................................................................. 454

13.3.4 Boundary Scan Register (BSCANR).................................................................... 454

13.4 Boundary Scan Function Operation .................................................................................. 462

13.4.1 TAP Controller..................................................................................................... 462

13.5 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 463

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)......................................................................... 465

14.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 465

14.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 467

14.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 467

14.3.1 USB Control Register (UCTLR).......................................................................... 468

14.3.2 USB DMAC Transfer Request Register (UDMAR) ............................................ 471

14.3.3 USB Device Resume Register (UDRR) ............................................................... 472

14.3.4 USB Trigger Register 0 (UTRG0) ....................................................................... 473

14.3.5 USB FIFO Clear Register 0 (UFCLR0) ............................................................... 475

14.3.6 USB Endpoint Stall Register 0 (UESTL0)........................................................... 476

14.3.7 USB Endpoint Stall Register 1 (UESTL1)........................................................... 477

14.3.8 USB Endpoint Data Register 0s (UEDR0s) ......................................................... 477

14.3.9 USB Endpoint Data Register 0i (UEDR0i) .......................................................... 477

14.3.10 USB Endpoint Data Register 0o (UEDR0o) ........................................................ 478

14.3.11 USB Endpoint Data Register 3 (UEDR3) ............................................................ 478

14.3.12 USB Endpoint Data Register 1 (UEDR1) ............................................................ 478

14.3.13 USB Endpoint Data Register 2 (UEDR2) ............................................................ 479

14.3.14 USB Endpoint Receive Data Size Register 0o (UESZ0o).................................... 479

14.3.15 USB Endpoint Receive Data Size Register 2 (UESZ2)........................................ 479

14.3.16 USB Interrupt Flag Register 0 (UIFR0) ............................................................... 480

14.3.17 USB Interrupt Flag Register 1 (UIFR1) ............................................................... 482

14.3.18 USB Interrupt Flag Register 3 (UIFR3) ............................................................... 483

14.3.19 USB Interrupt Enable Register 0 (UIER0)........................................................... 484

14.3.20 USB Interrupt Enable Register 1 (UIER1)........................................................... 485

14.3.21 USB Interrupt Enable Register 3 (UIER3)........................................................... 485

14.3.22 USB Interrupt Select Register 0 (UISR0)............................................................. 486

14.3.23 USB Interrupt Select Register 1 (UISR1)............................................................. 486

14.3.24 USB Interrupt Select Register 3 (UISR3)............................................................. 487

14.3.25 USB Data Status Register (UDSR) ...................................................................... 487

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxi of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.26 USB Configuration Value Register (UCVR)....................................................... 488

14.3.27 USB Test Register 0 (UTSTR0) .......................................................................... 489

14.3.28 USB Test Register 1 (UTSTR1) .......................................................................... 490

14.3.29 USB Test Registers 2 and A to F (UTSTR2, UTSTRA to UTSTRF).................. 492

14.3.30 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB).................................................... 492

14.3.31 Extended Module Stop Register (EXMDLSTP).................................................. 493

14.4 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 494

14.5 Communication Operation ................................................................................................ 497

14.5.1 Initialization ......................................................................................................... 497

14.5.2 USB Cable Connection/Disconnection................................................................ 498

14.5.3 Suspend and Resume Operations......................................................................... 502

14.5.4 Control Transfer................................................................................................... 506

14.5.5 Interrupt-In Transfer (Endpoint 3) ....................................................................... 512

14.5.6 Bulk-In Transfer (Dual FIFOs) (Endpoint 1)....................................................... 513

14.5.7 Bulk-Out Transfer (Dual FIFOs) (Endpoint 2) .................................................... 515

14.5.8 Processing of USB Standard Commands and Class/Vendor Commands............. 516

14.5.9 Stall Operations.................................................................................................... 517

14.6 DMA Transfer Specifications ........................................................................................... 520

14.6.1 DMAC Transfer by USB Request........................................................................ 520

14.6.2 DMA Transfer by Auto-Request.......................................................................... 522

14.7 USB External Circuit Example ......................................................................................... 525

14.8 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 527

14.8.1 Emulator Usage Notes ......................................................................................... 527

14.8.2 Bus Interface ........................................................................................................ 527

14.8.3 Operating Frequency............................................................................................ 527

14.8.4 Setup Data Reception........................................................................................... 528

14.8.5 FIFO Clear ........................................................................................................... 528

14.8.6 IRQ6 Interrupt...................................................................................................... 528

14.8.7 Data Register Overread or Overwrite................................................................... 528

14.8.8 Reset..................................................................................................................... 529

14.8.9 EP0 Interrupt Sources Assignment ...................................................................... 529

14.8.10 Level Shifter for VBUS and IRQx Pins............................................................... 530

14.8.11 USB Endpoint Data Read and Write.................................................................... 530

14.8.12 Restrictions on Entering and Canceling Power-Down Mode............................... 530

14.8.13 USB External Circuit Example ............................................................................ 532

14.8.14 Pin Processing when USB Not Used ................................................................... 533

14.8.15 Notes on TR Interrupt .......................................................................................... 533

14.8.16 Clearing the FIFO when DMA Transfer Is Enabled ............................................ 533

Section 15 A/D Converter................................................................................................. 535

15.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 535

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

15.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 537

15.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 537

15.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD).............................................. 538

15.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)................................................................ 538

15.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)............................................................................. 540

15.4 Interface to Bus Master ..................................................................................................... 541

15.5 Operation........................................................................................................................... 542

15.5.1 Single Mode ......................................................................................................... 542

15.5.2 Scan Mode............................................................................................................ 543

15.5.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time.......................................................... 544

15.5.4 External Trigger Input Timing ............................................................................. 545

15.6 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 546

15.7 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions .............................................................................. 546

15.8 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 548

15.8.1 Module Stop Mode Setting................................................................................... 548

15.8.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance.................................................................. 548

15.8.3 Influences on Absolute Precision ......................................................................... 548

15.8.4 Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pin Settings ...................................... 549

15.8.5 Notes on Board Design......................................................................................... 549

Section 16 RAM................................................................................................................... 551

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)............................................................. 553

17.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 553

17.2 Mode Transitions............................................................................................................... 555

17.3 Block Configuration.......................................................................................................... 558

17.4 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 561

17.5 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 561

17.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) ..................................................... 562

17.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) ..................................................... 563

17.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)............................................................................ 564

17.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)............................................................................ 564

17.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER) ................................................................... 565

17.5.6 Serial Control Register X (SCRX) ....................................................................... 566

17.6 On-Board Programming Modes ........................................................................................ 567

17.6.1 SCI Boot Mode (HD64F2218, HD64F2212, and HD64F2211)........................... 567

17.6.2 USB Boot Mode (HD64F2218U, HD64F2212U, and HD64F2211U)................. 571

17.6.3 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode ..................................................... 576

17.7 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM.................................................................................... 577

17.8 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing................................................................................ 579

17.8.1 Program/Program-Verify...................................................................................... 579

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxiii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

17.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify............................................................................................... 581

17.9 Program/Erase Protection.................................................................................................. 583

17.9.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 583

17.9.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 583

17.9.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... 583

17.10 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory....................................... 584

17.11 Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................ 585

17.12 Power-Down States for Flash Memory............................................................................. 586

17.13 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions..................................................... 587

17.14 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Masked ROM Version .............................. 592

Section 18 Masked ROM .................................................................................................. 593

18.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 593

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator .................................................................................. 595

19.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 596

19.1.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ........................................................... 596

19.1.2 Low Power Control Register (LPWRCR)............................................................ 597

19.2 System Clock Oscillator.................................................................................................... 600

19.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator........................................................................... 600

19.2.2 Inputting External Clock...................................................................................... 601

19.3 Duty Adjustment Circuit................................................................................................... 602

19.4 Medium-Speed Clock Divider .......................................................................................... 602

19.5 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit .................................................................................. 602

19.6 Subclock Oscillator........................................................................................................... 603

19.6.1 Connecting 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator.......................................................... 603

19.6.2 Handling Pins when Subclock Not Required....................................................... 603

19.7 Subclock Waveform Generation Circuit ........................................................................... 604

19.8 PLL Circuit for USB ......................................................................................................... 604

19.9 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 605

19.9.1 Note on Crystal Resonator ................................................................................... 605

19.9.2 Note on Board Design.......................................................................................... 605

19.9.3 Note on Switchover of External Clock ................................................................ 605

Section 20 Power-Down Modes...................................................................................... 607

20.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 611

20.1.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 611

20.1.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR_1)............................................................ 613

20.1.3 Module Stop Control Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC)................... 614

20.1.4 Extended Module Stop Register (EXMDLSTP).................................................. 617

20.2 Medium-Speed Mode........................................................................................................ 617

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxiv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

20.3 Sleep Mode........................................................................................................................ 618

20.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode ..................................................................................... 618

20.3.2 Exiting Sleep Mode.............................................................................................. 618

20.4 Software Standby Mode .................................................................................................... 619

20.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode.................................................................. 619

20.4.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode ........................................................................ 619

20.4.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode ... 620

20.4.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example .................................................... 620

20.5 Hardware Standby Mode................................................................................................... 621

20.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................ 621

20.5.2 Clearing Hardware Standby Mode ....................................................................... 621

20.5.3 Hardware Standby Mode Timing ......................................................................... 622

20.5.4 Hardware Standby Mode Timings........................................................................ 622

20.6 Module Stop Mode............................................................................................................ 623

20.7 Watch Mode ...................................................................................................................... 624

20.7.1 Transition to Watch Mode.................................................................................... 624

20.7.2 Exiting Watch Mode ............................................................................................ 624

20.8 Subsleep Mode .................................................................................................................. 625

20.8.1 Transition to Sleep Mode ..................................................................................... 625

20.8.2 Exiting Subsleep Mode ........................................................................................ 625

20.9 Subactive Mode................................................................................................................. 626

20.9.1 Transition to Subactive Mode .............................................................................. 626

20.9.2 Exiting Subactive Mode ....................................................................................... 626

20.10 Direct Transitions .............................................................................................................. 627

20.10.1 Direct Transitions from High-Speed Mode to Subactive Mode ........................... 627

20.10.2 Direct Transitions from Subactive Mode to High-Speed Mode ........................... 627

20.11 φ Clock Output Disabling Function................................................................................... 627

20.12 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 628

20.12.1 I/O Port Status ...................................................................................................... 628

20.12.2 Current Dissipation during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period........................ 628

20.12.3 Flash Memory Module Stop................................................................................. 628

20.12.4 DMAC Module Stop ............................................................................................ 628

20.12.5 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupt .................................................................. 628

20.12.6 Entering Subactive/Watch Mode and DMAC and DTC Module Stop................. 629

20.12.7 Writing to MSTPCR............................................................................................. 629

Section 21 List of Registers .............................................................................................. 631

21.1 Register Addresses (Address Order) ................................................................................. 632

21.2 Register Bits ...................................................................................................................... 640

21.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode........................................................................... 649

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics.............................................................................. 657

22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................................................................. 657

22.2 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range .................................................. 658

22.3 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 659

22.4 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 663

22.4.1 Clock Timing ....................................................................................................... 664

22.4.2 Control Signal Timing ......................................................................................... 666

22.4.3 Bus Timing .......................................................................................................... 668

22.4.4 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules............................................................. 675

22.5 USB Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 680

22.6 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................................ 682

22.7 Flash Memory Characteristics........................................................................................... 683

22.8 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 684

Appendix ............................................................................................................................. 685

A. I/O Port States in Each Processing State........................................................................... 685

B. Product Model Lineup ...................................................................................................... 689

C. Package Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 691

Index ............................................................................................................................. 695

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxvi of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxvii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Figures

Section 1 Overview

Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and

HD642217CU......................................................................................................... 3

Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of HD6432217 ................................................................. 4

Figure 1.3 Internal Block Diagram of HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU....................... 5

Figure 1.4 Internal Block Diagram of HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S.............. 6

Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangements of HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and

HD64F2217CU (TFP-100G, TFP-100GV)............................................................ 7

Figure 1.6 Pin Arrangements of HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and

HD64F2217CU (BP-112, BP-112V)...................................................................... 8

Figure 1.7 Pin Arrangements of HD6432217 (TFP-100G, TFP-100GV)................................ 9

Figure 1.8 Pin Arrangements of HD6432217 (BP-112, BP-112V) ......................................... 10

Figure 1.9 Pin Arrangements of HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU (FP-64E, FP-64EV)............ 11

Figure 1.10 Pin Arrangements of HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S

(FP-64E, FP-64EV)................................................................................................ 12

Figure 1.11 Pin Arrangements of HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU (TNP-64B, TNP-64BV) ..... 13

Figure 1.12 Pin Arrangements of HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S

(TNP-64B, TNP-64BV) ......................................................................................... 14

Section 2 CPU

Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)................................................................ 35

Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode ............................................................................ 35

Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)............................................................ 36

Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode........................................................................ 37

Figure 2.5 Memory Map.......................................................................................................... 38

Figure 2.6 CPU Registers ........................................................................................................ 39

Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers .................................................................................... 40

Figure 2.8 Stack....................................................................................................................... 41

Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1)......................................................................... 44

Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2)......................................................................... 44

Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats............................................................................................ 45

Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples) ............................................................................. 57

Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode...................................... 61

Figure 2.13 State Transitions..................................................................................................... 65

Figure 2.14 Flowchart of Method for Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.......... 69

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxviii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Figure 3.1 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode for HD64F2218, HD64F2218U and

HD64F2218CU....................................................................................................... 77

Figure 3.2 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode for HD64F2217CU .................................. 78

Figure 3.3 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode for HD6432217........................................ 79

Figure 3.4 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode for HD64F2212, HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU, HD64F2210CU,

HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S ......................................................... 80

Section 4 Exception Handling

Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Mode 4) ....................................................................................... 85

Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Modes 6 and 7)............................................................................ 86

Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling ................................................................... 89

Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value Is Odd ........................................................................... 90

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller ................................................................... 92

Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQn ......................................................................... 99

Figure 5.3 Timing of Setting IRQnF........................................................................................ 100

Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control

Mode 0.................................................................................................................... 104

Figure 5.5 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control

Mode 2.................................................................................................................... 106

Figure 5.6 Interrupt Exception Handling ................................................................................. 107

Figure 5.7 Interrupt Control for DMAC................................................................................... 110

Figure 5.8 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling........................................ 112

Section 6 Bus Controller

Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller........................................................................... 116

Figure 6.2 Overview of Area Divisions ................................................................................... 127

Figure 6.3 CSn Signal Output Timing (n = 0 to 5)................................................................... 130

Figure 6.4 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle ............................................................................. 131

Figure 6.5 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access ........................................................... 132

Figure 6.6 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle ............................................................. 132

Figure 6.7 Pin States during On-Chip Peripheral Module Access ........................................... 133

Figure 6.8 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space)........................... 134

Figure 6.9 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Space)......................... 135

Figure 6.10 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 2-State Access Space............................................................ 136

Figure 6.11 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 3-State Access Space (Except Area 6) ................................. 137

Figure 6.12 Bus Timing for Area 6 and RTC............................................................................. 138

Figure 6.13 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access) ..... 139

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xxxix of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 6.14 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access) ...... 140

Figure 6.15 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (3) (Word Access)........................... 141

Figure 6.16 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access) ..... 142

Figure 6.17 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access) ...... 143

Figure 6.18 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (3) (Word Access)........................... 144

Figure 6.19 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing................................................................ 146

Figure 6.20 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST0 = BRSTS1 = 1)................. 148

Figure 6.21 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST0 = BRSTS1 = 0)................. 148

Figure 6.22 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (1) ..................................................................... 150

Figure 6.23 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (2) ..................................................................... 151

Figure 6.24 Relationship between Chip Select (CS) and Read (RD)......................................... 152

Figure 6.25 Bus-Released State Transition Timing................................................................... 154

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DMAC ...................................................................................... 158

Figure 7.2 Operation in Sequential Mode................................................................................ 179

Figure 7.3 Example of Sequential Mode Setting Procedure.................................................... 180

Figure 7.4 Operation in Idle Mode .......................................................................................... 181

Figure 7.5 Example of Idle Mode Setting Procedure............................................................... 182

Figure 7.6 Operation in Repeat mode...................................................................................... 184

Figure 7.7 Example of Repeat Mode Setting Procedure.......................................................... 185

Figure 7.8 Operation in Normal Mode .................................................................................... 187

Figure 7.9 Example of Normal Mode Setting Procedure......................................................... 188

Figure 7.10 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 0)................................................ 190

Figure 7.11 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 1)................................................ 191

Figure 7.12 Operation Flow in Block Transfer Mode ............................................................... 192

Figure 7.13 Example of Block Transfer Mode Setting Procedure............................................. 193

Figure 7.14 Example of DMA Transfer Bus Timing................................................................. 196

Figure 7.15 Example of Short Address Mode Transfer ............................................................. 197

Figure 7.16 Example of Full Address Mode (Cycle Steal) Transfer ......................................... 198

Figure 7.17 Example of Full Address Mode (Burst Mode) Transfer......................................... 199

Figure 7.18 Example of Full Address Mode (Block Transfer Mode) Transfer ......................... 200

Figure 7.19 Example of DREQ Level Activated Normal Mode Transfer ................................. 201

Figure 7.20 Example of Multi-Channel Transfer ...................................................................... 202

Figure 7.21 Example of Procedure for Continuing Transfer on Channel Interrupted

by NMI Interrupt .................................................................................................... 204

Figure 7.22 Example of Procedure for Forcibly Terminating DMAC Operation...................... 204

Figure 7.23 Example of Procedure for Clearing Full Address Mode ........................................ 205

Figure 7.24 Block Diagram of Transfer End/Transfer Break Interrupt ..................................... 206

Figure 7.25 DMAC Register Update Timing ............................................................................ 207

Figure 7.26 Contention between DMAC Register Update and CPU Read................................ 208

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xl of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of TPU........................................................................................... 274

Figure 9.2 16-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCNT (16 Bits)] ..................... 299

Figure 9.3 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR (Upper 8 Bits)] ................. 300

Figure 9.4 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TMDR (Lower 8 Bits)]............. 300

Figure 9.5 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR and TMDR (16 Bits)]....... 300

Figure 9.6 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure.................................................. 301

Figure 9.7 Free-Running Counter Operation ........................................................................... 302

Figure 9.8 Periodic Counter Operation .................................................................................... 303

Figure 9.9 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match ............. 303

Figure 9.10 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation............................................................... 304

Figure 9.11 Example of Toggle Output Operation..................................................................... 304

Figure 9.12 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure......................................... 305

Figure 9.13 Example of Input Capture Operation...................................................................... 306

Figure 9.14 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure.......................................... 307

Figure 9.15 Example of Synchronous Operation ....................................................................... 308

Figure 9.16 Compare Match Buffer Operation .......................................................................... 309

Figure 9.17 Input Capture Buffer Operation.............................................................................. 309

Figure 9.18 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure .................................................... 310

Figure 9.19 Example of Buffer Operation (1)............................................................................ 311

Figure 9.20 Example of Buffer Operation (2)............................................................................ 312

Figure 9.21 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure............................................................ 314

Figure 9.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) .................................................................. 315

Figure 9.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) .................................................................. 315

Figure 9.24 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) .................................................................. 316

Figure 9.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure ............................................ 317

Figure 9.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation...................................................... 318

Figure 9.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation...................................................... 319

Figure 9.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation...................................................... 320

Figure 9.29 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation...................................................... 321

Figure 9.30 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation............................................................. 324

Figure 9.31 Count Timing in External Clock Operation............................................................ 324

Figure 9.32 Output Compare Output Timing............................................................................. 325

Figure 9.33 Input Capture Input Signal Timing......................................................................... 325

Figure 9.34 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)................................................................ 326

Figure 9.35 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) ................................................................... 326

Figure 9.36 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)........................................................... 327

Figure 9.37 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)............................................................... 327

Figure 9.38 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)................................................................. 328

Figure 9.39 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) .................................................................... 328

Figure 9.40 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing............................................................................... 329

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xli of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 9.41 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing............................................................................... 329

Figure 9.42 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU ............................................................... 330

Figure 9.43 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DMAC Activation ......................................... 330

Figure 9.44 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode ................. 331

Figure 9.45 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations........................................ 332

Figure 9.46 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations ................................ 332

Figure 9.47 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match............................................ 333

Figure 9.48 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match........................... 334

Figure 9.49 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture ................................................ 334

Figure 9.50 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture ............................................... 335

Figure 9.51 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture............................... 336

Figure 9.52 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing ............................................ 336

Figure 9.53 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow.................................................... 337

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of WDT......................................................................................... 340

Figure 10.2 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode...................................................................... 343

Figure 10.3 Timing of WOVF Setting....................................................................................... 344

Figure 10.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode ......................................................................... 344

Figure 10.5 Timing of OVF Setting........................................................................................... 345

Figure 10.6 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR ......................................................... 346

Figure 10.7 Format of Data Written to RSTCSR (Example of WDT0) .................................... 347

Figure 10.8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment................................................... 347

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of RTC .......................................................................................... 349

Figure 11.2 Definition of Time Expression ............................................................................... 354

Figure 11.3 Initial Setting Procedure......................................................................................... 358

Figure 11.4 Example: Reading of Inaccurate Time Data........................................................... 359

Figure 11.5 Initializing Procedure in Using RTC Interrupt ....................................................... 361

Figure 11.6 Example of RTC Interrupt Handling Routine ........................................................ 361

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of SCI_0........................................................................................ 365

Figure 12.2 Block Diagram of SCI_2........................................................................................ 366

Figure 12.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (1).................. 388

Figure 12.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (2).................. 389

Figure 12.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (3).................. 390

Figure 12.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TPU Clock Is Input (1)............ 391

Figure 12.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TPU Clock Is Input (2)............ 392

Figure 12.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TPU Clock Is Input (3)............ 393

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xlii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 12.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TPU Clock Is Input (4) ............ 394

Figure 12.5 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) ................................................. 403

Figure 12.6 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode........................................ 405

Figure 12.7 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase

(Asynchronous Mode) ............................................................................................ 406

Figure 12.8 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart....................................................................... 407

Figure 12.9 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ................................................... 408

Figure 12.10 Sample Serial Data Transmission Flowchart.......................................................... 409

Figure 12.11 Example of SCI Operation in Reception

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ................................................... 410

Figure 12.12 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (1).......................................................... 411

Figure 12.12 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (2).......................................................... 412

Figure 12.13 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format

(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)............................................ 414

Figure 12.14 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission Flowchart................................. 415

Figure 12.15 Example of SCI Operation in Reception

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) ............................... 416

Figure 12.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Flowchart (1)................................. 417

Figure 12.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Flowchart (2)................................. 418

Figure 12.17 Data Format in Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First).............................. 419

Figure 12.18 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart....................................................................... 420

Figure 12.19 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode.................... 422

Figure 12.20 Sample Serial Data Transmission Flowchart.......................................................... 423

Figure 12.21 Example of SCI Operation in Reception ................................................................ 424

Figure 12.22 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart ............................................................... 425

Figure 12.23 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Data Transmit

and Receive Operations .......................................................................................... 426

Figure 12.24 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections............................... 427

Figure 12.25 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format............................................................. 428

Figure 12.26 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0)........................................................ 428

Figure 12.27 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1)...................................................... 429

Figure 12.28 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode

(Using Clock of 372 Times the Transfer Rate)....................................................... 430

Figure 12.29 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode.......................................................... 433

Figure 12.30 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation................................... 433

Figure 12.31 Example of Transmission Processing Flow........................................................... 434

Figure 12.32 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode ........................................................... 435

Figure 12.33 Example of Reception Processing Flow ................................................................. 436

Figure 12.34 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level................................................................... 436

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xliii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 12.35 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure .......................................................................... 437

Figure 12.36 Example of Communication Using the SCI Select Function ................................. 438

Figure 12.37 Example of Communication Using the SCI Select Function ................................. 439

Figure 12.38 Example of Clocked Synchronous Transmission by DMAC ................................. 442

Figure 12.39 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission................................ 444

Figure 12.40 Port Pin State of Asynchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock..................... 444

Figure 12.41 Port Pin State of Synchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock ....................... 445

Figure 12.42 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception ..................................... 446

Figure 12.43 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function ............. 447

Figure 12.44 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function

(Example of Preventing Low-Level Output).......................................................... 448

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Boundary Scan Function........................................................... 450

Figure 13.2 Boundary Scan Register Configuration.................................................................. 455

Figure 13.3 TAP Controller Status Transition........................................................................... 462

Figure 13.4 Recommended Reset Signal Design....................................................................... 463

Figure 13.5 Serial Data Input/Output ........................................................................................ 463

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of USB .......................................................................................... 466

Figure 14.2 USB Initialization................................................................................................... 497

Figure 14.3 USB Cable Connection

(When USB Module Stop or Power-Down Mode Is not Used).............................. 498

Figure 14.4 USB Cable Connection

(When USB Module Stop or Power-Down Mode Is Used).................................... 499

Figure 14.5 USB Cable Disconnection

(When USB Module Stop or Power-Down Mode Is not Used).............................. 500

Figure 14.6 USB Cable Disconnection

(When USB Module Stop or Power-Down Mode Is Used).................................... 501

Figure 14.7 Example Flowchart of Suspend and Resume Operations....................................... 502

Figure 14.8 Example Flowchart of Suspend and Resume Interrupt Processing ........................ 503

Figure 14.9 Example Flowchart of Suspend and Remote-Wakeup Operations......................... 504

Figure 14.10 Example Flowchart of Remote-Wakeup Interrupt Processing ............................... 505

Figure 14.11 Control Transfer Stage Configuration .................................................................... 506

Figure 14.12 Setup Stage Operation ............................................................................................ 507

Figure 14.13 Data Stage Operation (Control-In) ......................................................................... 508

Figure 14.14 Data Stage Operation (Control-Out)....................................................................... 509

Figure 14.15 Status Stage Operation (Control-In)....................................................................... 510

Figure 14.16 Status Stage Operation (Control-Out) .................................................................... 511

Figure 14.17 EP3 Interrupt-In Transfer Operation ...................................................................... 512

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xliv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 14.18 EP1 Bulk-In Transfer Operation............................................................................. 514

Figure 14.19 EP2 Bulk-Out Transfer Operation .......................................................................... 515

Figure 14.20 Forcible Stall by Firmware ..................................................................................... 518

Figure 14.21 Automatic Stall by USB Function Module............................................................. 519

Figure 14.22 EP1PKTE Operation in UTRG0............................................................................. 521

Figure 14.23 EP2RDFN Operation in UTRG0 ............................................................................ 522

Figure 14.24 EP1PKTE Operation in UTRG0 (Auto-Request) ................................................... 523

Figure 14.25 EP2RDFN Operation in UTRG0 (Auto-Request) .................................................. 524

Figure 14.26 USB External Circuit in Bus-Powered Mode ......................................................... 525

Figure 14.27 USB External Circuit in Self-Powered Mode......................................................... 526

Figure 14.28 Flowchart ................................................................................................................ 531

Figure 14.29 Timing Chart........................................................................................................... 532

Figure 14.30 TR Interrupt Flag Set Timing ................................................................................. 533

Section 15 A/D Converter

Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter........................................................................... 536

Figure 15.2 Access to ADDR (When Reading H'AA40)........................................................... 541

Figure 15.3 A/D Conversion Timing (Single-Chip Mode, Channel 1 Selected)........................ 542

Figure 15.4 A/D Conversion Timing (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected)............... 543

Figure 15.5 A/D Conversion Timing ......................................................................................... 544

Figure 15.6 External Trigger Input Timing................................................................................ 545

Figure 15.7 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (1).............................................................. 547

Figure 15.8 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (2).............................................................. 547

Figure 15.9 Example of Analog Input Circuit............................................................................ 548

Figure 15.10 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit....................................................................... 549

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory ........................................................................... 554

Figure 17.2 Flash Memory State Transitions ............................................................................. 555

Figure 17.3 Boot Mode (Sample)............................................................................................... 556

Figure 17.4 User Program Mode (Sample) ................................................................................ 557

Figure 17.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration (HD64F2218, HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU, HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU)............................ 558

Figure 17.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration

(HD64F2217CU, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU) .......................... 559

Figure 17.7 Flash Memory Block Configuration (HD64F2210CU) .......................................... 560

Figure 17.8 System Configuration in SCI Boot Mode............................................................... 568

Figure 17.9 System Configuration Diagram when Using USB Boot Mode............................... 572

Figure 17.10 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode ....................... 576

Figure 17.11 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM................................................... 577

Figure 17.12 Example of RAM Overlap Operation ..................................................................... 578

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xlv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 17.13 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart....................................................................... 580

Figure 17.14 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ................................................................................ 582

Figure 17.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode....................................................................... 585

Figure 17.16 Power-On/Off Timing (Boot Mode)....................................................................... 589

Figure 17.17 Power-On/Off Timing (User Program Mode) ........................................................ 590

Figure 17.18 Mode Transition Timing

(Example: Boot Mode → User Mode ↔ User Program Mode)............................. 591

Section 18 Masked ROM

Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of On-Chip Masked ROM (64 kbytes).......................................... 593

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator .............................................................. 595

Figure 19.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example).......................................................... 600

Figure 19.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit..................................................................... 600

Figure 19.4 External Clock Input (Examples) ........................................................................... 601

Figure 19.5 External Clock Input Timing.................................................................................. 602

Figure 19.6 Example Connection of 32.768-kHz Quartz Oscillator.......................................... 603

Figure 19.7 Equivalence Circuit for 32.768-kHz Oscillator...................................................... 603

Figure 19.8 Pin Handling when Subclock Not Required........................................................... 603

Figure 19.9 Example of PLL Circuit ......................................................................................... 604

Figure 19.10 Note on Board Design of Oscillator Circuit ........................................................... 605

Figure 19.11 Example of External Clock Switching Circuit ....................................................... 606

Figure 19.12 Example of External Clock Switchover Timing..................................................... 606

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Figure 20.1 Mode Transition Diagram ...................................................................................... 609

Figure 20.2 Example of Flash Memory Module Stop Mode Usage .......................................... 616

Figure 20.3 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing ....................................... 618

Figure 20.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example ...................................................... 621

Figure 20.5 Hardware Standby Mode Timing (Example) ......................................................... 622

Figure 20.6 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ................................................. 622

Figure 20.7 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode.............................................. 623

Section 2 Electrical Characteristics

Figure 22.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges........................................................ 658

Figure 22.2 Output Load Circuit................................................................................................ 663

Figure 22.3 System Clock Timing............................................................................................. 665

Figure 22.4 Oscillation Stabilization Timing............................................................................. 665

Figure 22.5 Reset Input Timing................................................................................................. 667

Figure 22.6 Interrupt Input Timing............................................................................................ 667

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xlvi of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 22.7 Basic Bus Timing (Two-State Access)................................................................... 670

Figure 22.8 Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access) ................................................................. 671

Figure 22.9 Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access with One Wait State)................................ 672

Figure 22.10 Burst ROM Access Timing (Two-State Access) .................................................... 673

Figure 22.11 External Bus Release Timing ................................................................................. 674

Figure 22.12 I/O Port Input/Output Timing ................................................................................. 677

Figure 22.13 TPU Input/Output Timing ...................................................................................... 677

Figure 22.14 TPU Clock Input Timing ........................................................................................ 677

Figure 22.15 SCK Clock Input Timing........................................................................................ 678

Figure 22.16 SCI Input/Output Timing (Clock Synchronous Mode)........................................... 678

Figure 22.17 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing ....................................................... 678

Figure 22.18 Boundary Scan TCK Input Timing......................................................................... 678

Figure 22.19 Boundary Scan TRST Input Timing (At Reset Hold)............................................. 678

Figure 22.20 Boundary Scan Data Transmission Timing ............................................................ 679

Figure 22.21 Data Signal Timing................................................................................................. 681

Figure 22.22 Test Load Circuit .................................................................................................... 681

Appendix

Figure C.1 TFP-100G and TFP-100GV Package Dimensions ................................................. 691

Figure C.2 BP-112 and BP-112V Package Dimensions ........................................................... 692

Figure C.3 FP-64E and FP-64EV Package Dimensions ........................................................... 693

Figure C.4 TNP-64B and TNP-64BV Package Dimensions .................................................... 694

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xlvii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Tables

Section 1 Overview

Table 1.1 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode for H8S/2218 Group................................ 15

Table 1.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode for H8S/2212 Group................................ 18

Section 2 CPU

Table 2.1 Instruction Classification........................................................................................ 46

Table 2.2 Operation Notation ................................................................................................. 47

Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions ...................................................................................... 48

Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operations Instructions ........................................................................ 49

Table 2.5 Logic Operations Instructions ................................................................................ 50

Table 2.6 Shift Instructions .................................................................................................... 51

Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions................................................................................. 52

Table 2.8 Branch Instructions................................................................................................. 54

Table 2.9 System Control Instruction..................................................................................... 55

Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instruction ............................................................................. 56

Table 2.11 Addressing Modes.................................................................................................. 58

Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges .......................................................................... 60

Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation................................................................................ 62

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection............................................................................ 71

Table 3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode.................................................................. 76

Section 4 Exception Handling

Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority ................................................................................. 81

Table 4.2 Exception Handling Vector Table.......................................................................... 82

Table 4.3 Reset Types ............................................................................................................ 84

Table 4.4 Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling...................................... 87

Table 4.5 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling ..................... 88

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Table 5.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 93

Table 5.2 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities ................................ 101

Table 5.3 Interrupt Control Modes......................................................................................... 103

Table 5.4 Interrupt Response Times....................................................................................... 108

Table 5.5 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Statuses..................... 109

Table 5.6 Interrupt Source Selection and Clearing Control.................................................... 111

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xlviii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 6 Bus Controller

Table 6.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 117

Table 6.2 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface) ........................................ 129

Table 6.3 Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes........................................................................ 135

Table 6.4 Pin States in Idle Cycle........................................................................................... 152

Table 6.5 Pin States in Bus Released State............................................................................. 153

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Table 7.1 Short Address Mode and Full Address Mode

(For 1 Channel: Example of Channel 0) ................................................................. 160

Table 7.2 DMAC Transfer Modes.......................................................................................... 177

Table 7.3 Register Functions in Sequential Mode .................................................................. 178

Table 7.4 Register Functions in Idle Mode............................................................................. 181

Table 7.5 Register Functions in Repeat Mode........................................................................ 183

Table 7.6 Register Functions in Normal Mode....................................................................... 186

Table 7.7 Register Functions in Block Transfer Mode........................................................... 189

Table 7.8 DMAC Activation Sources..................................................................................... 194

Table 7.9 DMAC Channel Priority Order............................................................................... 202

Table 7.10 Interrupt Source Priority Order............................................................................... 206

Section 8 I/O Ports

Table 8.1 Port Functions of H8S/2218 Group ........................................................................ 211

Table 8.2 Port Functions of H8S/2212 Group ........................................................................ 214

Table 8.3 P17 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 218

Table 8.4 P16 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 218

Table 8.5 P15 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 218

Table 8.6 P14 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 219

Table 8.7 P13 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 219

Table 8.8 P12 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 219

Table 8.9 P11 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 220

Table 8.10 P10 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 220

Table 8.11 P17 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 220

Table 8.12 P16 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 221

Table 8.13 P15 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 221

Table 8.14 P14 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 221

Table 8.15 P13 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 222

Table 8.16 P12 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 222

Table 8.17 P11 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 222

Table 8.18 P10 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 222

Table 8.19 P36 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 225

Table 8.20 P32 Pin Function..................................................................................................... 226

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page xlix of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.21 P31 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 226

Table 8.22 P30 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 226

Table 8.23 P74 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 231

Table 8.24 P71 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 231

Table 8.25 P70 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 231

Table 8.26 P77 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 231

Table 8.27 P76 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 232

Table 8.28 P75 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 232

Table 8.29 PA3 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 236

Table 8.30 PA2 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 236

Table 8.31 PA1 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 237

Table 8.32 PA0 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 237

Table 8.33 PA3 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 237

Table 8.34 PA2 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 238

Table 8.35 PA1 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 238

Table 8.36 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port A)........................................................................ 238

Table 8.37 PB7 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 242

Table 8.38 PB6 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 242

Table 8.39 PB5 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 242

Table 8.40 PB4 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 243

Table 8.41 PB3 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 243

Table 8.42 PB2 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 243

Table 8.43 PB1 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 243

Table 8.44 PB0 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 244

Table 8.45 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port B)........................................................................ 244

Table 8.46 PC7 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 247

Table 8.47 PC6 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 247

Table 8.48 PC5 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 248

Table 8.49 PC4 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 248

Table 8.50 PC3 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 248

Table 8.51 PC2 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 248

Table 8.52 PC1 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 248

Table 8.53 PC0 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 249

Table 8.54 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port C)........................................................................ 249

Table 8.55 PD7 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 252

Table 8.56 PD6 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 252

Table 8.57 PD5 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 252

Table 8.58 PD4 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 253

Table 8.59 PD3 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 253

Table 8.60 PD2 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 253

Table 8.61 PD1 Pin Function ................................................................................................... 253

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page l of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.62 PD0 Pin Function.................................................................................................... 253

Table 8.63 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port D)........................................................................ 254

Table 8.64 PE7 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 257

Table 8.65 PE6 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 257

Table 8.66 PE5 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 258

Table 8.67 PE4 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 258

Table 8.68 PE3 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 258

Table 8.69 PE2 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 258

Table 8.70 PE1 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 259

Table 8.71 PE0 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 259

Table 8.72 PE7 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 259

Table 8.73 PE6 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 259

Table 8.74 PE5 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 259

Table 8.75 PE4 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 260

Table 8.76 PE3 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 260

Table 8.77 PE2 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 260

Table 8.78 PE1 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 260

Table 8.79 PE0 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 260

Table 8.80 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port E) ........................................................................ 261

Table 8.81 PF7 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 264

Table 8.82 PF6 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 264

Table 8.83 PF5 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 265

Table 8.84 PF4 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 265

Table 8.85 PF3 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 265

Table 8.86 PF2 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 265

Table 8.87 PF1 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 266

Table 8.88 PF0 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 266

Table 8.89 PF7 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 266

Table 8.90 PF3 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 267

Table 8.91 PF0 Pin Function .................................................................................................... 267

Table 8.92 PG4 Pin Function.................................................................................................... 270

Table 8.93 PG3 Pin Function.................................................................................................... 270

Table 8.94 PG2 Pin Function.................................................................................................... 270

Table 8.95 PG1 Pin Function.................................................................................................... 270

Table 8.96 PG1 Pin Function.................................................................................................... 271

Table 8.97 PG0 Pin Function.................................................................................................... 271

Table 8.98 Examples of Ways to Handle Unused Input Pins ................................................... 272

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Table 9.1 TPU Functions........................................................................................................ 275

Table 9.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 277

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page li of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.3 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (channel 0)............................................................................... 280

Table 9.4 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (channels 1 and 2).................................................................... 280

Table 9.5 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (channel 0)................................................................................. 281

Table 9.6 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (channel 1)................................................................................. 281

Table 9.7 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (channel 2)................................................................................. 282

Table 9.8 MD3 to MD0.......................................................................................................... 283

Table 9.9 TIORH_0 (channel 0)............................................................................................. 285

Table 9.10 TIORH_0 (channel 0)............................................................................................. 286

Table 9.11 TIORL_0 (channel 0) ............................................................................................. 287

Table 9.12 TIORL_0 (channel 0) ............................................................................................. 288

Table 9.13 TIOR_1 (channel 1)................................................................................................ 289

Table 9.14 TIOR_1 (channel 1)................................................................................................ 290

Table 9.15 TIOR_2 (channel 2)................................................................................................ 291

Table 9.16 TIOR_2 (channel 2)................................................................................................ 292

Table 9.17 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation........................................................... 309

Table 9.18 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins................................................................ 314

Table 9.19 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins................................................................. 317

Table 9.20 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1 ....................................... 318

Table 9.21 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2 ....................................... 319

Table 9.22 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3 ....................................... 320

Table 9.23 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4 ....................................... 321

Table 9.24 TPU Interrupts........................................................................................................ 322

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Table 10.1 WDT Interrupt Source............................................................................................ 345

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Table 11.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 350

Table 11.2 Interrupt Source...................................................................................................... 360

Table 11.3 Operating State in Each Mode................................................................................ 362

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Table 12.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 367

Table 12.2 Relationships between the N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B ................................ 395

Table 12.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) .................................. 396

Table 12.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)............................ 399

Table 12.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode).................. 400

Table 12.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ...................... 401

Table 12.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode)...... 401

Table 12.8 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates

(Smart Card Interface Mode, when n = 0 and S = 372).......................................... 402

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page lii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 12.9 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode)............. 402

Table 12.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)...................................................... 404

Table 12.11 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling........................................................ 411

Table 12.12 SCI Interrupt Sources ............................................................................................. 440

Table 12.13 Interrupt Sources in Smart Card Interface Mode .................................................... 441

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Table 13.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 451

Table 13.2 Instruction Configuration........................................................................................ 452

Table 13.3 IDCODE Register Configuration............................................................................ 454

Table 13.4 Correspondence between LSI Pins and Boundary Scan Register ........................... 455

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Table 14.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 467

Table 14.2 Relationship between UTSTR0 Setting and Pin Output......................................... 490

Table 14.3 Relationship between Pin Input and UTSTR1 Monitoring Value .......................... 491

Table 14.4 Interrupt Sources..................................................................................................... 495

Table 14.5 Command Decoding by Firmware.......................................................................... 516

Section 15 A/D Converter

Table 15.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 537

Table 15.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers................................ 538

Table 15.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)..................................................................... 545

Table 15.4 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode) ....................................................................... 545

Table 15.5 A/D Converter Interrupt Source.............................................................................. 546

Table 15.6 Analog Pin Specifications....................................................................................... 549

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Table 17.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode .................................... 555

Table 17.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 561

Table 17.3 Setting On-Board Programming Modes ................................................................. 567

Table 17.4 Boot Mode Operation ............................................................................................. 570

Table 17.5 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate Is

Possible................................................................................................................... 570

Table 17.6 Enumeration Information........................................................................................ 571

Table 17.7 USB Boot Mode Operation..................................................................................... 574

Table 17.8 Flash Memory Operating States.............................................................................. 586

Table 17.9 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Masked ROM Version......... 592

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Table 19.1 Damping Resistance Value..................................................................................... 600

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page liii of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 19.2 Crystal Resonator Characteristics........................................................................... 600

Table 19.3 External Clock Input Conditions............................................................................ 601

Table 19.4 External Clock Input Conditions when Duty Adjustment Circuit Is not Used....... 602

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Table 20.1 LSI Internal States in Each Mode........................................................................... 608

Table 20.2 Transition Conditions of Power-Down Modes....................................................... 610

Table 20.3 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings .................................................................. 620

Table 20.4 φ Pin State in Each Processing State ...................................................................... 627

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Table 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... 657

Table 22.2 DC Characteristics.................................................................................................. 659

Table 22.3 Permissible Output Currents................................................................................... 662

Table 22.4 Clock Timing.......................................................................................................... 664

Table 22.5 Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ 666

Table 22.6 Bus Timing............................................................................................................. 668

Table 22.7 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules ............................................................... 675

Table 22.8 USB Characteristics (USD+ and USD- pins) when On-Chip USB Transceiver Is

Used........................................................................................................................ 680

Table 22.9 A/D Conversion Characteristics ............................................................................. 682

Table 22.10 Flash Memory Characteristics................................................................................ 683

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page liv of liv

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 1 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 1 Overview

1.1 Overview

• High-speed H8S/2000 central processing unit with 16-bit architecture

⎯ Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs on an object level

⎯ Sixteen 16-bit general registers

⎯ 65 basic instructions

• Various peripheral functions

⎯ DMA controller (DMAC)

⎯ 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU)

⎯ Watchdog timer (WDT)

⎯ Realtime clock (RTC)

⎯ Serial communication interface (SCI)

⎯ Boundary scan

⎯ Universal serial bus (USB)

⎯ 10-bit A/D converter

⎯ High-performance user debugging interface (H-UDI)

⎯ Clock pulse generator

• On-chip memory

H8S/2218 Group

ROM Part No. ROM RAM Remarks

Flash memory Version HD64F2218 128 kbytes 12 kbytes SCI boot mode

HD64F2218U 128 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2218CU 128 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2217CU 64 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

Masked ROM Version HD6432217 64 kbytes 8 kbytes ⎯

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 2 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

H8S/2212 Group

ROM Part No. ROM RAM Remarks

Flash memory Version HD64F2212 128 kbytes 12 kbytes SCI boot mode

HD64F2212U 128 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2212CU 128 kbytes 12 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2211 64 kbytes 8 kbytes SCI boot mode

HD64F2211U 64 kbytes 8 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2211CU 64 kbytes 8 kbytes USB boot mode

HD64F2210CU 32 kbytes 8 kbytes USB boot mode

Masked ROM Version HD6432211 64 kbytes 8 kbytes ⎯

HD6432210 32 kbytes 4 kbytes ⎯

HD6432210S 32 kbytes 4 kbytes ⎯

• General I/O ports

I/O pins: 69 for the H8S/2218 Group, 37 for the H8S/2212 Group

• Supports various power-down states

• Compact package

Package Code* Body Size Pin Pitch Remarks

TQFP-100 TFP-100G, TFP-100GV 12.0 × 12.0 mm 0.4 mm H8S/2218 Group

P-LFBGA-112 BP-112, BP-112V 10.0 × 10.0 mm 0.8 mm

LQFP-64 FP-64E, FP-64EV 10.0 × 10.0 mm 0.5 mm H8S/2212 Group

VQFN-64 TNP-64B, TNP-64BV 8.0 × 8.0 mm 0.4 mm

Note: * A V appended to the end of the package code indicates a lead-free version.

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 3 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

1.2 Internal Block Diagram

The internal block diagram of the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and

HD64F2217CU is shown in figure 1.1. The internal block diagram of the HD6432217 is shown in

figure 1.2. The internal block diagram of the HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU is shown in figure 1.3. The

internal block diagram of the HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S is shown in figure 1.4.

PE7/D7

PE6/D6

PE5/D5

PE4/D4

PE3/D3

PE2/D2

PE1/D1

PE0/D0

PD7/D15

PD6/D14

PD5/D13

PD4/D12

PD3/D11

PD2/D10

PD1/D9

PD0/D8

VCC

VSS

DrVCC

DrVSS

EMLE*

TDO*

TCK*

TMS*

TRST*

TDI*

PA3/A19/SCK2

PA2/A18/RxD2

PA1/A17/TxD2

PA0/A16

PB7/A15

PB6/A14

PB5/A13

PB4/A12

PB3/ A11

PB2/A10

PB1/A9

PB0/A8

PC7/A7

PC6/A6

PC5/A5

PC4/A4

PC3/A3

PC2/A2

PC1/A1

PC0/A0

P36(PUPD+)

P32/SCK0/IRQ

P31/RxD0

P30/TxD0

P10/TIOCA0/A20

P11/TIOCB0/A21

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

P70/CS4

P71/CS5

P74/MRES

PG4/CS0

PG3/CS1

PG2/CS2

PG1/CS3/IRQ7

PF7/φ

PF6/AS

PF5/RD

PF4/HWR

PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF2/WAIT

PF1/BACK

PF0/BREQ/IRQ2

MD2

MD1

MD0

EXTAL

XTAL

PLLVCC

PLLVSS

OSC1

OSC2

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

Vref

H8S/2000 CPU

WDT

DMAC

USB

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

SCI2

STBY

RES

NMI

FWE

USPND/TMOW

USD+

USD-

UBPM

VBUS

ROM

RAM

RTC

Peripheral data bus

Peripheral address bus

Internal address bus

Internal data bus

Port D

Boundary scan/H-UDI*

TPU (3 channels)

Interrupts controller

Port E

Port APort B

Bus controller

Port CPort 3

Port FPort G

Port 9Port 4

Port 1 Port 7

SCI0 (High speed UART)

A/D converter (6 channels)

Main clock

pulse

generator

Sub-clock

pulse

generator

When EMLE = 0, boundary scan is available and the pins function as TDO, TCK, TMS, TRST, and TDI, respectively.

When EMLE = 1, H-UDI function is available and the pins function as TDO, TCK, TMS, TRST, and TDI, respectively.

Note:

Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU

and HD642217CU

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 4 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

PE7/D7

PE6/D6

PE5/D5

PE4/D4

PE3/D3

PE2/D2

PE1/D1

PE0/D0

PD7/D15

PD6/D14

PD5/D13

PD4/D12

PD3/D11

PD2/D10

PD1/D9

PD0/D8

VCC

VSS

DrVCC

DrVSS

NC*2

PA3/A19/SCK2

PA2/A18/RxD2

PA1/A17/TxD2

PA0/A16

PB7/A15

PB6/A14

PB5/A13

PB4/A12

PB3/A11

PB2/A10

PB1/A9

PB0/A8

PC7/A7

PC6/A6

PC5/A5

PC4/A4

PC3/A3

PC2/A2

PC1/A1

PC0/A0

P36(PUPD+)

P32/SCK0/IRQ

P31/RxD0

P30/TxD0

P10/TIOCA0/A20

P11/TIOCB0/A21

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

P70/CS4

P71/CS5

P74/MRES

PG4/CS0

PG3/CS1

PG2/CS2

PG1/CS3/IRQ7

PF7/φ

PF6/AS

PF5/RD

PF4/HWR

PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF2/WAIT

PF1/BACK

PF0/BREQ/IRQ2

MD2

MD1

MD0

EXTAL

XTAL

PLLVCC

PLLVSS

OSC1

OSC2

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

Vref

H8S/2000 CPU

WDT

DMAC

USB

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

SCI2

STBY

RES

NMI

FWE*1

USPND/TMOW

USD+

USD-

UBPM

VBUS

ROM

RAM

RTC

Peripheral data bus

Peripheral address bus

Internal address bus

Internal data bus

Port D

TPU (3 channels)

Interrupts controller

Port E

Port APort B

Bus controller

Port CPort 3

Port FPort G

Port 9Port 4

Port 1 Port 7

SCI0 (High speed UART)

A/D converter (6 channels)

Main clock

pulse

generator

Sub-clock

pulse

generator

Notes: NC (no connection): These pins should not be connected; they should be left open.

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. It should be fixed low.

2. Neither boundary scan nor H-UDI function is available and the pins function as NC.

Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of HD6432217

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 5 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

VCC

VSS

DrVCC

DrVSS

PA3/SCK2

PA2/RxD2

PA1/TxD2

P36(PUPD+)

P32/SCK0/IRQ

P31/RxD0

P30/TxD0

P10/TIOCA0

P11/TIOCB0

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

PG1/IRQ7

PF7/φ

PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF0/IRQ2

MD2

MD1

MD0

EXTAL

XTAL

PLLVCC

PLLVSS

OSC1

OSC2

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

Vref

H8S/2000 CPU

WDT

DMAC

USB

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

SCI2

STBY

RES

NMI

FWE

USPND/TMOW

USD+

USD-

UBPM

VBUS

ROM

RAM

RTC

EMLE*

TDO/P77*

TCK/P76*

TMS/P75*

TRST/NC*

TDI/PG0*

Note: NC (no connection): This pin should not be connected; it should be left open.

When EMLE = 0, port function is available and the pins function as P77, P76, P75, NC, and PG0, respectively.

When EMLE = 1, H-UDI function is available and the pins function as TDO, TCK, TMS, TRST, and TDI, respectively.

Peripheral data bus

Peripheral address bus

H-UDI/ports

7 and G*

TPU (3 channels)

Interrupts controller

Port E

Port APort 3

Port FPort G

Port 9Port 4

Port 1

Main clock

pulse

generator

Sub-clock

pulse

generator

SCI0 (High speed UART)

A/D converter (6 channels)

Internal address bus

Internal data bus

Bus controller

Figure 1.3 Internal Block Diagram of HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 6 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

VCC

VSS

DrVCC

DrVSS

PA3/SCK2

PA2/RxD2

PA1/TxD2

P36(PUPD+)

P32/SCK0/IRQ

P31/RxD0

P30/TxD0

P10/TIOCA0

P11/TIOCB0

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

PG1/IRQ7

PF7/φ

PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF0/IRQ2

MD2

MD1

MD0

EXTAL

XTAL

PLLVCC

PLLVSS

OSC1

OSC2

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

Vref

H8S/2000 CPU

WDT

DMAC

USB

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

SCI2

STBY

RES

NMI

FWE*1

USPND/TMOW

USD+

USD-

UBPM

VBUS

ROM

RAM

RTC

NC*2

P77*2

P76*2

P75*2

NC*2

PG0*2

Peripheral data bus

Peripheral address bus

Ports 7 and G*

TPU (3 channels)

Interrupts controller

Port E

Port APort 3

Port FPort G

Port 9Port 4

Port 1

Main clock

pulse

generator

Sub-clock

pulse

generator

SCI0 (High speed UART)

A/D converter (6 channels)

Internal address bus

Internal data bus

Bus controller

Notes: NC (no connection): These pins should not be connected; they should be left open.

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. It should be fixed low.

2. The port function is available and the pins function as NC, P77, P76, P75, NC, and PG0, respectively.

Figure 1.4 Internal Block Diagram of HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 7 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

1.3 Pin Arrangements

The pin arrangements of the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and HD64F2217CU are

shown in figures 1.5 and 1.6. The pin arrangements of the HD6432217 are shown in figures 1.7

and 1.8. The pin arrangements of the HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU are shown in figures 1.9 and 1.11. The pin

arrangements of the HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S is shown in figures 1.10 and

1.12.

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

(Top View)

PD4/D12

PD5/D13

PD6/D14

PD7/D15

FWE

NMI

EMLE*

TDO*

TCK*

TMS*

TRST*

TDI*

VCC

PF7/φ

VSS

PF6/AS

PF5/RD

PF4/HWR

PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF2/WAIT

PF1/BACK

PF0/BREQ/IRQ2

PA3/A19/SCK2

PA2/A18/RxD2

PA1/A17/TxD2

PB5/A13

PB4/A12

PLLVCC

UBPM

PLLVSS

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

Vref

PB3/A11

PB2/A10

PB1/A9

PB0/A8

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

DrVSS

USD-

USD+

DrVCC

P36(PUPD+)

VBUS

PG4/CS0

PG3/CS1

PG2/CS2

100

PA0/A16

P10/TIOCA0/A20

P11/TIOCB0/A21

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

PC0/A0

PC1/A1

PC2/A2

PC3/A3

MD0

MD1

MD2

PC4/A4

PC5/A5

PC6/A6

PC7/A7

USPND/TMOW

P30/TxD0

P31/RxD0

P32/SCK0/IRQ4

PG1/CS3/IRQ7

PD3/D11

PD2/D10

PD1/D9

PD0/D8

PE7/D7

PE6/D6

PE5/D5

PE4/D4

PE3/D3

PE2/D2

PE1/D1

PE0/D0

P70/CS4

VCC

EXTAL

XTAL

VSS

RES

STBY

P71/CS5

P74/MRE

OSC1

OSC2

PB7/A15

PB6/A14

Note: * When EMLE = 0, boundary scan is available and the pins function as TDO, TCK, TMS, TRST, and TDI, respectively.

When EMLE = 1, H-UDI function is available and the pins function as TDO, TCK, TMS, TRST, and TDI, respectively.

Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangements of HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU

and HD64F2217CU (TFP-100G, TFP-100GV)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 8 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

NC PD3/D11

PD0/D8

PE5/D5 PE2/D2 P70/CS4 XTAL STBY OSC1 PB7/A15 NC

PD5/D13 PD4/D12

PD2/D10

PE7/D7 PE3/D3 PE0/D0 EXTAL P71/CS5 OSC2 PB6/A14 PB5/A13

FWE PD7/D15

PD1/D9 PE4/D4 VCC VSS P74/

MRES NC PB4/A12 UBPM

TDO*EMLE*

NMI

PD6/D14 PE6/D6 PE1/D1 RES NC PLLVCC PLLVSS P41/AN1

TRST*TDI*

TMS

*TCK*P40/AN0 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 NC

PF7/φVSS

VCC

PF6/AS Vref PB1/A9 PB3/A11 PB2/A10

PF5/RD PF4/HWR

PF3/LWR/

ADTRG/

IRQ3

PF1/

BACK DrVSS P97/

AN15 PB0/A8 P96/

AN14

PF2/WAIT PF0/

BREQ/

IRQ2

PA2/A18/

RxD2

P11/

TIOCB0/

A21

P17/

TIOCB2/

TCLKD MD2 USPND/

TMOW PG4/CS0 DrVCC USD+ USD-

PA3/A19/

SCK2 PA1/A17/

TxD2

P14/

TIOCA1/

IRQ0 PC0/A0 PC3/A3 PC6/A6 P32/

SCK0/

IRQ4 NC VBUS P36

(PUDP+)

PA0/A16

P12/

TIOCC0/

TCLKA/

A22

P15/

TIOCB1/

TCLKC PC2/A2 MD1 PC5/A5 P30/TxD0 PG1/

CS3/

IRQ7 PG2/CS2 PG3/CS1

P10/

TIOCA0/

A20

P13/

TIOCD0/

TCLKB/

A23

P16/

TIOCA2/

IRQ1 PC1/A1 MD0 PC4/A4 PC7/A7 P31/RxD0

NC NC

BP-112

BP-112V

(Top view)

ABCDEFGHJKL

INDEX

Notes: NC (no connection): These pins should not be connected; they should be left open.

* When EMLE = 0, boundary scan is available and the pins function as TDO, TCK, TMS,

TRST, and TDI, respectively.

When EMLE = 1, H-UDI function is available and the pins function as TDO, TCK, TMS,

TRST, and TDI, respectively.

Figure 1.6 Pin Arrangements of HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU

and HD64F2217CU (BP-112, BP-112V)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 9 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

(Top View)

Notes: NC (no connection): These pins should not be connected; they should be left open.

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. It should be fixed low.

2. Neither boundary scan nor H-UDI function is available and the pins function as NC.

PD4/D12

PD5/D13

PD6/D14

PD7/D15

FWE*

NMI

NC*

VCC

PF7/φ

VSS

PF6/AS

PF5/RD

PF4/HWR

PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF2/WAIT

PF1/BACK

PF0/BREQ/IRQ2

PA3/A19/SCK2

PA2/A18/RxD2

PA1/A17/TxD2

PB5/A13

PB4/A12

PLLVCC

UBPM

PLLVSS

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

Vref

PB3/A11

PB2/A10

PB1/A9

PB0/A8

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

DrVSS

USD-

USD+

DrVCC

P36(PUPD+)

VBUS

PG4/CS0

PG3/CS1

PG2/CS2

100

PA0/A16

P10/TIOCA0/A20

P11/TIOCB0/A21

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

PC0/A0

PC1/A1

PC2/A2

PC3/A3

MD0

MD1

MD2

PC4/A4

PC5/A5

PC6/A6

PC7/A7

USPND/TMOW

P30/TxD0

P31/RxD0

P32/SCK0/IRQ4

PG1/CS3/IRQ7

PD3/D11

PD2/D10

PD1/D9

PD0/D8

PE7/D7

PE6/D6

PE5/D5

PE4/D4

PE3/D3

PE2/D2

PE1/D1

PE0/D0

P70/CS4

VCC

EXTAL

XTAL

VSS

RES

STBY

P71/CS5

P74/MRE

OSC1

OSC2

PB7/A15

PB6/A14

Figure 1.7 Pin Arrangements of HD6432217 (TFP-100G, TFP-100GV)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 10 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

NC PD3/D11

PD0/D8

PE5/D5 PE2/D2 P70/CS4 XTAL STBY OSC1 PB7/A15 NC

PD5/D13 PD4/D12

PD2/D10

PE7/D7 PE3/D3 PE0/D0 EXTAL P71/CS5 OSC2 PB6/A14 PB5/A13

FWE

PD7/D15

PD1/D9 PE4/D4 VCC VSS P74/

MRES NC PB4/A12 UBPM

NMI

PD6/D14 PE6/D6 PE1/D1 RES NC PLLVCC PLLVSS P41/AN1

P40/AN0 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 NC

PF7/φVSS

VCC

PF6/AS Vref PB1/A9 PB3/A11 PB2/A10

PF5/RD PF4/HWR

PF3/LWR/

ADTRG/

IRQ3

PF1/

BACK DrVSS P97/

AN15 PB0/A8 P96/

AN14

PF2/WAIT PF0/

BREQ/

IRQ2

PA2/A18/

RxD2

P11/

TIOCB0/

A21

P17/

TIOCB2/

TCLKD MD2 USPND/

TMOW PG4/CS0 DrVCC USD+ USD-

PA3/A19/

SCK2 PA1/A17/

TxD2

P14/

TIOCA1/

IRQ0 PC0/A0 PC3/A3 PC6/A6 P32/

SCK0/

IRQ4 NC VBUS P36

(PUDP+)

PA0/A16

P12/

TIOCC0/

TCLKA/

A22

P15/

TIOCB1/

TCLKC PC2/A2 MD1 PC5/A5 P30/TxD0 PG1/

CS3/

IRQ7 PG2/CS2 PG3/CS1

P10/

TIOCA0/

A20

P13/

TIOCD0/

TCLKB/

A23

P16/

TIOCA2/

IRQ1 PC1/A1 MD0 PC4/A4 PC7/A7 P31/RxD0

NC NC

BP-112

BP-112V

(Top view)

ABCDEFGHJKL

INDEX

Notes: NC (no connection): These pins should not be connected; they should be left open.

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. It should be fixed low.

2. Neither boundary scan nor H-UDI function is available and the pins function as NC.

Figure 1.8 Pin Arrangements of HD6432217 (BP-112, BP-112V)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 11 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Notes: NC (no connection): This pin should not be connected; it should be left open.

* When EMLE = 0, port function is available and the pins function as P77, P76, P75, NC,

and PG0, respectively.

When EMLE = 1, H-UDI function is available and the pins function as TDO, TCK, TMS, TRST,

and TDI, respectively.

P10/TIOCA0

P11/TIOCB0

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

MD0

MD1

MD2

USPND/TMOW

P30/TxD0

P31/RxD0

P32/SCK0/IRQ4

PG1/IRQ7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

VCC

EXTAL

XTAL

VSS

RES

STBY

OSC1

OSC2

FWE

NMI

EMLE*

TDO/P77*

TCK/P76*

TMS/P75*

TRST/NC*

TDI/PG0*

VCC

PF7/φ

VSS

PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF0/IRQ2

PA3/SCK2

PA2/RXD2

PA1/TXD2

PLLVCC

UBPM

PLLVSS

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

Vref

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

DrVSS

USD-

USD+

DrVCC

P36 (PUPD+)

VBUS

FP-64E

FP-64EV

(Top View)

Figure 1.9 Pin Arrangements of HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU (FP-64E, FP-64EV)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 12 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Notes: NC (no connection): These pins should not be connected; they should be left open.

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. It should be fixed low.

2. The port function is available and the pins function as NC, P77, P76, P75, NC, and PG0, respectively.

P10/TIOCA0

P11/TIOCB0

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

MD0

MD1

MD2

USPND/TMOW

P30/TxD0

P31/RxD0

P32/SCK0/IRQ4

PG1/IRQ7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

VCC

EXTAL

XTAL

VSS

RES

STBY

OSC1

OSC2

FWE*1

NMI

NC*2

P77*2

P76*2

P75*2

NC*2

PG0*2

VCC

PF7/φ

VSS

PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF0/IRQ2

PA3/SCK2

PA2/RXD2

PA1/TXD2

PLLVCC

UBPM

PLLVSS

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

Vref

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

DrVSS

USD-

USD+

DrVCC

P36 (PUPD+)

VBUS

FP-64E

FP-64EV

(Top View)

Figure 1.10 Pin Arrangements of HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S

(FP-64E, FP-64EV)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 13 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Notes: NC (no connection): This pin should not be connected; it should be left open.

* When EMLE = 0, the port function is enabled (P77, P76, P75, NC, and PG0).

When EMLE = 1, the H-UDI function is enabled (TDO, TCK, TMS, TRST, and TDI).

P10/TIOCA0

P11/TIOCB0

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

MD0

MD1

MD2

USPND/TMOW

P30/TxD0

P31/RxD0

P32/SCK0/IRQ4

PG1/IRQ7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

VCC

EXTAL

XTAL

VSS

RES

STBY

OSC1

OSC2

FWE

NMI

EMLE*

TDO/P77*

TCK/P76*

TMS/P75*

TRST/NC*

TDI/PG0*

VCC

PF7/φ

VSS

PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF0/IRQ2

PA3/SCK2

PA2/RXD2

PA1/TXD2

PLLVCC

UBPM

PLLVSS

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

Vref

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

DrVSS

USD-

USD+

DrVCC

P36 (PUPD+)

VBUS

TNP-64B

TNP-64BV

(Top View)

Figure 1.11 Pin Arrangements of HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211,

HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU (TNP-64B, TNP-64BV)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 14 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

P10/TIOCA0

P11/TIOCB0

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

MD0

MD1

MD2

USPND/TMOW

P30/TxD0

P31/RxD0

P32/SCK0/IRQ4

PG1/IRQ7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

VCC

EXTAL

XTAL

VSS

RES

STBY

OSC1

OSC2

FWE*

NMI

NC*

P77*

P76*

P75*

NC*

PG0*

VCC

PF7/φ

VSS

PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF0/IRQ2

PA3/SCK2

PA2/RXD2

PA1/TXD2

PLLVCC

UBPM

PLLVSS

P40/AN0

P41/AN1

P42/AN2

P43/AN3

Vref

P96/AN14

P97/AN15

DrVSS

USD-

USD+

DrVCC

P36 (PUPD+)

VBUS

TNP-64B

TNP-64BV

(Top View)

Notes: NC (no connection): These pins should not be connected; they should be left open.

1. The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. It should be fixed low.

2. The port function is enabled (P77, P76, P75, NC, and PG0).

Figure 1.12 Pin Arrangements of HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S

(TNP-64B, TNP-64BV)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 15 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

1.4 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode

Table 1.1 shows the pin functions in each operating mode for the H8S/2218 Group, and table 1.2

shows that for the H8S/2212 Group.

Table 1.1 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode for H8S/2218 Group

Pin No. Pin Name*

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

Modes 4, 5

Mode 6

Mode 7

Programmer

Mode

1 B2 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0 NC

2 B1 P10/TIOCA0/A20 P10/TIOCA0/A20 P10/TIOCA0 A2

3 D4 P11/TIOCB0/A21 P11/TIOCB0/A21 P11/TIOCB0 A3

4 C2 P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA A4

5 C1 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB A5

6 D3 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 VSS

7 D2 P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC WE

8 D1 P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 VSS

9 E4 P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD CE

10 E3 A0 PC0/A0 PC0 NC

11 E1 A1 PC1/A1 PC1 NC

12 E2 A2 PC2/A2 PC2 NC

13 F3 A3 PC3/A3 PC3 NC

14 F1 MD0 MD0 MD0 VSS

15 F2 MD1 MD1 MD1 VSS

16 F4 MD2 MD2 MD2 VSS

17 G1 A4 PC4/A4 PC4 NC

18 G2 A5 PC5/A5 PC5 NC

19 G3 A6 PC6/A6 PC6 NC

20 H1 A7 PC7/A7 PC7 NC

21 G4 USPND/TMOW USPND/TMOW USPND/TMOW NC

22 H2 P30/TxD0 P30/TxD0 P30/TxD0 A10

23 J1 P31/RxD0 P31/RxD0 P31/RxD0 A11

24 H3 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 A12

25 J2 PG1/CS3/IRQ7 PG1/CS3/IRQ7 PG1/IRQ7 A15

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 16 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No. Pin Name*

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

Modes 4, 5

Mode 6

Mode 7

Programmer

Mode

26 K2 PG2/CS2 PG2/CS2 PG2 NC

27 L2 PG3/CS1 PG3/CS1 PG3 NC

28 H4 PG4/CS0 PG4/CS0 PG4 NC

29 K3 VBUS VBUS VBUS VSS

30 L3 P36 (PUDP+) P36 (PUDP+) P36 (PUDP+) A16

31 J4 DrVCC DrVCC DrVCC VCC

32 K4 USD+ USD+ USD+ NC

33 L4 USD- USD- USD- NC

34 H5 DrVSS DrVSS DrVSS VSS

35 J5 P97/AN15 P97/AN15 P97/AN15 A7

36 L5 P96/AN14 P96/AN14 P96/AN14 A6

37 K5 PB0/A8 PB0/A8 PB0 NC

38 J6 PB1/A9 PB1/A9 PB1 NC

39 L6 PB2/A10 PB2/A10 PB2 NC

40 K6 PB3/A11 PB3/A11 PB3 NC

41 H6 Vref Vref Vref VCC

42 K7 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 A14

43 J7 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 A13

44 L8 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 A9

45 H7 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 A8

46 K8 PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS VSS

47 L9 UBPM UBPM UBPM A17

48 J8 PLLVCC PLLVCC PLLVCC VCC

49 K9 PB4/A12 PB4/A12 PB4 NC

50 L10 PB5/A13 PB5/A13 PB5 NC

51 K10 PB6/A14 PB6/A14 PB6 NC

52 K11 PB7/A15 PB7/A15 PB7 NC

53 J10 OSC2 OSC2 OSC2 NC

54 J11 OSC1 OSC1 OSC1 VCC

55 H9 P74/MRES P74/MRES P74/MRES NC

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 17 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No. Pin Name*

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

Modes 4, 5

Mode 6

Mode 7

Programmer

Mode

56 H10 P71/CS5 P71/CS5 P71 NC

57 H11 STBY STBY STBY VCC

58 G8 RES RES RES RES

59 G9 VSS VSS VSS VSS

60 G11 XTAL XTAL XTAL XTAL

61 G10 EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL

62 F9 VCC VCC VCC VCC

63 F11 P70/CS4 P70/CS4 P70 NC

64 F10 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0 D0

65 F8 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1 D1

66 E11 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2 D2

67 E10 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3 D3

68 E9 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4 D4

69 D11 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5 D5

70 E8 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6 D6

71 D10 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7 D7

72 C11 D8 D8 PD0 NC

73 D9 D9 D9 PD1 NC

74 C10 D10 D10 PD2 NC

75 B11 D11 D11 PD3 NC

76 B10 D12 D12 PD4 NC

77 A10 D13 D13 PD5 NC

78 D8 D14 D14 PD6 NC

79 B9 D15 D15 PD7 NC

80 A9 FWE FWE FWE FWE

81 C8 NMI NMI NMI VCC

82 B8 EMLE/NC EMLE/NC EMLE/NC VSS

83 A8 TDO/NC TDO/NC TDO/NC NC

84 D7 TCK/NC TCK/NC TCK/NC VCC

85 C7 TMS/NC TMS/NC TMS/NC VCC

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 18 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No. Pin Name*

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

Modes 4, 5

Mode 6

Mode 7

Programmer

Mode

86 A7 TRST/NC TRST/NC TRST/NC RES

87 B7 TDI/NC TDI/NC TDI/NC VSS

88 C6 VCC VCC VCC VCC

89 A6 PF7/φ PF7/φ PF7/φ NC

90 B6 VSS VSS VSS VSS

91 D6 AS AS PF6 NC

92 A5 RD RD PF5 NC

93 B5 HWR HWR PF4 NC

94 C5 PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3 VCC

95 A4 PF2/WAIT PF2/WAIT PF2 NC

96 D5 PF1/BACK PF1/BACK PF1 NC

97 B4 PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF0/IRQ2 VCC

98 A3 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/SCK2 A1

99 C4 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/RxD2 A0

100 B3 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/TxD2 OE

Note: * The NC should be left open.

Table 1.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode for H8S/2212 Group

Pin No. Pin Name*

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV Mode 7 Programmer Mode

1 P10/TIOCA0 A2

2 P11/TIOCB0 A3

3 P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA A4

4 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB A5

5 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 VSS

6 P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC WE

7 P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 VSS

8 P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD CE

9 MD0 VSS

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 19 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No. Pin Name*

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV Mode 7 Programmer Mode

10 MD1 VSS

11 MD2 VSS

12 USPND/TMOW NC

13 P30/TxD0 A10

14 P31/RxD0 A11

15 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 A12

16 PG1/IRQ7 A15

17 VBUS VSS

18 P36(PD+) A16

19 DrVCC VCC

20 USD+ NC

21 USD- NC

22 DrVSS VSS

23 P97/AN15 A7

24 P96/AN14 A6

25 Vref VCC

26 P43/AN3 A14

27 P42/AN2 A13

28 P41/AN1 A9

29 P40/AN0 A8

30 PLLVSS VSS

31 UBPM A17

32 PLLVCC VCC

33 OSC2 NC

34 OSC1 VCC

35 STBY VCC

36 RES RES

37 VSS VSS

38 XTAL XTAL

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 20 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No. Pin Name*

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV Mode 7 Programmer Mode

39 EXTAL EXTAL

40 VCC VCC

41 PE0 D0

42 PE1 D1

43 PE2 D2

44 PE3 D3

45 PE4 D4

46 PE5 D5

47 PE6 D6

48 PE7 D7

49 FWE FWE

50 NMI VCC

51 EMLE/NC VSS

52 TDO/P77 NC

53 TCK/P76 VCC

54 TMS/P75 VCC

55 TRST/NC RES

56 TDI/PG0 VSS

57 VCC VCC

58 PF7/φ NC

59 VSS VSS

60 PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3 VCC

61 PF0/IRQ2 VCC

62 PA3/SCK2 A1

63 PA2/RxD2 A0

64 PA1/TxD2 OE

Note: * The NC should be left open.

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 21 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

1.5 Pin Functions

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

VCC Input

Power supply pins. Connect all

these pins to the system power

supply.

VSS Input

Ground pins. Connect all these pins

to the system power supply (0 V).

PLLVCC 48 J8 32 Input Power supply pin for an on-chip

PLL oscillator. Connect this pin to

the system power supply.

Power

supply

PLLVSS 46 K8 30 Input Ground pin for an on-chip PLL

oscillator

XTAL 60 G11 38 Input For connection to a crystal

resonator. For examples of crystal

resonator connection and external

clock input, see section 19, Clock

Pulse Generator.

Clock

EXTAL 61 G10 39 Input For connection to a crystal

resonator. An external clock can be

supplied from the EXTAL pin. For

examples of crystal resonator

connection and external clock input,

see section 19, Clock Pulse

Generator.

OSC1

OSC2

J11

J10

Input For connection to a 32.768-kHz

crystal resonator. For examples of

crystal resonator connection, see

section 19, Clock Pulse Generator.

φ 89 A6 58 Output Supplies the system clock to

external devices.

Operating

mode

control

MD2

MD1

MD0

Input Set the operating mode. Inputs at

these pins cannot be modified

during operation.

Sets the operating mode. Inputs at

these pins should not be changed

during operation. Except for mode

changing, be sure to fix the levels

of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) by

pulling them down or pulling them

up until the power turns off.

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 22 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

RES* 58 G8 36 Input Reset pin. When this pin is driven

low, the chip is reset.

STBY* 57 H11 35 Input When this pin is driven low, a

transition is made to hardware

standby mode.

MRES 55 H9 ⎯ Input When this pin is driven low, a

transition is made to manual reset

mode. (Supported only by the

H8S/2218 Group)

BREQ 97 B4 ⎯ Input Used by an external bus master to

issue a bus request to this LSI

(Supported only by the H8S/2218

Group)

BACK 96 D5 ⎯ Output Indicates that the bus has been

released to an external bus master.

(Supported only by the H8S/2218

Group)

FWE 80 A9 49 Input Pin for use by flash memory. This

pin is only used in the flash memory

version. In the masked ROM

version, it should be connected to

the system power supply (0 V).

System

control

EMLE 82 B8 51 Input Emulator enable

When E10A is not used, connect

this pin to the system power supply

(0 V). When E10A is used, this pin

should be fixed high.

Interrupts NMI* 81 C8 50 Input Nonmaskable interrupt pin. If this

pin is not used, it should be fixed

high.

IRQ7

IRQ4

IRQ3

IRQ2

IRQ1

IRQ0

Input These pins request a maskable

interrupt.

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 23 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

Address bus A23

A22

A21

A20

A19

A18

A17

A16

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A10

100

K11

K10

L10

⎯

Output These pins output an address.

(Supported only by the H8S/2218

Group)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 24 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

Data bus D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

A10

B10

B11

C10

C11

D10

D11

E10

E11

F10

⎯

I/O These pins constitute a bi-

directional data bus. (Supported

only by the H8S/2218 Group)

Bus control CS5

CS4

CS3

CS2

CS1

CS0

H10

F11

⎯

Output Signals for selecting areas 5 to 0 in

the external address space.

(Supported only by the H8S/2218

Group)

AS 91 D6 ⎯ Output When this pin is low, it indicates

that address output on the address

bus is enabled. (Supported only by

the H8S/2218 Group)

RD 92 A5 ⎯ Output When this pin is low, it indicates

that the external address space can

be read. (Supported only by the

H8S/2218 Group)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 25 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

Bus control HWR 93 B5 ⎯ Output A strobe signal that writes to

external address space and

indicates that the upper half (D15 to

D8) of the data bus is enabled.

(Supported only by the H8S/2218

Group)

LWR 94 C5 ⎯ Output A strobe signal that writes to

external address space and

indicates that the lower half (D7 to

D0) of the data bus is enabled.

(Supported only by the H8S/2218

Group)

WAIT 95 A4 ⎯ Input Requests insertion of a wait state in

the bus cycle when accessing

external 3-state address space.

(Supported only by the H8S/2218

Group)

TCLKA

TCLKB

TCLKC

TCLKD

Input TPU external clock input pins

TIOCA0

TIOCB0

TIOCC0

TIOCD0

I/O The TGRA_0 to TGRD_0 input

capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pins

TIOCA1

TIOCB1

I/O The TGRA_1 and TGRB_1 input

capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pins

16-bit timer

pulse unit

(TPU)

TIOCA2

TIOCB2

I/O The TGRA_2 and TGRB_2 input

capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pins

Realtime

clock (RTC)

TMOW 21 G4 12 Output The divided clock output pin

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 26 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

TxD2

TxD0

100

Output Data output pins

RxD2

RxD0

Input Data input pins

Serial

communication

interface (SCI)

SCK2

SCK0

I/O Clock input/output pins

AN15

AN14

AN3

AN2

AN1

AN0

Input Analog input pins for the A/D

converter

ADTRG 94 C5 60 Input Pin for input of an external trigger

to start A/D conversion

A/D converter

Vref 41 H6 25 Input The reference voltage input pin for

the A/D converter. When the A/D

converter is not used, this pin

should be connected to the system

power supply (VCC).

TMS 85 C7 54 Input Control signal input pin for the

boundary scan

TCK 84 D7 53 Input Clock input pin for the boundary

scan

TDO 83 A8 52 Output Data output pin for the boundary

scan

TDI 87 B7 56 Input Data input pin for the boundary

scan

Boundary

scan

(Supported only

by the

HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU

and

HD64F2217CU)

TRST 86 A7 55 Input Reset pin for the TAP controller

USB DrVCC 31 J4 19 Input Power supply pin for the on-chip

transceiver. Connect this pin to the

system power supply.

DrVSS 34 H5 22 Input Ground pin for the on-chip

transceiver.

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 27 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

USB USD+*

USD-*

I/O USB data I/O pin

VBUS* 29 K3 17 Input Connection/disconnection detecting

input pin for the USB cable

USPND 21 G4 12 Output USB suspend output

This pin is driven high when a

transition is made to suspend state.

UBPM 47 L9 31 Input Bus power/self power mode setting

Input

When the USB is used in bus

power mode, this input pin must be

fixed low.

When the USB is used in self

power mode, this input pin must be

fixed high.

P36

(PUPD+)

30 L3 18 I/O Use as D+ signal pull-up control

pin.

I/O port P17

P16

P15

P14

P13

P12

P11

P10

I/O 8-bit I/O pins

P36

P32

P31

P30

I/O 4-bit I/O pins

(Use P36 as D+ signal pull-up

control pin of USB.)

P43 42 K7 26 Input 4-bit input pins

P42 43 J7 27

P41 44 L8 28

P40 45 H7 29

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 28 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

I/O port P77

P76

P75

P74

P71

P70

⎯

H10

F11

⎯

I/O 3-bit I/O pins

P97

P96

Input 2-bit input pins

PA3

PA2

PA1

PA0

100

⎯

I/O 4-bit I/O pins for the H8S/2218

Group. 3-bit I/O pins for the

H8S/2212 Group.

PB7

PB6

PB5

PB4

PB3

PB2

PB1

PB0

K11

K10

L10

⎯

I/O 8-bit I/O pins (Supported only by

the H8S/2218 Group)

PC7

PC6

PC5

PC4

PC3

PC2

PC1

PC0

⎯

I/O 8-bit I/O pins (Supported only by

the H8S/2218 Group)

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 29 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin No.

Type Symbol

TFP-100G,

TFP-100GV

BP-112,

BP-112V

FP-64E,

FP-64EV,

TNP-64B,

TNP-64BV I/O Function

I/O port PD7

PD6

PD5

PD4

PD3

PD2

PD1

PD0

A10

B10

B11

C10

C11

⎯

I/O 8-bit I/O pins (Supported only by

the H8S/2218 Group)

PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

D10

D11

E10

E11

F10

I/O 8-bit I/O pins

PF7

PF6

PF5

PF4

PF3

PF2

PF1

PF0

⎯

I/O 8-bit I/O pins for the H8S/2218

Group. 3-bit I/O pins for the

H8S/2212 Group.

PG4

PG3

PG2

PG1

PG0

⎯

I/O 4-bit I/O pins for the H8S/2218

Group. 2-bit I/O pins for the

H8S/2212 Group.

Note: * Anti-noise measures should be taken to prevent malfunction.

Section 1 Overview

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 30 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 31 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 2 CPU

The H8S/2000 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that

is upward compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2000 CPU has sixteen 16-bit

general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control.

This section describes the H8S/2000 CPU. The usable modes and address spaces differ depending

on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes.

2.1 Features

• Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs

⎯ Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H CPU object programs

• General-register architecture

⎯ Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers

• Sixty-five basic instructions

⎯ 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions

⎯ Multiply and divide instructions

⎯ Powerful bit-manipulation instructions

• Eight addressing modes

⎯ Register direct [Rn]

⎯ Register indirect [@ERn]

⎯ Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)]

⎯ Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn]

⎯ Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32]

⎯ Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]

⎯ Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]

⎯ Memory indirect [@@aa:8]

• 16-Mbyte address space

⎯ Program: 16 Mbytes

⎯ Data: 16 Mbytes

• High-speed operation

⎯ All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states

⎯ 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 1 state

⎯ 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply: 12 states

⎯ 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide: 12 states

CPUS211A_010020011200

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 32 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

⎯ 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 20 states

⎯ 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 20 states

• Two CPU operating modes

⎯ Normal mode*

⎯ Advanced mode

Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.

• Power-down state

⎯ Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction

⎯ CPU clock speed selection

2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU

The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are as shown below.

• Register configuration

The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU.

• Basic instructions

The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the

H8S/2600 CPU.

• The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions

Execution States

Instruction Mnemonic H8S/2600 H8S/2000

MULXU MULXU.B Rs, Rd 3 12

MULXU.W Rs, ERd 4 20

MULXS MULXS.B Rs, Rd 4 13

MULXS.W Rs, ERd 5 21

In addition, there are differences in address space, CCR and EXR register functions, power-down

modes, etc., depending on the model.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 33 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU

In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements.

• More general registers and control registers

⎯ Eight 16-bit extended registers, and one 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers, have been

added.

• Extended address space

⎯ Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU.

⎯ Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space.

• Enhanced addressing

⎯ The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address

space.

• Enhanced instructions

⎯ Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.

⎯ Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added.

⎯ Two-bit shift instructions have been added.

⎯ Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.

⎯ A test and set instruction has been added.

• Higher speed

⎯ Basic instructions execute twice as fast.

2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU

In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements.

• Additional control register

⎯ One 8-bit control registers have been added.

• Enhanced instructions

⎯ Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.

⎯ Two-bit shift instructions have been added.

⎯ Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.

⎯ A test and set instruction has been added.

• Higher speed

⎯ Basic instructions execute twice as fast.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 34 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.2 CPU Operating Modes

The H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a

maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address

space. The mode is selected by the mode pins.

2.2.1 Normal Mode

The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU.

• Address Space

A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed.

• Extended Registers (En)

The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit

segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even

when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the general

post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding

extended register (En) will be affected.

• Instruction Set

All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective

addresses (EA) are valid.

• Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses

In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One

branch address is stored per 16 bits. The exception vector table in normal mode is shown in

figure 2.1. For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling.

The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions

uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand

that contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit (word) operand,

providing a 16-bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000

to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector table.

• Stack Structure

When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC,

condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack

in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.2. EXR is not pushed onto the stack

in interrupt control mode 0. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.

Note: Normal mode is not available in this LSI.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 35 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

H'0000

H'0001

H'0002

H'0003

H'0004

H'0005

H'0006

H'0007

H'0008

H'0009

H'000A

H'000B

Reset exception vector

(Reserved for system use)

Exception vector 1

Exception vector 2

Exception

vector tabl

(Reserved for system use)

Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)

(a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling

(16 bits) EXR*

Reserved*

CCR

CCR*

(16 bits)

SP SP

Notes: 1.

When EXR is not used, it is not stored on the stack.

SP when EXR is not used.

Ignored when returning.

( SP*

)

Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 36 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.2.2 Advanced Mode

• Address Space

Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space.

• Extended Registers (En)

The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit

segments of 32-bit registers or address registers.

• Instruction Set

All instructions and addressing modes can be used.

• Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses

In advanced mode the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table

in units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in

the lower 24 bits (figure 2.3). For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception

Handling.

H'00000000

H'00000003

H'00000004

H'0000000B

H'0000000C

H'00000010

H'00000008

H'00000007

Reserved

Reset exception vector

(Reserved for system use)

Exception vector table

Exception vector 1

(Reserved for system use)

Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 37 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions

uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand

that contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand,

providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is

regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF.

Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector table.

• Stack Structure

In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine

call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are

pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.4. When EXR

is invalid, it is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.

(24 bits)

EXR*

Reserved*

CCR

(24 bits)

Reserved

(a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling

When EXR is not used, it is not stored on the stack.

SP when EXR is not used.

Ignored when returning.

Notes: 1.

( SP*

)

Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 38 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.3 Address Space

Figure 2.5 shows a memory map of the H8S/2000 CPU. The H8S/2000 CPU provides linear

access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte

(architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. The usable modes and address spaces

differ depending on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating

Modes.

H'0000

H'FFFF

H'00000000

H'FFFFFFFF

H'00FFFFFF

64 kbytes

16 Mbytes

Not available

in this LSI.

Program area

Data area

(b) Advanced Mode(a) Normal Mode*

Note: * Not available in this LSI.

Figure 2.5 Memory Map

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 39 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.4 Register Configuration

The H8S/2000 CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.6. There are two types of registers:

general registers and control registers. Control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), an 8-bit

extended control register (EXR), and an 8-bit condition code register (CCR).

TI2I1I0

EXR

76543210

23 0

15 0 7 0 7 0

R0H

R1H

R2H

R3H

R4H

R5H

R6H

R7H

R0L

R1L

R2L

R3L

R4L

R5L

R6L

R7L

SP:

PC:

EXR:

I2 to I0:

CCR:

UI:

Stack pointer

Program counter

Extended control register

Trace bit

Interrupt mask bits

Condition-code register

Interrupt mask bit

User bit or interrupt mask bit

Half-carry flag

User bit

Negative flag

Zero flag

Overflow flag

Carry flag

ER0

ER1

ER2

ER3

ER4

ER5

ER6

ER7 (SP)

IUIHUNZVC

CCR

76543210

General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En)

Control Registers (CR)

Legend:

----

Note: * Cannot be used as an interrupt mask bit in this LSI.

Figure 2.6 CPU Registers

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 40 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.4.1 General Registers

The H8S/2000 CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally

alike and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used

as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.7 illustrates the

usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address

registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7).

The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R

(R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit

registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers.

The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and

RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit

registers.

The usage of each register can be selected independently.

General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register

function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.8 shows the

stack.

• Address registers

• 32-bit registers • 16-bit registers • 8-bit registers

ER registers

(ER0 to ER7)

E registers (extended registers)

(E0 to E7)

R registers

(R0 to R7)

RH registers

(R0H to R7H)

RL registers

(R0L to R7L)

Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 41 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

SP (ER7)

Free area

Stack area

Figure 2.8 Stack

2.4.2 Program Counter (PC)

This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length

of all CPU instructions is two bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an

instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.)

2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR)

EXR is an 8-bit register that manipulates the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.

When these instructions except for the STC instruction is executed, all interrupts including NMI

will be masked for three states after execution is completed.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 T 0 R/W Trace Bit

When this bit is set to 1, a trace exception is generated

each time an instruction is executed. When this bit is

cleared to 0, instructions are executed in sequence.

6 to 3 – All 1 – Reserved

These bits are always read as 1.

1 R/W These bits designate the interrupt mask level (0 to 7).

For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 42 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.4.4 Condition-Code Register (CCR)

This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and

half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags.

Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC

instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch

(Bcc) instructions.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 I 1 R/W Interrupt Mask Bit

Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is

accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set to 1

by hardware at the start of an exception-handling

sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt

Controller.

6 UI undefined R/W User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit

Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC,

ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit cannot be

used as an interrupt mask bit in this LSI.

5 H undefined R/W Half-Carry Flag

When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B or

NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is

a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When

the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is

executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow

at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L,

SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag

is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared

to 0 otherwise.

4 U undefined R/W User Bit

Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC,

ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.

3 N undefined R/W Negative Flag

Stores the value of the most significant bit of data as a sign

bit.

2 Z undefined R/W Zero Flag

Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate

non-zero data.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 43 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

1 V undefined R/W Overflow Flag

Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to

0 at other times.

0 C undefined R/W Carry Flag

Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise.

Used by:

• Add instructions, to indicate a carry

• Subtract instructions, to indicate a carry

• Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a carry

They carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit

manipulation instructions.

2.4.5 Initial Register Values

Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the

trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits

and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized.

The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately

after a reset.

2.5 Data Formats

The H8S/2000 CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit

(longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2,

…, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two

digits of 4-bit BCD data.

2.5.1 General Register Data Formats

Figure 2.9 shows the data formats in general registers.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 44 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

MSB LSB

7043

Don't care

7043

Don't care

65432710

Don't care 65432710

Don't care

Data Type Register Number Data Image

Byte data

4-bit BCD data

1-bit data

RnH

RnL

RnH

RnL

RnH

RnL

Upper Lower

Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1)

15 0

MSB LSB

15 0

MSB LSB

31 16

MSB

15 0

LSB

En Rn

ERn:

En:

Rn:

RnH:

RnL:

MSB:

LSB:

General register ER

General register E

General register R

General register RH

General register RL

Most significant bit

Least significant bit

Data Type Data ImageRegister Number

Word data

Longword data

Legend:

ERn

Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2)

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 45 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.5.2 Memory Data Formats

Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in memory. The H8S/2000 CPU can access word data and

longword data in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt

is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least

significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This

also applies to instruction fetches.

When SP (ER7) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word

size or longword size.

76 543210

MSB LSB

MSB

LSB

Data Type Address

1-bit data

Byte data

Word data

Address L

Address 2M

Address 2M+1

Longword data Address 2N

Address 2N+1

Address 2N+2

Address 2N+3

Data Image

Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats

2.6 Instruction Set

The H8S/2000 CPU has 65 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in

table 2.1.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 46 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.1 Instruction Classification

Function Instructions Size Types

MOV B/W/L 5

POP*1, PUSH*1 W/L

LDM*5, STM*5 L

Data transfer

MOVFPE*3, MOVTPE*3 B

ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG B/W/L 19

ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS B

INC, DEC B/W/L

ADDS, SUBS L

MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS B/W

EXTU, EXTS W/L

Arithmetic

operations

TAS*4 B

Logic operations AND, OR, XOR, NOT B/W/L 4

Shift SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL,

ROTXR

B/W/L 8

Bit manipulation BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND,

BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR

B 14

Branch Bcc*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS – 5

System control TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC,

NOP

– 9

Block data transfer EEPMOV – 1

Total: 65

Legend: B: Byte size

W: Word size

L: Longword size

Notes: 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @-

SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn,

@-SP.

2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.

3. Cannot be used in this LSI.

4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.

5. ER7 is used as a stack pointer in STM and LDM instructions. ER7, therefore, should not

be used as a saving (STM) or restoring (LDM) register.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 47 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.6.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function

Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarizes the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in

tables 2.3 to 2.10 is defined below.

Table 2.2 Operation Notation

Symbol Description

Rd General register (destination)*

Rs General register (source) *

Rn General register*

ERn General register (32-bit register)

(EAd) Destination operand

(EAs) Source operand

EXR Extended control register

CCR Condition-code register

N N (negative) flag in CCR

Z Z (zero) flag in CCR

V V (overflow) flag in CCR

C C (carry) flag in CCR

PC Program counter

SP Stack pointer

#IMM Immediate data

disp Displacement

+ Addition

– Subtraction

× Multiplication

÷ Division

∧ Logical AND

∨ Logical OR

⊕ Logical exclusive OR

→ Move

∼ NOT (logical complement)

:8/:16/:24/:32 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length

Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to

R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7).

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 48 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions

Instruction Size*1 Function

MOV B/W/L (EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)

Moves data between two general registers or between a general register

and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.

MOVFPE B Cannot be used in this LSI.

MOVTPE B Cannot be used in this LSI.

POP W/L @SP+ → Rn

Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W

@SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn

PUSH W/L Rn → @-SP

Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to

MOV.W Rn, @-SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP.

LDM*2 L @SP+ → Rn (register list)

Pops two or more general registers from the stack.

STM*2 L Rn (register list) → @-SP

Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack.

Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

W: Word

L: Longword

2. ER7 is used as a stack pointer in STM and LDM instructions. ER7, therefore, should not

be used as a saving (STM) or restoring (LDM) register.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 49 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operations Instructions

Instruction Size*1 Function

ADD

SUB

B/W/L Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd

Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on

immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate byte data

cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX

or ADD instruction.)

ADDX

SUBX

B Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd

Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on byte data in two

general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register.

INC

DEC

B/W/L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd

Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands

can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.)

ADDS

SUBS

L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd

Adds or subtracts the value 1,2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register.

DAA

DAS

B Rd (decimal adjust) → Rd

Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by

referring to the OCR to produce 4-bit BCD data.

MULXU B/W Rd × Rs → Rd

Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either

8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.

MULXS B/W Rd × Rs → Rd

Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8

bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.

DIVXU B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd

Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16

bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits →

16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder.

DIVXS B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd

Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷

8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit

quotient and 16-bit remainder.

CMP B/W/L Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM

Compares data in a general register with data in another general register

or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 50 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Instruction Size*1 Function

NEG B/W/L 0 – Rd → Rd

Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a

general register.

EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) → Rd

Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16

bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the

left.

EXTS W/L Rd (sign extension) → Rd

Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16

bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit.

TAS*2 B @ERd – 0, 1 → (<bit 7> of @ERd)

Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7) to 1.

Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

W: Word

L: Longword

2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.

Table 2.5 Logic Operations Instructions

Instruction Size* Function

AND B/W/L Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd

Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another

general register or immediate data.

OR B/W/L Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd

Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another

general register or immediate data.

XOR B/W/L Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd

Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and

another general register or immediate data.

NOT B/W/L ∼ Rd → Rd

Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general register

contents.

Note: * Size refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

W: Word

L: Longword

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 51 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.6 Shift Instructions

Instruction Size* Function

SHAL

SHAR

B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd

Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. 1-bit or 2 bit

shift is possible.

SHLL

SHLR

B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd

Performs an logical shift on general register contents. 1-bit or 2 bit shift is

possible.

ROTL

ROTR

B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd

Rotates general register contents. 1-bit or 2 bit rotation is possible.

ROTXL

ROTXR

B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd

Rotates general register contents through the carry flag. 1-bit or 2 bit

rotation is possible.

Note: * Size refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

W: Word

L: Longword

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 52 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions

Instruction Size* Function

BSET B 1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit

number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a

general register.

BCLR B 0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The

bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of

a general register.

BNOT B ∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit

number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a

general register.

BTST B ∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z

Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or

clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit

immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register.

BAND B C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C

ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory

operand and stores the result in the carry flag.

BIAND B C ∧ ∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C

ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general

bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.

BOR B C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C

ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory

operand and stores the result in the carry flag.

BIOR B C ∨ ∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C

ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register

or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit

number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.

Note: * Size refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 53 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Instruction Size* Function

BXOR B C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C

Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or

memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.

BIXOR B C ⊕ ∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C

Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a

general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry

flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.

BLD B (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C

Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory to the carry flag.

BILD B ∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C

Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory

operand to the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate

data.

BST B C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or

memory operand.

BIST B ∼ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general

immediate data.

Note:* Size refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 54 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.8 Branch Instructions

Instruction Size Function

Bcc – Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The

branching conditions are listed below.

Mnemonic Description Condition

BRA (BT) Always (true) Always

BRN (BF) Never (false) Never

BHI High C ∨ Z = 0

BLS Low or same C ∨ Z = 1

BCC (BHS) Carry clear

(high or same)

C = 0

BCS (BLO) Carry set (low) C = 1

BNE Not equal Z = 0

BEQ Equal Z = 1

BVC Overflow clear V = 0

BVS Overflow set V = 1

BPL Plus N = 0

BMI Minus N = 1

BGE Greater or equal N ⊕ V = 0

BLT Less than N ⊕ V = 1

BGT Greater than Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0

BLE Less or equal Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1

JMP – Branches unconditionally to a specified address.

BSR – Branches to a subroutine at a specified address

JSR – Branches to a subroutine at a specified address

RTS – Returns from a subroutine

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 55 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.9 System Control Instruction

Instruction Size* Function

TRAPA – Starts trap-instruction exception handling.

RTE – Returns from an exception-handling routine.

SLEEP – Causes a transition to a power-down state.

LDC B/W (EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR

Moves the source operand contents or immediate data to CCR or EXR.

Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are

performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.

STC B/W CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd)

Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory.

Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are

performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.

ANDC B CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR

Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.

ORC B CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR

Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.

XORC B CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR

Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.

NOP – PC + 2 → PC

Only increments the program counter.

Note:* Size refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

W: Word

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 56 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instruction

Instruction Size Function

EEPMOV.B – if R4L ≠ 0 then

Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+

R4L–1 → R4L

Until R4L = 0

else next;

EEPMOV.W – if R4 ≠ 0 then

Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+

R4–1 → R4

Until R4 = 0

else next;

Transfer a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers

data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location

set in ER6.

Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is

completed.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 57 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.6.2 Basic Instruction Formats

The H8S/2000 CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an

operation field (op), a register field (r), an effective address extension (EA), and a condition field

(cc).

Figure 2.11 shows examples of instruction formats.

• Operation Field

Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried

out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction.

Some instructions have two operation fields.

• Register Field

Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or

4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.

• Effective Address Extension

8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement.

• Condition Field

Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.

op rn rm

NOP, RTS, etc.

ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.

MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc.

rn rm

EA(disp)

op cc EA(disp) BRA d:16, etc.

(1) Operation field only

(2) Operation field and register fields

(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension

(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field

Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples)

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 58 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation

The H8S/2000 CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses

a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct

and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-

counter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register

indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR,

BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in

the operand.

Table 2.11 Addressing Modes

No. Addressing Mode Symbol

1 Register direct Rn

2 Register indirect @ERn

3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn)

4 Register indirect with post-increment

@ERn+

@–ERn

5 Absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32

6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32

7 Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)

8 Memory indirect @@aa:8

2.7.1 Register Direct—Rn

The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the

operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7

can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers.

2.7.2 Register Indirect—@ERn

The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the

address of the operand on memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24

bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 59 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.7.3 Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)

A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn)

specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory

operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.

2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn

specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the

operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the

address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for

longword transfer instruction. For word or longword transfer instruction, the register value should

be even.

address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result becomes

the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value

subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer

instruction. For word or longword transfer instruction, the register value should be even.

2.7.5 Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32

The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address

may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long

(@aa:32). Table 2.12 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges.

To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits

(@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF).

For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can

access the entire address space.

A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8 bits

are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 60 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges

Absolute Address Normal Mode* Advanced Mode

Data address 8 bits (@aa:8) H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF

16 bits (@aa:16) H'0000 to H'FFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF,

H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF

32 bits (@aa:32) H'000000 to H'FFFFFF

Program instruction

address

24 bits (@aa:24)

Note: * Not available in this LSI.

2.7.6 Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32

The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an

operand.

The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit

manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit

number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a

vector address.

2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)

This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in

the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address.

Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0

(H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next

instruction, so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to

+32768 bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should

be an even number.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 61 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.7.8 Memory Indirect—@@aa:8

This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit

absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address.

The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255

(H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode*, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode

the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode

the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be H'00.

Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details,

refer to section 4, Exception Handling.

If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least

significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or instruction code to be fetched at the

address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory Data

Formats.)

Note: * Not available in this LSI.

Specified

by @aa:8 Specified

by @aa:8

Branch address

Reserved

(a) Normal Mode*(b) Advanced Mode

Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.

Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 62 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.7.9 Effective Address Calculation

Table 2.13 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal

mode the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address.

Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation

Offset

31 0

31 23

3Register indirect with displacement

@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)

op disp

op rn

31 0

Don't care

31 23

31 0

Don't care

31 0

disp

31 0

31 23

31 0

Don't care

31 23

31 0

Don't care

Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA)

General register contents

Sign extension

pre-decrement

•Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+

•Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn

1, 2, or 4

Operand Size

Byte

Word

Longword

Operand is general register contents.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 63 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

op 31 23

31 0

Don't care

abs

@aa:8 7

H'FFFF

op 31 23

31 0

Don't care

@aa:16

@aa:24

@aa:32

abs 15

31 23

31 0

Don't care

31 23

31 0

Don't care

abs

op IMM

#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32

Addressing Mode and Instruction Format

Absolute address

Immediate

Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA)

Sign extension

Operand is immediate data.

31 23

Program-counter relative

@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)

Memory indirect @@aa:8

•Normal mode*

•Advanced mode

31 0

Don't care

23 0

disp

31 23

31 0

Don't care

disp

abs 31 0

abs

H'000000 7

15 31 23

31 0

Don't care 15

H'0016

op abs 31 0

abs

H'000000 78

Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.

PC contents

Sign

extension

Memory contents

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 64 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.8 Processing States

The H8S/2000 CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state,

program execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. Figure 2.13 indicates the state

transitions.

• Reset State

In this state the CPU and internal peripheral modules are all initialized and stop. When the RES

input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All interrupts are

masked in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from

low to high. For details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling.

The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow.

• Exception-Handling State

The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal

processing flow due to an exception source, such as, a reset, trace, interrupt, or trap instruction.

The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that

address. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling.

• Program Execution State

In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence.

• Bus-Released State

In a product which has a bus master other than the CPU, such as a direct memory access

controller (DMAC) and a data transfer controller (DTC), the bus-released state occurs when the

bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master other than the CPU. While

the bus is released, the CPU halts operations.

• Power-Down State

This is a power-down state in which the CPU stops operating. The program stop state occurs

when a SLEEP instruction is executed or the CPU enters hardware standby mode. For details,

refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 65 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Exception handling state

Bus-released state

Hardware standby mode*

Software standby mode

Reset state*

Sleep mode

Power-down state*

Program execution state

End of bus request

Bus request

Interrupt request

External interrupt request

RES = High

MRES = High

Request for exception handling

STBY = High, RES = Low

End of bus

request

Bus request

SLEEP instruction,

SSBY = 0

SLEEP instruction,

SSBY = 1

Notes: 1.

From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES

goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows.

From any state except hardware standby mode and power-on reset state, a transition to the manual

reset state occurs whenever MRES goes low.

From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low.

Apart from these states, there are also the watch mode, subactive mode, and the subsleep mode.

See section 20, Power-Down Modes.

End of exception

handling

Figure 2.13 State Transitions

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 66 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2.9 Usage Notes

2.9.1 Note on TAS Instruction Usage

Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS

instruction is not generated by the Renesas Technology H8S and H8/300 Series C/C++ compilers.

If the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only register ER0,

ER1, ER4, or ER5 is used.

2.9.2 STM/LTM Instruction Usage

With the STM or LDM instruction, the ER7 register is used as the stack pointer, and thus cannot

be used as a register that allows save (STM) or restore (LDM) operation.

With a single STM or LDM instruction, two to four registers can be saved or restored. The

available registers are as follows:

For two registers: ER0 and ER1, ER2 and ER3, or ER4 and ER5

For three registers: ER0 to ER2, or ER4 to ER6

For four registers: ER0 to ER3

For the Renesas Technology H8S or H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, the STM/LDM instruction

including ER7 is not created.

2.9.3 Note on Bit Manipulation Instructions

Using bit manipulation instructions on registers containing write-only bits can result in the bits that

should have been manipulated not being manipulated as intended or in the wrong bits being

manipulated.

Reading data from a register containing write-only bits may return fixed or undefined values.

Consequently, bit manipulation instructions that use the read values to perform operations (BNOT,

BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR, BLD, and BILD) will not work properly.

In addition, bit manipulation instructions that write data following operations based on the data

values read (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST) may change the values of bits unrelated to the

intended bit manipulation. Therefore, caution is necessary when using bit manipulation

instructions on registers containing write-only bits.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 67 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

The instructions BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST perform the following operations in the

order shown:

1. Read data in byte units

2. Perform bit manipulation on the read data according to the instruction

3. Write data in byte units

Example: Using the BCLR instruction to clear pin 14 only of P1DDR for port 1

P1DDR is an 8-bit register that contains write-only bits. It is used to specify the I/O setting of the

individual pins in port 1. Reading produces invalid data. Attempting to read from P1DDR returns

undefined values.

In this example, the BCLR instruction is used to set pin 14 as an input port. Let us assume that pins

17 to 14 are presently set as output pins and pins 13 to 10 are set as input pins. Thus, the value of

P1DDR is initially H'F0.

P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10

I/O Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input

P1DDR 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

To change pin 14 from an output pin to an input pin, the value of bit 4 in P1DDR must be changed

from 1 to 0 (H'F0 to H'E0). Now assume that the BCLR instruction is used to clear bit 4 in P1DDR

to 0.

BCLR #4, @P1DDR

However, using the above bit manipulation instruction on the write-only register P1DDR can cause

problems, as described below.

The BCLR instruction first reads data from P1DDR in byte units, but in this case the read values

are undefined. These undefined values can be 0 or 1 for each bit in the register, but there is no way

of telling which. Since all of the bits in P1DDR are write-only, undefined values are returned for

all of the bits when the register is read. In this example the value of P1DDR is H'F0, but we will

assume that the value returned when the register was read is H'F8, which would give bit 3 a value

of 1.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 68 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10

I/O Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input

P1DDR 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Read value 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

The BCLR instruction performs bit manipulation on the read value, which is H'F8 in this example.

It clears bit 4 to 0.

P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10

I/O Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input

P1DDR 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

After bit

manipulation

1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

Following bit manipulation the data is written to P1DDR and the BCLR instruction terminates.

P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10

I/O Output Output Output Input Output Input Input Input

P1DDR 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

Write value 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

The contents of P1DDR should have been overwritten with a value of H'E0, but in fact a value of

H'E8 was written to the register. This changed pin 13, which should have been an input pin, to an

output pin. In this example we assumed that the value of bit 1 in P1DDR was 1. However, since

the values of bits 7 to 0 in P1DDR are all undefined when read, there is the possibility that

individual bit values could be changed from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0. To prevent this from happening,

the recommendations in section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits, should be

followed when changing the values of registers containing write-only bits.

In addition, the BCLR instruction can be used to clear flags in internal I/O registers to 0. In such

cases it is not necessary to read the relevant flag beforehand so long as it is clear that it has been

set to 1 by an interrupt processing routine or the like.

2.9.4 Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits

Using data transfer instructions or bit manipulation instructions on registers containing write-only

bits can result in undefined values being read. To prevent the reading of undefined values, the

procedure described below should be used to access registers containing write-only bits.

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 69 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

In order to write to a register containing write-only bits, set aside a work area in memory (in on-

chip RAM, for example) and write the data to be manipulated to it. After accessing and

manipulating the data in the work area in memory, write the resulting data to the register

containing write-only bits.

Figure 2.14 Example Flowchart of Method for Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits

Write data to work area

Write data from work area to

Access data in work area

(using either data transfer instructions

or bit manipulation instructions)

Write data from work area to

Write initial value

Change value of register containing

write-only bits

Figure 2.14 Flowchart of Method for Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits

Example: Clearing pin 14 only of P1DDR for port 1

P1DDR is an 8-bit register that contains write-only bits. It is used to specify the I/O setting of the

individual pins in port 1. Reading produces invalid data. Attempting to read from P1DDR returns

undefined values.

In this example, the BCLR instruction is used to set pin 14 as an input port. To start, the initial

value H'F0 to be written to P1DDR is written ahead of time to the work area (RAM0) in memory.

MOV.B #H'F0, R0L

MOV.B R0L, @RAM0

MOV.B R0L, @P1DDR

Section 2 CPU

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 70 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10

I/O Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input

P1DDR 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

RAM0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

To change pin 14 from an output pin to an input pin, the value of bit 4 in P1DDR must be changed

from 1 to 0 (H'F0 to H'E0). Here the BCLR instruction will be used to clear bit 4 in P1DDR to 0.

BCLR #4, @RAM0

P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10

I/O Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input

P1DDR 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

RAM0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

Since RAM0 is a read/write area of memory, performing the above bit manipulation using the

BCLR instruction causes only bit 4 in RAM0 to be cleared to 0. The value of RAM0 is then

written to P1DDR.

MOV.B @RAM0, R0L

MOV.B R0L, @P1DDR

P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10

I/O Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Input

P1DDR 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

RAM0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

By using the above procedure to access registers containing write-only bits, it is possible to create

programs that are not dependent on the type of instructions used.

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 71 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

3.1 Operating Mode Selection

This LSI supports four operating modes (modes 4 to 7). These modes enable selection of the CPU

operating mode, enabling/disabling of on-chip ROM, and the initial bus width setting, by setting

the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) as show in table 3.1. Modes 4 to 6 are external extended modes that

allow access to the external memory and peripheral devices. In external extended mode, 8-bit or

16-bit address space can be set for each area depending on the bus controller setting after program

execution starts. If 16-bit access is selected for any one area, 16-bit bus mode is set; if 8-bit access

is selected for all areas, 8-bit bus mode is set. In mode 7, the external address space cannot be

used. Do not change the mode pin settings during operation. Only mode 7 is available in the

H8S/2212 Group.

Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection

External Data Bus

MCU

Operating

Mode MD2 MD1 MD0

CPU Operating

Mode Description

On-chip

ROM Initial Value

Maximum

Value

4 1 0 0 Advanced mode On-chip ROM

disabled, extended

mode

Disabled 16 bits 16 bits

5 1 0 1 Advanced mode On-chip ROM

disabled, extended

mode

Disabled 8 bits 16 bits

6 1 1 0 Advanced mode On-chip ROM

enabled, extended

mode

Enabled 8 bits 16 bits

7 1 1 1 Advanced mode Single-chip mode Enabled – –

Note: When using the E6000 emulator:

• Mode 7 is not available in the H8S/2218 Group. (The E6000 emulator does not support

mode 7.)

• Note following restrictions to use the RTC and USB in mode 6.

Specify PFCR so that A9 and A8 are output on the PB1 and PB0 pins.

Set H'FF in PCDDR so that A7 to A0 are output on the PC7 to PC0 pins.

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 72 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

3.2 Register Descriptions

The following registers are related to the operating mode.

• Mode control register (MDCR)

• System control register (SYSCR)

3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR)

MDCR is used to monitor the current operating mode of this LSI. MDCR should not be modified.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 4 ⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are always read as undefined value and

cannot be modified.

3 FWE ⎯*1 R Flash Programming Enable

Reflects the input level at the FWE pin. This bit

functions same as the FWE bit in the FLMCR1

MDS2

MDS1

MDS0

⎯*1

Mode Select 2 to 0

These bits indicate the input levels at pins MD2 to

MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS2 to

MDS0 correspond to MD2 to MD0. MDS2 to MDS0

are read-only bits and they cannot be written to. The

mode pin (MD2 to MD0) input levels are latched into

these bits when MDCR is read.

These latches are canceled by a power-on reset, but

maintained at manual reset*2.

Notes: 1. Determined by the FWE and MD2 to MD0 pin settings.

2. Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)

SYSCR is used to select the interrupt control mode and the detected edge for NMI, select the

MRES input pin* enable or disable, and enables or disables on-chip RAM.

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 73 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 – 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

6 – 0 – Reserved

This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

INTM1

INTM0

R/W

These bits select the control mode of the interrupt

controller. For details of the interrupt control modes,

see section 5.6, Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt

Operation.

00: Interrupt control mode 0

01: Setting prohibited

10: Interrupt control mode 2

11: Setting prohibited

3 NMIEG 0 R/W NMI Edge Select

Selects the valid edge of the NMI interrupt input.

0: An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI

input

1: An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI

input

2 MRESE 0 R/W Manual Reset Select

Enables or disables the MRES pin* input.

0: Manual reset is disabled

1: Manual reset is enabled

The MRES input pin* can be used.

1 – 0 – Reserved

This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

0 RAME 1 R/W RAM Enable

Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit

is initialized when the reset status is released.

0: On-chip RAM is disabled

1: On-chip RAM is enabled

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 74 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

3.3 Operating Mode Descriptions

3.3.1 Mode 4 (Supported Only by the H8S/2218 Group)

The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled.

Pins P13 to P10, and ports A, B, and C function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data

bus, and part of port F carries bus control signals.

Pins P13 to P11 function as input ports immediately after a reset. Pin 10 and ports A and B

function as address (A20 to A8) outputs immediately after a reset. Address (A23 to A21) output

can be enabled or disabled by bits AE3 to AE0 in the pin function control register (PFCR)

regardless of the corresponding data direction register (DDR) values. Pins for which address

output is disabled among pins P13 to P10 and in ports A and B become port outputs when the

corresponding DDR bits are set to 1.

Port C always has an address (A7 to A0) output function.

The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 8-

bit access is designated by the bus controller for all areas, the bus mode switches to 8 bits.

3.3.2 Mode 5 (Supported Only by the H8S/2218 Group)

The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled.

Pins P13 to P10, and ports A, B, and C function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data

bus, and part of port F carries bus control signals.

Pins P13 to P11 function as input ports immediately after a reset. Pin 10 and ports A and B

function as address (A20 to A8) outputs immediately after a reset. Address (A23 to A21) output

can be enabled or disabled by bits AE3 to AE0 in the pin function control register (PFCR)

regardless of the corresponding data direction register (DDR) values. Pins for which address

output is disabled among pins P13 to P10 and in ports A and B become port outputs when the

corresponding DDR bits are set to 1.

Port C always has an address (A7 to A0) output function.

The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 16-

bit access is designated by the bus controller for any area, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and

port E becomes a data bus.

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 75 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

3.3.3 Mode 6 (Supported Only by the H8S/2218 Group)

The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled.

Pins P13 to P10, and ports A, B and C function as input ports immediately after a reset. Address

(A23 to A8) output can be enabled or disabled by bits AE3 to AE0 in the pin function control

which address output is disabled among pins P13 to P10 and in ports A and B become port outputs

when the corresponding DDR bits are set to 1.

Port C is an input port immediately after a reset. Addresses A7 to A0 are output by setting the

corresponding DDR bits to 1.

Ports D and E function as a data bus, and part of port F carries data bus signals.

The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 16-

bit access is designated by the bus controller for any area, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and

port E becomes a data bus.

3.3.4 Mode 7

The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled,

but external addresses cannot be accessed.

All I/O ports are available for use as input-output ports.

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 76 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

3.3.5 Pin Functions

The pin functions of ports 1, and A to F vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3.2 shows

their functions in each operating mode.

Table 3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode

Port Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

Port 1 P13 to P11 P*/A P*/A P*/A P

P10 P/A* P/A* P*/A P

Port A PA3 to PA0 P/A* P/A* P*/A P

Port B P/A* P/A* P*/A P

Port C A A P*/A P

Port D D D D P

Port E P/D* P*/D P*/D P

Port F PF7 P/C* P/C* P/C* P*/C

PF6 to PF4 C C C P

PF3 P/C* P*/C P*/C

PF2 to PF0 P*/C P*/C P*/C

Legend:

P: I/O port

A: Address bus output

D: Data bus I/O

C: Control signals, clock I/O

*: After reset

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 77 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

3.4 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode

Figures 3.1 to 3.4 show the memory map in each operation mode, respectively.

External address

space

Notes: 1.

Though RTC and USB registers are provided inside the chip, ASN, RDN, and WRN are asserted and

the addresses are output when these areas are accessed.

Therefore, care should be taken when connecting memory externally.

The reserved area of H'FEE800 to H'FFBFFF should not be accessed.

The external address can be used instead, by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.

External address

space

On-chip RAM*

USB registers*

Internal I/O registers*

Reserved*

On-chip RAM*

External address

space

External address

space

On-chip RAM*

On-chip ROM On-chip ROM

USB registers*

Internal I/O registers*

Reserved*

On-chip RAM*

External address

space

External address

space

On-chip RAM

USB registers

Internal I/O registers

On-chip RAM

H'000000

H'01FFFF

H'020000

H'E00000

H'FEE800

H'C00000

H'000000 H'000000

H'FFC000

H'FEE800

H'FFC000

H'E00000

H'FEE800

H'C00000

H'FFC000 H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFC0

H'FFFFFF H'FFFFFF H'FFFFFF

H'FFEFC0 H'FFEFC0

H'FFF800 H'FFF800 H'FFF800

H'DFFFFF

H'C00000

Modes 4 and 5

(advanced extended modes

with on-chip ROM desabled)

Mode 6

(advanced extended mode

with on-chip ROM enabled)

Mode 7

(advanced single-chip mode)

ROM: ⎯

RAM: 12 kbytes ROM: 128 kbytes

RAM: 12 kbytes

Figure 3.1 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode for HD64F2218, HD64F2218U and

HD64F2218CU

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 78 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

External address

space

Notes: 1.

Though RTC and USB registers are provided inside the chip, ASN, RDN, and WRN are asserted and

the addresses are output when these areas are accessed.

Therefore, care should be taken when connecting memory externally.

The reserved area of H'FEE800 to H'FFBFFF should not be accessed.

The external address can be used instead, by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.

External address

space

On-chip RAM*3

USB registers*1

Internal I/O registers*1

Reserved*2

On-chip RAM*3On-chip RAM*3On-chip RAM

External address

space

External address

space

On-chip RAM*3

On-chip ROM On-chip ROM

USB registers*1USB registers

Internal I/O registers*1

Reserved*2Reserved*2

Reserved

External address

space

External address

space

On-chip RAM

Internal I/O registers

Modes 4 and 5

(advanced extended modes

with on-chip ROM desabled)

Mode 6

(advanced extended mode

with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7

(advanced single-chip mode)

ROM: ⎯

RAM: 12 kbytes ROM: 64 kbytes

RAM: 12 kbytes

H'00FFFF

H'000000

H'020000

H'010000

H'E00000

H'FEE800

H'C00000

H'000000

H'00FFFF

H'FFC000

H'FEE800

H'FFC000

H'E00000

H'FEE800

H'C00000

H'FFC000 H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFC0

H'FFFFFF H'FFFFFF H'FFFFFF

H'FFEFC0 H'FFEFC0

H'FFF800 H'FFF800 H'FFF800

H'DFFFFF

H'C00000

Figure 3.2 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode for HD64F2217CU

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 79 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

External address

space

Notes: 1.

Though RTC and USB registers are provided inside the chip, ASN, RDN, and WRN are asserted and

the addresses are output when these areas are accessed.

Therefore, care should be taken when connecting memory externally.

The reserved area of H'FEE800 to H'FFCFFF should not be accessed.

The external address can be used instead, by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.

External address

space

On-chip RAM*3

USB registers*1

Internal I/O registers*1

Reserved*2

On-chip RAM*3On-chip RAM*3On-chip RAM

External address

space

External address

space

On-chip RAM*3

On-chip ROM On-chip ROM

USB registers*1USB registers

Internal I/O registers*1

Reserved*2Reserved*2

Reserved

External address

space

External address

space

On-chip RAM

Internal I/O registers

Modes 4 and 5

(advanced extended modes

with on-chip ROM desabled)

Mode 6

(advanced extended mode

with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7

(advanced single-chip mode)

ROM: ⎯

RAM: 8 kbytes ROM: 64 kbytes

RAM: 8 kbytes

H'00FFFF

H'000000

H'020000

H'010000

H'E00000

H'FEE800

H'C00000

H'000000

H'00FFFF

H'FFD000

H'FEE800

H'FFD000

H'E00000

H'FEE800

H'C00000

H'FFD000 H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFC0

H'FFFFFF H'FFFFFF H'FFFFFF

H'FFEFC0 H'FFEFC0

H'FFF800 H'FFF800 H'FFF800

H'DFFFFF

H'C00000

Figure 3.3 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode for HD6432217

Section 3 MCU Operating Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 80 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Note: *The reserved area should not be accessed.

Mode 7

(advanced single-chip mode)

ROM: 128 kbytes

RAM: 12 kbytes

H'01FFFF

H'000000

H'FEE800

H'FFC000

H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0

H'FFFFFF

H'FFF800

H'DFFFFF

H'C00000

On-chip RAM

On-chip ROM

USB registers

Internal I/O registers

Reserved*

HD64F2212, HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU

Mode 7

(advanced single-chip mode)

ROM: 64 kbytes

RAM: 8 kbytes

H'00FFFF

H'000000

H'FEE800

H'FFD000

H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0

H'FFFFFF

H'FFF800

H'DFFFFF

H'C00000

On-chip RAM

On-chip ROM

USB registers

Internal I/O registers

Reserved*

HD64F2211, HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU,HD6432211

Mode 7

(advanced single-chip mode)

ROM: 32 kbytes

RAM: 4 kbytes

H'007FFF

H'000000

H'FEE800

H'FFE000

H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0

H'FFFFFF

H'FFF800

H'DFFFFF

H'C00000

On-chip RAM

On-chip ROM

USB registers

Internal I/O registers

Reserved*

HD6432210, HD6432210S

Mode 7

(advanced single-chip mode)

ROM: 32 kbytes

RAM: 8 kbytes

H'007FFF

H'000000

H'FEE800

H'FFD000

H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0

H'FFFFFF

H'FFF800

H'DFFFFF

H'C00000

On-chip RAM

On-chip ROM

USB registers

Reserved*

HD64F2210CU

Internal I/O registers

Figure 3.4 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode for HD64F2212, HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU,

HD64F2210CU, HD6432211, HD6432210 and HD6432210S

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 81 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 4 Exception Handling

4.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority

As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trace, trap instruction, or

interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur

simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Exception sources, the stack

structure, and operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode. For details on

the interrupt control mode, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.

Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority

Priority Exception Type Start of Exception Handling

High Reset Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES or

MRES* pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. The CPU

enters the reset state when the RES pin is low. The CPU enters

the manual reset state when the MRES pin* is low.

Trace Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception

handling ends, if the trace (T) bit in the EXR is set to 1. This is

enabled only in trace interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception

processing is not performed after RTE instruction execution.

Interrupt Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception

handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued. Note that

after executing the ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC instruction or at

the completion of reset exception processing, no interrupt is

detected.

Low Trap instruction

(TRAPA)

Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA). Trap exception

processing is always accepted in program execution state.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

4.2 Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table

Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception

sources and their vector addresses. Since the usable modes differ depending on the product, for

details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes.

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 82 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 4.2 Exception Handling Vector Table

Vector Address*1

Exception Source Vector Number Normal Mode*4 Advanced Mode

Power-on reset 0 H'0000 to H'0001 H'0000 to H'0003

Manual reset 1 H'0002 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0007

2 H'0004 to H'0005 H'0008 to H'000B

3 H'0006 to H'0007 H'000C to H'000F

Reserved for system use

4 H'0008 to H'0019 H'0010 to H'0013

Trace 5 H'000A to H'000B H'0014 to H'0017

Direct transitions*2 6 H'000C to H'000D H'0018 to H'001B

External interrupt (NMI) 7 H'000E to H'000F H'001C to H'001F

#0 8 H'0010 to H'0011 H'0020 to H'0023

#1 9 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0024 to H'0027

#2 10 H'0014 to H'0015 H'0028 to H'002B

Trap instruction

#3 11 H'0016 to H'0017 H'002C to H'002F

12 H'0018 to H'0019 H'0030 to H'0033

13 H'001A to H'001B H'0034 to H'0037

14 H'001C to H'001D H'0038 to H'003B

Reserved for system use

15 H'001E to H'001F H'003C to H'003F

External interrupt IRQ0 16 H'0020 to H'0021 H'0040 to H'0043

External interrupt IRQ1 17 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0044 to H'0047

External interrupt IRQ2 18 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0048 to H'004B

External interrupt IRQ3 19 H'0026 to H'0027 H'004C to H'004F

External interrupt IRQ4 20 H'0028 to H'0029 H'0050 to H'0053

RTC interrupt IRQ5 21 H'002A to H'002B H'0054 to H'0057

USB interrupt IRQ6 22 H'002C to H'002D H'0058 to H'005B

External interrupt IRQ7 23 H'002E to H'002F H'005C to H'005F

Internal interrupt*3 24 H'0030 to H'0031 H'0060 to H'0063

⏐ ⏐ ⏐

127 H'00FE to H'00FF H'01FC to H'01FF

Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.

2. For direct transfer, see section 20.10, Direct Transitions.

3. For details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.5, Interrupt Exception Handling

Vector Table.

4. Not available in this LSI.

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 83 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

4.3 Reset

A reset has the highest exception priority.

When the RES or MRES* pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset state. To

ensure that this LSI is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up or hold the RES

or MRES* pin low for at least 20 states during operation.

A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip peripheral modules.

This LSI can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 10,

Watchdog Timer (WDT).

Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set.

Notes: TRST in the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and HD64F2217CU, which

incorporate a boundary scan function, should be brought low when power is on. For

details, see section 13, Boundary Scan Function.

* Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

4.3.1 Reset Types

A reset can be of either of two types for the H8S/2218 Group: a power-on reset or a manual reset.

A reset for the H8S/2212 Group is power-on reset. Reset types are shown in table 4.3. A power-on

reset should be used when powering on.

The internal state of the CPU is initialized by either type of reset. A power-on reset also initializes

all the registers in the on-chip peripheral modules, while a manual reset initializes all the registers

in the on-chip peripheral modules except for the bus controller and I/O ports, which retain their

previous states.

With a manual reset, since the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized, ports used as on-chip

peripheral module I/O pins are switched to I/O ports controlled by DDR and DR.

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 84 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 4.3 Reset Types

Reset Transition Condition Internal State

Type MRES RES CPU On-Chip Peripheral Modules

Power-on reset × Low Initialized Initialized

Manual reset Low High Initialized Initialized, except for bus

controller and I/O ports

Legend:

×: Don't care

A reset caused by the watchdog timer can also be of either of two types: a power-on reset or a

manual reset.

When the MRES pin* is used, MRES pin* input must be enabled by setting the MRESE bit to 1 in

SYSCR.

Note:* Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

4.3.2 Reset Exception Handling

When the RES or MRES* pin goes low, this LSI enters the reset. To ensure that this LSI is reset,

hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset the chip during operation, hold the

RES or MRES* pin low for at least 20 states.

When the RES or MRES* pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts

reset exception handling as follows.

1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized,

the T bit is cleared to 0 in EXR, and the I bit is set to 1 in EXR and CCR.

2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program

execution starts from the address indicated by the PC.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Figures 4.1 and 4.2 show examples of the reset sequence.

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 85 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(1) (3)

(2) (4)

(5)

(6)

Note: * Three program wait states are inserted.

Reset exception handling vector address (for power-on reset, (1) = H'000000,

(3) = H'000002; for manual reset, (1) = H'000004, (3) = H'000006)

Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)

Start address ((5) = (2) (4))

First program instruction

RES, MRES

Address bus

HWR, LWR

D15 to D0

(1) (3)

High

(2) (4)

(5)

(6)

* * *

Vector fetch Internal

processing Prefetch of first

program instruction

Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Mode 4)

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 86 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(1) (3)

(2) (4)

(5)

(6)

: Reset exception handling vector address (for a power-on reset, (1) = H'000000, (3) = H'000002

for a manual reset, (1) = H'000004, (3) = H'000006)

: Start address (contents of reset exceptiion handling vector address)

: Start address ((5) = (2) (4))

: First program instruction

RES, MRES

Internal

Address bus

Internal

read signal

Internal

write signal

Internal

data bus

Vector

fetch

(1) (3) (5)

High

Internal

processing Prefetch of first progra

instruction

(4) (6)(2)

Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Modes 6 and 7)

4.3.3 Interrupts after Reset

If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and

CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests,

including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is

always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes

the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32,SP).

4.3.4 State of On-Chip Peripheral Modules after Reset Release

After reset release, MSTPCRA, MSTPCRB, and MSTPCRC are initialized and all modules except

the DMAC enter module stop mode. Consequently, on-chip peripheral module registers cannot be

read from or written to. Register reading and writing is enabled when module stop mode is exited.

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 87 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

4.4 Traces

Traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is not activated in interrupt control

mode 0, irrespective of the state of the T bit. For details of interrupt control modes, see section 5,

Interrupt Controller.

If the T bit in EXR is set to 1, trace mode is activated. In trace mode, a trace exception occurs on

completion of each instruction. Trace mode is not affected by interrupt masking. Table 4.4 shows

the state of CCR and EXR after execution of trace exception handling. Trace mode is canceled by

clearing the T bit in EXR to 0. The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when control

is returned from the trace exception handling routine by the RTE instruction, trace mode resumes.

Trace exception handling is not carried out after execution of the RTE instruction.

Interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine.

Table 4.4 Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling

CCR EXR

Interrupt Control Mode I UI I2 to I0 T

0 Trace exception handling cannot be used.

2 1 – – 0

Legend:

1: Set to 1

0: Cleared to 0

–: Retains value prior to execution.

4.5 Interrupts

Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt

control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to eight priority/mask levels to enable

multiplexed interrupt control. The source to start interrupt exception handling and the vector

address differ depending on the product. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.

The interrupt exception handling is as follows:

1. The values in the program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended control

2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared.

3. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded

from the vector table to the PC, and program execution starts from that address.

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 88 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

4.6 Trap Instruction

Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction

exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state.

The trap instruction exception handling is as follows:

1. The values in the program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended control

2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared.

3. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded

from the vector table to the PC, and program execution starts from that address.

The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector

number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code.

Table 4.5 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling.

Table 4.5 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling

CCR EXR

Interrupt Control Mode I UI I2 to I0 T

0 1 – – –

2 1 – – 0

Legend:

1: Set to 1

0: Cleared to 0

–: Retains value prior to execution.

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 89 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

4.7 Stack Status after Exception Handling

Figure 4.3 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt

exception handling.

CCR

CCR*1

PC (16 bits)

EXR

Reserved*1

CCR

CCR*1

PC (16 bits)

CCR

PC (24 bits)

EXR

Reserved*1

CCR

PC (24 bits)

(a) Normal Modes*2

(b) Advanced Modes

Interrupt control mode 0 Interrupt control mode 2

Notes: 1.

2. Ignored on return.

Normal modes are not available in this LSI.

Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling

Section 4 Exception Handling

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 90 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

4.8 Notes on Use of the Stack

When accessing word data or longword data, this LSI assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The

stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and

the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following

instructions to save registers:

PUSH.W Rn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP)

PUSH.L ERn (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP)

Use the following instructions to restore registers:

POP.W Rn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn)

POP.L ERn (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)

Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.4 shows an example of what

happens when the SP value is odd.

CCR:

PC:

R1L:

SP:

Condition code register

Program counter

General register R1L

Stack pointer

CCR

SP SP R1L H'FFFEFA

H'FFFEFB

H'FFFEFC

H'FFFEFD

H'FFFEFE

H'FFFEFF

PC PC

TRAPA instruction executedSP set to H'FFFEFF

Data saved above SP

MOV.B R1L, @-ER7 executed

Contents of CCR lost

Address

Legend:

Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode.

Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value Is Odd

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 91 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

5.1 Features

• Two interrupt control modes

⎯ Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in

the system control register (SYSCR).

• Priorities settable with IPR

⎯ An interrupt priority register (IPR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Eight priority

levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI. NMI is assigned the highest

priority level of 8, and can be accepted at all times.

• Independent vector addresses

⎯ All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for

the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine.

• Seven external interrupts (NMI, IRQ7, and IRQ4 to IRQ0)

⎯ NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling

edge can be selected for NMI. Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level

sensing, can be selected for IRQ7 and IRQ4 to IRQ0. IRQ6 is an interrupt only for the on-

chip USB. IRQ5 is an interrupt only for the on-chip RTC.

• DMAC control

⎯ DMAC activation is performed by means of interrupts.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 92 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5.1.

SYSCR

NMI input

IRQ input

Internal interrupt

request

WOVI to EXIRQ1

INTM1, INTM0

NMIEG

NMI input unit

IRQ input unit

ISR

ISCR IER

IPR

Interrupt controller

Priority

determination

Interrupt

request

Vector number

I2 to I0 CCR

EXR

CPU

ISCR:

IER:

ISR:

IPR:

SYSCR:

IRQ sense control register

IRQ enable register

IRQ status register

Interrupt priority register

System control register

Legend:

Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 93 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller.

Table 5.1 Pin Configuration

Name I/O Function

NMI Input Nonmaskable external interrupt

Rising or falling edge can be selected

IRQ7 Input

IRQ4 Input

IRQ3 Input

IRQ2 Input

Maskable external interrupts

Rising, falling, or both edges, or level sensing can be selected (IRQ6 is

an interrupt signal only for the on-chip USB. IRQ5 is an interrupt signal

only for the on-chip RTC.)

IRQ1 Input

IRQ0 Input

5.3 Register Descriptions

The interrupt controller has the following registers. For details on the system control register, refer

to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR).

• System control register (SYSCR)

• IRQ sense control register H (ISCRH)

• IRQ sense control register L (ISCRL)

• IRQ enable register (IER)

• IRQ status register (ISR)

• Interrupt priority register A (IPRA)

• Interrupt priority register B (IPRB)

• Interrupt priority register C (IPRC)

• Interrupt priority register D (IPRD)

• Interrupt priority register E (IPRE)

• Interrupt priority register F (IPRF)

• Interrupt priority register G (IPRG)

• Interrupt priority register J (IPRJ)

• Interrupt priority register K (IPRK)

• Interrupt priority register M (IPRM)

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 94 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A to G, J, K, M (IPRA to IPRG, IPRJ, IPRK, IPRM)

The IPR registers set priorities (levels 7 to 0) for interrupts other than NMI.

The correspondence between interrupt sources and IPR settings is shown in section 5.5, Interrupt

Exception Handling Vector Table. Setting a value in the range from H'0 to H'7 in the 3-bit groups

of bits 6 to 4 and 2 to 0 sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 – 0 – Reserved

This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

IPR6

IPR5

IPR4

R/W

These bits set the priority of the corresponding

interrupt source.

000: Priority level 0 (Lowest)

001: Priority level 1

010: Priority level 2

011: Priority level 3

100: Priority level 4

101: Priority level 5

110: Priority level 6

111: Priority level 7 (Highest)

3 – 0 – Reserved

This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

IPR2

IPR1

IPR0

R/W

These bits set the priority of the corresponding

interrupt source.

000: Priority level 0 (Lowest)

001: Priority level 1

010: Priority level 2

011: Priority level 3

100: Priority level 4

101: Priority level 5

110: Priority level 6

111: Priority level 7 (Highest)

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 95 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.3.2 IRQ Enable Register (IER)

IER controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 IRQ7E 0 R/W IRQ7 Enable

The IRQ7 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.

6 IRQ6E 0 R/W IRQ6 Enable*1

The IRQ6 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.

5 IRQ5E 0 R/W IRQ5 Enable*2

The IRQ5 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.

4 IRQ4E 0 R/W IRQ4 Enable

The IRQ4 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.

3 IRQ3E 0 R/W IRQ3 Enable

The IRQ3 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.

2 IRQ2E 0 R/W IRQ2 Enable

The IRQ2 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.

1 IRQ1E 0 R/W IRQ1 Enable

The IRQ1 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.

0 IRQ0E 0 R/W IRQ0 Enable

The IRQ0 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.

Notes: 1. IRQ6 is an interrupt only for the on-chip USB.

2. IRQ5 is an interrupt only for the on-chip RTC.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 96 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.3.3 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)

The ISCR registers select the source that generates an interrupt request at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

IRQ7SCB

IRQ7SCA

R/W

IRQ7 Sense Control B

IRQ7 Sense Control A

00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ7 input low level

01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ7

input

10: Interrupt request generated rising edge of IRQ7

input

11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and

rising edges of IRQ7 input

IRQ6SCB

IRQ6SCA

R/W

IRQ6*1 Sense Control B

IRQ6*1 Sense Control A

00: Setting prohibited when using on-chip USB

suspend or resume interrupt

01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ6

input

1x: Setting prohibited

IRQ5SCB

IRQ5SCA

R/W

IRQ5*2 Sense Control B

IRQ5*2 Sense Control A

00: Setting prohibited when using RTC interrupt

01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ5

input

1x: Setting prohibited

IRQ4SCB

IRQ4SCA

R/W

IRQ4 Sense Control B

IRQ4 Sense Control A

00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ4 input low level

01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ4

input

10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ4

input

11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and

rising edges of IRQ4 input

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 97 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

IRQ3SCB

IRQ3SCA

R/W

IRQ3 Sense Control B

IRQ3 Sense Control A

00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ3 input low level

01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ3

input

10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ3

input

11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and

rising edges of IRQ3 input

IRQ2SCB

IRQ2SCA

R/W

IRQ2 Sense Control B

IRQ2 Sense Control A

00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ2 input low level

01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ2

input

10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ2

input

11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and

rising edges of IRQ2 input

IRQ1SCB

IRQ1SCA

R/W

IRQ1 Sense Control B

IRQ1 Sense Control A

00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ1 input low level

01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ1

input

10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ1

input

11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising

edges of IRQ1 input

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 98 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

IRQ0SCB

IRQ0SCA

R/W

IRQ0 Sense Control B

IRQ0 Sense Control A

00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ0 input low level

01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ0

input

10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ0

input

11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and

rising edges of IRQ0 input

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Notes: 1. IRQ6 is an interrupt only for the on-chip USB.

2. IRQ5 is an interrupt only for the on-chip RTC.

5.3.4 IRQ Status Register (ISR)

ISR indicates the status of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt requests.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 IRQ7F 0 R/(W)*

6 IRQ6F 0 R/(W)*

5 IRQ5F 0 R/(W)*

4 IRQ4F 0 R/(W)*

3 IRQ3F 0 R/(W)*

2 IRQ2F 0 R/(W)*

1 IRQ1F 0 R/(W)*

0 IRQ0F 0 R/(W)*

[Setting condition]

When the interrupt source selected by the ISCR

registers occurs

[Clearing conditions]

• Cleared by reading IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1,

then writing 0 to IRQnF flag

• When interrupt exception handling is executed

when low-level detection is set and , IRQn input is

high

• When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed

when falling, rising, or both-edge detection is set

Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 99 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.4 Interrupt Sources

5.4.1 External Interrupts

There are seven external interrupts: NMI, IRQ7, and IRQ4 to IRQ0. These interrupts can be used

to restore this LSI from software standby mode. Though IRQ5 is only for the on-chip RTC and

IRQ6 is only for the on-chip USB, the interrupts can be used to restore this LSI from software

standby mode. IRQ5 and IRQ6 are functionally same as IRQ7 and IRQ4 to IRQ0.

NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU

regardless of the interrupt control mode or the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG

bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling

edge on the NMI pin.

IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ7

to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 have the following features:

• Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling

edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0

• Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER.

• The interrupt priority level can be set with IPR.

• The status of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0

by software.

A block diagram of IRQn interrupts is shown in figure 5.2.

IRQnE

IRQnF

IRQn interrupt

request

Clear signal

Edge/level

detection circuit

IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB

IRQn input

Note: n = 7 to 0

Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQn

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 100 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

The set timing for IRQnF is shown in figure 5.3.

IRQn

input pin

IRQnF

Note: n = 7 to 0

Figure 5.3 Timing of Setting IRQnF

The detection of IRQn interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for

input or output. However, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the

corresponding DDR to 0; and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function. IRQnF interrupt

request flag is set when the setting condition is satisfied, regardless of IER settings. Accordingly,

refer to only necessary flags.

5.4.2 Internal Interrupts

The sources for internal interrupts from on—chip peripheral modules have the following features:

• For each on—chip peripheral module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status,

and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If both of these are set to 1

for a particular interrupt source, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller.

• The interrupt priority level can be set by means of IPR.

• The DMAC can be activated by a TPU, SCI, or other interrupt request.

• When the DMAC is activated by an interrupt request, it is not affected by the interrupt control

mode or CPU interrupt mask bit.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 101 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table

Table 5.2 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities.

For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. Priorities among

modules can be set by means of the IPR. Modules set at the same priority will conform to their

default priorities. Priorities within a module are fixed.

Table 5.2 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities

Vector Address*

Interrupt

Source

Origin of Interrupt

Source

Vector

Number Advanced Mode IPR Priority

External pins NMI 7 H'001C High

IRQ0 16 H'0040 IPRA6 to IPRA4

IRQ1 17 H'0044 IPRA2 to IPRA0

IRQ2 18 H'0048 IPRB6 to IPRB4

IRQ3 19 H'004C

IRQ4 20 H'0050 IPRB2 to IPRB0

RTC IRQ5 21 H'0054

USB IRQ6 22 H'0058 IPRC6 to IPRC4

External pins IRQ7 23 H'005C

Watchdog Timer WOVI 25 H'0064 IPRD6 to IPRD4

A/D ADI 28 H'0070 IPRE2 to IPRE0

TGI0A 32 H'0080

TGI0B 33 H'0084

TGI0C 34 H'0088

TGI0D 35 H'008C

TPU channel 0

TGI0V 36 H'0090

IPRF6 to IPRF4

TPU channel 1 TGI1A 40 H'00A0 IPRF2 to IPRF0

TGI1B 41 H'00A4

TGI1V 42 H'00A8

TGI1U 43 H'00AC Low

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 102 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Vector Address*

Interrupt

Source

Origin of Interrupt

Source

Vector

Number Advanced Mode IPR Priority

TGI2A 44 H'00B0 High

TGI2B 45 H'00B4

TGI2V 46 H'00B8

TPU channel 2

TGI2U 47 H'00BC

IPRG6 to IPRG4

DEND0A 72 H'0120

DEND0B 73 H'0124

DEND1A 74 H'0128

DMAC

DEND1B 75 H'012C

IPRJ6 to IPRJ4

ERI0 80 H'0140

RXI0 81 H'0144

TXI0 82 H'0148

SCI channel 0

TEI0 83 H'014C

IPRJ2 to IPRJ0

ERI2 88 H'0160

RXI2 89 H'0164

TXI2 90 H'0168

SCI channel 2

TEI2 91 H'016C

IPRK2 to IPRK0

USB EXIRQ0 104 H'01A0 IPRM6 to IPRM4

EXIRQ1 105 H'01A4 Low

Note: * Lower 16 bits of the start address.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 103 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.6 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation

The interrupt controller has two modes: interrupt control mode 0 and interrupt control mode 2.

Interrupt operations differ depending on the interrupt control mode. The interrupt control mode is

selected by SYSCR. Table 5.3 shows the differences between interrupt control mode 0 and

interrupt control mode 2.

Table 5.3 Interrupt Control Modes

Interrupt

Control Mode

Priority Setting

Interrupt Mask

Bits Description

0 Default I The priority of interrupt sources are fixed at

the default settings.

Interrupt sources except for NMI is marked by

the I bit.

2 IPR I2 to I0 8-level interrupt mask control is performed by

bits I2 to I0.

8 priority levels other than NMI can be set with

IPR.

5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0

In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt requests except for NMI is masked by the I bit of CCR in the

CPU. Figure 5.4 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.

1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt

request is sent to the interrupt controller.

2. If the I bit is set to 1, only an NMI interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held

pending. If the I bit is cleared, an interrupt request is accepted.

3. Interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the highest-ranked interrupt according to

the priority system is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending.

4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after

execution of the current instruction has been completed.

5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on

the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the

interrupt handling routine.

6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 104 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the

interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the

vector table.

Program execution status

Interrupt generated?

NMI

IRQ0

IRQ1

EXIRQ1

I = 0

Save PC and CCR

I←1

Read vector address

Branch to interrupt handling routine

Yes

Yes No

Yes

Hold

pending

Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance

in Interrupt Control Mode 0

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 105 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 2

In interrupt control mode 2, mask control is done in eight levels for interrupt requests except for

NMI by comparing the EXR interrupt mask level (I2 to I0 bits) in the CPU and the IPR setting.

Figure 5.5 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.

1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt

request is sent to the interrupt controller.

2. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest

priority according to the interrupt priority levels set in IPR is selected, and lower-priority

interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same priority are

generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the

priority system shown in table 5.2 is selected.

3. Next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set

in EXR. An interrupt request with a priority no higher than the mask level set at that time is

held pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority higher than the interrupt mask level

is accepted.

4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after

execution of the current instruction has been completed.

5. The PC, CCR, and EXR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC

saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from

the interrupt handling routine.

6. The T bit in EXR is cleared to 0. The interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority level of

the accepted interrupt.

If the accepted interrupt is NMI, the interrupt mask level is set to H'7.

7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the

interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the

vector table.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 106 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Yes

Program execution status

Interrupt generated?

NMI

Level 6 interrupt?

Mask level 5

or below?

Level 7 interrupt?

Mask level 6

or below?

Save PC, CCR, and EXR

Clear T bit to 0

Update mask level

Read vector address

Branch to interrupt handling routine

Level 1 interrupt?

Mask level 0?

Yes

No Yes

Yes

Hold

pending

Figure 5.5 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in

Interrupt Control Mode 2

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 107 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.6.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence

Figure 5.6 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case

where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in

on-chip memory.

(14)(12)(10)(6)(4)(2)

(1) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13)

Interrupt service

routine instruction

prefetch

Internal

operation

Vector fetchstack

Instruction

prefetch Internal

operation

Interrupt

acceptance

Interrupt level determination

Wait for end of instruction

Interrupt

request signal

Internal

address bus

Internal

read signal

Internal

write signal

Internal

data bus

(3)

(1)

(2) (4)

(3)

(5)

(7)

Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.

This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address)

Instruction code (Not executed)

Instruction prefetch address (Not executed)

SP-2

SP-4

Saved PC and saved CCR

Vector address

Interrupt handling routine start address (Vector address contents)

Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10) (12))

First instruction of interrupt handling routine

(6) (8)

(9) (11)

(10) (12)

(13)

(14)

(8)

Figure 5.6 Interrupt Exception Handling

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 108 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times

Table 5.4 shows interrupt response times ⎯ the interval between generation of an interrupt request

and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The execution status

symbols used in table 5.4 are explained in table 5.5.

This LSI is capable of fast word transfer to on-chip memory, and have the program area in on-chip

ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM, enabling high-speed processing.

Table 5.4 Interrupt Response Times

Normal Mode*5 Advanced Mode

No. Execution State

Interrupt

Control

Mode 0

Interrupt

Control

Mode 2

Interrupt

Control

Mode 0

Interrupt

Control

Mode 2

1 Interrupt priority determination*1 3 3 3 3

2 Number of wait states until

executing instruction ends*2

1 to 19+2·SI 1 to 19+2·SI 1 to 19+2·SI 1 to 19+2·SI

3 PC, CCR, EXR stack save 2·SK 3·SK 2·SK 3·SK

4 Vector fetch SI S

I 2·SI 2·SI

5 Instruction fetch*3 2·SI 2·SI 2·SI 2·SI

6 Internal processing*4 2 2 2 2

Total (using on-chip memory) 11 to 31 12 to 32 12 to 32 13 to 33

Notes: 1. Two states in case of internal interrupt.

2. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions.

3. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch.

4. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch.

5. Not available in this LSI.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 109 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 5.5 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Statuses

Object of Access

External Device

8-Bit Bus 16-Bit Bus

Symbol

Internal

Memory

2-State

Access

3-State

Access

2-State

Access

3-State

Access

Instruction fetch SI 1 4 6 + 2m 2 3 + m

Branch address read SJ

Stack manipulation SK

Legend:

m: Number of wait states in an external device access.

5.6.5 DMAC Activation by Interrupt

The DMAC can be activated by an interrupt. In this case, the following options are available:

• Interrupt request to CPU

• Activation request to DMAC

• Selection of a number of the above

For details of interrupt requests that can be used with to activate the DMAC, see section 7, DMA

Controller (DMAC).

Figure 5.7 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller of DMAC.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 110 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

CPU

I, I2 to I0

DMAC

IRQ

interrupt

On-chip

peripheral

module Interrupt source

clear signal

Interrupt

request

Disenable

signal Clear

signal

Selection

circuit

CPU interrupt

request vector

number

Interrupt controller

Determination of

priority

Control logic

Figure 5.7 Interrupt Control for DMAC

Selection of Interrupt Source: An activation factor is directly input to each channel of the

DMAC. The activation factors for each channel of the DMAC are selected by the DTF3 to DTF0

bits of DMACR. The DTA bit of DMABCR can be used to select whether the selected activation

factors are managed by the DMAC. By setting the DTA bit to 1, the interrupt factor which was the

activation factor for that DMAC cannot act as the CPU interrupt factor.

Interrupt factors other than the interrupts managed by the DMAC is CPU interrupt request.

Determination of Priority: The activation source is directly input to each channel of DMAC.

Operation Order: If the same interrupt is selected as the DMAC activation factor or CPU

interrupt factor, these operate independently. They operate in accordance with the respective

operating states and bus priorities.

Table 5.6 shows the interrupt factor clear control and selection of interrupt factors by specification

of the DTA bit of DMAC's DMABCR.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 111 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 5.6 Interrupt Source Selection and Clearing Control

Settings

DMAC Interrupt Sources Selection/Clearing Control

DTA DMAC CPU

0 Δ Ο

1 Ο X

Legend:

Ο: The relevant interrupt is used. Interrupt source clearing is performed.

(The CPU should clear the source flag in the interrupt handling routine.)

Δ: The relevant interrupt is used. The interrupt source is not cleared.

X: The relevant bit cannot be used.

Notes on Use: The SCI interrupt source is cleared when the DMAC reads or writes to the

prescribed register, and is not dependent upon the DTA bit.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 112 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.7 Usage Notes

5.7.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling

When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective

after execution of the instruction.

When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, if an

interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be

enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will

be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher

priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority

interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored.

The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0.

Figure 5.8 shows an example in which the TGIEA bit in the TPU's TIER_0 is cleared to 0.

The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while

the interrupt is masked.

Internal

address bus

Internal

write signal

TGIEA

TGFA

TGI0A

Interrupt signal

TIER0 write cycle by CPU TGI0A exception handling

TIER_0 address

Figure 5.8 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 113 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.7.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts

Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these

instructions is executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is

always executed. When the I bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid

two states after execution of the instruction ends.

5.7.3 Times when Interrupts Are Disabled

There are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller.

The interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the CPU has

updated the mask level with an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction.

5.7.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction

Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction.

With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer

is not accepted until the move is completed.

With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt

exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this

case is the address of the next instruction.

Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the

following coding should be used.

L1: EEPMOV.W

MOV.W R4, R4

BNE L1

5.7.5 IRQ Interrupt

When operating by clock input, acceptance of input to an IRQ is synchronized with the clock. In

software standby mode and watch mode, the input is accepted asynchronously. For details on the

input conditions, see section 22.4.2, Control Signal Timing.

Section 5 Interrupt Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 114 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5.7.6 NMI Interrupt Usage Notes

The NMI interrupt is part of the exception processing performed cooperatively by the LSI’s

internal interrupt controller and the CPU when the system is operating normally under the

specified electrical conditions. No operations, including NMI interrupts, are guaranteed when

operation is not normal (runaway status) due to software problems or abnormal input to the LSI’s

pins. In such cases, the LSI may be restored to the normal program execution state by applying an

external reset.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 115 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 6 Bus Controller

This LSI has a built-in bus controller (BSC) that manages the external address space divided into

eight areas. The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the

internal bus masters: the CPU and DMA controller (DMAC).

6.1 Features

• Manages external address space in area units

⎯ Manages the external space as 8 areas of 2-Mbytes

⎯ Bus specifications can be set independently for each area

⎯ Burst ROM interface can be set

• Basic bus interface*1

⎯ Chip select (CS0 to CS5) can be output for areas 0 to 5*2

⎯ 8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area

⎯ 2-state access or 3-state access can be selected for each area

⎯ Program wait states can be inserted for each area

• Burst ROM interface*2

⎯ Burst ROM interface can be selected for area 0

⎯ One or two states can be selected for the burst cycle

• Idle cycle insertion*2

⎯ Idle cycle can be inserted between consecutive read accesses to different areas

⎯ Idle cycle can be inserted before a write access to an external area immediately after a read

access to an external area

• Bus arbitration

⎯ The on-chip bus arbiter arbitrates bus mastership among CPU and DMAC

• Other features

⎯ External bus release function*2

Notes: 1. Chip select CS6 in area 6 is for the on-chip USB. Therefore it cannot be used as an

external area. 8-bit bus mode, 3-state access, and no program wait state should be set

for area 6. Access to the RTC related registers (address: H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F)

follows the specification of area 7. 8-bit access, 3-state access, and no program wait

state should be set for area 7.

2. These functions are not available in the H8S/2212 Group.

BSCS207A_010020020100

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 116 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller.

Area decorder

Bus

controller

ABWCR

ASTCR

BCRH

BCRL

Internal

address bus

External bus control signals

Chip select signals

BREQ*

BACK*Internal control

signals

Wait

controller WCRH

WCRL

Bus mode signal

Internal data bus

Bus arbiter CPU bus acknowledge signal

DMAC bus acknowledge signal

DMAC bus request signal

CPU bus request signal

WAIT*

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Legend:

BWCR:

STCR:

WCRH, WCRL:

BCRH, BCRL:

Bus width control register

Access state control register

Waite control registers H, L

Bus control registers H, L

Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 117 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 6.1 summarizes the pins of the bus controller.

These pins are supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Table 6.1 Pin Configuration

Name Symbol I/O Function

Address strove AS Output Strobe signal indicating that address output on

address bus is enabled.

Read RD Output Strobe signal indicating that external space is being

read.

High write HWR Output Strobe signal indicating that external space is to be

written, and upper half (D15 to D8) of data bus is

enabled.

Low write LWR Output Strobe signal indicating that external space is to be

written, and lower half (D7 to D0) of data bus is

enabled.

Chip select 0 to 5 CS0 to CS5 Output Strobe signal indicating that areas 0 to 5 are selected.

Wait WAIT Input Wait request signal when accessing external 3-state

access space.

Bus request BREQ Input Request signal that releases bus to external device.

Bus request

acknowledge

BACK Output Acknowledge signal indicating that bus has been

released.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 118 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.3 Register Descriptions

The following shows the registers of the bus controller.

• Bus width control register (ABWCR)

• Access state control register (ASTCR)

• Wait control register H (WCRH)

• Wait control register L (WCRL)

• Bus control register H (BCRH)

• Bus control register L (BCRL )

• Pin function control register (PFCR)

6.3.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)

ABWCR designates each area for either 8-bit access or 16-bit access.

ABWCR sets the data bus width for the external memory space. The bus width for on-chip

memory and internal I/O registers except for the on-chip USB and RTC is fixed regardless of the

settings in ABWCR.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

ABW7*2

ABW6*2

ABW5

ABW4

ABW3

ABW2

ABW1

ABW0

1/0*1

R/W

Area 7 to 0 Bus Width Control:

These bits select whether the corresponding area is to

be designated for 8-bit access or 16-bit access.

0: Area n is designated for 16-bit access

1: Area n is designated for 8-bit access

Legend: n = 7 to 0

Notes: 1. In modes 5 to 7, initial value of each bit is 1. In mode 4, initial value of each bit is 0.

These bits should be set to 1 in the H8S/2212 Group.

2. The on-chip USB and on-chip RTC are allocated to area 6 and area 7, respectively.

Therefore, these bits should be set to 1.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 119 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.3.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR)

ASTCR designates each area as either a 2-state access space or a 3-state access space.

ASTCR sets the number of access states for the external memory space. The number of access

states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers except for the on-chip USB is fixed regardless

of the settings in ASTCR.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

AST7*

AST6*

AST5

AST4

AST3

AST2

AST1

AST0

R/W

Area 7 to 0 Access State Control:

These bits select whether the corresponding area is to

be designated as a 2-state access space or a 3-state

access space. Wait state insertion is enabled or disabled

at the same time.

0: Area n is designated for 2-state access

Wait state insertion in area n external space is

disabled

1: Area n is designated for 3-state access

Wait state insertion in area n external space is

enabled

Legend: n = 7 to 0

Note: * The on-chip USB and on-chip RTC are allocated to area 6 and area 7, respectively.

Therefore, these bits should be set to 1.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 120 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.3.3 Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL)

WCRH and WCRL select the number of program wait states for each area.

Program waits are not inserted in the case of on-chip memory or internal I/O registers except for

the on-chip USB.

• WCRH

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

W71*

W70*

R/W

Area 7 Wait Control 1 and 0

These bits select the number of program wait states

when area 7 in external space is accessed while the

AST7 bit in ASTCR is set to 1.

00: Program wait not inserted when external space area

7 is accessed

01: 1 program wait state inserted when external space

area 7 is accessed

10: 2 program wait states inserted when external space

area 7 is accessed

11: 3 program wait states inserted when external space

area 7 is accessed

W61*

W60*

R/W

Area 6 Wait Control 1 and 0

These bits select the number of program wait states

when area 6 in external space is accessed while the

AST6 bit in ASTCR is set to 1.

00: Program wait not inserted when external space area

6 is accessed

01: 1 program wait state inserted when external space

area 6 is accessed

10: 2 program wait states inserted when external space

area 6 is accessed

11: 3 program wait states inserted when external space

area 6 is accessed

Note: * The on-chip USB and on-chip RTC are allocated to area 6 and area 7, respectively.

Therefore, these bits should be set to 0.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 121 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

W51

W50

R/W

Area 5 Wait Control 1 and 0

These bits select the number of program wait states

when area 5 in external space is accessed while the

AST5 bit in ASTCR is set to 1.

00: Program wait not inserted when external space area

5 is accessed

01: 1 program wait state inserted when external space

area 5 is accessed

10: 2 program wait states inserted when external space

area 5 is accessed

11: 3 program wait states inserted when external space

area 5 is accessed

W41

W40

R/W

Area 4 Wait Control 1 and 0

These bits select the number of program wait states

when area 4 in external space is accessed while the

AST4 bit in ASTCR is set to 1.

00: Program wait not inserted when external space area

4 is accessed

01: 1 program wait state inserted when external space

area 4 is accessed

10: 2 program wait states inserted when external space

area 4 is accessed

11: 3 program wait states inserted when external space

area 4 is accessed

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 122 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• WCRL

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

W31

W30

R/W

Area 3 Wait Control 1 and 0

These bits select the number of program wait states

when area 3 in external space is accessed while the

AST3 bit in ASTCR is set to 1.

00: Program wait not inserted when external space area

3 is accessed

01: 1 program wait state inserted when external space

area 3 is accessed

10: 2 program wait states inserted when external space

area 3 is accessed

11: 3 program wait states inserted when external space

area 3 is accessed

W21

W20

R/W

Area 2 Wait Control 1 and 0

These bits select the number of program wait states

when area 2 in external space is accessed while the

AST2 bit in ASTCR is set to 1.

00: Program wait not inserted when external space area

2 is accessed

01: 1 program wait state inserted when external space

area 2 is accessed

10: 2 program wait states inserted when external space

area 2 is accessed

11: 3 program wait states inserted when external space

area 2 is accessed

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 123 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

W11

W10

R/W

Area 1 Wait Control 1 and 0

These bits select the number of program wait states

when area 1 in external space is accessed while the

AST1 bit in ASTCR is set to 1.

00: Program wait not inserted when external space area

1 is accessed

01: 1 program wait state inserted when external space

area 1 is accessed

10: 2 program wait states inserted when external space

area 1 is accessed

11: 3 program wait states inserted when external space

area 1 is accessed

W01

W00

R/W

Area 0 Wait Control 1 and 0

These bits select the number of program wait states

when area 0 in external space is accessed while the

AST0 bit in ASTCR is set to 1.

00: Program wait not inserted when external space area

0 is accessed

01: 1 program wait state inserted when external space

area 0 is accessed

10: 2 program wait states inserted when external space

area 0 is accessed

11: 3 program wait states inserted when external space

area 0 is accessed

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 124 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.3.4 Bus Control Register H (BCRH)

BCRH selects enabling or disabling of idle cycle insertion, and the memory interface for area 0.

This register should be set initial value and not be modified in the H8S/2212 Group.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 ICIS1 1 R/W Idle Cycle Insert 1:

Selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be

inserted between bus cycles when successive external

read cycles are performed in different areas.

0: Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external

read cycles in different areas

1: Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read

cycles in different areas

6 ICIS0 1 R/W Idle Cycle Insert 0:

Selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be

inserted between bus cycles when successive external

read and write cycles are performed.

0: Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external

read and write cycles

1: Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read

and write cycles

5 BRSTRM 0 R/W Burst ROM enable:

Selects whether area 0 is used as a burst ROM interface.

0: Area 0 is basic bus interface

1: Area 0 is burst ROM interface

4 BRSTS1 1 R/W Burst Cycle Select 1:

Selects the number of burst cycles for the burst ROM

interface.

0: Burst cycle comprises 1 state

1: Burst cycle comprises 2 states

3 BRSTS0 0 R/W Burst Cycle Select 0:

Selects the number of words that can be accessed in a

burst ROM interface burst access.

0: Max. 4 words in burst access

1: Max. 8 words in burst access

2 to

– All 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 125 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.3.5 Bus Control Register L (BCRL)

BCRL performs selection of the external bus-released state protocol, and enabling or disabling of

WAIT pin input.

The functions selected by this register are available only in the H8S/2218 Group. This register

should not be modified in the H8S/2212 Group.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 BRLE* 0 R/W Bus Release Enable

Enables or disables external bus release.

0: External bus release is disabled. BREQ and BACK

can be used as I/O ports.

1: External bus release is enabled.

6 – 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

5 – 0 – Reserved

This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

4 – 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

3 – 1 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 1.

2, 1 – All 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

0 WAITE* 0 R/W WAIT Pin Enable

Selects enabling or disabling of wait input by the WAIT

pin.

0: Wait input by WAIT pin disabled. WAIT pin can be

used as I/O port.

1: Wait input by WAIT pin enabled.

Note: * These bits should be set to 0 in the H8S/2212 Group.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 126 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.3.6 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR)

PFCR performs address output control in external extended mode. When using the USB with the

emulator (E6000), enable the A8 and A9 output by setting AE3 to AE0 to 0010.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

AE3

AE2

AE1

AE0

1/0*

R/W

Address Output Enable 3 to 0

These bits select enabling or disabling of address outputs

A8 to A23 in ROMless extended mode and modes with

ROM.

When a pin is enabled for address output, the address is

output regardless of the corresponding DDR setting. When

a pin is disabled for address output, it becomes an output

port when the corresponding DDR bit is set to 1.

0000: A8 to A23 output disabled (initial value of mode 6 and 7)

0001: A8 output enabled; A9 to A23 output disabled

0010: A8, A9 output enabled; A10 to A23 output disabled

0011: A8 to A10 output enabled; A11 to A23 output disabled

0100: A8 to A11 output enabled; A12 to A23 output disabled

0101: A8 to A12 output enabled; A13 to A23 output disabled

0110: A8 to A13 output enabled; A14 to A23 output disabled

0111: A8 to A14 output enabled; A15 to A23 output disabled

1000: A8 to A15 output enabled; A16 to A23 output disabled

1001: A8 to A16 output enabled; A17 to A23 output disabled

1010: A8 to A17 output enabled; A18 to A23 output disabled

1011: A8 to A18 output enabled; A19 to A23 output disabled

1100: A8 to A19 output enabled; A20 to A23 output disabled

1101: A8 to A20 output enabled; A21 to A23 output disabled

(initial value of modes 4 and 5)

1110: A8 to A21 output enabled; A22, A23 output disabled

1111: A8 to A23 output enabled

Note: * In modes 4 and 5, initial value of each bit is 1. In modes 6 and 7, initial value of each bit is 0.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 127 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.4 Bus Control

6.4.1 Area Divisions

In advanced mode, the bus controller partitions the 16 Mbytes address space into eight areas, 0 to

7, in 2-Mbyte units, and performs bus control for external space in area units. In normal mode*, it

controls a 64-kbyte address space comprising part of area 0.

Figure 6.2 shows an outline of the memory map.

Chip select signals (CS0 to CS5) can be output for areas 0 to 5.

Note: * Not available in this LSI.

Area 0

(2 Mbytes)

H'000000

H'FFFFFF

(1) (2)

H'0000

H'1FFFFF

H'200000 Area 1

(2 Mbytes)

H'3FFFFF

H'400000 Area 2

(2 Mbytes)

H'5FFFFF

H'600000 Area 3

(2 Mbytes)

H'7FFFFF

H'800000 Area 4

(2 Mbytes)

H'9FFFFF

H'A00000 Area 5

(2 Mbytes)

H'BFFFFF

H'C00000 Area 6

(2 Mbytes)

H'DFFFFF

H'E00000 Area 7

(2 Mbytes)

H'FFFF

Advanced mode Normal mode*

Notes: 1. Not available in this LSI.

2. This area is allocated to the on-chip USB in this LSI.

Figure 6.2 Overview of Area Divisions

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 128 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.4.2 Bus Specifications

The external space bus specifications consist of three elements: bus width, number of access states,

and number of program wait states.

The bus width and number of access states for memory and internal I/O registers except for the on-

chip USB and RTC are fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller.

Bus Width: A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with ABWCR. An area for which an 8-bit

bus is selected functions as an 8-bit access space, and an area for which a 16-bit bus is selected

functions as a16-bit access space.

If all areas are designated for 8-bit access, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated for 16-bit

access, 16-bit bus mode is set. When the burst ROM interface is designated, 16-bit bus mode is

always set. 8-bit bus mode should be set for area 6 and area 7 in this LSI.

Number of Access States: Two or three access states can be selected with ASTCR.

An area for which 2-state access is selected functions as a 2-state access space, and an area for

which 3-state access is selected functions as a 3-state access space.

With the burst ROM interface, the number of access states may be determined without regard to

ASTCR.

When 2-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled.

Area 6 and area 7 should be set to function as a 3-state access space in this LSI.

Number of Program Wait States: When 3-state access space is designated by ASTCR, the

number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with WCRH and WCRL.

From 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected.

The number of program wait states in area 6 and area 7 should be set to 0 in this LSI.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 129 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 6.2 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface)

ABWCR ASTCR WCRH, WCRL Bus Specifications (Basic Bus Interface)

ABWn ASTn Wn1 Wn0 Bus Width

Number of

Access States

Number of

Program Wait States

0 0 ⎯ ⎯ 16 2 0

1 0 0 3 0

1 1

1 0 2

1 3

1 0 ⎯ ⎯ 8 2 0

1 0 0 3 0

1 1

1 0 2

1 3

6.4.3 Bus Interface for Each Area

The initial state of each area is basic bus interface, 3-state access space. The initial bus width is

selected according to the operating mode. The bus specifications described here cover basic items

only, and the sections on each memory interface (section 6.6, Basic Bus Interface and section 6.7,

Burst ROM Interface) should be referred to for further details. Note that the ROM is always

enabled and no external extended mode in the H8S/2212 Group.

Area 0: Area 0 includes on-chip ROM, and in ROM-disabled extended mode, all of area 0 is

external space. In ROM-enabled extended mode, the space excluding on-chip ROM is external

space.

When area 0 external space is accessed, the CS0 signal can be output.

Either basic bus interface or burst ROM interface can be selected for area 0.

Areas 1 to 6: In external extended mode, all of areas 1 to 6 is external space. When area 1 to 5

external space is accessed, the CS1 to CS5 pin signals respectively can be output. Only the basic

bus interface can be used for areas 1 to 5. Area 6 is only for the on-chip USB. For details, see

section 14, Universal Serial Bus (USB).

Area 7: Area 7 includes the on-chip RAM and internal l/O registers. In external extended mode,

the space excluding the reserved area (for details, see section 3.4, Memory Map in Each Operating

Mode) the on-chip RAM and internal l/O registers except on-chip RTC, is external space. The on-

chip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 130 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes

external space.

Only the basic bus interface can be used for the area 7.

6.4.4 Chip Select Signals

In the H8S/2218 Group chip select signals (CS0 to CS5) can be output to areas 0 to 5, the signal

being driven low when the corresponding external space area is accessed. Figure 6.3 shows an

example of CSn (n = 0 to 5) output timing. Enabling or disabling of the CSn signal is performed

by setting the data direction register (DDR) for the port corresponding to the particular CSn pin.

In ROM-disabled extended mode, the CS0 pin is placed in the output state after a power-on reset.

Pins CS1 to CS5 are placed in the input state after a power-on reset, and so the corresponding

DDR should be set to 1 when outputting signals CS1 to CS5.

In ROM-enabled extended mode, pins CS0 to CS5 are all placed in the input state after a power-on

reset, and so the corresponding DDR should be set to 1 when outputting signals CS0 to CS5. For

details, see section 8, I/O Ports.

Bus cycle

Area n external address

ddress bus

CSn

Figure 6.3 CSn Signal Output Timing (n = 0 to 5)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 131 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.5 Basic Timing

The CPU is driven by a system clock (φ), denoted by the symbol φ. The period from one rising

edge of φ to the next is referred to as a "state." The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of one,

two, or three states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory, on-chip peripheral

modules, and the external address space.

6.5.1 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) Access Timing

On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and

word transfer instruction. Figure 6.4 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 6.5 shows the

pin states.

Internal address bus

Bus cycle

Address

Read data

Write data

Internal read signal

Internal data bus

Internal write signal

Internal data bus

Read

access

Write

access

Figure 6.4 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 132 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bus cycle

Unchanged

ddress bus*

AS*

RD*

HWR, LWR*

Data bus*

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

High

High-impedance state

Figure 6.5 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access

6.5.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Timing

The on-chip peripheral modules are accessed in two states except on-chip USB and RTC. The data

bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed.

Figure 6.6 shows the access timing for the on-chip peripheral modules. Figure 6.7 shows the pin

states.

T1T2

Internal address bus

Bus cycle

Address

Read data

Write data

Internal read signal

Internal data bus

Internal write signal

Internal data bus

Read

access

Write

access

Figure 6.6 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 133 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bus cycle

Unchanged

ddress bus*

AS*

RD*

HWR, LWR*

Data bus*

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

High

High-impedance state

Figure 6.7 Pin States during On-Chip Peripheral Module Access

6.5.3 External Address Space Access Timing

The external address space is accessed with an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus width in a two-state or

three-state bus cycle. In three-state access, wait states can be inserted. For further details, refer to

section 6.6.3, Basic Timing.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 134 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.6 Basic Bus Interface

The basic bus interface enables direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on.

6.6.1 Data Size and Data Alignment (Supported Only by the H8S/2218 Group)

Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus

controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the

upper data bus (D15 to D8) or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus

specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space) and the data

size.

8-Bit Access Space: Figure 6.8 illustrates data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. With

the 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is always used for accesses. The amount of

data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word transfer instruction is performed as two-

byte accesses, and a longword transfer instruction, as four-byte accesses.

D15 D8 D7 D0

Upper data bus Lower data bus

Byte size

Word size 1st bus cycle

2nd bus cycle

Longword

size

1st bus cycle

2nd bus cycle

3rd bus cycle

4th bus cycle

Figure 6.8 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space)

16-Bit Access Space: Figure 6.9 illustrates data alignment control for the 16-bit access space.

With the 16-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7 to D0) are

used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word,

and a longword transfer instruction is executed as two word transfer instructions.

In byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is

even or odd. The upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd

address.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 135 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

D15 D8 D7 D0

Upper data bus Lower data bus

Byte size

Word size

1st bus cycle

2nd bus cycle

Longword

size

· Even address

Byte size · Odd address

Figure 6.9 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Space)

6.6.2 Valid Strobes

Table 6.3 shows the data buses used and valid strobes for the access spaces in the H8S/2218

Group.

In a read, the RD signal is valid without discrimination between the upper and lower halves of the

data bus.

In a write, the HWR signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the LWR signal for the

lower half.

The RD, HWR, and LWR signals are not available in the H8S/2212 Group.

Table 6.3 Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes

Area

Access

Size

Read/

Write Address Valid Strobe

Upper Data Bus

(D15 to D8)

Lower Data Bus

(D7 to D0)

Byte Read – RD Valid Invalid 8-bit access

space Write – HWR Hi-Z

Byte Read Even RD Valid Invalid

Odd Invalid Valid

16-bit

access

space

Write Even HWR Valid Hi-Z

Odd LWR Hi-Z Valid

Word Read – RD Valid Valid

Write – HWR, LWR

Notes:

Hi-Z: High impedance.

Invalid: Input state: input value is ignored.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 136 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.6.3 Basic Timing

8-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figure 6.10 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 2-state access space in

the H8S/2218 Group. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the

data bus is used.

Wait states cannot be inserted.

Bus cycle

T1T2

Address bus

CSn

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0 Invalid

Read

HWR

LWR

(16-bit bus

mode)

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0

High impedance

Write

High

Note: n = 0 to 5

LWR

(8-bit bus

mode)

Figure 6.10 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 2-State Access Space

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 137 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8-Bit 3-State Access Space (Except Area 6): Figure 6.11 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 3-

state access space in the H8S/2218 Group. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half

(D15 to D8) of the data bus is used.

Wait states can be inserted.

Bus cycle

Address bus

CSn

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0 Invalid

Read

HWR

LWR

(16-bit bus

mode)

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0

Write

High

Note: n = 0 to 5

High impedance

LWR

(8-bit bus

mode)

Figure 6.11 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 3-State Access Space (Except Area 6)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 138 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8-Bit 3-State Access Space (Area 6 and RTC): Figure 6.12 shows the bus timing for area 6 and

RTC area (address = H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F). When the areas are accessed, the data bus cannot be

used.

Wait states cannot be inserted.

AS*

RD*

D15 to D8*

D7 to D0*

HWR*

LWR*

(16-bit bus

mode)

LWR*

(8-bit bus

mode)

D15 to D8*

D7 to D0*

Write

Invalid

High

High impedance

Read

Bus cycle

Address bus*

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Figure 6.12 Bus Timing for Area 6 and RTC

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 139 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

16-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figures 6.13 to 6.15 show bus timings for a 16-bit 2-state access

space in the H8S/2218 Group. When a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8)

of the data bus is used for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address.

Wait states cannot be inserted.

Bus cycle

Address bus

CSn

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0 Invalid

Read

HWR

LWR

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0

Write

High

Note: n = 0 to 5

High impedance

Figure 6.13 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 140 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bus cycle

Address bus

CSn

D15 to D8 Invalid

D7 to D0 Valid

Read

HWR

LWR

D15 to D8

D7 to D0 Valid

Write

Note: n = 0 to 5

High

High impedance

Figure 6.14 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 141 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bus cycle

Address bus

CSn

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0 Valid

Read

HWR

LWR

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0 Valid

Write

Note: n = 0 to 5

Figure 6.15 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (3) (Word Access)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 142 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

16-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figures 6.16 to 6.18 show bus timings for a 16-bit 3-state access

space in the H8S/2218 Group. When a 16-bit access space is accessed , the upper half (D15 to D8)

of the data bus is used for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address.

Wait states can be inserted.

Bus cycle

Address bus

CSn

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0 Invalid

Read

HWR

LWR

D15 to D8 Valid

D7 to D0

Write

High

Note: n = 0 to 5

High impedance

Figure 6.16 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 143 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bus cycle

Address bus

CSn

D15 to D8 Invalid

D7 to D0 Valid

Read

HWR

LWR

D15 to D8

D7 to D0 Valid

Write

High

Note: n = 0 to 5

High impedance

Figure 6.17 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 144 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bus cycle

Address bus

CSn

D15 to D8

D7 to D0 Valid

Valid

Read

HWR

LWR

D15 to D8

D7 to D0 Valid

Valid

Write

Note: n = 0 to 5

Figure 6.18 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (3) (Word Access)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 145 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.6.4 Wait Control

When accessing external space, this LSI can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait

states (Tw). There are two ways of inserting wait states: program wait insertion and pin wait

insertion using the WAIT pin.

Program Wait Insertion: From 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted automatically between the T2

state and T3 state on an individual area basis in 3-state access space, according to the settings of

WCRH and WCRL.

Pin Wait Insertion: Setting the WAITE bit in BCRH to 1 enables wait insertion by means of the

WAIT pin in the H8S/2218 Group. When external space is accessed in this state, program wait

insertion is first carried out according to the settings in WCRH and WCRL. Then, if the WAIT pin

is low at the falling edge of φ in the last T2 or TW state, a TW state is inserted. If the WAIT pin is

held low, TW states are inserted until it goes high.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 146 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 6.19 shows an example of wait state insertion timing.

In the H8S/2212 Group, the WAITE bit in BCRH should not be set to 1.

By program

wait

Address bus

Data bus Read data

Read

HWR, LWR

Write data

Write

Note: ↓ indicates the timing of WAIT pin sampling.

WAIT

Data bus

By WAIT pin

Figure 6.19 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 147 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.7 Burst ROM Interface

With the H8S/2218 Group, external space area 0 can be designated as burst ROM space, and burst

ROM interfacing can be performed. The burst ROM space interface enables 16-bit configuration

ROM with burst access capability to be accessed at high speed.

Area 0 can be designated as burst ROM space by means of the BRSTRM bit in BCRH.

Consecutive burst accesses of a maximum of 4 words or 8 words can be performed for CPU

instruction fetches only. One or two states can be selected for burst access.

6.7.1 Basic Timing

The number of states in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface is in accordance

with the setting of the AST0 bit in ASTCR. Also, when the AST0 bit is set to 1, wait state

insertion is possible. One or two states can be selected for the burst cycle, according to the setting

of the BRSTS1 bit in BCRH. Wait states cannot be inserted. When area 0 is designated as burst

ROM space, it becomes 16-bit access space regardless of the setting of the ABW0 bit in ABWCR.

When the BRSTS0 bit in BCRH is cleared to 0, burst access of up to 4 words is performed; when

the BRSTS0 bit is set to 1, burst access of up to 8 words is performed.

The basic access timing for burst ROM space is shown in figures 6.20 and 6.21. The timing shown

in figure 6.20 is for the case where the AST0 and BRSTS1 bits are both set to 1, and that in figure

6.21 is for the case where both these bits are cleared to 0.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 148 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

ddress bus

CS0

Data bus

Full access

Burst access

Only lower address changed

Read data Read data Read data

Figure 6.20 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST0 = BRSTS1 = 1)

CS0

T2T1T1

ddress bus

Data bus

Full access Burst access

Only lower address changed

Read data Read data Read data

Figure 6.21 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST0 = BRSTS1 = 0)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 149 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.7.2 Wait Control

As with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the WAIT

pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface. See section 6.6.4, Wait

Control.

Wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle.

6.8 Idle Cycle

When the H8S/2218 Group accesses external space, it can insert a 1-state idle cycle (TI) between

bus cycles in the following two cases: (1) when read accesses between different areas occur

consecutively, and (2) when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle. By inserting an

idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between ROM, with a long output

floating time, and high-speed memory, I/O interfaces, and so on.

Consecutive Reads between Different Areas: If consecutive reads between different areas occur

while the ICIS1 bit in BCRH is set to 1, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the second read

cycle.

Figure 6.22 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read

cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a read cycle from SRAM,

each being located in a different area. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in

cycle B between the read data from ROM and that from SRAM. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted,

and a data collision is prevented.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 150 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Address bus

Bus cycle A

Data bus

T2T3T1T2

Bus cycle B

Long output floating time

Data collision

(a) Idle cycle not inserted

(ICIS1 = 0)

Address bus

Bus cycle A

Data bus

T2T3TIT1

Bus cycle B

(b) Idle cycle inserted

(Initial value ICIS1 = 1)

CS (area A)

CS (area B)

CS (area A)

CS (area B)

Figure 6.22 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (1)

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 151 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Write after Read: If an external write occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit in BCRH

is set to 1, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle.

Figure 6.23 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read

cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an

idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and

the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented.

ddress bus

φφ

Bus cycle A

Data bus

Bus cycle B

Long output floating time Data collision

(a) Idle cycle not inserted

(ICIS0 = 0)

Address bus

Bus cycle A

Data bus

Bus cycle B

(b) Idle cycle inserted

(Initial value ICIS0 = 1)

CS (area A)

CS (area B)

HWR

CS (area A)

CS (area B)

Figure 6.23 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (2)

Relationship between Chip Select (CS) Signal and Read (RD) Signal: Depending on the

system's load conditions, the RD signal may lag behind the CS signal. An example is shown in

figure 6.24.

In this case, with the setting for no idle cycle insertion (a), there may be a period of overlap

between the bus cycle A RD signal and the bus cycle B CS signal.

Setting idle cycle insertion, as in (b), however, will prevent any overlap between the RD and CS

signals.

In the initial state after reset release, idle cycle insertion (b) is set.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 152 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

ddress bus

φφ

Bus cycle A Bus cycle B

(a) Idle cycle not inserted

(ICIS1 = 0)

Possibility of overlap between

CS (area B) and RD

Address bus

Bus cycle A Bus cycle B

(b) Idle cycle inserted

(Initial value ICIS1 = 1)

CS (area A)

CS (area B)

RD RD

CS (area A)

CS (area B)

Figure 6.24 Relationship between Chip Select (CS) and Read (RD)

Table 6.4 shows pin states in an idle cycle.

Table 6.4 Pin States in Idle Cycle

Pins Pin State

A23 to A0 Contents of next bus cycle

D15 to D0 High impedance

CSn High

AS High

RD High

HWR High

LWR High

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 153 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.9 Bus Release

The H8S/2218 Group can release the external bus in response to a bus request from an external

device. In the external bus released state, the internal bus master continues to operate as long as

there is no external access.

In external extended mode, the bus can be released to an external device by setting the BRLE bit in

BCRL to 1. Driving the BREQ pin low issues an external bus request to this LSI. When the BREQ

pin is sampled, at the prescribed timing the BACK pin is driven low, and the address bus, data bus,

and bus control signals are placed in the high-impedance state, establishing the external bus-

released state.

In the external bus released state, an internal bus master can perform accesses using the internal

bus. When an internal bus master wants to make an external access, it temporarily defers activation

of the bus cycle, and waits for the bus request from the external bus master to be dropped.

When the BREQ pin is driven high, the BACK pin is driven high at the prescribed timing and the

external bus released state is terminated.

In the event of simultaneous external bus release request and external access request generation,

the order of priority is as follows:

(High) External bus release > Internal bus master external access (Low)

Table 6.5 shows pin states in the external bus released state.

In the H8S/2212 Group, the BRLE bit in BCRL should not be set to 1.

Table 6.5 Pin States in Bus Released State

Pins Pin State

A23 to A0 High impedance

D15 to D0 High impedance

CSn High impedance

AS High impedance

RD High impedance

HWR High impedance

LWR High impedance

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 154 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 6.25 shows the timing for transition to the bus-released state.

CPU

cycle

Address

Minimum

1 state

T0T1T2

HWR, LWR

BREQ

BACK

High impedance

CSn

High impedance

RD High impedance

Data bus

ddress bus

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[1] Low level of BREQ pin is sampled at rise of T

state.

[2] BACK pin is driven low at end of CPU read cycle, releasing bus to external bus

master.

[3] BREQ pin state is still sampled in external bus released state.

[4] High level of BREQ pin is sampled.

[5] BACK pin is driven high, ending bus release cycle.

CPU cycle External bus released state

Note : n = 0 to 5

Figure 6.25 Bus-Released State Transition Timing

6.9.1 Bus Release Usage Note

When MSTPCR is set to H'FFFFFF and transmitted to sleep mode, the external bus release does

not function. To activate the external bus release in sleep mode, do not set MSTPCR to H'FFFFFF.

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 155 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

6.10 Bus Arbitration

This LSI has a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations.

There are two bus masters, the CPU and DMAC, which perform read/write operations when they

have possession of the bus. Each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. The

bus arbiter determines priorities at the prescribed timing, and permits use of the bus by means of a

bus request acknowledge signal. The selected bus master then takes possession of the bus and

begins its operation.

6.10.1 Operation

The bus arbiter detects the bus masters' bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus

request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. If there are bus requests from

more than one bus master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest

priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the

bus until that signal is canceled.

The order of priority of the bus masters is as follows:

(High) DMAC > CPU (Low)

An internal bus access by an internal bus master, and external bus release, can be executed in

parallel in the H8S/2218 Group.

In the event of simultaneous external bus release request, and internal bus master external access

request generation, the order of priority is as follows:

(High) External bus release > Internal bus master external access (Low)

The H8S/2212 Group does not have the external bus release function.

6.10.2 Bus Transfer Timing

Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus

master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred

immediately. There are specific times at which each bus master can relinquish the bus.

CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DMAC,

the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the bus master that issued the request. The timing for transfer of

the bus is as follows:

Section 6 Bus Controller

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 156 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• The bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. However, if a bus cycle is executed in

discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between

the operations.

• If the CPU is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus immediately.

DMAC: The DMAC sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is

generated.

In the case of a USB request in short address mode or normal mode, and in cycle steal mode, the

DMAC releases the bus after a single transfer.

In block transfer mode, it releases the bus after transfer of one block, and in burst mode, after

completion of the transfer.

6.10.3 External Bus Release Usage Note

External bus release can be performed on completion of an external bus cycle in the H8S/2218

Group. The CS signal remains low until the end of the external bus cycle. Therefore, when

external bus release is performed, the CS signal may change from the low level to the high-

impedance state.

6.11 Resets and the Bus Controller

In a power-on reset, this LSI, including the bus controller, enters the reset state at that point, and an

executing bus cycle is discontinued.

In a manual reset*, the bus controller's registers and internal state are maintained, and an executing

external bus cycle is completed. In this case, WAIT input is ignored and write data is not

guaranteed.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 157 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

This LSI has a built-in DMA controller (DMAC) which can carry out data transfer on up to 4

channels.

7.1 Features

The features of the DMAC are listed below.

• Choice of short address mode or full address mode

(1) Short address mode

— Maximum of 4 channels can be used

— Choice of dual address mode

— In dual address mode, one of the two addresses, transfer source and transfer destination,

is specified as 24 bits and the other as16 bits

— Choice of sequential mode, idle mode, or repeat mode for dual address mode

(2) Full address mode

— Maximum of 2 channels can be used

— Transfer source and transfer destination address specified as 24 bits

— Choice of normal mode or block transfer mode

• 16-Mbyte address space can be specified directly

• Byte or word can be set as the transfer unit

• Activation sources: internal interrupt, USB request, auto-request (depending on transfer mode)

⎯ 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) compare match/input capture interrupts

⎯ Serial communication interface (SCI_0) transmission complete interrupt, reception

complete interrupt

⎯ A/D conversion end Interrupt

⎯ USB request

⎯ Auto-request

• Module stop mode can be set

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 158 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

A block diagram of the DMAC is shown in figure 7.1.

Internal address bus

Addres buffer

Processor

Internal interrupts

TGI0A

TGI1A

TGI2A

TXI0

RXI0

ADI

USB request signals

DREQ0

DREQ1

Interrupt signals

DEND0A

DEND0B

DEND1A

DEND1B

Control logic

DMACR1B

DMACR1A

DMACR0B

DMACR0A

DMATCR

DMABCR

Data buffer

Internal address bus

MAR0A

IOAR0A

ETCR0A

MAR0B

IOAR0B

ETCR0B

MAR1A

IOAR1A

ETCR1A

MAR1B

IOAR1B

ETCR1B

Legend:

DMATCR:

DMABCR:

DMACR:

MAR:

IOAR:

ETCR:

DMA terminal control register*

DMA band control register (for all channels)

DMA control register

Memory address register

I/O address register

Executive transfer counter register

Note: * Reserved register

Channel 0

Module data bus

Channel 0AChannel 0BChannel 1AChannel 1B

Channel 1

Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DMAC

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 159 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.2 Register Configuration

The DMAC registers are listed below.

• Memory address register 0A (MAR0A)

• I/O address register 0A (IOAR0A)

• Transfer count register 0A (ETCR0A)

• Memory address register 0B (MAR0B)

• I/O address register 0B (IOAR0B)

• Transfer count register 0B (ETCR0B)

• Memory address register 1A (MAR1A)

• I/O address register 1A (IOAR1A)

• Transfer count register 1A (ETCR1A)

• Memory address register 1B (MAR1B)

• I/O address register 1B (IOAR1B)

• Transfer count register 1B (ETCR1B)

• DMA control register 0A (DMACR0A)

• DMA control register 0B (DMACR0B)

• DMA control register 1A (DMACR1A)

• DMA control register 1B (DMACR1B)

• DMA band control register (DMABCR)

The DMAC register functions differs depending on the address modes: short address mode and full

address mode. The DMAC register functions are described in each address mode. Short address

mode or full address mode can be selected for channels 1 and 0 independently by means of bits

FAE1 and FAE0.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 160 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 7.1 Short Address Mode and Full Address Mode (For 1 Channel: Example of

Channel 0)

FAE0 Description

MAR0A Specifies transfer source/transfer destination address

Specifies transfer destination/transfer source address

Specifies number of transfers

Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source, etc.

Short address mode specified (channels A and B operate independently)

Specifies transfer source/transfer destination address

Specifies transfer destination/transfer source address

Specifies number of transfers

Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source, etc.

Channel 0AChannel 0B

IOAR0A

ETCR0A

DMACR0A

MAR0B

IOAR0B

ETCR0B

DMACR0B

MAR0A

IOAR0A

ETCR0A

DMACR0A

MAR0B

IOAR0B

ETCR0B

DMACR0B

Specifies transfer source address

Specifies transfer destination address

Not used

Specifies number of transfers

Specifies number of transfers (used in block transfer mode only)

Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source, etc.

Full address mode specified (channels A and B operate combination)

Channel 0

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 161 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.3 Register Descriptions

7.3.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR)

• Short Address Mode

MAR is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the transfer source address or

destination address. The upper 8 bits of MAR are reserved: they are always read as 0, and

cannot be modified. Whether MAR functions as the source address register or as the

destination address register can be selected by means of the DTDIR bit in DMACR.

MAR is incremented or decremented each time a byte or word transfer is executed, so that the

address specified by MAR is constantly updated. For details, see section 7.3.4, DMA Control

• Full Address Mode

MAR is a 32-bit readable/writable register; MARA functions as the transfer source address

MAR is composed of two 16-bit registers, MARH and MARL. The upper 8 bits of MARH are

reserved: they are always read as 0, and cannot be modified. MAR is incremented or

decremented each time a byte or word transfer is executed, so that the source or destination

memory address can be updated automatically. For details, see section 7.3.4, DMA Control

7.3.2 I/O Address Register (IOAR)

• Short Address Mode

IOAR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the lower 16 bits of the transfer

source address or destination address. The upper 8 bits of the transfer address are automatically

set to H'FF. Whether IOAR functions as the source address register or as the destination

address register can be selected by means of the DTDIR bit in DMACR.

IOAR is not incremented or decremented each time a transfer is executed, so that the address

specified by IOAR is fixed. IOAR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode.

• Full Address Mode:

IOAR is not used in full address mode transfer.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 162 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Register (ETCR)

• Short Address Mode

ETCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers. The setting

of this register is different for sequential mode and idle mode on the one hand, and for repeat

mode on the other. ETCR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode.

⎯ Sequential Mode and Idle Mode

In sequential mode and idle mode, ETCR functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (with a

count range of 1 to 65,536). ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is performed,

and when the count reaches H'0000, the DTE bit in DMABCR is cleared, and transfer ends.

⎯ Repeat Mode

In repeat mode, ETCR functions as an 8-bit transfer counter ETCRL (with a count range of

1 to 256) and transfer number storage register ETCRH. ETCRL is decremented by 1 each

time a transfer is performed, and when the count reaches H'00, ETCRL is loaded with the

value in ETCRH. At this point, MAR is automatically restored to the value it had when the

count was started. The DTE bit in DMABCR is not cleared, and so transfers can be

performed repeatedly until the DTE bit is cleared by the user.

• Full Address Mode

ETCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers. The function

of this register is different in normal mode and in block transfer mode. ETCR is not initialized

by a reset or in standby mode.

⎯ Normal Mode

(a) ETCRA

In normal mode, ETCRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. ETCRA is decremented by

1 each time a transfer is performed, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.

(b) ETCRB

ETCRB is not used in normal mode.

⎯ Block Transfer Mode

(a) ETCRA

In block transfer mode, ETCRAL functions as an 8-bit block size counter and ETCRAH

holds the block size. ETCRAL is decremented each time a 1-byte or 1-word transfer is

performed, and when the count reaches H'00, ETCRAL is loaded with the value in

ETCRAH. So by setting the block size in ETCRAH and ETCRAL, it is possible to

repeatedly transfer blocks consisting of any desired number of bytes or words.

(b) ETCRB

ETCRB functions in block transfer mode, as a 16-bit block transfer counter. ETCRB is

decremented by 1 each time a block is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches

H'0000.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 163 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.3.4 DMA Control Register (DMACR)

DMACR controls the operation of each DMAC channel.

• Short Address Mode (common to DMACRA and DMACRB)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 DTSZ 0 R/W Data Transfer Size

Selects the size of data to be transferred at one time.

0: Byte-size transfer

1: Word-size transfer

6 DTID 0 R/W Data Transfer Increment/Decrement

Selects incrementing or decrementing of MAR every data

transfer in sequential mode or repeat mode.

In idle mode, MAR is neither incremented nor decremented.

0: MAR is incremented after a data transfer

• When DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 after a

transfer

• When DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 after a

transfer

1: MAR is decremented after a data transfer

• When DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 after a

transfer

• When DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 after a

transfer

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 164 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

5 RPE 0 R/W Repeat Enable

Used in combination with the DTIE bit in DMABCR to select

the mode (sequential, idle, or repeat) in which transfer is to

be performed.

RPE DTIE

0 0: Transfer in sequential mode (no transfer end

interrupt)

0 1: Transfer in sequential mode (with transfer end

interrupt)

1 0: Transfer in repeat mode (no transfer end

interrupt)

1 1: Transfer in idle mode (with transfer end

interrupt)

Note: For details of operation in sequential, idle, and repeat

mode, see section 7.4.2, Sequential Mode, section

7.4.3, Idle Mode, and section 7.4.4, Repeat Mode.

4 DTDIR 0 R/W Data Transfer Direction

Specifies the data transfer direction (source or destination).

0: Transfer with MAR as source address and IOAR as

destination address

1: Transfer with IOAR as source address and MAR as

destination address

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 165 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

DTF3

DTF2

DTF1

DTF0

R/W

Data Transfer Factor

These bits select the data transfer factor (activation source).

0000: ⎯

0001: Activated by A/D conversion end interrupt

0010: ⎯

0011: ⎯

0100: Activated by SCI channel 0 transmission complete

interrupt

0101: Activated by SCI channel 0 reception complete

interrupt

0110: ⎯

0111: ⎯

1000: Activated by TPU channel 0 compare match/input

capture A interrupt

1001: Activated by TPU channel 1 compare match/input

capture A interrupt

1010: Activated by TPU channel 2 compare match/input

capture A interrupt

1011: ⎯

1100: ⎯

1101: ⎯

1110: ⎯

1111: ⎯

The same factor can be selected for more than one channel. In this case, activation starts with the

highest-priority channel according to the relative channel priorities. For relative channel priorities,

see section 7.4.10, DMAC Multi-Channel Operation.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 166 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Full Address Mode (DMACRA)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

15 DTSZ 0 R/W Data Transfer Size

Selects the size of data to be transferred at one time.

0: Byte-size transfer

1: Word-size transfer

SAID

SAIDE

R/W

Source Address Increment/Decrement

Source Address Increment/Decrement Enable

These bits specify whether source address register MARA is

to be incremented, decremented, or left unchanged, when

data transfer is performed.

00: MARA is fixed

01: MARA is incremented after a data transfer

• When DTSZ = 0, MARA is incremented by 1 after a

transfer

• When DTSZ = 1, MARA is incremented by 2 after a

transfer

10: MARA is fixed

11: MARA is decremented after a data transfer

• When DTSZ = 0, MARA is decremented by 1 after a

transfer

• When DTSZ = 1, MARA is decremented by 2 after a

transfer

BLKDIR

BLKE

R/W

Block Direction

Block Enable

These bits specify whether normal mode or block transfer

mode is to be used. If block transfer mode is specified, the

BLKDIR bit specifies whether the source side or the

destination side is to be the block area.

00: Transfer in normal mode

01: Transfer in block transfer mode, destination side is block

area

10: Transfer in normal mode

11: Transfer in block transfer mode, source side is block area

For operation in normal mode and block transfer mode, see

section 7.4, Operation.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 167 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

⎯ All 0 R/W Reserved

Although these bits are readable/writable, only 0 should be

written to.

• Full Address Mode (DMACRB)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 ⎯ 0 R/W Reserved

Although this bit is readable/writable, only 0 should be written

to.

DAID

DAIDE

R/W

Destination Address Increment/Decrement

Destination Address Increment/Decrement Enable

These bits specify whether destination address register

MARB is to be incremented, decremented, or left unchanged,

when data transfer is performed.

00: MARB is fixed

01: MARB is incremented after a data transfer

• When DTSZ = 0, MARB is incremented by 1 after a

transfer

• When DTSZ = 1, MARB is incremented by 2 after a

transfer

10: MARB is fixed

11: MARB is decremented after a data transfer

• When DTSZ = 0, MARB is decremented by 1 after a

transfer

• When DTSZ = 1, MARB is decremented by 2 after a

transfer

4 ⎯ 0 R/W Reserved

Although this bit is readable/writable, only 0 should be written

to.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 168 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

DTF3

DTF2

DTF1

DTF0

R/W

Data Transfer Factor

These bits select the data transfer factor (activation source).

In normal mode:

0000: ⎯

0001: ⎯

0010: ⎯

0011: Activated by DREQ signal's low level input from USB

(USB request)

010×: ⎯

0110: Auto-request (cycle steal)

0111: Auto-request (burst)

1×××: ⎯

In block transfer mode:

0000: ⎯

0001: Activated by A/D conversion end interrupt

0010: ⎯

0011: ⎯

0100: Activated by SCI channel 0 transmission complete

interrupt

0101: Activated by SCI channel 0 reception complete

interrupt

0110: ⎯

0111: ⎯

1000: Activated by TPU channel 0 compare match/input

capture A interrupt

1001: Activated by TPU channel 1 compare match/input

capture A interrupt

1010: Activated by TPU channel 2 compare match/input

capture A interrupt

1011: ⎯

11××: ⎯

The same factor can be selected for more than one channel.

In this case, activation starts with the highest-priority channel

according to the relative channel priorities. For relative

channel priorities, see section 7.4.10, DMAC Multi-Channel

Operation.

Legend:

×: Don't care

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 169 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.3.5 DMA Band Control Register (DMABCR)

DMABCR controls the operation of each DMAC channel.

• Short Address Mode

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

15 FAE1 0 R/W Full Address Enable 1

Specifies whether channel 1 is to be used in short address

mode or full address mode.

In short address mode, channels 1A and 1B are used as

independent channels.

0: Short address mode

1: Full address mode

14 FAE0 0 R/W Full Address Enable 0

Specifies whether channel 0 is to be used in short address

mode or full address mode.

In short address mode, channels 0A and 0B are used as

independent channels.

0: Short address mode

1: Full address mode

13,

⎯ ⎯ R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 170 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

DTA1B

DTA1A

DTA0B

DTA0A

R/W

Data Transfer Acknowledge

These bits enable or disable clearing, when DMA transfer is

performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the

data transfer factor setting.

When DTE = 1 and DTA = 1, the internal interrupt source

selected by the data transfer factor setting is cleared

automatically by DMA transfer. When DTE = 1 and DTA = 1,

the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer

factor setting does not issue an interrupt request to the CPU.

When DTE = 1 and DTA = 0, the internal interrupt source

selected by the data transfer factor setting is not cleared

when a transfer is performed, and can issue an interrupt

request to the CPU in parallel. In this case, the interrupt

source should be cleared by the CPU.

When DTE = 0, the internal interrupt source selected by the

data transfer factor setting issues an interrupt request to the

CPU regardless of the DTA bit setting.

0: Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of

DMA transfer is disabled

1: Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of

DMA transfer is enabled

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 171 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

DTE1B

DTE1A

DTE0B

DTE0A

R/W

Data Transfer Enable

When DTE = 0, data transfer is disabled and the activation

source selected by the data transfer factor setting is ignored.

If the activation source is an internal interrupt, an interrupt

request is issued to the CPU. If the DTIE bit is set to 1when

DTE = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a

transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the

CPU.

The conditions for the DTE bit being cleared to 0 are as

follows:

• When initialization is performed

• When the specified number of transfers have been

completed in a transfer mode other than repeat mode

• When 0 is written to the DTE bit to forcibly abort the

transfer, or for a similar reason

When DTE = 1, data transfer is enabled and the DMAC waits

for a request by the activation source selected by the data

transfer factor setting. When a request is issued by the

activation source, DMA transfer is executed. The condition for

the DTE bit being set to 1 is as follows:

• When 1 is written to the DTE bit after the DTE bit is read

as 0

0: Data transfer disabled

1: Data transfer enabled

DTIE1B

DTIE1A

DTIE0B

DTIE0A

R/W

Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable

These bits enable or disable an interrupt to the CPU when

transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 when DTE = 0, the

DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and

issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU.

A transfer end interrupt can be canceled either by clearing

the DTIE bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by

performing processing to continue transfer by setting the

transfer counter and address register again, and then setting

the DTE bit to 1.

0: Transfer end interrupt disabled

1: Transfer end interrupt enabled

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 172 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Full Address Mode

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

15 FAE1 0 R/W Full Address Enable 1

Specifies whether channel 1 is to be used in short

address mode or full address mode.

In full address mode, channels 1A and 1B are used

together as a single channel.

0: Short address mode

1: Full address mode

14 FAE0 0 R/W Full Address Enable 0

Specifies whether channel 0 is to be used in short

address mode or full address mode.

In full address mode, channels 0A and 0B are used

together as a single channel.

0: Short address mode

1: Full address mode

13,12 — All 0 R/W Reserved

Although these bits are readable/writable, only 0 should

be written to.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 173 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

Data Transfer Acknowledge

Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is

performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the

data transfer factor setting.

When DTE = 1 and DTA = 1, the internal interrupt source

selected by the data transfer factor setting is cleared

automatically by DMA transfer. When DTE = 1 and DTA

= 1, the internal interrupt source selected by the data

transfer factor setting does not issue an interrupt request

to the CPU.

When DTE = 1 and DTA = 0, the internal interrupt source

selected by the data transfer factor setting is not cleared

when a transfer is performed, and can issue an interrupt

request to the CPU in parallel. In this case, the interrupt

source should be cleared by the CPU transfer.

When DTE = 0, the internal interrupt source selected by

the data transfer factor setting issues an interrupt request

to the CPU regardless of the DTA bit setting.

The state of the DTME bit does not affect the above

operations.

11 DTA1 0 R/W Data transfer acknowledge 1

Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is

performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the

channel 1 data transfer factor setting.

0: Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of

DMA transfer is disabled

1: Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of

DMA transfer is enabled

10 – 0 R/W Reserved

Although this bit is readable/writable, only 0 should be

written to.

9 DTA0 0 R/W Data Transfer Acknowledge 0

Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is

performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the

channel 0 data transfer factor setting.

0: Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of

DMA transfer is disabled

1: Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of

DMA transfer is enabled

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 174 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

8 – 0 R/W Reserved

Although this bit is readable/writable, only 0 should be written

to.

Data Transfer Master Enable

Together with the DTE bit, this bit controls enabling or

disabling of data transfer on the relevant channel. When both

the DTME bit and the DTE bit are set to 1, transfer is enabled

for the channel. If the relevant channel is in the middle of a

burst mode transfer when an NMI interrupt is generated, the

DTME bit is cleared, the transfer is interrupted, and bus

mastership passes to the CPU. When the DTME bit is

subsequently set to 1 again, the interrupted transfer is

resumed. In block transfer mode, however, the DTME bit is

not cleared by an NMI interrupt, and transfer is not

interrupted.

The conditions for the DTME bit being cleared to 0 are as

follows:

• When initialization is performed

• When NMI is input in burst mode

• When 0 is written to the DTME bit

The condition for DTME being set to 1 is as follows:

• When 1 is written to DTME after DTME is read as 0

7 DTME1 0 R/W Data Transfer Master Enable 1

Enables or disables data transfer on channel 1

0: Data transfer disabled. In burst mode, cleared to 0 by an

NMI interrupt

1: Data transfer enabled

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 175 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

Data Transfer Enable

When DTE = 0, data transfer is disabled and the activation

source selected by the data transfer factor setting is ignored.

If the activation source is an internal interrupt, an interrupt

request is issued to the CPU. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 when

DTE = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a

transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the

CPU.

The conditions for the DTE bit being cleared to 0 are as

follows:

• When initialization is performed

• When the specified number of transfers have been

completed

• When 0 is written to the DTE bit to forcibly abort the

transfer, or for a similar reason

When DTE = 1 and DTME = 1, data transfer is enabled and

the DMAC waits for a request by the activation source

selected by the data transfer factor setting. When a request is

issued by the activation source, DMA transfer is executed.

The condition for the DTE bit being set to 1 is as follows:

• When 1 is written to the DTE bit after the DTE bit is read

as 0

6 DTE1 0 R/W Data Transfer Enable 1

Enables or disables data transfer on channel 1.

0: Data transfer disabled

1: Data transfer enabled

5 DTME0 0 R/W Data Transfer Master Enable 0

Enables or disables data transfer on channel 0.

0: Data transfer disabled. In burst mode, cleared to 0 by an

NMI interrupt

1: Data transfer enabled

4 DTE0 0 R/W Data Transfer Enable 0

Enables or disables data transfer on channel 0.

0: Data transfer disabled

1: Data transfer enabled

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 176 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

Data Transfer Interrupt Enable B

Enables or disables an interrupt to the CPU when transfer is

interrupted. If the DTIEB bit is set to 1 when DTME = 0, the

DMAC regards this as indicating a break in the transfer, and

issues a transfer break interrupt request to the CPU. A

transfer break interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the

DTIEB bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by

performing processing to continue transfer by setting the

DTME bit to 1.

3 DTIE1B 0 R/W Data Transfer Interrupt Enable 1B

Enables or disables the channel 1 transfer break interrupt.

0: Transfer break interrupt disabled

1: Transfer break interrupt enabled

Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable A

Enables or disables an interrupt to the CPU when transfer

ends. If the DTIEA bit is set to 1 when DTE = 0, the DMAC

regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a

transfer end interrupt request to the CPU. A transfer end

interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIEA bit to 0

in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing

to continue transfer by setting the DTE bit to 1.

2 DTIE1A 0 R/W Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 1A

Enables or disables the channel 1 transfer end interrupt.

0: Transfer end interrupt disabled

1: Transfer end interrupt enabled

1 DTIE0B 0 R/W Data Transfer Interrupt Enable 0B

Enables or disables the channel 0 transfer break interrupt.

0: Transfer break interrupt disabled

1: Transfer break interrupt enabled

0 DTIE0A 0 R/W Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 0A

Enables or disables the channel 0 transfer end interrupt.

0: Transfer end interrupt disabled

1: Transfer end interrupt enabled

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 177 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4 Operation

7.4.1 Transfer Modes

Table 7.2 lists the DMAC modes.

Table 7.2 DMAC Transfer Modes

Transfer Mode Transfer Source Remarks

Short

address

mode

Dual

address

mode

(1) Sequential mode

(2) Idle mode

(3) Repeat Mode

• TPU channel 0 to 2

compare match/input

capture A interrupt

• SCI transmission

complete interrupt

• SCI reception

complete interrupt

• A/D conversion end

interrupt

• Up to 4 channels can

operate

independently

Full

address

mode

(4) Normal mode • USB request

• Auto-request

• Max. 2-channel

operation, combining

channels A and B

(5) Block transfer

mode

• TPU channel 0 to 2

compare match/input

capture A interrupt

• SCI transmission

complete interrupt

• SCI reception

complete interrupt

• A/D conversion end

interrupt

• With auto-request,

burst mode transfer

or cycle steal transfer

can be selected

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 178 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.2 Sequential Mode

Sequential mode can be specified by clearing the RPE bit in DMACR to 0. In sequential mode,

MAR is updated after each byte or word transfer in response to a single transfer request, and this is

executed the number of times specified in ETCR. One address is specified by MAR, and the other

by IOAR. The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 7.3

summarizes register functions in sequential mode.

Table 7.3 Register Functions in Sequential Mode

Function

23 0

MAR

Source

address

Destination

address

Start address of

transfer destination

or transfer source

Incremented/

decremented every

transfer

23 15 0

IOARH'FF

Destination

address

Source

address

Start address of

transfer source or

transfer destination

Fixed

015 ETCR

Transfer counter Number of transfers Decremented every

transfer, transfer

ends when count

reaches H'0000

MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is

incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the

lower 16 bits of the other address. The 8 bits above IOAR have a value of H'FF. Figure 7.2

illustrates operation in sequential mode.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 179 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

ddress T

ddress B

Transfer IOAR

1 byte or word transfer performed in

response to 1 transfer request

Notes:

Address

Where:

T = L

B = L + (–1)DTID · (2DTSZ · (N–1))

L = Value set in MAR

N = Value set in ETCR

Figure 7.2 Operation in Sequential Mode

The number of transfers is specified as 16 bits in ETCR. ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a

transfer is executed, and when its value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and transfer ends. If

the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The maximum number

of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCR, is 65,536. Transfer requests (activation sources) consist

of A/D conversion end interrupt, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and

TPU channel 0 to 2 compare match/input capture A interrupts. Figure 7.3 shows an example of the

setting procedure for sequential mode.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 180 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Sequential mode

setting

Set DMABCRH

Set transfer source

and transfer destination

addresses

Set number of transfers

Set DMACR

Read DMABCRL

Set DMABCRL

Sequential mode

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1] Set each bit in DMABCRH.

· Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode.

· Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt

clearing with the DTA bit.

[2] Set the transfer source address and transfer

destination address in MAR and IOAR.

[3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR.

[4] Set each bit in DMACR.

· Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit.

· Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or

decremented with the DTID bit.

· Clear the RPE bit to 0 to select sequential mode.

· Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit.

· Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0.

[5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0.

[6] Set each bit in DMABCRL.

· Specify enabling or disabling of transfer

andinterrupts with the DTIE bit.

· Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer.

Figure 7.3 Example of Sequential Mode Setting Procedure

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 181 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.3 Idle Mode

Idle mode can be specified by setting the RPE bit and DTIE bit in DMACR to 1. In idle mode, one

byte or word is transferred in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number

of times specified in ETCR. One address is specified by MAR, and the other by IOAR. The

transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 7.4 summarizes register

functions in idle mode.

Table 7.4 Register Functions in Idle Mode

Function

23 0

MAR

Source

address

Destination

address

Start address of

transfer destination

or transfer source

Fixed

23 15 0

IOARH'FF

Destination

address

Source

address

Start address of

transfer source or

transfer destination

Fixed

015 ETCR

Transfer counter Number of transfers Decremented every

transfer, transfer

ends when count

reaches H'0000

MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is

neither incremented nor decremented each time a byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the

lower 16 bits of the other address. The 8 bits above IOAR have a value of H'FF. Figure 7.4

illustrates operation in idle mode.

Transfer IOAR

1 byte or word transfer performed in

response to 1 transfer request

MAR

Figure 7.4 Operation in Idle Mode

The number of transfers is specified as 16 bits in ETCR. ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a

transfer is executed, and when its value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and transfer ends. If

the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The maximum number

of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCR, is 65,536.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 182 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D conversion end interrupt, SCI transmission

complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channel 0 to 2 compare match/input capture

A interrupts. Figure 7.5 shows an example of the setting procedure for idle mode.

Idle mode setting

Set DMABCRH

Set transfer source

and transfer destination

addresses

Set number of transfers

Set DMACR

Read DMABCRL

Set DMABCRL

Idle mode

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1] Set ech bit in DMABCRH.

· Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address

mode.

· Specify enabling or disabling of internal

interrupt clearing with the DTA bit.

[2] Set the transfer source address and transfer

destinatiln address in MAR and IOAR.

[3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR.

[4] Set each bit in DMACR.

· Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit.

· Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or

decremented with the DTID bit.

· Set the RPE bit to 1.

· Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR

bit.

· Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to

DTF0.

[5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0.

[6] Set each bit in DMABCRL.

· Set the DTIE bit to 1.

· Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer.

Figure 7.5 Example of Idle Mode Setting Procedure

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 183 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.4 Repeat Mode

Repeat mode can be specified by setting the RPE bit in DMACR to 1, and clearing the DTIE bit to

0. In repeat mode, MAR is updated after each byte or word transfer in response to a single transfer

request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCR. On completion of the

specified number of transfers, MAR and ETCRL are automatically restored to their original

settings and operation continues. One address is specified by MAR, and the other by IOAR. The

transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 7.5 summarizes register

functions in repeat mode.

Table 7.5 Register Functions in Repeat Mode

Function

23 0

MAR

Source

address

Destination

address

Start address of

transfer destination

or transfer source

Incremented/decrem

ented every transfer.

Initial setting is

restored when value

reaches H'0000

23 15 0

IOARH'FF

Destination

address

Source

address

Start address of

transfer source or

transfer destination

Fixed

ETCRH

Holds number of transfers

Number of transfers Fixed

ETCRL

Transfer counter Number of transfers Decremented every

transfer. Loaded

with ETCRH value

when count reaches

H'00

MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is

incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the

lower 16 bits of the other address. The 8 bits above IOAR have a value of H'FF. The number of

transfers is specified as 8 bits by ETCRH and ETCRL. The maximum number of transfers, when

H'00 is set in both ETCRH and ETCRL, is 256.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 184 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

In repeat mode, ETCRL functions as the transfer counter, and ETCRH is used to hold the number

of transfers. ETCRL is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is executed, and when its value

reaches H'00, it is loaded with the value in ETCRH. At the same time, the value set in MAR is

restored in accordance with the values of the DTSZ and DTID bits in DMACR. The MAR

restoration operation is as shown below.

MAR = MAR – (–1)DTID · 2 DTSZ · ETCRH

The same value should be set in ETCRH and ETCRL.

In repeat mode, operation continues until the DTE bit is cleared. To end the transfer operation,

therefore, you should clear the DTE bit to 0. A transfer end interrupt request is not sent to the

CPU. By setting the DTE bit to 1 again after it has been cleared, the operation can be restarted

from the transfer after that terminated when the DTE bit was cleared. Figure 7.6 illustrates

operation in repeat mode.

ddress T

ddress B

Transfer IOAR

1 byte or word transfer performed in

rewponse to 1 transfer request

Notes:

Address

Where:

T = L

B = L + (–1)DTID · (2DTSZ · (N–1))

L = Value set in MAR

N = Value set in ETCR

Figure 7.6 Operation in Repeat mode

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 185 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D conversion end interrupt, SCI transmission

complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channel 0 to 2 compare match/input capture

A interrupts. Figure 7.7 shows an example of the setting procedure for repeat mode.

Repeat mode

setting

Read DMABCRH

Set transfer source

and transfer destination

addresses

Set number of transfers

Set DMACR

Read DMABCRL

Set DMABCRL

Repeat mode

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1] Set each bit in DMABCRH.

· Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address

mode.

· Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt

clearing with the DTA bit.

[2] Set the transfer source address and transfer

destination address in MAR and IOAR.

[3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR.

[4] Set each bit in DMACR.

· Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit.

· Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or

decremented with the DTID bit.

· Set the RPE bit to 1.

· Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit.

· Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to

DTF0.

[5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0.

[6] Set each bit in DMABCRL.

· Clear the DTIE bit to 1.

· Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer.

Figure 7.7 Example of Repeat Mode Setting Procedure

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 186 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.5 Normal Mode

In normal mode, transfer is performed with channels A and B used in combination. Normal mode

can be specified by setting the FAE bit in DMABCR to 1 and clearing the BLKE bit in DMACRA

to 0. In normal mode, MAR is updated after each byte or word transfer in response to a single

transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCRA. The transfer source

is specified by MARA, and the transfer destination by MARB. Table 7.6 summarizes register

functions in normal mode.

Table 7.6 Register Functions in Normal Mode

23 0

MARA

Source address

Start address of

transfer source

Incremented/decremented

every transfer, or fixed

23 0

MARB

Destination address

Start address of

transfer destination

Incremented/decremented

every transfer, or fixed

15 0

ETCRA

Transfer counter Number of transfers Decremented every

transfer; transfer ends

when count reaches

H'0000

MARA and MARB specify the start addresses of the transfer source and transfer destination,

respectively, as 24 bits. MAR can be incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or

word is transferred, or can be fixed. Incrementing, decrementing, or holding a fixed value can be

set separately for MARA and MARB.

The number of transfers is specified by ETCRA as 16 bits. ETCRA is decremented each time a

transfer is performed, and when its value reaches H'0000 the DTE bit is cleared and transfer ends.

If the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The maximum

number of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCRA, is 65,536.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 187 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 7.8 illustrates operation in normal mode.

ddress T

ddress B

Transfer Address T

Notes:

Address T

= L

Address T

= L

Address B

= L

+ SAIDE · (–1)

SAID

· (2

DTSZ

· (N–1))

Address B

= L

+ DAIDE · (–1)

DAID

· (2

DTSZ

· (N–1))

= Value set in MARA

= Value set in MARB

N = Value set in ETCRA

Address B

Figure 7.8 Operation in Normal Mode

Transfer requests (activation sources) are external requests and auto-requests. With auto-request,

the DMAC is only activated by register setting, and the specified number of transfers are

performed automatically. With auto-request, cycle steal mode or burst mode can be selected. In

cycle steal mode, the bus is released to another bus master each time a transfer is performed. In

burst mode, the bus is held continuously until transfer ends. For setting details, see section 7.3.4,

DMA Controller Register (DMACR).

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 188 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 7.9 shows an example of the setting procedure for normal mode.

Normal mode

setting

Set DMABCRH

Set transfer source

and transfer destination

addresses

Set number of transfers

Set DMACR

Read DMABCRL

Set DMABCRL

Normal mode

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1] Set each bit in DMABCRH.

· Set the FAE bit to 1 to select full address

mode.

· Specify enabling or disabling of internal

interrupt clearing with the DTA bit.

[2] Set the transfer source address in MARA, and

the transfer destination address in MARB.

[3] Set the number of transfers in ETCRA.

[4] Set each bit in DMACRA and DMACRB.

· Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit.

· Specify whether MARA is to be

incremented, decremented, or fixed, with

the SAID and SAIDE bits.

· Clear the BLKE bit to 0 to select normal

mode.

· Specify whether MARB is to be

incremented, decremented, or fixed, with

the DAID and DAIDE bits.

· Select the activation source with bits DTF3

to DTF0.

[5] Read the DTE = 0 and DTME = 0 in

DMABCRL.

[6] Set each bit in DMABCRL.

· Specify enabling or desabling of transfer

end interrupts with the DTIE bit.

· Set both the DTME bit and the DTE bit to 1

to enable transfer.

Figure 7.9 Example of Normal Mode Setting Procedure

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 189 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.6 Block Transfer Mode

In block transfer mode, transfer is performed with channels A and B used in combination. Block

transfer mode can be specified by setting the FAE bit in DMABCR and the BLKE bit in

DMACRA to 1. In block transfer mode, a transfer of the specified block size is carried out in

response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the specified number of times. The

transfer source is specified by MARA, and the transfer destination by MARB. Either the transfer

source or the transfer destination can be selected as a block area (an area composed of a number of

bytes or words). Table 7.7 summarizes register functions in block transfer mode.

Table 7.7 Register Functions in Block Transfer Mode

23 0

MARA

Source address

Start address of

transfer source

Incremented/decremented

every transfer, or fixed

23 0

MARB

Description address

Start address of

transfer destination

Incremented/decremented

every transfer, or fixed

ETCRAH

Holds block size Block size Fixed

ETCRAL

Block size counter Block size decremented every

transfer; ETCRH value

copied when count reaches

H'00

015 ETCRB

Block transfer

counter

Number of block

transfers

Decremented every block

transfer; transfer ends

when count reaches

H'0000

MARA and MARB specify the start addresses of the transfer source and transfer destination,

respectively, as 24 bits. MAR can be incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or

word is transferred, or can be fixed. Incrementing, decrementing, or holding a fixed value can be

set separately for MARA and MARB. Whether a block is to be designated for MARA or for

MARB is specified by the BLKDIR bit in DMACRA.

To specify the number of transfers, if M is the size of one block (where M = 1 to 256) and N

transfers are to be performed (where N = 1 to 65,536), M is set in both ETCRAH and ETCRAL,

and N in ETCRB.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 190 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 7.10 illustrates operation in block transfer mode when MARB is designated as a block area.

ddress T

ddress B

Transfer

Address T

Notes:

Address T

= L

Address T

= L

Address B

= L

+ SAIDE · (–1)

SAID

· (2

DTSZ

· (M · N–1))

Address B

= L

+ DAIDE · (–1)

DAID

· (2

DTSZ

· (N–1))

= Value set in MARA

= Value set in MARB

N = Value set in ETCRA

M = Value set in ETCRAH and ETCRAL

Address B

1st block

2nd block

Nth block

Block area

Consecutive transfer

of M bytes or words

is performed in

response to one

request

Figure 7.10 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 0)

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 191 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 7.11 illustrates operation in block transfer mode when MARA is designated as a block area.

Address T

Address B

Transfer

ddress T

Notes:

Address T

= L

Address T

= L

Address B

= L

+ SAIDE · (–1)

SAID

· (2

DTSZ

· (N–1))

Address B

= L

+ DAIDE · (–1)

DAID

· (2

DTSZ

· (M · N–1))

LA = Value set in MARA

LB = Value set in MARB

N = Value set in ETCRB

M = Value set in ETCRAH and ETCRAL

ddress B

1st block

2nd block

Nth block

Block area

Consecutive transfer

of M bytes or words

is performed in

response to one

request

Figure 7.11 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 1)

ETCRAL is decremented by 1 each time a byte or word transfer is performed. In response to a

single transfer request, burst transfer is performed until the value in ETCRAL reaches H'00.

ETCRAL is then loaded with the value in ETCRAH. At this time, the value in the MAR register

for which a block designation has been given by the BLKDIR bit in DMACRA is restored in

accordance with the DTSZ, SAID/DAID, and SAIDE/DAIDE bits in DMACR.

ETCRB is decremented by 1 every block transfer, and when the count reaches H'0000 the DTE bit

is cleared and transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this point, an interrupt request is sent to

the CPU. Figure 7.12 shows the operation flow in block transfer mode.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 192 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Start

(DTE = DTME = 1)

MARA = MARA – SAIDE

(–1)

SAID

DTSZ

ETCRAH

Yes

Clear DTE bit to 0

to end transfer

Acquire bus

ETCRAL = ETCRAL–1

Transfer request?

ETCRAL = H'00

Release bus

BLKDIR = 0

ETCRAL = ETCRAH

ETCRB = ETCRB – 1

ETCRB = H'0000

Read address specified by MARA

MARA = MARA + SAIDE · (–1)

SAID

· 2

DTSZ

Write to address specified by MARB

MARB = MARB + DAIDE · (–1)

DAID

· 2

DTSZ

MARB = MARB – DAIDE

(–1)

DAID

DTSZ

ETCRAH

Figure 7.12 Operation Flow in Block Transfer Mode

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 193 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D conversion end interrupt, SCI transmission

complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channel 0 to 2 compare match/input capture

A interrupts. For details, see section 7.3.4, DMA Control Register (DMACR). Figure 7.13 shows

an example of the setting procedure for block transfer mode.

Block transfer

mode setting

Set DMABCRH

Set transfer source

and transfer destination

addresses

Set number of transfers

Set DMACR

Read DMABCRL

Set DMABCRL

Block transfer mode

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1] Set each bit in DMABCRH.

· Set the FAE bit to 1 to select full address

mode.

· Specify enabling or disabling of internal

interrupt clearing with the DTA bit.

[2] Set the transfer source address in MARA, and

the transfer destination address in MARB.

[3] Set the transfer source address in ETCRAH

and ETCRAL. Set the number of transfers in

ETCRB.

[4] Set each bit in DMACRA and DMACRB.

· Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit.

· Specify whether MARA is to be incremented,

decremented, or fixed, with the SAID and

SAIDE bits.

· Set the BLKE bit to 1 to select block transfer

mode.

· Specify whether the transfer source or the

transfer destination is a block area with the

BLKDIR bit.

· Specify whether MARB is to be incremented,

decremented, or fixed, with the DAID and

DAIDE bits.

· Select the activation source with bits DTF3

to DTF0.

[5] Read the DTE = 0 and DTME = 0 in

DMABCRL.

[6] Set each bit in DMABCRL.

· Specify enabling or desabling of transfer end

interrupts to the CPU with the DTIE bit.

· Set both the DTME bit and the DTE bit to 1

to enable transfer.

Figure 7.13 Example of Block Transfer Mode Setting Procedure

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 194 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.7 DMAC Activation Sources

DMAC activation sources consist of internal interrupts, external requests, and auto-requests. The

activation sources that can be specified depend on the transfer mode, as shown in table 7.8.

Table 7.8 DMAC Activation Sources

Full Address Mode

Activation

Source

Short Address

Mode

Normal Mode

Block Transfer

Mode

Internal ADI ×

Interrupt TXI0 ×

RXI0 ×

TGI0A ×

TGI1A ×

TGI2A ×

USB request Low level input of the DREQ

signal

× ×

Auto-request × ×

Legend:

: Can be specified

×: Cannot be specified

Activation by Internal Interrupt: An interrupt request selected as a DMAC activation source can

be sent simultaneously to the CPU. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.

With activation by an internal interrupt, the DMAC accepts the request independently of the

interrupt controller. Consequently, interrupt controller priority settings are not accepted.

If the DMAC is activated by an interrupt request that is not used as a CPU interrupt source (DTA =

1), the interrupt source flag is cleared automatically by the DMA transfer. With ADI, TXI, and

RXI interrupts, however, the interrupt source flag is not cleared unless the prescribed register is

accessed in a DMA transfer. If the same interrupt is used as an activation source for more than one

channel, the interrupt request flag is cleared when the highest-priority channel is activated first.

Transfer requests for other channels are held pending in the DMAC, and activation is carried out in

order of priority.

When DTE = 0, such as after completion of a transfer, a request from the selected activation

source is not sent to the DMAC, regardless of the DTA bit. In this case, the relevant interrupt

request is sent to the CPU. In case of overlap with a CPU interrupt source (DTA = 0), the interrupt

request flag is not cleared by the DMAC.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 195 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Activation by USB Request: The USB request (DREQ signal) is specified as a DMAC activation

source. The USB request is generated by the level sense. In full-address normal mode, the USB

request is carried out as follows.

While the DREQ signal is kept high, the DMAC waits for the transfer request. While the DREQ

signal is kept low, the DMAC releases the bus each time a byte is transferred and the transfer is

performed continuously. When the DREQ signal is driven high during the transfer, the transfer is

halted and the DMAC waits for the transfer request.

Activation by Auto-Request: Auto-request activation is performed by register setting only, and

transfer continues to the end. With auto-request activation, cycle steal mode or burst mode can be

selected.

In cycle steal mode, the DMAC releases the bus to another bus master each time a byte or word is

transferred. DMA and CPU cycles usually alternate. In burst mode, the DMAC keeps possession

of the bus until the end of the transfer, and transfer is performed continuously.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 196 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.8 Basic DMAC Bus Cycles

An example of the basic DMAC bus cycle timing is shown in figure 7.14. In this example, word-

size transfer is performed from 16-bit, 2-state access space to 8-bit, 3-state access space. When the

bus is transferred from the CPU to the DMAC, a source address read and destination address write

are performed. The bus is not released in response to another bus request, etc., between these read

and write operations. As with CPU cycles, DMA cycles conform to the bus controller settings.

DMAC cycle (1-word transfer) CPU cycleCPU cycle

Source

address Destination address

Address bus

HWR

LWR

Figure 7.14 Example of DMA Transfer Bus Timing

The address is not output to the external address bus in an access to on-chip memory or an internal

I/O register.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 197 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.9 DMAC Bus Cycles (Dual Address Mode)

Short Address Mode: Figure 7.15 shows a transfer example in which TEND* output is enabled

and byte-size short address mode transfer (sequential/idle/repeat mode) is performed from external

8-bit, 2-state access space to internal I/O space.

DMA read

HWR

TEND*

LWR

DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA

dead

ddress bus

Note: * This LSI does not support TEND output.

Bus release Bus release Bus release Bus releas

Last transfer cycle

Figure 7.15 Example of Short Address Mode Transfer

A one-byte or one-word transfer is performed for one transfer request, and after the transfer the

bus is released. While the bus is released one or more bus cycles are inserted by the CPU.

In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead

cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle.

In repeat mode, when TEND* output is enabled, TEND* output goes low in the transfer cycle in

which the transfer counter reaches 0.

Note: * This LSI does not support TEND output.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 198 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Full Address Mode (Cycle Steal Mode): Figure 7.16 shows a transfer example in which TEND*

output is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (cycle steal mode) is performed from

external 16-bit, 2-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space.

DMA read

HWR

TEND*

LWR

DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA

dead

ddress bus

Bus release Bus release Bus release Bus releas

Last transfer cycle

Note: * This LSI does not support TEND output.

Figure 7.16 Example of Full Address Mode (Cycle Steal) Transfer

A one-byte or one-word transfer is performed, and after the transfer the bus is released. While the

bus is released one bus cycle is inserted by the CPU.

In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead

cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle.

Note: * This LSI does not support TEND output.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 199 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Full Address Mode (Burst Mode): Figure 7.17 shows a transfer example in which TEND* output

is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (burst mode) is performed from external 16-

bit, 2-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space.

DMA read

HWR

TEND*

LWR

DMA write

DMA read

DMA write

DMA read

DMA write

DMA

dead

ddress bus

Bus release Bus release

Last transfer cycle

Burst transfer

Note: * This LSI does not support TEND output.

Figure 7.17 Example of Full Address Mode (Burst Mode) Transfer

In burst mode, one-byte or one-word transfers are executed consecutively until transfer ends. In the

transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle

is inserted after the DMA write cycle.

If a request from another higher-priority channel is generated after burst transfer starts, that

channel has to wait until the burst transfer ends.

If an NMI is generated while a channel designated for burst transfer is in the transfer enabled state,

the DTME bit is cleared and the channel is placed in the transfer disabled state. If burst transfer

has already been activated inside the DMAC, the bus is released on completion of a one-byte or

one-word transfer within the burst transfer, and burst transfer is suspended. If the last transfer

cycle of the burst transfer has already been activated inside the DMAC, execution continues to the

end of the transfer even if the DTME bit is cleared.

Note: * This LSI does not support TEND output.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 200 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Full Address Mode (Block Transfer Mode): Figure 7.18 shows a transfer example in which

TEND* output is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (block transfer mode) is

performed from internal 16-bit, 1-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space.

DMA

read

HWR

TEND*

LWR

DMA

write DMA

dead

ddress bus

Bus release

Last block transfer

DMA

read

Block transfer

DMA

write DMA

read DMA

write DMA

dead

DMA

read DMA

write

Note: * This LSI does not support TEND output.

Figure 7.18 Example of Full Address Mode (Block Transfer Mode) Transfer

A one-block transfer is performed for one transfer request, and after the transfer the bus is

released. While the bus is released, one or more bus cycles are inserted by the CPU.

In the transfer end cycle of each block (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-

state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle.

One block is transmitted without interruption. NMI generation does not affect block transfer

operation.

Note: * This LSI does not support TEND output.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 201 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

DREQ Signal Level Activation Timing (Normal Mode): Set the DTA bit for the channel for

which the DREQ signal is selected to 1.

Figure 7.19 shows an example of DREQ level activated normal mode transfer.

DREQ

Bus release

Idle Idle IdleRead

Request clear period

Acceptance resumes Acceptance resumes

Minimum of 2 cycles Minimum of 2 cycles

Request clear periodRequest Request

Transfer

source Transfer

source

Transfer

destination Transfer

destination

ReadWrite Write

ddress bus

DMA control

Channel

DMA

read DMA

write Bus

release DMA

read DMA

write Bus

release

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ signal low level is sampled on the rising

edge of f, and the request is held.

The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC.

Start of DMA cycle.

Acceptance is resumed after the write cycle is completed.

(As in [1], the DREQ signal low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request

is held.)

[1]

[2] [5]

[3] [6]

[4] [7]

Figure 7.19 Example of DREQ Level Activated Normal Mode Transfer

DREQ signal sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next φ cycle after the

end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point.

When the DREQ signal low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ signal is

possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the

request is cleared. Acceptance resumes after the end of the write cycle, DREQ signal low level

sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends.

Note: The DREQ signal of this chip is an internal signal of chip, so it is not output from the pin.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 202 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.10 DMAC Multi-Channel Operation

The DMAC channel priority order is: channel 0 > channel 1, and channel A > channel B. Table 7.9

summarizes the priority order for DMAC channels.

Table 7.9 DMAC Channel Priority Order

Short Address Mode Full Address Mode Priority

Channel 0A Channel 0 High

Channel 0B

Channel 1A Channel 1

Channel 1B Low

If transfer requests are issued simultaneously for more than one channel, or if a transfer request for

another channel is issued during a transfer, when the bus is released the DMAC selects the highest-

priority channel from among those issuing a request according to the priority order shown in table

7.9. During burst transfer, or when one block is being transferred in block transfer, the channel will

not be changed until the end of the transfer. Figure 7.20 shows a transfer example in which transfer

requests are issued simultaneously for channels 0A, 0B, and 1.

DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA

read

ddress bus

HWR

LWR

DMA control

Channel 0A

Channel 0B

Channel 1

Idle Write Idle Read Write Idle Read Write Read

Request clear

Request

hold

Request

hold

Request clear

Bus

release Channel 0A

transfer Bus

release Channel 0B

transfer Channel 1 transfer

Bus

release

Request

hold

Read

Selection

Non-

selection Selection

Figure 7.20 Example of Multi-Channel Transfer

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 203 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.11 Relation between the DMAC and External Bus Requests

There can be no break between a DMA cycle read and a DMA cycle write. This means that an

external bus release cycle is not generated between the external read and external write in a DMA

cycle.

In the case of successive read and write cycles, such as in burst transfer or block transfer, an

external bus released state may be inserted after a write cycle.

When DMA cycle reads or writes are accesses to on-chip memory or internal I/O registers, these

DMA cycles can be executed at the same time as refresh cycles or external bus release. However,

simultaneous operation may not be possible when a write buffer is used.

7.4.12 NMI Interrupts and DMAC

When an NMI interrupt is requested, burst mode transfer in full address mode is interrupted. An

NMI interrupt does not affect the operation of the DMAC in other modes.

In full address mode, transfer is enabled for a channel when both the DTE bit and the DTME bit

are set to 1. With burst mode setting, the DTME bit is cleared when an NMI interrupt is requested.

If the DTME bit is cleared during burst mode transfer, the DMAC discontinues transfer on

completion of the 1-byte or 1-word transfer in progress, then releases the bus, which passes to the

CPU.

The channel on which transfer was interrupted can be restarted by setting the DTME bit to 1 again.

Figure 7.21 shows the procedure for continuing transfer when it has been interrupted by an NMI

interrupt on a channel designated for burst mode transfer.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 204 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Resumption of

transfer on interrupted

channel

Set DTME bit to 1

Transfer continues

[1]

[2]

DTE = 1

DTME = 0

Transfer ends

Yes

[1]

[2]

Check that DTE = 1 and

DTME = 0 in DMABCRL

Write 1 to the DTME bit.

Figure 7.21 Example of Procedure for Continuing Transfer on Channel Interrupted by

NMI Interrupt

7.4.13 Forced Termination of DMAC Operation

If the DTE bit for the channel currently operating is cleared to 0, the DMAC stops on completion

of the 1-byte or 1-word transfer in progress. DMAC operation resumes when the DTE bit is set to

1 again. In full address mode, the same applies to the DTME bit. Figure 7.22 shows the procedure

for forcibly terminating DMAC operation by software.

Forced termination

of DMAC

Clear DTE bit to 0

Forced termination

[1]

[1] Clear the DTE bit in DMABCRL to 0.

If you want to prevent interrupt generation after

forced termination of DMAC operation, clear the

DTIE bit to 0 at the same time.

Figure 7.22 Example of Procedure for Forcibly Terminating DMAC Operation

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 205 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.4.14 Clearing Full Address Mode

Figure 7.23 shows the procedure for releasing and initializing a channel designated for full address

mode. After full address mode has been cleared, the channel can be set to another transfer mode

using the appropriate setting procedure.

Clearing full

address mode

Stop the channel

Initialize DMACR

Clear FAE bit to 0

Initialization;

operation halted

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] Clear both the DTE bit and the DTME bit in

DMABCRL to 0; or wait until the transfer ends

and the DTE bit is cleared to 0, then clear the

DTME bit to 0.

Also clear the corresponding DTIE bit to 0 at the

same time.

[2] Clear all bits in DMACRA and DMACRB to 0.

[3] Clear the FAE bit in DMABCRH to 0.

Figure 7.23 Example of Procedure for Clearing Full Address Mode

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 206 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.5 Interrupts

The sources of interrupts generated by the DMAC are transfer end and transfer break. Table 7.10

shows the interrupt sources and their priority order.

Table 7.10 Interrupt Source Priority Order

Interrupt Source

Interrupt

Name Short Address Mode Full Address Mode

Interrupt

Priority Order

DEND0A Interrupt due to end of transfer

on channel 0A

Interrupt due to end of transfer

on channel 0

High

DEND0B Interrupt due to end of transfer

on channel 0B

Interrupt due to break in transfer

on channel 0

DEND1A Interrupt due to end of transfer

on channel 1A

Interrupt due to end of transfer

on channel 1

DEND1B Interrupt due to end of transfer

on channel 1B

Interrupt due to break in transfer

on channel 1 Low

Enabling or disabling of each interrupt source is set by means of the DTIE bit for the

corresponding channel in DMABCR, and interrupts from each source are sent to the interrupt

controller independently. The relative priority of transfer end interrupts on each channel is decided

by the interrupt controller, as shown in table 7.10.

Figure 7.24 shows a block diagram of a transfer end/transfer break interrupt. An interrupt is always

generated when the DTIE bit is set to 1 while DTE bit is cleared to 0.

DTE/

DTME

DTIE

Transfer end/transfe

break interrupt

Figure 7.24 Block Diagram of Transfer End/Transfer Break Interrupt

In full address mode, a transfer break interrupt is generated when the DTME bit is cleared to 0

while DTIEB bit is set to 1. In both short address mode and full address mode, DMABCR should

be set so as to prevent the occurrence of a combination that constitutes a condition for interrupt

generation during setting.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 207 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.6 Usage Notes

7.6.1 DMAC Register Access during Operation

Except for forced termination, the operating (including transfer waiting state) channel setting

should not be changed. The operating channel setting should only be changed when transfer is

disabled. Also, the DMAC register should not be written to in a DMA transfer.

DMAC register reads during operation (including the transfer waiting state) are described below.

1. DMAC control starts one cycle before the bus cycle, with output of the internal address.

Consequently, MAR is updated in the bus cycle before DMAC transfer.

Figure 7.25 shows an example of the update timing for DMAC registers in dual address

transfer mode.

[1] Transfer source address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed)

Transfer counter ETCR operation (decremented)

Block size counter ETCR operation (decremented in block transfer mode)

[2] Transfer destination address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed)

[2'] Transfer destination address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed)

Block transfer counter ETCR operation (decremented, in last transfer cycle of

a block in block transfer mode)

[3] Transfer address register MAR restore operation (in block or repeat transfer mode)

Transfer counter ETCR restore (in repeat transfer mode)

Block size counter ETCR restore (in block transfer mode)

Note: The MAR operation is post-incrementing/decrementing of the DMA internal address value.

[3]

[2'][2] [1]

[1]

DMA transfer cycle

DMA read DMA read

DMA write DMA write DMA

dead

DMA Internal

address

DMA control

DMA register

operation

DMA last transfer cycle

Transfer

destination Transfer

destination

Transfer

source

Transfer

source

Idle Idle IdleRead Read Dead

Write Write

Figure 7.25 DMAC Register Update Timing

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 208 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2. If a DMAC transfer cycle occurs immediately after a DMAC register read cycle, the DMAC

[1] [2]

Note: The lower word of MAR is the updated value after the operation in [1].

CPU longword read DMA transfer cycle

MAR upper

word read MAR lower

word read DMA read DMA write

DMA internal

address

DMA control

DMA register

operation

Idle

Read Write Idle

Transfer

source Transfer

destination

Figure 7.26 Contention between DMAC Register Update and CPU Read

7.6.2 Module Stop

When the MSTPA7 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, the DMAC clock stops, and the module stop state

is entered. However, 1 cannot be written to the MSTPA7 bit if any of the DMAC channels is

enabled. This setting should therefore be made when DMAC operation is stopped.

When the DMAC clock stops, DMAC register accesses can no longer be made. Since the

following DMAC register settings are valid even in the module stop state, they should be

invalidated, if necessary, before a module stop.

• Transfer end/suspend interrupt (DTE = 0 and DTIE = 1)

For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.

7.6.3 Medium-Speed Mode

When the DTA bit is 0, internal interrupt signals specified as DMAC transfer sources are edge-

detected. In medium-speed mode, the DMAC operates on a medium-speed clock, while on-chip

peripheral modules operate on a high-speed clock.

Consequently, if the period in which the relevant interrupt source is cleared by the CPU or another

DMAC channel, and the next interrupt is generated, is less than one state with respect to the

DMAC clock (bus master clock), edge detection may not be possible and the interrupt may be

ignored.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 209 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

7.6.4 Activation Source Acceptance

At the start of activation source acceptance, a low level is detected in both DREQ signal falling

edge sensing and low level sensing. Similarly, in the case of an internal interrupt, the interrupt

request is detected. Therefore, a request is accepted from an internal interrupt or DREQ pin low

level that occurs before execution of the DMABCRL write to enable transfer.

When the DMAC is activated, take any necessary steps to prevent an internal interrupt or DREQ

signal low level remaining from the end of the previous transfer, etc.

7.6.5 Internal Interrupt after End of Transfer

When the DTE bit is cleared to 0 by the end of transfer or an abort, the selected internal interrupt

request will be sent to the CPU even if DTA is set to 1.

Also, if internal DMAC activation has already been initiated when operation is aborted, the

transfer is executed but flag clearing is not performed for the selected internal interrupt even if

DTA is set to 1.

An internal interrupt request following the end of transfer or an abort should be handled by the

CPU as necessary.

7.6.6 Channel Re-Setting

To reactivate a number of channels when multiple channels are enabled, use exclusive handling of

transfer end interrupts, and perform DMABCR control bit operations exclusively. Note, in

particular, that in cases where multiple interrupts are generated between reading and writing of

DMABCR, and a DMABCR operation is performed during new interrupt handling, the DMABCR

write data in the original interrupt handling routine will be incorrect, and the write may invalidate

the results of the operations by the multiple interrupts. Ensure that overlapping DMABCR

operations are not performed by multiple interrupts, and that there is no separation between read

and write operations by the use of a bit-manipulation instruction. Also, when the DTE and DTME

bits are cleared by the DMAC or are written with 0, they must first be read while cleared to 0

before the CPU can write a 1 to them.

Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 210 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 211 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 8 I/O Ports

Table 8.1 and table 8.2 summarize the port functions of the H8S/2218 Group and H8S/2212 Group

respectively. The pins of each port also have other functions such as input/output or external

interrupt input pins of on-chip peripheral modules. Each I/O port includes a data direction register

(DDR) that controls input/output, a data register (DR) that stores output data, and a port register

(PORT) used to read the pin states. The input-only ports do not have DR and DDR.

Ports A to E have an on-chip input pull-up MOS and a input pull-up MOS control register (PCR)

to control the on/off state of the input pull-up MOS. Ports 3 and A include an open-drain control

All the I/O ports can drive a single TTL load and 30-pF capacitive load.

Table 8.1 Port Functions of H8S/2218 Group

Port Description Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

Input/Output

Type

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA

P11/TIOCB0/A21 P11/TIOCB0

Port 1 General I/O port

also functioning

as TPU I/O pins,

interrupt input

pins, and address

bus output pins

P10/TIOCA0/A20 P10/TIOCA0

Schmitt trigger

input

(IRQ1, IRQ0)

Port 3 General I/O port

also functioning

as SCI_0 I/O pins

and interrupt

input pins

P36

P32/SCK0/IRQ4

P31/RxD0

P30/TxD0

Open-drain

output

Schmitt trigger

input (IRQ4)

Port 4 General input

port also

functioning as

A/D converter

analog input pins

P43/AN3

P42/AN2

P41/AN1

P40/AN0

Port 7 General I/O port

also functioning

as bus control

output pins and

manual reset

input pins

P74/MRES

P71/CS5

P70/CS4

P74/MRES

P71

P70

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 212 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Port Description Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

Input/Output

Type

Port 9 General input

port also

functioning as

A/D converter

analog input pins

P97/AN15

P96/AN14

Port A General I/O port

also functioning

as SCI_2 I/O pins

and address bus

output pins

PA3/A19/SCK2

PA2/A18/RxD2

PA1/A17/TxD2

PA0/A16

PA3/SCK2

PA2/RxD2

PA1/TxD2

PA0

On-chip input

pull-up MOS

Open-drain

output

Port B General I/O port

also functioning

as address bus

output pins

PB7/A15

PB6/A14

PB5/A13

PB4/A12

PB3/A11

PB2/A10

PB1/A9

PB0/A8

PB7

PB6

PB5

PB4

PB3

PB2

PB1

PB0

On-chip input

pull-up MOS

A7 When DDR = 0: PC7

When DDR = 1: A7

PC7

A6 When DDR = 0: PC6

When DDR = 1: A6

PC6

Port C General I/O port

also functioning

as address bus

output pins

A5 When DDR = 0: PC5

When DDR = 1: A5

PC5

On-chip input

pull-up MOS

A4 When DDR = 0: PC4

When DDR = 1: A4

PC4

A3 When DDR = 0: PC73

When DDR = 1: A3

PC3

A2 When DDR = 0: PC2

When DDR = 1: A2

PC2

A1 When DDR = 0: PC1

When DDR = 1: A1

PC1

A0 When DDR = 0: PC0

When DDR = 1: A0

PC0

Port D General I/O port

also functioning

as data bus I/O

pins

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

PD7

PD6

PD5

PD4

PD3

PD2

PD1

PD0

On-chip input

pull-up MOS

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 213 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Port Description Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

Input/Output

Type

8-bit bus mode: PE7

16-bit bus mode: D7

PE7

8-bit bus mode: PE6

16-bit bus mode: D6

PE6

8-bit bus mode: PE5

16-bit bus mode: D5

PE5

8-bit bus mode: PE4

16-bit bus mode: D4

PE4

8-bit bus mode: PE3

16-bit bus mode: D3

PE3

Port E General I/O port

also functioning as

data bus I/O pins

8-bit bus mode: PE2

16-bit bus mode: D2

PE2

On-chip input

pull-up MOS

8-bit bus mode: PE1

16-bit bus mode: D1

PE1

8-bit bus mode: PE0

16-bit bus mode: D0

PE0

Port F When DDR = 0: PF7

When DDR = 1 (after

reset): φ

When DDR = 0

(after reset): PF7

When DDR = 1: φ

Schmitt trigger

input

(IRQ3, IRQ2)

AS PF6

RD PF5

General I/O port

also functioning as

bus control signal

I/O pins and

interrupt input pins

HWR PF4

8-bit bus mode:

PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

16-bit bus mode: LWR

PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

When WAITE = 0

(after reset): PF2

When WAITE = 1:

WAIT

PF2

When BRLE = 0

(after reset): PF1

When BRLE = 1:

BACK

PF1

When BRLE = 0

(after reset): PF0/IRQ2

When BRLE = 1:

BREQ/IRQ2

PF0/IRQ2

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 214 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Port Description Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

Input/Output

Type

Port G When DDR = 0 (after reset in mode 6):

PG4

When DDR = 1 (after reset in modes 4, 5):

CS0

PG4 Schmitt trigger

input

(IRQ7)

General I/O port

also functioning

as bus control

output pins and

interrupt Input

pins When DDR = 0: PG3

When DDR = 1: CS1

PG3

When DDR = 0: PG2

When DDR = 1: CS2

PG2

When DDR = 0: PG1/IRQ7

When DDR = 1: CS3/IRQ7

PG1/IRQ7

Table 8.2 Port Functions of H8S/2212 Group

Port Description Mode 7

Input/Output

Type

Port 1 General I/O port

also functioning

as TPU I/O pins

and interrupt

input pins

P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD

P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1

P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC

P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0

P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB

P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA

P11/TIOCB0

P10/TIOCA0

Schmitt trigger

input

(IRQ1, IRQ0)

Port3 General I/O port

also functioning

as SCI_0 I/O pins

and interrupt

input pins

P36

P32/SCK0/IRQ4

P31/RxD0

P30/TxD0

Open-drain

output

Schmitt trigger

input

(IRQ4)

Port 4 General input

port also

functioning as

A/D converter

analog input pins

P43/AN3

P42/AN2

P41/AN1

P40/AN0

Port 7 General I/O port P77*

P76*

P75*

Port 9 General input

port also

functioning as

A/D converter

analog input pins

P97/AN15

P96/AN14

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 215 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Port Description Mode 7

Input/Output

Type

Port A General I/O port

also functioning

as SCI_2 I/O pins

PA3/SCK2

PA2/RxD2

PA1/TxD2

On-chip input

pull-up MOS

Open-drain

output

Port E General I/O port PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

On-chip input

pull-up MOS

When DDR = 0 (after reset): PF7

When DDR = 1: φ

Port F General I/O port

also functioning

as interrupt input

pins PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3

PF0/IRQ2

Schmitt trigger

input

(IRQ3, IRQ2)

Port G General I/O port

also functioning

as interrupt input

pins

PG1/IRQ7

PG0*

Schmitt trigger

input

(IRQ7)

Note: * These pins are available only when EMLE = 0. These pins are not available when the

H-UDI is used.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 216 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.1 Port 1

In the H8S/2218 Group, the port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port also functioning as address bus pins, TPU

I/O pins, and external interrupt input pins. In the H8S/2212 Group, the port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port

also functioning as TPU I/O pins and external interrupt input pins. The port 1 has the following

registers.

• Port 1 data direction register (P1DDR)

• Port 1 data register (P1DR)

• Port 1 register (PORT1)

8.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)

P1DDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port 1.

Since P1DDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

P1DDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

P17DDR

P16DDR

P15DDR

P14DDR

P13DDR

P12DDR

P11DDR

P10DDR

(H8S/2218 Group)

Modes 4 to 6:

If address output is enabled by the setting of bits AE3 to

AE0 in PFCR, pins P13 to P10 are address outputs. Pins

P17 to P14, and pins P13 to P10 when address output is

disabled, are output ports when the corresponding

P1DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when the

corresponding P1DDR bits are cleared to 0.

Mode 7:

Setting a P1DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Setting a P1DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 217 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.1.2 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)

P1DR stores output data for the port 1 pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

P17DR

P16DR

P15DR

P14DR

P13DR

P12DR

P11DR

P10DR

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

8.1.3 Port 1 Register (PORT1)

PORT1 indicates the pin states of the port 1.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

P17

P16

P15

P14

P13

P12

P11

P10

⎯*

If the port 1 is read while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the

P1DR value is read. If the port 1 is read while P1DDR bits

are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins P17 to P10.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 218 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.1.4 Pin Functions

Pin Functions of H8S/2218 Group

Port 1 pins also function as address bus (A23 to A20) output pins, TPU I/O pins, and external

interrupt input (IRQ0 and IRQ1) pins. The correspondence between the register specification and

the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.3 P17 Pin Function

TPU Channel 2 Setting* Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P17DDR ⎯ 0 1

P17 input pin P17 output pin TIOCB2 output pin

TIOCB2 input pin

Pin Function

TCLKD input pin

Note: * For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).

Table 8.4 P16 Pin Function

TPU Channel 2 Setting*1Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P16DDR ⎯ 0 1

P16 input pin P16 output pin TIOCA2 output pin

TIOCA2 input pin

Pin Function

IRQ1 input pin*2

Notes: 1. For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit

(TPU).

2. When this pin is used as an external interrupt pin, this pin must not be used for another

function.

Table 8.5 P15 Pin Function

TPU Channel 1 Setting* Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P15DDR ⎯ 0 1

P15 input pin P15 output pin TIOCB1 output pin

TIOCB1 input pin

Pin Function

TCLKC input pin

Note: * For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 219 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.6 P14 Pin Function

TPU Channel 1 Setting*1Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P14DDR ⎯ 0 1

P14 input pin P14 output pin TIOCA1 output pin

TIOCA1 input pin

Pin Function

IRQ0 input pin*2

Notes: 1. For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit

(TPU).

2. When this pin is used as an external interrupt pin, this pin must not be used for another

function.

Table 8.7 P13 Pin Function

AE3 to AE0*2 Other than B'1111 B'1111

TPU Channel 0 Setting*1Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value ⎯

P13DDR ⎯ 0 1 ⎯

P13 input pin P13 output pin TIOCD0 output pin

TIOCD0 input pin

Pin Function

TCLKB input pin

A23 output

pin*2

Notes: 1. For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit

(TPU).

2. Valid in modes 4, 5, and 6.

Table 8.8 P12 Pin Function

AE3 to AE0*2 Other than B'1111 B'1111

TPU Channel 0 Setting*1Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value ⎯

P12DDR ⎯ 0 1 ⎯

P12 input pin P12 output pin TIOCC0 output pin

TIOCC0 input pin

Pin Function

TCLKA input pin

A22 output

pin*2

Notes: 1. For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit

(TPU).

2. Valid in modes 4, 5, and 6.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 220 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.9 P11 Pin Function

AE3 to AE0*2 Other than B'1110 to B'1111 B'1110 to

B'1111

TPU Channel 0 Setting*1Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value ⎯

P11DDR ⎯ 0 1 ⎯

P11 input pin P11 output pin Pin Function TIOCB0 output pin

TIOCB0 input pin

A21 output

pin*2

Notes: 1. For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit

(TPU).

2. Valid in modes 4, 5, and 6.

Table 8.10 P10 Pin Function

AE3 to AE0*2 Other than B'1101 to B'1111 B'1101 to

B'1111

TPU Channel 0 Setting*1Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value ⎯

P10DDR ⎯ 0 1 ⎯

P10 input pin P10 output pin Pin Function TIOCA0 output pin

TIOCA0 input pin

A20 output

pin*2

Notes: 1. For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit

(TPU).

2. Valid in modes 4, 5, and 6.

Pin Functions of H8S/2212 Group

Port 1 pins also function as TPU I/O pins and external interrupt input (IRQ0 and IRQ1) pins. The

correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.11 P17 Pin Function

TPU Channel 2 Setting* Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P17DDR ⎯ 0 1

P17 input pin P17 output pin TIOCB2 output pin

TIOCB2 input pin

Pin Function

TCLKD input pin

Note: * For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 221 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.12 P16 Pin Function

TPU Channel 2 Setting*1Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P16DDR ⎯ 0 1

P16 input pin P16 output pin TIOCA2 output pin

TIOCA2 input pin

Pin Function

IRQ1 input pin*2

Notes: 1. For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit

(TPU).

2. When this pin is used as an external interrupt pin, this pin must not be used for another

function.

Table 8.13 P15 Pin Function

TPU Channel 1 Setting* Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P15DDR ⎯ 0 1

P15 input pin P15 output pin TIOCB1 output pin

TIOCB1 input pin

Pin Function

TCLKC input pin

Note: * For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).

Table 8.14 P14 Pin Function

TPU Channel 1 Setting*1Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P14DDR ⎯ 0 1

P14 input pin P14 output pin TIOCA1 output pin

TIOCA1 input pin

Pin Function

IRQ0 input pin*2

Notes: 1. For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit

(TPU).

2. When this pin is used as an external interrupt pin, this pin must not be used for another

function.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 222 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.15 P13 Pin Function

TPU Channel 0 Setting*Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P13DDR ⎯ 0 1

P13 input pin P13 output pin TIOCD0 output pin

TIOCD0 input pin

Pin Function

TCLKB input pin

Note: * For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).

Table 8.16 P12 Pin Function

TPU Channel 0 Setting*Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P12DDR ⎯ 0 1

P12 input pin P12 output pin TIOCC0 output pin

TIOCC0 input pin

Pin Function

TCLKA input pin

Note: * For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).

Table 8.17 P11 Pin Function

TPU Channel 0 Setting*Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P11DDR ⎯ 0 1

P11 input pin P11 output pin Pin Function TIOCB0 output pin

TIOCB0 input pin

Note: * For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).

Table 8.18 P10 Pin Function

TPU Channel 0 Setting*Output Setting Input Setting or Initial Value

P10DDR ⎯ 0 1

P10 input pin P10 output pin Pin Function TIOCA0 output pin

TIOCA0 input pin

Note: * For details on the TPU channel setting, refer to section 9, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 223 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.2 Port 3

The port 3 is a 4-bit I/O port also functioning as the SCI I/O pins and external interrupt input

(IRQ4) pins. The port 3 of the H8S/2218 Group has the same function as that of the H8S/2212

Group. The port 3 has the following registers.

• Port 3 data direction register (P3DDR)

• Port 3 data register (P3DR)

• Port 3 register (PORT3)

• Port 3 open-drain control register (P3ODR)

8.2.1 Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)

P3DDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port 3.

Since P3DDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

P3DDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 ⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

This bit is undefined and cannot be modified.

6 P36DDR 0 W Setting a P3DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 3

pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin

an input pin.

5 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

P32DDR

P31DDR

P30DDR

Setting a P3DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 3

pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin

an input pin.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 224 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.2.2 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)

P3DR stores output data for the port 3 pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 ⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

This bit is undefined and cannot be modified.

6 P36DR 0 R/W Stores output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

5 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

P32DR

P31DR

P30DR

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

8.2.3 Port 3 Register (PORT3)

PORT3 indicates the pin states of the port 3.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 ⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

This bit is undefined.

6 P36 ⎯* R If the port 3 is read while P3DDR bits are set to 1, the

P3DR value is read. If the port 3 is read while P3DDR bits

are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

5 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined.

P32

P31

P30

⎯*

If the port 3 is read while P3DDR bits are set to 1, the

P3DR value is read. If the port 3 is read while P3DDR bits

are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins P36 and P32 to P30.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 225 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.2.4 Port 3 Open-Drain Control Register (P3ODR)

P3ODR controls the PMOS on/off state for each port 3 pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 ⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

This bit is undefined and cannot be modified.

6 P36ODR 0 R/W Setting a P3ODR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 3

pin an NMOS open-drain output pin, while clearing the bit

to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output pin.

5 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

P32ODR

P31ODR

P30ODR

R/W

Setting a P3ODR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 3

pin an NMOS open-drain output pin, while clearing the bit

to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output pin.

8.2.5 Pin Functions

Port 3 pins also function as SCI I/O pins and external interrupt input (IRQ4) pins. The

correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. The P36

pin must be used as the D+ pull-up control output pin of the USB. For details, refer to section 14,

Universal Serial Bus (USB).

Table 8.19 P36 Pin Function

P36DDR 0 1

Pin Function P36 input pin P36 output pin

(D+ pull-up control output pin of USB)

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 226 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.20 P32 Pin Function

CKE1 in SCR_0 0 1

C/A in SMR_0 0 1 ⎯

CKE0 in SCR_0 0 1 ⎯ ⎯

P32DDR 0 1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

P32 input pin P32 output pin SCK0 output pin SCK0 output pin SCK0 input pin Pin Function

IRQ4 input pin*

Note: * When this pin is used as an external interrupt pin, this pin must not be used for another

function.

Table 8.21 P31 Pin Function

RE in SCR_0 0 1

P31DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function P31 input pin P31 output pin RxD0 input pin

Table 8.22 P30 Pin Function

TE in SCR_0 0 1

P30DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function P30 input pin P30 output pin TxD0 output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 227 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.3 Port 4

The port 4 is a 4-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog input pins. The port 4 of

the H8S/2218 Group has the same function as that of the H8S/2212 Group. The port 4 has the

following register.

• Port 4 register (PORT4)

8.3.1 Port 4 Register (PORT4)

PORT4 indicates the pin states of the port 4.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined.

P43

P42

P41

P40

⎯*

The pin states are always read when these bits are read.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins P43 to P40.

8.3.2 Pin Function

The port 4 also functions as A/D converter analog input (AN3 to AN0) pins.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 228 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.4 Port 7

In the H8S/2218 Group, the port 7 is a 3-bit I/O port also functioning as bus control output pins

and manual reset input pins. In the H8S/2212 Group, the port 7 is a 3-bit I/O port also functioning

as H-UDI pins. The port 7 has the following registers.

• Port 7 data direction register (P7DDR)

• Port 7 data register (P7DR)

• Port 7 register (PORT7)

8.4.1 Port 7 Data Direction Register (P7DDR)

P7DDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port 7.

Since P7DDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

P7DDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

P77DDR

P76DDR

P75DDR

(H8S/2218 Group)

Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

(H8S/2212 Group)

When EMLE = 1: Pins P77 to P75 function as the H-UDI

pins (TDO, TMS, TCK).

When EMLE = 0: If a P7DDR bit is set to 1, pins P77 to

P75 function as output ports. If a P7DDR bit is cleared to

0, pins P77 to P75 function as input ports.

4 P74DDR 0 W (H8S/2218 Group)

Setting a P7DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 7

pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin

an input pin.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Reserved

This bit is undefined and cannot be modified.

3, 2 ⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 229 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

P71DDR

P70DDR

(H8S/2218 Group)

Setting a P7DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port

7 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input pin.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

8.4.2 Port 7 Data Register (P7DR)

P7DR stores output data for the port 7 pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

P77DR

P76DR

P75DR

R/W

(H8S/2218 Group)

Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Store output data for the port 7 pins.

4 P74DR 0 R/W (H8S/2218 Group)

Stores output data for the port 7 pins.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Reserved

This bit is undefined and cannot be modified.

3, 2 ⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

P71DR

P70DR

R/W

(H8S/2218 Group)

Store output data for the port 7 pins.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 230 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.4.3 Port 7 Register (PORT7)

PORT7 indicates the pin states of the port 7.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

P77

P76

P75

⎯*

⎯

(H8S/2218 Group)

Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

(H8S/2212 Group)

If P7DDR bits are set to 1, the P7DR value is read. If

P7DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

4 P74 ⎯* R (H8S/2218 Group)

If the port 7 is read while P7DDR bits are set to 1, the

P7DR value is read. If the port 7 is read while P7DDR

bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Reserved

This bit is undefined and cannot be modified.

3, 2 ⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

P71

P70

⎯*

(H8S/2218 Group)

If the port 7 is read while P7DDR bits are set to 1, the

P7DR value is read. If the port 7 is read while P7DDR

bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins P77 to P74, P71, and P70.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 231 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.4.4 Pin Functions

Pin Functions of H8S/2218 Group

Port 7 pins also function as bus control output pins and manual reset input pins. The

correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.23 P74 Pin Function

MRESE 0 1

P74DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function P74 input pin P74 output pin MRES input pin

Table 8.24 P71 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

P71DDR 0 1 0 1

Pin Function P71 input pin CS5 output pin P71 input pin P71 output pin

Table 8.25 P70 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

P70DDR 0 1 0 1

Pin Function P70 input pin CS4 output pin P70 input pin P70 output pin

Pin Functions of H8S/2212 Group

Port 7 pins also function as H-UDI pins. The correspondence between the register specification

and the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.26 P77 Pin Function

EMLE 0 1

P77DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function P77 input pin P77 output pin TDO output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 232 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.27 P76 Pin Function

EMLE 0 1

P76DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function P76 input pin P76 output pin TCK input pin

Table 8.28 P75 Pin Function

EMLE 0 1

P75DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function P75 input pin P75 output pin TMS input pin

8.5 Port 9

The port 9 is a 2-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog input pins. The port 9 of

the H8S/2218 Group has the same function as that of the H8S/2212 Group.

• Port 9 register (PORT9)

8.5.1 Port 9 Register (PORT9)

PORT9 indicates the pin states of the port 9.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

P97

P96

⎯*

The pin states are always read when these bits are read.

5 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins P97 and P96.

8.5.2 Pin Function

The port 9 also functions as A/D converter analog input (AN15 and AN14) pins.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 233 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.6 Port A

In the H8S/2218 Group, the port A is a 4-bit I/O port also functioning as address bus (A19 to A16)

output pins and SCI I/O pins. In the H8S/2212 Group, the port A is a 3-bit I/O port also

functioning as SCI I/O pins. The port A has the following registers.

• Port A data direction register (PADDR)

• Port A data register (PADR)

• Port A register (PORTA)

• Port A pull-up MOS control register (PAPCR)

• Port A open-drain control register (PAODR)

8.6.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)

PADDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port A.

Since PADDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

PADDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

PA3DDR

PA2DDR

PA1DDR

PA0DDR*

(H8S/2218 Group)

Modes 4 to 6:

If address output is enabled by the setting of bits AE3 to

AE0 in PFCR, the corresponding port A pins are address

outputs. When address output is disabled, setting a

PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an

output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input port.

Mode 7:

Setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

Note: * Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read. This bit

cannot be modified.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 234 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.6.2 Port A Data Register (PADR)

PADR stores output data for the port A pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

PA3DR

PA2DR

PA1DR

PA0DR*

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

Note: * Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read. This bit

cannot be modified.

8.6.3 Port A Register (PORTA)

PORTA indicates the pin states of the port A.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined.

PA3

PA2

PA1

PA0*2

⎯*1

If the port A is read while PADDR bits are set to 1, the

PADR value is read. If the port A is read while PADDR

bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Notes: 1. Determined by the states of pins PA3 to PA0.

2. Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 235 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.6.4 Port A Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PAPCR)

PAPCR controls the on/off state of the port A input pull-up MOS. PAPCR is valid for port input

and SCI input pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

PA3PCR

PA2PCR

PA1PCR

PA0PCR*

R/W

When a pin functions as an input port, setting the

corresponding bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS for

that pin.

Note: * Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read. This bit

cannot be modified.

8.6.5 Port A Open-Drain Control Register (PAODR)

PAODR specifies an output type of the port A. PAODR is valid for port output and SCI output

pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

PA3ODR

PA2ODR

PA1ODR

PA0ODR*

R/W

Setting a PAODR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A

pin an NMOS open-drain output pin, while clearing the bit

to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output pin.

Note: * Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read. This bit

cannot be modified.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 236 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.6.6 Pin Functions

Pin Functions of H8S/2218 Group

Port A pins also function as address bus (A19 to A16) output pins and SCI_2 I/O pins. The

correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.29 PA3 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 B'11×× Other than B'11×× —

CKE1 in SCR_2 — 0 1 0 1

C/A in SMR_2 — 0 1 — 0 1 —

CKE0 in SCR_2 — 0 1 — — 0 1 — —

PA3DDR — 0 1 — — — 0 1 — — —

Pin Function A19

output

PA3

input

PA3

output

SCK2

output

SCK2

output

SCK2

input

PA3

input

PA3

output

SCK2

output

SCK2

output

SCK2

input

Table 8.30 PA2 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 B'1011 or

B'11××

Other than B'1011 or B'11×× —

RE in SCR_2 — 0 1 0 1

PA2DDR — 0 1 — 0 1 —

Pin Function A18

output pin

PA2

input pin

PA2

output pin

RxD2

input pin

PA2

input pin

PA2

output pin

RxD2

input pin

Legend:

×: Don't care.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 237 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.31 PA1 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 B'101×or

B'11××

Other than B'101× or B'11×× —

TE in SCR_2 — 0 1 0 1

PA1DDR — 0 1 — 0 1 —

Pin Function A17

output pin

PA1

input pin

PA1

output pin

TxD2

output pin

PA1

input pin

PA1

output pin

TxD2

output pin

Table 8.32 PA0 Pin Function

Operating

mode

Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 Other than

B'0××× or B'1000

B'0××× or B'1000 —

PA0DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A16 output pin PA0 input pin PA0 output pin PA0 input pin PA0 output pin

Legend:

×: Don't care.

Pin Functions of H8S/2212 Group

Port A pins also function as SCI_2 I/O pins. The correspondence between the register specification

and the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.33 PA3 Pin Function

CKE1 in SCR_2 0 1

C/A in SMR_2 0 1 ⎯

CKE0 in SCR_2 0 1 ⎯ ⎯

PA3DDR 0 1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Pin Function PA3 input

PA3 output

SCK2 output

SCK2 input

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 238 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.34 PA2 Pin Function

RE in SCR_2 0 1

PA2DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function PA2 input pin PA2 output pin RxD2 input pin

Table 8.35 PA1 Pin Function

TE in SCR_2 0 1

PA1DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function PA1 input pin PA1 output pin TxD2 output pin

8.6.7 Port A Input Pull-Up MOS States

The port A has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. The

input pull-up MOS can be specified as the on or off state for individual bits.

Table 8.36 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states.

Table 8.36 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port A)

Pins

Power-On

Reset

Hardware

Standby

Mode

Manual

Reset

Software

Standby

Mode

In Other

Operations

Address output, port

output, SCI output

Off Off

Port input, SCI input On/Off

Legend:

Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off.

On/Off: On when PADDR = 0 and PAPCR = 1; otherwise off.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 239 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.7 Port B (H8S/2218 Group Only)

The port B is an 8-bit I/O port also functioning as address bus (A15 to A8) output pins. The port B

has the following registers.

Note: When the USB is used while the E6000 emulator is used, the AE3 to AE0 bits in PFCR

must be set so that the PB1 and PB0 pins output addresses A9 and A8. This note applies to

both the H8S/2218 Group and H8S/2212 Group.

• Port B data direction register (PBDDR)

• Port B data register (PBDR)

• Port B register (PORTB)

• Port B pull-up MOS control register (PBPCR)

8.7.1 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)

PBDDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port B.

Since PBDDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

PBDDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PB7DDR

PB6DDR

PB5DDR

PB4DDR

PB3DDR

PB2DDR

PB1DDR

PB0DDR

Modes 4 to 6:

If address output is enabled by the setting of bits AE3 to

AE0 in PFCR, the corresponding port B pins are address

outputs. When address output is disabled, setting a

PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an

output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input port.

Mode 7:

Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 240 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.7.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR)

PBDR stores output data for the port B pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PB7DR

PB6DR

PB5DR

PB4DR

PB3DR

PB2DR

PB1DR

PB0DR

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

8.7.3 Port B Register (PORTB)

PORTB indicates the pin states of the port B.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PB7

PB6

PB5

PB4

PB3

PB2

PB1

PB0

⎯*

If the port B is read while PBDDR bits are set to 1, the

PBDR value is read. If the port B is read while PBDDR

bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins PB7 to PB0.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 241 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.7.4 Port B Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PBPCR)

PBPCR controls the on/off state of the port B input pull-up MOS. PBPCR is valid for port input

pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PB7PCR

PB6PCR

PB5PCR

PB4PCR

PB3PCR

PB2PCR

PB1PCR

PB0PCR

R/W

When a pin functions as an input port, setting the

corresponding bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS for

that pin.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 242 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.7.5 Pin Functions

Port B pins also function as address bus (A15 to A9) output pins. The correspondence between the

Note: When using the USB with the emulator (E6000), set A9 and A8 as address bus output pins.

Table 8.37 PB7 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 B'1××× Other than B'1××× —

PB7DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A15

output pin

PB7

input pin

PB7

output pin

PB7

input pin

PB7

output pin

Table 8.38 PB6 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 B'0111 or B'1××× Other than B'0111 or

B'1×××

—

PB6DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A14

output pin

PB6

input pin

PB6

output pin

PB6

input pin

PB6

output pin

Table 8.39 PB5 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 B'011× or B'1××× Other than B'011× or

B'1×××

—

PB5DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A13

output pin

PB5

input pin

PB5

output pin

PB5

input pin

PB5

output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 243 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.40 PB4 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 Other than B'0100

or B'00××

B'0100 or B'00×× —

PB4DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A12

output pin

PB4

input pin

PB4

output pin

PB4

input pin

PB4

output pin

Table 8.41 PB3 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 Other than B'00×× B'00×× —

PB3DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A11

output pin

PB3

input pin

PB3

output pin

PB3

input pin

PB3

output pin

Table 8.42 PB2 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 Other than B'0010

or B'000×

B'0010 or B'000× —

PB2DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A10

output pin

PB2

input pin

PB2

output pin

PB2

input pin

PB2

output pin

Table 8.43 PB1 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 Other than B'000× B'000× —

PB1DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A9

output pin

PB1

input pin

PB1

output pin

PB1

input pin

PB1

output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 244 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.44 PB0 Pin Function

Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

AE3 to AE0 Other than B'0000 B'0000 —

PB0DDR — 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A8

output pin

PB0

input pin

PB0

output pin

PB0

input pin

PB0

output pin

Legend:

×: Don't care.

8.7.6 Port B Input Pull-Up MOS States

The port B has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. The

input pull-up MOS can be specified as the on or off state for individual bits.

Table 8.45 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states.

Table 8.45 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port B)

Pins

Power-On

Reset

Hardware

Standby

Mode

Manual

Reset

Software

Standby

Mode

In Other

Operations

Address output, port

output

Off Off

Port input On/Off

Legend:

Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off.

On/Off: On when PBDDR = 0 and PBPCR = 1; otherwise off.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 245 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.8 Port C (H8S/2218 Group Only)

The port C is an 8-bit I/O port also functioning as address bus (A7 to A0) output pins. The port C

has the following registers.

Note: When the RTC and USB are used while the E6000 emulator is used, the PC7DDR to

PC0DDR bits in PCDDR must be set so that the PC7 to PC0 pins output addresses A7 to

A0. This note applies to both the H8S/2218 Group and H8S/2212 Group.

• Port C data direction register (PCDDR)

• Port C data register (PCDR)

• Port C register (PORTC)

• Port C pull-up MOS control register (PCPCR)

8.8.1 Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR)

PCDDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port C.

Since PCDDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

PCDDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PC7DDR

PC6DDR

PC5DDR

PC4DDR

PC3DDR

PC2DDR

PC1DDR

PC0DDR

Modes 4 and 5:

Port C pins are address output pins.

Mode 6:

Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C

pin an address output pin, while clearing the bit to 0

makes the pin an input port.

Mode 7:

Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 246 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.8.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR)

PCDR stores output data for the port C pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PC7DR

PC6DR

PC5DR

PC4DR

PC3DR

PC2DR

PC1DR

PC0DR

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

8.8.3 Port C Register (PORTC)

PORTC indicates the pin states of the port C.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PC7

PC6

PC5

PC4

PC3

PC2

PC1

PC0

⎯*

If the port C is read while PCDDR bits are set to 1, the

PCDR value is read. If the port C is read while PCDDR

bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins PC7 to PC0.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 247 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.8.4 Port C Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PCPCR)

PCPCR controls the on/off state of the port C input pull-up MOS.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PC7PCR

PC6PCR

PC5PCR

PC4PCR

PC3PCR

PC2PCR

PC1PCR

PC0PCR

R/W

When a pin functions as an input port, setting the

corresponding bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS for

that pin.

8.8.5 Pin Functions

Port C pins also function as address bus (A7 to A0) output pins. The correspondence between the

Note: When using the RTC and USB with the emulator (E6000), set A7 to A0 as address bus

output pins.

Table 8.46 PC7 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

PC7DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A7

output pin

PC7

input pin

output pin

PC7

input pin

PC7

output pin

Table 8.47 PC6 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

PC6DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A6

output pin

PC6

input pin

output pin

PC6

input pin

PC6

output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 248 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.48 PC5 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

PC5DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A5

output pin

PC5

input pin

output pin

PC5

input pin

PC5

output pin

Table 8.49 PC4 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

PC4DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A4

output pin

PC4

input pin

output pin

PC4

input pin

PC4

output pin

Table 8.50 PC3 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

PC3DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A3

output pin

PC3

input pin

output pin

PC3

input pin

PC3

output pin

Table 8.51 PC2 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

PC2DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A2

output pin

PC2

input pin

output pin

PC2

input pin

PC2

output pin

Table 8.52 PC1 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

PC1DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A1

output pin

PC1

input pin

output pin

PC1

input pin

PC1

output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 249 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.53 PC0 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 and 5 Mode 6 Mode 7

PC0DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

Pin Function A0

output pin

PC0

input pin

output pin

PC0

input pin

PC0

output pin

8.8.6 Port C Input Pull-Up MOS States

The port C has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. The

input pull-up MOS can be used in modes 6 and 7, and can be specified as the on or off state for

individual bits.

Table 8.54 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states.

Table 8.54 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port C)

Pins

Power-On

Reset

Hardware

Standby

Mode

Manual

Reset

Software

Standby

Mode

In Other

Operations

Address output (modes 4 and 5),

port output (modes 6 and 7)

Off Off

Port input (modes 6 and 7) On/Off

Legend:

Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off.

On/Off: On when PCDDR = 0 and PCPCR = 1; otherwise off.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 250 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.9 Port D (H8S/2218 Group Only)

The port D is an 8-bit I/O port also functioning as data bus (D15 to D8) I/O pins. The port D has

the following registers.

• Port D data direction register (PDDDR)

• Port D data register (PDDR)

• Port D register (PORTD)

• Port D pull-up MOS control register (PDPCR)

8.9.1 Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR)

PDDDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port D.

Since PDDDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

PDDDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PD7DDR

PD6DDR

PD5DDR

PD4DDR

PD3DDR

PD2DDR

PD1DDR

PD0DDR

Modes 4 to 6:

Port D pins automatically function as data input/output

pins.

Mode 7:

Setting a PDDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port D

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 251 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.9.2 Port D Data Register (PDDR)

PDDR stores output data for the port D pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PD7DR

PD6DR

PD5DR

PD4DR

PD3DR

PD2DR

PD1DR

PD0DR

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

8.9.3 Port D Register (PORTD)

PORTD indicates the pin states of the port D.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PD7

PD6

PD5

PD4

PD3

PD2

PD1

PD0

⎯*

If the port D is read while PDDDR bits are set to 1, the

PDDR value is read. If the port D is read while PDDDR

bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Note: After accessing EXMDLSTP or the RTC register

(address range: H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F), you

must perform a dummy read to the external

address space (such as H'FFEF00 to H'FF7FF)

outside the range H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F before

reading PORTD.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins PD7 to PD0.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 252 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.9.4 Port D Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PDPCR)

PDPCR controls the on/off state of the port D input pull-up MOS.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PD7PCR

PD6PCR

PD5PCR

PD4PCR

PD3PCR

PD2PCR

PD1PCR

PD0PCR

R/W

When a pin functions as an input port, setting the

corresponding bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS for

that pin.

8.9.5 Pin Functions

Port D pins also function as data bus (D15 to D8) I/O pins. The correspondence between the

Table 8.55 PD7 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PD7DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function D15 input/output pin PD7 input pin PD7 output pin

Table 8.56 PD6 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PD6DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function D14 input/output pin PD6 input pin PD6 output pin

Table 8.57 PD5 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PD5DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function D13 input/output pin PD5 input pin PD5 output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 253 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.58 PD4 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PD4DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function D12 input/output pin PD4 input pin PD4 output pin

Table 8.59 PD3 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PD3DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function D11 input/output pin PD3 input pin PD3 output pin

Table 8.60 PD2 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PD2DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function D10 input/output pin PD2 input pin PD2 output pin

Table 8.61 PD1 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PD1DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function D9 input/output pin PD1 input pin PD1 output pin

Table 8.62 PD0 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PD0DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function D8 input/output pin PD0 input pin PD0 output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 254 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.9.6 Port D Input Pull-Up MOS States

The port D has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. The

input pull-up MOS can be used in mode 7, and can be specified as the on or off state for individual

bits.

Table 8.63 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states.

Table 8.63 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port D)

Pins

Power-

On Reset

Hardware

Standby

Mode

Manual

Reset

Software

Standby

Mode

In Other

Operations

Data input/output (modes 4 to 6),

port output (mode 7)

Off Off

Port input (mode 7) On/Off

Legend:

Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off.

On/Off: On when PDDDR = 0 and PDPCR = 1; otherwise off.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 255 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.10 Port E

The port E is an 8-bit I/O port also functioning as data bus (D7 to D0) I/O pins. The port E has the

following registers.

• Port E data direction register (PEDDR)

• Port E data register (PEDR)

• Port E register (PORTE)

• Port E pull-up MOS control register (PEPCR)

8.10.1 Port E Data Direction Register (PEDDR)

PEDDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port E.

Since PEDDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

PEDDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PE7DDR

PE6DDR

PE5DDR

PE4DDR

PE3DDR

PE2DDR

PE1DDR

PE0DDR

(H8S/2218 Group)

Modes 4 to 6:

When 8-bit bus mode is selected, port E functions as an

I/O port. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the

corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the

bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.

When 16-bit bus mode is selected, the input/output

direction settings in PEDDR are ignored, and port E pins

automatically function as data input/output pins.

For details on 8-bit/16-bit bus mode, refer to section 6,

Bus Controller.

Mode 7:

Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 256 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.10.2 Port E Data Register (PEDR)

PEDR stores output data for the port E pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PE7DR

PE6DR

PE5DR

PE4DR

PE3DR

PE2DR

PE1DR

PE0DR

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

8.10.3 Port E Register (PORTE)

PORTE indicates the pin states of the port E.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PE7

PE6

PE5

PE4

PE3

PE2

PE1

PE0

⎯*

If the port E is read while PEDDR bits are set to 1, the

PEDR value is read. If the port E is read while PEDDR

bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Note: * Determined by the states of pins PE7 to PE0.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 257 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.10.4 Port E Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PEPCR)

PEPCR controls the on/off state of the port E input pull-up MOS.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PE7PCR

PE6PCR

PE5PCR

PE4PCR

PE3PCR

PE2PCR

PE1PCR

PE0PCR

R/W

When a pin functions as an input port, setting the

corresponding bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS for

that pin.

8.10.5 Pin Functions

Pin Functions of H8S/2218 Group

Port E pins also function as data bus (D7 to D0) I/O pins. The correspondence between the register

specification and the pin function is shown below.

Table 8.64 PE7 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode ⎯

PE7DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PE7

input pin

PE7

output pin

input/output pin

PE7

input pin

PE7

output pin

Table 8.65 PE6 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode ⎯

PE6DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PE6

input pin

PE6

output pin

input/output pin

PE6

input pin

PE6

output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 258 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.66 PE5 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode ⎯

PE5DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PE5

input pin

PE5

output pin

input/output pin

PE5

input pin

PE5

output pin

Table 8.67 PE4 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode ⎯

PE4DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PE4

input pin

PE4

output pin

input/output pin

PE4

input pin

PE4

output pin

Table 8.68 PE3 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode ⎯

PE3DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PE3

input pin

PE3

output pin

input/output pin

PE3

input pin

PE3

output pin

Table 8.69 PE2 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode ⎯

PE2DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PE2

input pin

PE2

output pin

input/output pin

PE2

input pin

PE2

output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 259 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.70 PE1 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode ⎯

PE1DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PE1

input pin

PE1

output pin

input/output pin

PE1

input pin

PE1

output pin

Table 8.71 PE0 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode ⎯

PE0DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PE0

input pin

PE0

output pin

input/output pin

PE0

input pin

PE0

output pin

Pin Functions of H8S/2212 Group

The port E function as a general I/O port. The correspondence between the register specification

and the pin function is shown below.

Table 8.72 PE7 Pin Function

PE7DDR 0 1

Pin Function PE7 input pin PE7 output pin

Table 8.73 PE6 Pin Function

PE6DDR 0 1

Pin Function PE6 input pin PE6 output pin

Table 8.74 PE5 Pin Function

PE5DDR 0 1

Pin Function PE5 input pin PE5 output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 260 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.75 PE4 Pin Function

PE4DDR 0 1

Pin Function PE4 input pin PE4 output pin

Table 8.76 PE3 Pin Function

PE3DDR 0 1

Pin Function PE3 input pin PE3 output pin

Table 8.77 PE2 Pin Function

PE2DDR 0 1

Pin Function PE2 input pin PE2 output pin

Table 8.78 PE1 Pin Function

PE1DDR 0 1

Pin Function PE1 input pin PE1 output pin

Table 8.79 PE0 Pin Function

PE0DDR 0 1

Pin Function PE0 input pin PE0 output pin

8.10.6 Port E Input Pull-Up MOS States

The port E has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. The

input pull-up MOS can be used in modes 4 to 6 and in 8-bit bus mode, or in mode 7, and can be

specified as the on or off state for individual bits.

Table 8.80 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 261 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.80 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port E)

Pins

Power-On

Reset

Hardware

Standby

Mode

Manual

Reset

Software

Standby

Mode

In Other

Operations

Data input/output (16-bit

bus mode in modes 4 to

6), port output (8-bit bus

mode in modes 4 to 6,

mode 7)

Off Off

Port input (8-bit bus

mode in modes 4 to 6,

mode 7)

On/Off

Legend:

Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off.

On/Off: On when PEDDR = 0 and PEPCR = 1; otherwise off.

8.11 Port F

In the H8S/2218 Group, the port F is an 8-bit I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input

(IRQ2, IRQ3) pins, bus control signal I/O pins, and system clock output pins. In the H8S/2212

Group, the port F is a 3-bit I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ2, IRQ3) pins

and system clock output pins. The port F has the following registers.

• Port F data direction register (PFDDR)

• Port F data register (PFDR)

• Port F register (PORTF)

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 262 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.11.1 Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR)

PFDDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port F.

Since PFDDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

PFDDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PF7DDR

PF6DDR*2

PF5DDR*2

PF4DDR*2

PF3DDR

PF2DDR*2

PF1DDR*2

PF0DDR

1/0*1

(H8S/2218 Group)

Modes 4 to 6:

Pin PF7 functions as the φ output pin when the PF7DDR

bit is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared

to 0. Pins PF6 to PF3 are automatically designated as bus

control output pins. Pins PF2 to PF0 are made bus control

input/output pins by bus controller settings. Otherwise,

setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an

output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input port.

Mode 7

Setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F

pin PF6 to PF0 an output port, or in the case of pin PF7,

the φ output pin. Clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input port.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F

pin PF6 to PF0 an output port, or in the case of pin PF7,

the φ output pin. Clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input port.

Notes: 1. The initial value becomes 1 in modes 4 to 6 and 0 in mode 7.

2. Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

This bit cannot be modified.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 263 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.11.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR)

PFDR stores output data for the port F pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PF7DR

PF6DR*

PF5DR*

PF4DR*

PF3DR

PF2DR*

PF1DR*

PF0DR

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

Note: * Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read. This bit

cannot be modified.

8.11.3 Port F Register (PORTF)

PORTF indicates the pin states of the port F.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

PF7

PF6*2

PF5*2

PF4*2

PF3

PF2*2

PF1*2

PF0

⎯*1

If the port F is read while PFDDR bits are set to 1, the

PFDR value is read. If the port F is read while PFDDR bits

are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Notes: 1. Determined by the states of pins PF7 to PF0.

2. Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 264 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.11.4 Clock Output Control Register (OUTCR)

OUTCR specifies the clock frequency output from the PF7 pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

PF7OUT2

PF7OUT1

PF7OUT0

R/W

PF7 Pin Output Select 2 to 0

000: Main oscillation clock

001: Outputs 1/2 of main oscillation clock

010: Outputs 1/3 of main oscillation clock

011: Outputs 1/4 of main oscillation clock

1xx: Reserved

This function is not supported by the E6000 emulator.

φ in section 22, Electrical Characteristics is in the case

when PF7OUT2 to PF7OUT0 = 000.

8.11.5 Pin Functions

Pin Functions of H8S/2218 Group

The port F is an 8-bit I/O port. Port F pins also function as external interrupt input (IRQ2, IRQ3)

pins, bus control signal I/O pins, and system clock output (φ) pins. The correspondence between

the register specification and the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.81 PF7 Pin Function

PF7DDR 0 1

PF7OUT2 to PF7OUT0 ⎯ B'000 B'001 B'010 B'011

Pin Function PF7 input pin φ output pin φ/2 output pin φ/3 output pin φ/4 output pin

Table 8.82 PF6 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PF6DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function AS output pin PF6 input pin PF6 output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 265 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.83 PF5 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PF5DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function RD output pin PF5 input pin PF5 output pin

Table 8.84 PF4 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PF4DDR ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function HWR output pin PF4 input pin PF4 output pin

Table 8.85 PF3 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

Bus Mode 16-bit bus

mode

8-bit bus mode ⎯

PF3DDR ⎯ 0 1 0 1

PF3

input pin

PF3

output pin

PF3

input pin

PF3

output pin

ADTRG input pin*1

Pin Function LWR

output pin

IRQ3 input pin*2

Notes: 1. ADTRG input pin when TRGS0 = TRGS1 = 1.

2. When this pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, this pin must not be used as an

I/O pin for another function.

Table 8.86 PF2 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

WAITE 0 1 ⎯

PF2DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PF2

input pin

PF2

output pin

WAIT

input pin

PF2

input pin

PF2

output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 266 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.87 PF1 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

BRLE 0 1 ⎯

PF1DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

Pin Function PF1

input pin

PF1

output pin

BACK

output pin

PF1

input pin

PF1

output pin

Table 8.88 PF0 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

BRLE 0 1 ⎯

PF0DDR 0 1 ⎯ 0 1

PF0

input pin

PF0

output pin

BREQ

input pin

PF0

input pin

PF0

output pin

Pin Function

IRQ2 input pin*

Note: * When this pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, this pin must not be used as an I/O

pin for another function.

Pin Functions of H8S/2212 Group

The port F is a 3-bit I/O port. Port F pins also function as external interrupt input (IRQ2, IRQ3)

pins and system clock output (φ) pins. The correspondence between the register specification and

the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.89 PF7 Pin Function

PF7DDR 0 1

PF7OUT2 to PF7OUT0 ⎯ B'000 B'001 B'010 B'011

Pin Function PF7 input pin φ output pin φ/2 output pin φ/3 output pin φ/4 output pin

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 267 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.90 PF3 Pin Function

PF3DDR 0 1

PF3 input pin PF3 output pin

ADTRG input pin*1

Pin Function

IRQ3 input pin*2

Notes: 1. ADTRG input pin when TRGS0 = TRGS1 = 1.

2. When this pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, this pin must not be used as an

I/O pin for another function.

Table 8.91 PF0 Pin Function

PF0DDR 0 1

PF0 input pin PF0 output pin Pin Function

IRQ2 input pin*

Note: * When this pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, this pin must not be used as an I/O

pin for another function.

8.12 Port G

In the H8S/2218 Group, the port G is a 4-bit I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input

(IRQ7) pins and bus control output (CS0 to CS3) pins. In the H8S/2212 Group, the port G is a 2-

bit I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ7) pins and H-UDI (TDI) pins. The

port G has the following registers.

• Port G data direction register (PGDDR)

• Port G data register (PGDR)

• Port G register (PORTG)

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 268 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.12.1 Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR)

PGDDR specifies input or output for the pins of the port G.

Since PGDDR is a write-only register, the bit manipulation instructions must not be used to write

PGDDR. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

PG4DDR*2

PG3DDR*2

PG2DDR*2

PG1DDR

0/1*1

(H8S/2218 Group)

Modes 4 to 6:

Setting a PGDDR bit to 1 makes the PG4 to PG1 pins bus

control signal output pins, while clearing the bit to 0

makes the pins input ports.

Mode 7:

Setting a PGDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port G

pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

(H8S/2212 Group)

Setting a PG1DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port

G pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the

pin an input port.

0 PG0DDR*3 0 W (H8S/2212 Group)

When EMLE = 1: Pin PG0 function as the H-UDI (TDI)

pin.

When EMLE = 0: If a PG0DDR bit is set to 1, pin PG0

function as output ports. If a PG0DDR bit is cleared to 0,

pin PG0 function as input ports.

Notes: 1. The initial value becomes 1 in modes 4 and 5 and 0 in modes 6 and 7.

2. Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

This bit cannot be modified.

3. Reserved in the H8S/2218 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

This bit cannot be modified.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 269 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.12.2 Port G Data Register (PGDR)

PGDR stores output data for the port G pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined and cannot be modified.

PG4DR*1

PG3DR*1

PG2DR*1

PG1DR

PG0DR*2

R/W

Store output data for a pin that functions as a general

output port.

Notes: 1. Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

This bit cannot be modified.

2. Reserved in the H8S/2218 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

This bit cannot be modified.

8.12.3 Port G Register (PORTG)

PORTG indicates the pin states of the port G.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are undefined.

PG4*2

PG3*2

PG2*2

PG1

PG0*3

⎯*1

If the port G is read while PGDDR bits are set to 1, the

PGDR value is read. If the port G is read while PGDDR

bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.

Notes: 1. Determined by the states of pins PG4 to PG0.

2. Reserved in the H8S/2212 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

3. Reserved in the H8S/2218 Group. If this bit is read, an undefined value will be read.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 270 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

8.12.4 Pin Functions

Pin Functions of H8S/2218 Group

Port G pins also function as external interrupt input (IRQ7) pins and bus control signal output

(CS0 to CS3) pins. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is

shown below.

Table 8.92 PG4 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PG4DDR 0 1 0 1

Pin Function PG4 input pin CS0 output pin PG4 input pin PG4 output pin

Table 8.93 PG3 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PG3DDR 0 1 0 1

Pin Function PG3 input pin CS1 output pin PG3 input pin PG3 output pin

Table 8.94 PG2 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PG2DDR 0 1 0 1

Pin Function PG2 input pin CS2 output pin PG2 input pin PG2 output pin

Table 8.95 PG1 Pin Function

Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7

PG1DDR 0 1 0 1

PG1 input pin CS3 output pin PG1 input pin PG1 output pin Pin Function

IRQ7 input pin*

Note: * When this pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, this pin must not be used as an I/O

pin for another function.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 271 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Pin Functions of H8S/2212 Group

Port G pins also function as external interrupt input (IRQ7) pins and H-UDI (TDI) pins. The

correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below.

Table 8.96 PG1 Pin Function

PG1DDR 0 1

PG1 input pin PG1 output pin Pin Function

IRQ7 input pin*

Note: * When this pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, this pin must not be used as an I/O

pin for another function.

Table 8.97 PG0 Pin Function

EMLE 0 1

PG0DDR 0 1 ⎯

Pin Function PG0 input pin PG0 output pin TDI input pin

8.13 Handling of Unused Pins

Unused input pins should be fixed high or low. Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are

high-impedance. Leaving unused pins open can cause the generation of intermediate levels due to

peripheral noise induction. This can result in shoot-through current inside the device and cause it

to malfunction. Table 8.98 lists examples of ways to handle unused pins. For the handling of

dedicated boundary scan pins that are unused, see section 13.2, Pin Configuration, and section

13.5, Usage Notes. Pins marked NC should be left open. For the handling of dedicated USB pins

that are unused, see section 14.8.14, Pin Processing when USB Not Used.

Section 8 I/O Ports

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 272 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 8.98 Examples of Ways to Handle Unused Input Pins

Port Name Pin Handling Example

Port 1

Port 3

Connect each pin to Vcc (pull-up) or to Vss (pull-down) via a resistor.

Port 4 Connect each pin to AVcc (pull-up) or to AVss (pull-down) via a resistor.

Port 7 Connect each pin to Vcc (pull-up) or to Vss (pull-down) via a resistor.

Port 9 Connect each pin to AVcc (pull-up) or to AVss (pull-down) via a resistor.

Port A

Port B*

Port C*

Port D*

Port E

Port F

Connect each pin to Vcc (pull-up) or to Vss (pull-down) via a resistor.

* Ports B, C, and D apply to the H8S/2218 Group only.

Port G

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 273 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

This LSI has an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) that comprises three 16-bit timer channels.

The function list of the 16-bit timer unit and its block diagram are shown in table 9.1 and figure

9.1, respectively.

9.1 Features

• Maximum 8-pulse input/output

• Selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel

• The following operations can be set for each channel

Waveform output at compare match, input capture function, counter clear operation,

simultaneous writing to multiple timer counters (TCNT), simultaneous clearing using compare

match or input capture, simultaneous input/output for individual registers using counter

synchronous operation, PWM output using user-defined duty, up to 7-phase PWM output by

combination with synchronous operation

• Buffer operation settable for channel 0

• Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1 and 2

• Fast access via internal 16-bit bus

• 13 interrupt sources

• Automatic transfer of register data

• A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated

• Module stop mode can be set

• Baud rate clock for the SCI0 can be generated

TIMTPU2C_000020020900

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 274 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Channel 2

TMDR

TSR

TCR

TIOR

TIER

TGRA

TCNT

TGRB

TGRC

Channel 1

TMDR

TSR

TCR

TIOR

TIER

TGRA

TCNT

TGRB

Channel 0

Control logic for channel 0 to 2

TGRA

TCNT

TGRB

TGRD

Bus

interface

Common

TSYR

Control logic

TSTR

φ/1

φ/4

φ/16

φ/64

φ/256

φ/1024

TCLKA

TCLKB

TCLKC

TCLKD

Legend:

TSTR:

TSYR:

TCR:

TMDR:

Timer start register

Timer synchro register

Timer control register

Timer mode register

Timer I/O control registers (H, L)

Timer interrupt enable register

Timer status register

TImer general registers (A, B, C, D)

TIOCA0

TIOCB0

TIOCC0

TIOCD0

TIOCA1

TIOCB1

TIOCA2

TIOCB2

Interrupt request signals

Channel 0:

Channel 1:

Channel 2:

Internal data bus

A/D converter convertion

start signal

Module data bus

TGI0A

TGI0B

TGI0C

TGI0D

TCI0V

TGI1A

TGI1B

TCI1V

TCI1U

TGI2A

TGI2B

TCI2V

TCI2U

TMDR

TSR

TCR

TIORH

TIER TIORL

Input/output pins

Channel 0:

Channel 1:

Channel 2:

Clock input

Internal clock:

External clock:

TIOR(H, L):

TIER:

TSR:

TGR(A, B, C, D):

Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of TPU

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 275 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.1 TPU Functions

Item Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2

Count clock φ/1

φ/4

φ/16

φ/64

TCLKA

TCLKB

TCLKC

TCLKD

φ/1

φ/4

φ/16

φ/64

φ/256

TCLKA

TCLKB

φ/1

φ/4

φ/16

φ/64

φ/1024

TCLKA

TCLKB

TCLKC

General registers TGRA_0

TGRB_0

TGRA_1

TGRB_1

TGRA_2

TGRB_2

General registers/buffer

registers

TGRC_0

TGRD_0

– –

I/O pins TIOCA0

TIOCB0

TIOCC0

TIOCD0

TIOCA1

TIOCB1

TIOCA2

TIOCB2

Counter clear function TGR compare match

or input capture

TGR compare match

or input capture

TGR compare match or

input capture

0 output O O O

1 output O O O

Compare

match

output

Toggle

output

O O O

Input capture function O O O

Synchronous operation O O O

PWM mode O O O

Phase counting mode – O O

Buffer operation O – –

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 276 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2

DMAC activation TGRA_0 compare

match or input capture

TGRA_1 compare

match or input capture

TGRA_2 compare

match or input capture

A/D converter trigger TGRA_0 compare

match or input capture

TGRA_1 compare

match or input capture

TGRA_2 compare

match or input capture

Interrupt sources 5 sources

• Compare match or

input capture 0A

• Compare match or

input capture 0B

• Compare match or

input capture 0C

• Compare match or

input capture 0D

• Overflow

4 sources

• Compare match or

input capture 1A

• Compare match or

input capture 1B

• Overflow

• Underflow

4 sources

• Compare match or

input capture 2A

• Compare match or

input capture 2B

• Overflow

• Underflow

Legend:

O: Possible

–: Not possible

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 277 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 9.2 Pin Configuration

Channel Symbol I/O Function

TCLKA Input External clock A input pin

(Channel 1 phase counting mode A phase input)

TCLKB Input External clock B input pin

(Channel 1 phase counting mode B phase input)

TCLKC Input External clock C input pin

(Channel 2 phase counting mode A phase input)

All

TCLKD Input External clock D input pin

(Channel 2 phase counting mode B phase input)

TIOCA0 I/O TGRA_0 input capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pin

TIOCB0 I/O TGRB_0 input capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pin

TIOCC0 I/O TGRC_0 input capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pin

TIOCD0 I/O TGRD_0 input capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pin

TIOCA1 I/O TGRA_1 input capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pin

TIOCB1 I/O TGRB_1 input capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pin

2 TIOCA2 I/O TGRA_2 input capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pin

TIOCB2 I/O TGRA_2 input capture input/output compare

output/PWM output pin

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 278 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.3 Register Descriptions

The TPU has the following registers.

• Timer control register_0 (TCR_0)

• Timer mode register_0 (TMDR_0)

• Timer I/O control register H_0 (TIORH_0)

• Timer I/O control register L_0 (TIORL_0)

• Timer interrupt enable register_0 (TIER_0)

• Timer status register_0 (TSR_0)

• Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0)

• Timer general register A_0 (TGRA_0)

• Timer general register B_0 (TGRB_0)

• Timer general register C_0 (TGRC_0)

• Timer general register D_0 (TGRD_0)

• Timer control register_1 (TCR_1)

• Timer mode register_1 (TMDR_1)

• Timer I/O control register _1 (TIOR_1)

• Timer interrupt enable register_1 (TIER_1)

• Timer status register_1 (TSR_1)

• Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1)

• Timer general register A_1 (TGRA_1)

• Timer general register B_1 (TGRB_1)

• Timer control register_2 (TCR_2)

• Timer mode register_2 (TMDR_2)

• Timer I/O control register_2 (TIOR_2)

• Timer interrupt enable register_2 (TIER_2)

• Timer status register_2 (TSR_2)

• Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2)

• Timer general register A_2 (TGRA_2)

• Timer general register B_2 (TGRB_2)

Common Registers

• Timer start register (TSTR)

• Timer synchro register (TSYR)

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 279 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR)

The TCR registers control the TCNT operation for each channel. The TPU has a total of three TCR

registers, one for each channel (channel 0 to 2). TCR register settings should be made only when

TCNT operation is stopped.

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

CCLR2

CCLR1

CCLR0

R/W

Counter Clear 2 to 0

These bits select the TCNTcounter clearing source. See

tables 9.3 and 9.4 for details.

CKEG1

CKEG0

R/W

Clock Edge 1 and 0

These bits select the input clock edge. When the internal

clock is counted using both edges, the input clock

frequency is halved (e.g., φ/4 both edges = φ/2 rising

edge). If phase counting mode is used on channels 1, 2,

4, and 5, this setting is ignored and the phase counting

mode setting has priority. Internal clock edge selection is

valid when the input clock is φ/4 or slower. If φ/1 is

selected as the input clock, this setting is ignored and

count at falling edge of φ is selected.

00: Count at rising edge

01: Count at falling edge

1×: Count at both edges

Legend:

×: Don’t care

TPSC2

TPSC1

TPSC0

R/W

Time Prescaler 2 to 0

These bits select the TCNT counter clock. The clock

source can be selected independently for each channel.

See tables 9.5 to 9.7 for details.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 280 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.3 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (channel 0)

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5

Channel CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 Description

0 0 0 0 TCNT clearing disabled

1 TCNT cleared by TGRA compare

match/input capture

1 0 TCNT cleared by TGRB compare

match/input capture

1 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for

another channel performing synchronous

clearing/synchronous operation*1

1 0 0 TCNT clearing disabled

1 TCNT cleared by TGRC compare

match/input capture*2

1 0 TCNT cleared by TGRD compare

match/input capture*2

1 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for

another channel performing synchronous

clearing/synchronous operation*1

Notes: 1. Synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.

2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register. TCNT is not cleared because the

buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture dose not occur.

Table 9.4 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (channels 1 and 2)

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5

Channel Reserved*2 CCLR1 CCLR0 Description

1, 2 0 0 0 TCNT clearing disabled

1 TCNT cleared by TGRA compare

match/input capture

1 0 TCNT cleared by TGRB compare

match/input capture

1 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for

another channel performing synchronous

clearing/synchronous operation*1

Notes: 1. Synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.

2. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1 and 2. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 281 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.5 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (channel 0)

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Description

0 0 0 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1

1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4

1 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16

1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64

1 0 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input

1 External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input

1 0 External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input

1 External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input

Table 9.6 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (channel 1)

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Description

1 0 0 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1

1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4

1 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16

1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64

1 0 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input

1 External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input

1 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/256

1 Setting prohibited

Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 282 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.7 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (channel 2)

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Description

2 0 0 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1

1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4

1 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16

1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64

1 0 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input

1 External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input

1 0 External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input

1 Internal clock: counts on φ/1024

Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode.

9.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)

The TMDR registers are used to set the operating mode for each channel. The TPU has three

TMDR registers, one for each channel. TMDR register settings should be made only when TCNT

operation is stopped.

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

7, 6 — All 1 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

5 BFB 0 R/W Buffer Operation B

Specifies whether TGRB is to operate in the normal way,

or TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for buffer

operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer register.

TGRD input capture/output compare is not generation. In

channels 1 and 2, which have no TGRD, bit 5 is reserved.

It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

0: TGRB operates normally

1: TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer operation

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 283 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

4 BFA 0 R/W Buffer Operation A

Specifies whether TGRA is to operate in the normal way,

or TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for buffer

operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer register,

TGRC input capture/output compare is not generated. In

channels 1 and 2, which have no TGRC, bit 4 is reserved.

It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

0: TGRA operates normally

1: TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer operation

MD3

MD2

MD1

MD0

R/W

Modes 3 to 0

These bits are used to set the timer operating mode.

MD3 is a reserved bit. In a write, the write value should

always be 0. See table 9.8, for details.

Table 9.8 MD3 to MD0

Bit 3 Bit2 Bit 1 Bit 0

MD3*1 MD2*2 MD1 MD0

Description

0 Normal operation 0

1 Reserved

0 PWM mode 1

1 PWM mode 2

0 Phase counting mode 1 0

1 Phase counting mode 2

0 Phase counting mode 3

1 Phase counting mode 4

1 × × × —

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Notes: 1. MD3 is reserved bit. In a write, it should be written with 0.

2. Phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. In this case, 0 should always

be written to MD2.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 284 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)

The TIOR registers control the TGR registers. The TPU has eight TIOR registers, two each for

channels 0, and one each for channels 1 and 2. Care is required since TIOR is affected by the

TMDR setting. The initial output specified by TIOR is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST

bit in TSTR is cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM mode 2, the output at the point at which the

counter is cleared to 0 is specified. When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this

setting is invalid and the register operates as a buffer register.

• TIORH_0, TIOR_1, TIOR_2

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

IOB3

IOB2

IOB1

IOB0

R/W

I/O Control B3 to B0

Specify the function of TGRB.

IOA3

IOA2

IOA1

IOA0

R/W

I/O Control A3 to A0

Specify the function of TGRA.

• TIORL_0

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

IOD3

IOD2

IOD1

IOD0

R/W

I/O Control D3 to D0

Specify the function of TGRD.

IOC3

IOC2

IOC1

IOC0

R/W

I/O Control C3 to C0

Specify the function of TGRC.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 285 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.9 TIORH_0 (channel 0)

Description

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0

TGRB_0

Function TIOCB0 Pin Function

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 0 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 0 output

1 output at compare match

1 Initial output is 0 output

Toggle output at compare match

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 1 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 1 output

1 output at compare match

Output

compare

Initial output is 1 output

Toggle output at compare match

1 0 Input capture

Capture input source is TIOCB0 pin

Input capture at rising edge

1 Capture input source is TIOCB0 pin

Input capture at falling edge

1 × Capture input source is TIOCB0 pin

Input capture at both edges

1 × × Setting prohibited

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 286 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.10 TIORH_0 (channel 0)

Description

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0

TGRA_0

Function TIOCA0 Pin Function

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 0 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 0 output

1 output at compare match

1 Initial output is 0 output

Toggle output at compare match

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 1 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 1 output

1 output at compare match

Output

compare

Initial output is 1 output

Toggle output at compare match

1 0 Input capture

Capture input source is TIOCA0 pin

Input capture at rising edge

1 Capture input source is TIOCA0 pin

Input capture at falling edge

1 × Capture input source is TIOCA0 pin

Input capture at both edges

1 × × Setting prohibited

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 287 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.11 TIORL_0 (channel 0)

Description

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0

TGRD_0

Function TIOCD0 Pin Function

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 0 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 0 output

1 output at compare match

1 Initial output is 0 output

Toggle output at compare match

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 1 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 1 output

Output

Compare

Initial output is 1 output

Toggle output at compare match

1 0 Input capture

Capture input source is TIOCD0 pin

Input capture at rising edge

1 Capture input source is TIOCD0 pin

Input capture at falling edge

1 × Capture input source is TIOCD0 pin

Input capture at both edges

1 × × Setting prohibited

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Note: * When the BFB bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRD_0 is used as a buffer register, this

setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 288 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.12 TIORL_0 (channel 0)

Description

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 1

IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0

TGRC_0

Function TIOCC0 Pin Function

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 0 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 0 output

1 output at compare match

1 Initial output is 0 output

Toggle output at compare match

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 1 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 1 output

1 output at compare match

Output

compare

Initial output is 1 output

Toggle output at compare match

1 0 Input capture

Capture input source is TIOCC0 pin

Input capture at rising edge

1 Capture input source is TIOCC0 pin

Input capture at falling edge

1 × Capture input source is TIOCC0 pin

Input capture at both edges

1 × × Setting prohibited

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Note: * When the BFA bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1and TGRC_0 is used as a buffer register, this

setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 289 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.13 TIOR_1 (channel 1)

Description

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0

TGRB_1

Function TIOCB1 Pin Function

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 0 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 0 output

1 output at compare match

1 Initial output is 0 output

Toggle output at compare match

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 1 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 1 output

1 output at compare match

Output

compare

Initial output is 1 output

Toggle output at compare match

1 0 Input capture

Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin

Input capture at rising edge

1 Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin

Input capture at falling edge

1 × Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin

Input capture at both edges

1 × × Setting prohibited

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 290 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.14 TIOR_1 (channel 1)

Description

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0

TGRA_1

Function TIOCA1 Pin Function

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 0 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 0 output

1 output at compare match

1 Initial output is 0 output

Toggle output at compare match

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 1 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 1 output

1 output at compare match

Output

compare

Initial output is 1 output

Toggle output at compare match

1 0 Input capture

Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin

Input capture at rising edge

1 Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin

Input capture at falling edge

1 × Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin

Input capture at both edges

1 × × Setting prohibited

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 291 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.15 TIOR_2 (channel 2)

Description

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0

TGRB_2

Function TIOCB2 Pin Function

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 0 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 0 output

1 output at compare match

1 Initial output is 0 output

Toggle output at compare match

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 1 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 1 output

1 output at compare match

Output

compare

Initial output is 1 output

Toggle output at compare match

1 × 0 Input capture

Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin

Input capture at rising edge

1 Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin

Input capture at falling edge

1 × Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin

Input capture at both edges

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 292 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.16 TIOR_2 (channel 2)

Description

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0

TGRA_2

Function TIOCA2 Pin Function

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 0 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 0 output

1 output at compare match

1 Initial output is 0 output

Toggle output at compare match

0 Output disabled 0

1 Initial output is 1 output

0 output at compare match

0 Initial output is 1 output

1 output at compare match

Output

compare

Initial output is 1 output

Toggle output at compare match

1 × 0 Input capture

Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin

Input capture at rising edge

1 Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin

Input capture at falling edge

1 × Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin

Input capture at both edges

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 293 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)

The TIER registers control enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for each channel. The TPU

has three TIER registers, one for each channel.

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

7 TTGE 0 R/W A/D Conversion Start Request Enable

Enables or disables generation of A/D conversion start

requests by TGRA input capture/compare match.

0: A/D conversion start request generation disabled

1: A/D conversion start request generation enabled

6 – 1 – Reserved

This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

5 TCIEU 0 R/W Underflow Interrupt Enable

Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCU) by the TCFU

flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in channels 1

and 2. In channel 0, bit 5 is reserved.

0: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled

1: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled

4 TCIEV 0 R/W Overflow Interrupt Enable

Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by the

TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1.

0: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled

1: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled

3 TGIED 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable D

Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the

TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in channel

0. In channels 1 and 2, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read

as 0 and cannot be modified.

0: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD disabled

1: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD enabled.

2 TGIEC 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable C

Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the

TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in channel

0. In channels 1 and 2, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read

as 0 and cannot be modified.

0: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC disabled

1: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC enabled

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 294 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

1 TGIEB 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable B

Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the

TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1.

0: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB disabled

1: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB enabled

0 TGIEA 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable A

Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the

TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1.

0: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA disabled

1: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA enabled

9.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)

The TSR registers indicate the status of each channel. The TPU has three TSR registers, one for

each channel.

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

7 TCFD 1 R Count Direction Flag

Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT counts

in channel 1 and 2. In channel 0, bit 7 is reserved. It is

always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

0: TCNT counts down

1: TCNT counts up

6 – 1 – Reserved

This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

5 TCFU 0 R/(W)* Underflow Flag

Status flag that indicates that TCNT underflow has

occurred when channels 1 and 2 are set to phase

counting mode. The write value should always be 0 to

clear this flag. In channel 0, bit 5 is reserved.

[Setting condition]

When the TCNT value underflows (change from H'0000

to H'FFFF)

[Clearing condition]

When 0 is written to TCFU after reading TCFU = 1

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 295 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

4 TCFV 0 R/(W)* Overflow Flag

Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has

occurred. The write value should always be 0 to clear this

flag.

[Setting condition]

When the TCNT value overflows (change from H'FFFF

to H'0000)

[Clearing condition]

When 0 is written to TCFV after reading TCFV = 1

3 TGFD 0 R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D

Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRD input

capture or compare match in channel 0. The write value

should always be 0 to clear this flag. In channels 1 and 2,

bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

[Setting conditions]

• When TCNT = TGRD while TGRD is functioning as

output compare register

• When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by input

capture signal while TGRD is functioning as input

capture register

[Clearing condition]

When 0 is written to TGFD after reading TGFD = 1

2 TGFC 0 R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C

Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRC input

capture or compare match in channel 0. The write value

should always be 0 to clear this flag. In channels 1 and 2,

bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

[Setting conditions]

• When TCNT = TGRC while TGRC is functioning as

output compare register

• When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by input

capture signal while TGRC is functioning as input

capture register

[Clearing condition]

When 0 is written to TGFC after reading TGFC = 1

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 296 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description

1 TGFB 0 R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B

Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRB input

capture or compare match. The write value should always

be 0 to clear this flag.

[Setting conditions]

• When TCNT = TGRB while TGRB is functioning as

output compare register

• When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input

capture signal while TGRB is functioning as input

capture register

[Clearing condition]

When 0 is written to TGFB after reading TGFB = 1

0 TGFA 0 R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A

Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRA input

capture or compare match. The write value should always

be 0 to clear this flag.

[Setting conditions]

• When TCNT = TGRA while TGRA is functioning as

output compare register

• When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input

capture signal while TGRA is functioning as input

capture register

[Clearing conditions]

• When DMAC is activated by TGIA interrupt while DTA

bit of DMABCR in DMAC is 1

• When 0 is written to TGFA after reading TGFA = 1

Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flags.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 297 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)

The TCNT registers are 16-bit counters. The TPU has three TCNT counters, one for each channel.

The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. The

TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit.

9.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR)

The TGR registers are 16-bit registers with a dual function as output compare and input capture

registers. The TPU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channel 0 and two each for channels 1 and

2. TGRC and TGRD for channel 0 can also be designated for operation as buffer registers. The

TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit.

TGR buffer register combinations are TGRA—TGRC and TGRB—TGRD.

9.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR)

TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 2.

When setting the operating mode in TMDR or setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT

counter.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

– All 0 – Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

CST2

CST1

CST0

R/W

Counter Start 2 to 0 (CST2 to CST0)

These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT.

If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the

TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but the

TIOC pin output compare output level is retained.

If TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the

pin output level will be changed to the set initial output

value.

0: TCNT_2 to TCNT_0 count operation is stopped

1: TCNT_2 to TCNT_0 performs count operation

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 298 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.3.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR)

TSYR selects independent operation or synchronous operation for the channel 0 to 2 TCNT

counters. A channel performs synchronous operation when the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to

– All 0 – Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

SYNC2

SYNC1

SYNC0

R/W

Timer Synchro 2 to 0

These bits select whether operation is independent of or

synchronized with other channels.

When synchronous operation is selected, synchronous

presetting of multiple channels, and synchronous clearing

through counter clearing on another channel are possible.

To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at least

two channels must be set to 1. To set synchronous

clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit, the TCNT clearing

source must also be set by means of bits CCLR2 to

CCLR0 in TCR.

0: TCNT_2 to TCNT_0 operates independently

(TCNT presetting /clearing is unrelated to other

channels)

1: TCNT_2 to TCNT_0 performs synchronous operation

TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is

possible

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 299 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.4 Interface to Bus Master

9.4.1 16-Bit Registers

TCNT and TGR are 16-bit registers. As the data bus to the bus master is 16 bits wide, these

registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units.

These registers cannot be read from or written to in 8-bit units; 16-bit access must always be used.

An example of 16-bit register access operation is shown in figure 9.2.

TCNTH TCNTL

Internal data bus

Bus interface Module

data bus

Bus

master

Figure 9.2 16-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCNT (16 Bits)]

9.4.2 8-Bit Registers

Registers other than TCNT and TGR are 8-bit. As the data bus to the CPU is 16 bits wide, these

registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units. They can also be read and written to in 8-bit

units.

Examples of 8-bit register access operation are shown in figures 9.3 to 9.5.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 300 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TCR

Internal data bus

Bus interface Module

data bus

Bus

master

Figure 9.3 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR (Upper 8 Bits)]

TMDR

Internal data bus

Bus interface Module

data bus

Bus

master

Figure 9.4 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TMDR (Lower 8 Bits)]

TCR TMDR

Internal data bus

Bus interface Module

data bus

Bus

master

Figure 9.5 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR and TMDR (16 Bits)]

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 301 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.5 Operation

9.5.1 Basic Functions

Each channel has a TCNT and TGR. TCNT performs up-counting, and is also capable of free-

running operation, synchronous counting, and external event counting. Each TGR can be used as

an input capture register or output compare register.

Counter Operation: When one of bits CST0 to CST2 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for

the corresponding channel starts counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic

counter, and so on.

1. Example of count operation setting procedure

Figure 9.6 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure.

Operation selection

Select counter clock

Periodic counter

Select counter clearing source

Select output compare register

Set period

Free-running counter

Start count operation

<Free-running counter><Periodic counter>

Start count operation

Select the counter

clock with bits

TPSC2 to TPSC0 in

TCR. At the same

time, select the

input clock edge

with bits CKEG1

and CKEG0 in TCR.

For periodic counter

operation, select the

TGR to be used as

the TCNT clearing

source with bits

CCLR2 to CCLR0 in

TCR.

Designate the TGR

selected in [2] as an

output compare

TIOR.

Set the periodic

counter cycle in the

TGR selected in [2].

Set the CST bit in

TSTR to 1 to start

the counter

operation.

[1]

[2]

[3][3]

[4]

[5]

Figure 9.6 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 302 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2. Free-running count operation and periodic count operation

Immediately after a reset, the TPU's TCNT counters are all designated as free-running

counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts up-

count operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000),

the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at

this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from

H'0000. Figure 9.7 illustrates free-running counter operation.

TCNT value

H'FFFF

H'0000

CST bit

TCFV

Time

Figure 9.7 Free-Running Counter Operation

When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the

relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is

designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by

means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts up-

count operation as periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the

count value matches the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared to

H'0000. If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests

an interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Figure 9.8

illustrates periodic counter operation.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 303 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TCNT value

TGR

H'0000

CST bit

TGF

Time

Counter cleared by TGR

compare match

Flag cleared by software or

DMAC activation

Figure 9.8 Periodic Counter Operation

Waveform Output by Compare Match: The TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the

corresponding output pin using compare match.

1. Example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match

Figure 9.9 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match.

Output selection

Select waveform output mode

Set output timing

Start count operation

Select initial value 0 output or 1 output, and

compare match output value 0 output, 1 output,

or toggle output, by means of TIOR. The set

initial value is output at the TIOC pin unit the

first compare match occurs.

Set the timing for compare match generation in

TGR.

Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count

operation.

[1]

[1] [2]

[2]

[3]

Figure 9.9 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 304 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2. Examples of waveform output operation

Figure 9.10 shows an example of 0 output/1 output. In this example TCNT has been designated

as a free-running counter, and settings have been made so that 1 is output by compare match A,

and 0 is output by compare match B. When the set level and the pin level coincide, the pin

level does not change.

TCNT value

H'FFFF

H'0000

TIOCA

TIOCB

Tim

TGRA

TGRB

No change No change

1 output

0 output

Figure 9.10 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation

Figure 9.11 shows an example of toggle output.

In this example TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing

performed by compare match B), and settings have been made so that output is toggled by both

compare match A and compare match B.

TCNT value

H'FFFF

H'0000

TIOCB

TIOCA

Time

TGRB

TGRA

Toggle output

Counter cleared by TGRB compare match

Figure 9.11 Example of Toggle Output Operation

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 305 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC

pin input edge. Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge.

1. Example of input capture operation setting procedure

Figure 9.12 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure.

Input selection

Select input capture input

Start count

Designate TGR as an input capture register by

means of TIOR, and select rising edge, falling

edge, or both edges as the input capture source

and input signal edge.

Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count

operation.

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

Figure 9.12 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 306 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2. Example of input capture operation

Figure 9.13 shows an example of input capture operation. In this example both rising and

falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge, falling edge has

been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input edge, and counter clearing by TGRB input

capture has been designated for TCNT.

TCNT value

H'0180

H'0000

TIOCA

TGRA

H'0010

H'0005

Counter cleared by TIOCB

input (falling edge)

H'0160

H'0005 H'0160 H'0010

TGRB H'0180

TIOCB

Time

Figure 9.13 Example of Input Capture Operation

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 307 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.5.2 Synchronous Operation

In synchronous operation, the values in a number of TCNT counters can be rewritten

simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, a number of TCNT counters can be cleared

simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing). Synchronous

operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base. Channels 0 to 2 can

all be designated for synchronous operation.

Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 9.14 shows an example of the

synchronous operation setting procedure.

Yes

Synchronous operation

selection

Set synchronous

operation

Synchronous presetting

Set TCNT

Synchronous clearing

Clearing

source generation

channel?

Select counter

clearing source

Start count

Set synchronous

counter clearing

Start count

Set to 1 the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous

operation.

When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is

written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters.

Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare,

etc.

Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing

source.

Set to 1 the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[3]

[5]

[4]

[5]

[2]

Figure 9.14 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 308 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Example of Synchronous Operation: Figure 9.15 shows an example of synchronous operation.

In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to

2, TGRB_0 compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous

clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing source. Three-phase PWM

waveforms are output from pins TIOC0A, TIOC1A, and TIOC2A. At this time, synchronous

presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match, is performed for channel 0 to 2

TCNT counters, and the data set in TGRB_0 is used as the PWM cycle. For details of PWM

modes, see section 9.5.4, PWM Modes.

TCNT0 to TCNT2 values

H'0000

TIOCA_0

TIOCA_1

TGRB_0

Synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match

TGRA_2

TGRA_1

TGRB_2

TGRA_0

TGRB_1

TIOCA_2

Time

Figure 9.15 Example of Synchronous Operation

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 309 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.5.3 Buffer Operation

Buffer operation, provided for channel 0, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer registers.

Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture

operation.

Table 9.17 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation

Channel Timer General Register Buffer Register

0 TGRA_0 TGRC_0

TGRB_0 TGRD_0

• When TGR is an output compare register

When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is

transferred to the timer general register. This operation is illustrated in figure 9.16.

Buffer register Timer general

Compare match signal

Figure 9.16 Compare Match Buffer Operation

• When TGR is an input capture register

When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously

held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register. This operation is

illustrated in figure 9.17.

Buffer register Timer general

Input capture

signal

Figure 9.17 Input Capture Buffer Operation

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 310 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 9.18 shows an example of the buffer

operation setting procedure.

Buffer operation

Select TGR function

Set buffer operation

Start count

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[3]

Designate TGR as an input capture register or

output compare register by means of TIOR.

Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits

BFA and BFB in TMDR.

Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 start the count

operation.

Figure 9.18 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 311 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Examples of Buffer Operation

1. When TGR is an output compare register

Figure 9.19 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for

channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used in

this example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0

output at compare match B. As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs

the output changes and the value in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer

general register TGRA. This operation is repeated each time compare match A occurs. For

details of PWM modes, see section 9.5.4, PWM Modes.

TCNT value

TGRB_0

H'0000

TGRC_0

TGRA_0

H'0200 H'0520

TIOCA

H'0200

H'0450 H'0520

H'0450

TGRA_0 H'0450H'0200

Transfer

Time

Figure 9.19 Example of Buffer Operation (1)

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 312 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2. When TGR is an input capture register

Figure 9.20 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input

capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. Counter

clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling edges have

been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge. As buffer operation has been set,

when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon occurrence of input capture A, the value

previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously transferred to TGRC.

TCNT value

H'09FB

H'0000

TGRC

Tim

H'0532

TIOCA

TGRA H'0F07H'0532

H'0F07

H'0532

H'0F07

H'09FB

Figure 9.20 Example of Buffer Operation (2)

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 313 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.5.4 PWM Modes

In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. 0, 1, or toggle output can be

selected as the output level in response to compare match of each TGR. Settings of TGR registers

can output a PWM waveform in the range of 0 % to 100 % duty. Designating TGR compare match

as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that register. All channels can be

designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is also possible. There are two

PWM modes, as described below.

• PWM mode 1

PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and

TGRC with TGRD. The output specified by bits IOA3 to IOA0 and IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR is

output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, and the output specified

by bits IOB3 to IOB0 and IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR is output at compare matches B and D. The

initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If the set values of paired TGRs are

identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 1, a

maximum 4-phase PWM output is possible.

• PWM mode 2

PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty registers.

The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon counter

clearing by a synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial

value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output

value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 2, a maximum 7-phase

PWM output is possible by combined use with synchronous operation. The correspondence

between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 9.18.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 314 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 9.18 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins

Output Pins

Channel Registers PWM Mode 1 PWM Mode 2

TGRA_0 TIOCA0

TGRB_0

TIOCA0

TIOCB0

TGRC_0 TIOCC0

TGRD_0

TIOCC0

TIOCD0

TGRA_1 TIOCA1 1

TGRB_1

TIOCA1

TIOCB1

2 TGRA_2 TIOCA2 TIOCA2

TGRB_2 TIOCB2

Note: In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the period is set.

Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 9.21 shows an example of the PWM mode

setting procedure.

PWM mode

Select counter clock

Select counter clearing source

Select waveform output level

Set TGR

Set PWM mode

Start count

Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to

TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the

input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0

in TCR.

Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the

TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source.

Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output

compare register, and select the initial value and

output value.

Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set

the duty in the other the TGR.

Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in

TMDR.

Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 start the count

operation.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

Figure 9.21 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 315 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Examples of PWM Mode Operation: Figure 9.22 shows an example of PWM mode 1 operation.

In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA

initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value. In this case, the value

set in TGRA is used as the period, and the values set in TGRB registers as the duty.

TCNT value

TGRA

H'0000

TIOCA

Time

TGRB

Counter cleared by

TGRA compare match

Figure 9.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1)

Figure 9.23 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation. In this example, synchronous operation

is designated for channels 0 and 1, TGRB_1 compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source,

and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output value of the other TGR registers

(TGRA_0 to TGRD_0, TGRA_1), to output a 5-phase PWM waveform. In this case, the value set

in TGRB_1 is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs as the duty.

TCNT value

TGRB_1

H'0000

TIOCA0

Counter cleared by

TGRB_1 compare match

Time

TGRA_1

TGRD_0

TGRC_0

TGRB_0

TGRA_0

TIOCB0

TIOCC0

TIOCD0

TIOCA1

Figure 9.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2)

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 316 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 9.24 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in PWM

mode.

TCNT value

TGRA

H'0000

TIOCA

Time

TGRB

0% duty

TGRB rewritten

TGRB

rewritten

TGRB rewritten

TCNT value

TGRA

H'0000

TIOCA

Time

TGRB

100% duty

TGRB rewritten

Output does not change when cycle register and duty register

compare matches occur simultaneously

TCNT value

TGRA

H'0000

TIOCA

Time

TGRB

100% duty

TGRB rewritten

Output does not change when cycle register and duty

0% duty

Figure 9.24 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3)

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 317 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.5.5 Phase Counting Mode

In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and

TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1 and 2. When

phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and TCNT

operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 and bits CKEG1

and CKEG0 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR, and of TIOR,

TIER, and TGR are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be used.

This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input. When overflow occurs while TCNT is

counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; when underflow occurs while TCNT is counting down,

the TCFU flag is set. The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag

provides an indication of whether TCNT is counting up or down. Table 9.19 shows the

correspondence between external clock pins and channels.

Table 9.19 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins

External Clock Pins

Channels A-Phase B-Phase

When channel 1 is set to phase counting mode TCLKA TCLKB

When channel 2 is set to phase counting mode TCLKC TCLKD

Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 9.25 shows an example of the

phase counting mode setting procedure.

Phase counting mode

Select phase counting mode

Start count

Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to

MD0 in TMDR.

Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the coun

operation.

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

Figure 9.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 318 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation: In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or

down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. There are four modes,

according to the count conditions.

1. Phase counting mode 1

Figure 9.26 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 9.20 summarizes

the TCNT up/down-count conditions.

TCNT value

Time

Down-count

Up-count

TCLKA (channel 1)

TCLKC (channel 2)

TCLKB (channel 1)

TCLKD (channel 2)

Figure 9.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation

Table 9.20 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1

TCLKA (Channel 1)

TCLKC (Channel 2)

TCLKB (Channel 1)

TCLKD (Channel 2) Operation

High level

Low level

High level

Up-count

High level

Low level

High level

Down-count

Low level

Legend:

: Rising edge

: Falling edge

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 319 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

2. Phase counting mode 2

Figure 9.27 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 9.21 summarizes

the TCNT up/down-count conditions.

Time

Down-countUp-count

TCNT value

TCLKA (channel 1)

TCLKC (channel 2)

TCLKB (channel 1)

TCLKD (channel 2)

Figure 9.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation

Table 9.21 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2

TCLKA (Channel 1)

TCLKC (Channel 2)

TCLKB (Channel 1)

TCLKD (Channel 2) Operation

High level Don't care

Low level Don't care

High level Up-count

High level Don't care

Low level Don't care

High level Don't care

Low level Down-count

Legend:

: Rising edge

: Falling edge

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 320 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

3. Phase counting mode 3

Figure 9.28 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 9.22 summarizes

the TCNT up/down-count conditions.

Time

Up-count Down-count

TCNT value

TCLKA (channel 1)

TCLKC (channel 2)

TCLKB (channel 1)

TCLKD (channel 2)

Figure 9.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation

Table 9.22 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3

TCLKA (Channel 1)

TCLKC (Channel 2)

TCLKB (Channel 1)

TCLKD (Channel 2) Operation

High level Don't care

Low level Don't care

High level Up-count

High level Down-count

Low level Don't care

High level Don't care

Low level Don't care

Legend:

: Rising edge

: Falling edge

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 321 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

4. Phase counting mode 4

Figure 9.29 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 9.23 summarizes

the TCNT up/down-count conditions.

Tim

Up-count Down-count

TCNT value

TCLKA (channel 1)

TCLKC (channel 2)

TCLKB (channel 1)

TCLKD (channel 2)

Figure 9.29 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation

Table 9.23 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4

TCLKA (Channel 1)

TCLKC (Channel 2)

TCLKB (Channel 1)

TCLKD (Channel 2) Operation

High level

Low level

Up-count

Low level

High level

Don't care

High level

Low level

Down-count

High level Don't care

Low level

Legend:

: Rising edge

: Falling edge

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 322 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.6 Interrupts

9.6.1 Interrupt Source and Priority

There are three kinds of TPU interrupt source: TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT

overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disabled

bit, allowing generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually. When

an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the

corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The

interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0. Relative channel priorities can be

changed by the interrupt controller, but the priority order within a channel is fixed. For details, see

section 5, Interrupt Controller. Table 9.24 lists the TPU interrupt sources.

Table 9.24 TPU Interrupts

Channel Name Interrupt Source Interrupt Flag DMAC Activation Priority*

TGI0A TGRA_0 input

capture/compare match

TGFA Possible High

TGI0B TGRB_0 input

capture/compare match

TGFB Not possible

TGI0C TGRC_0 input

capture/compare match

TGFC Not possible

TGI0D TGRD_0 input

capture/compare match

TGFD Not possible

TCI0V TCNT_0 overflow TCFV Not possible

TGI1A TGRA_1 input

capture/compare match

TGFA Possible

TGI1B TGRB_1 input

capture/compare match

TGFB Not possible

TCI1V TCNT_1 overflow TCFV Not possible

TCI1U TCNT_1 underflow TCFU Not possible

2 TGI2A TGRA_2 input

capture/compare match

TGFA Possible

TGI2B TGRB_2 input

capture/compare match

TGFB Not possible

TCI2V TCNT_2 overflow TCFV Not possible

TCI2U TCNT_2 underflow TCFU Not possible Low

Note: * This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priorities

can be changed by the interrupt controller.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 323 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is

set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare

match on a particular channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The

TPU has 8 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channel 0, and two each for

channels 1 and 2.

Overflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the

TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt

request is cleared by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has three overflow interrupts, one for

each channel.

Underflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the

TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt

request is cleared by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The TPU has two underflow interrupts, one each

for channels 1 and 2.

9.6.2 DMAC Activation

The DMAC can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel.

For details, see section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC). With the TPU, a total of three TGRA input

capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DMAC activation sources, one for each channel.

9.6.3 A/D Converter Activation

The A/D converter can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match for a channel. If

the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a

TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to start A/D conversion is

sent to the A/D converter. If the TPU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D

converter side at this time, A/D conversion is started. In the TPU, a total of three TGRA input

capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D converter conversion start sources, one for

each channel.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 324 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.7 Operation Timing

9.7.1 Input/Output Timing

TCNT Count Timing: Figure 9.30 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and

figure 9.31 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation.

TCNT

input clock

Internal clock

N - 1 N N + 1 N + 2

Falling edge Rising edge

Figure 9.30 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation

TCNT

input clock

External clock

N - 1 N N + 1 N + 2

Falling edge Rising edge Falling edge

Figure 9.31 Count Timing in External Clock Operation

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 325 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Output Compare Output Timing: A compare match signal is generated in the final state in

which TCNT and TGR match (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated).

When a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output

compare output pin. After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not

generated until the TCNT input clock is generated. Figure 9.32 shows output compare output

timing.

TGR

TCNT

input clock

N N + 1

Compare

match signal

TIOC pin

Figure 9.32 Output Compare Output Timing

Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 9.33 shows input capture signal timing.

TCNT

Input capture

input

N N + 1 N + 2

NN + 2

TGR

Input capture

signal

Figure 9.33 Input Capture Input Signal Timing

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 326 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture: Figure 9.34 shows the

timing when counter clearing by compare match occurrence is specified, and figure 9.35 shows the

timing when counter clearing by input capture occurrence is specified.

TCNT

Counter

clear signal

Compare

match signal

TGR N

N H'0000

Figure 9.34 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)

TCNT

Counter clear

signal

Input capture

signal

TGR

N H'0000

Figure 9.35 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture)

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 327 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Buffer Operation Timing: Figures 9.36 and 9.37 show the timing in buffer operation.

TGRA,

TGRB

Compare

match signal

TCNT

TGRC,

TGRD

n n + 1

Figure 9.36 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)

TGRA,

TGRB

TCNT

Input capture

signal

TGRC,

TGRD

n N + 1

N N + 1

Figure 9.37 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)

9.7.2 Interrupt Signal Timing

TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match: Figure 9.38 shows the timing for setting

of the TGF flag in TSR by compare match occurrence, and TGI interrupt request signal timing.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 328 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TGR

TCNT

TCNT input

clock

N N + 1

Compare

match signal

TGF flag

TGI interrupt

Figure 9.38 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)

TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture: Figure 9.39 shows the timing for setting of

the TGF flag in TSR by input capture occurrence, and TGI interrupt request signal timing.

TGR

TCNT

Input capture

signal

TGF flag

TGI interrupt

Figure 9.39 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture)

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 329 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing: Figure 9.40 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV

flag in TSR by overflow occurrence, and TCIV interrupt request signal timing. Figure 9.41 shows

the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR by underflow occurrence, and TCIU interrupt

request signal timing.

Overflow

signal

TCNT

(overflow)

TCNT input

clock

H'FFFF H'0000

TCFV flag

TCIV interrupt

Figure 9.40 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing

Underflow

signal

TCNT

(underflow)

TCNT

input clock

H'0000 H'FFFF

TCFU flag

TCIU interrupt

Figure 9.41 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 330 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Status Flag Clearing Timing: After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing

0 to it. When the DMAC is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 9.42 shows the

timing for status flag clearing by the CPU, and figure 9.43 shows the timing for status flag clearing

by the DMAC.

T1T2

TSR write cycle

TSR address

ddress

Write signal

Status flag

Interrupt

request

signal

Figure 9.42 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU

Interrupt

request

signal

Status flag

ddress Source address

DMAC

read cycle

Destination

address

DMAC

write cycle

Figure 9.43 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DMAC Activation

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 331 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.8 Usage Notes

Input Clock Restrictions: The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of

single-edge detection, and at least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not

operate properly with a narrower pulse width. In phase counting mode, the phase difference and

overlap between the two input clocks must be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at

least 2.5 states. Figure 9.44 shows the input clock conditions in phase counting mode.

Overlap

Phase

differ-

ence

Phase

differ-

ence

Overlap

TCLKA

(TCLKC)

TCLKB

(TCLKD)

Pulse width Pulse width

Notes: Phase difference and overlap

Pulse width : 1.5 states or more

: 2.5 states or more

Figure 9.44 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode

Caution on Period Setting: When counter clearing by compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in

the final state in which it matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by

TCNT is updated). Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula:

f = ————

(N + 1)

Where f : Counter frequency

φ : Operating frequency

N : TGR set value

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 332 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations: If the counter clear signal is generated

in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes precedence and the TCNT write is not

performed. Figure 9.45 shows the timing in this case.

Counter clear

signal

Write signal

ddress

TCNT address

TCNT

TCNT write cycle

N H'0000

Figure 9.45 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations

Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations: If incrementing occurs in the T2

state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence and TCNT is not incremented.

Figure 9.46 shows the timing in this case.

TCNT input

clock

Write signal

ddress

TCNT address

TCNT

TCNT write cycle

N M

TCNT write data

Figure 9.46 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 333 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T2

state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes precedence and the compare match signal is

inhibited. A compare match does not occur even if the same value as before is written. Figure 9.47

shows the timing in this case.

Compare

match signal

Write signal

ddress

TGR address

TCNT

TGR write cycle

T1T2

N M

TGR write data

TGR

N N+1

Prohibited

Figure 9.47 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 334 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in

the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data transferred to TGR by the buffer operation will be the

data prior to the write. Figure 9.48 shows the timing in this case.

Compare

match signal

Write signal

ddress

Buffer register

address

Buffer

TGR write cycle

TGR

N M

Buffer register write data

Figure 9.48 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match

Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in

the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read will be the data after input capture transfer.

Figure 9.49 shows the timing in this case.

Input capture

signal

Read signal

ddress

TGR address

TGR

TGR read cycle

Internal

data bus

X M

Figure 9.49 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 335 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in

the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture operation takes precedence and the write to

TGR is not performed. Figure 9.50 shows the timing in this case.

Input capture

signal

Write signal

ddress

TCNT

TGR write cycle

TGR

TGR address

Figure 9.50 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 336 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is

generated in the T2 state of a buffer register write cycle, the buffer operation takes precedence and

the write to the buffer register is not performed. Figure 9.51 shows the timing in this case.

Input capture

signal

Write signal

ddress

TCNT

Buffer register write cycle

T1T2

TGR

Buffer

Buffer register

address

Figure 9.51 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture

Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing: If overflow/underflow and

counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set and TCNT clearing

takes precedence. Figure 9.52 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified

as the clearing source, and H'FFFF is set in TGR.

Counter

clearing signal

TCNT input

clock

TCNT

TGF flag

Prohibited

TCFV flag

H'FFFF H'0000

Figure 9.52 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 337 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow: If there is an up-count or down-

count in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, and overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write takes

precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set. Figure 9.53 shows the operation timing

when there is contention between TCNT write and overflow.

Write signal

ddress

TCNT address

TCNT

TCNT write cycle

T1T2

H'FFFF M

TCNT write data

TCFV flag Prohibited

Figure 9.53 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow

Multiplexing of I/O Pins: In this LSI, the TCLKA input pin is multiplexed with the TIOCC0 I/O

pin, the TCLKB input pin with the TIOCD0 I/O pin, the TCLKC input pin with the TIOCB1 I/O

pin, and the TCLKD input pin with the TIOCB2 I/O pin. When an external clock is input, compare

match output should not be performed from a multiplexed pin.

Interrupts in Module Stop Mode: If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been

requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DMAC activation source.

Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode.

Module Stop Mode Setting: TPU operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop

control register. The initial setting is for TPU operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by

clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.

Section 9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 338 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 339 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

The watchdog timer (WDT) is an 8-bit timer that can generate an internal reset signal for this LSI

if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow.

When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval

timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows.

The block diagram of the WDT is shown in figure 10.1.

10.1 Features

• Selectable from eight counter input clocks

• Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode

In watchdog timer mode:

• If the counter overflows, it is possible to select whether this LSI is internally reset or not.

In interval timer mode:

• If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).

WDT0104A_000020011200

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 340 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Overflow

Interrupt

control

WOVI

(interrupt request

signal)

Internal reset signal*Reset

control

RSTCSR TCNT TSCR

φ/2

φ/64

φ/128

φ/512

φ/2048

φ/8192

φ/32768

φ/131072

Clock Clock

select

Internal clock

sources

Bus

interface

Module bus

TCSR:

TCNT:

RSTCSR:

Notes: When a sub-block is operating, φ will be φSUB.

* The type of internal reset signal depends on a register setting.

Timer control/status register

Timer counter

Reset control/status register

WDT

Legend:

Internal bus

Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of WDT

10.2 Register Descriptions

The WDT has the following three registers. For details, refer to section 21, List of Registers. To

prevent accidental overwriting, TCSR, TCNT, and RSTCSR have to be written to by a different

method to normal registers. For details, refer to section 10.5.1, Notes on Register Access.

• Timer counter (TCNT)

• Timer control/status register (TCSR)

• Reset control/status register (RSTCSR)

10.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)

TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, when the

TME bit in TCSR is cleared to 0.

10.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)

TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be

input to TCNT, and selecting the timer mode.

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 341 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 OVF 0 R/(W)* Overflow Flag

Indicates that TCNT has overflowed. Only a write of

0 is permitted, to clear the flag.

[Setting condition]

When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)

When internal reset request generation is selected

in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared

automatically by the internal reset.

[Clearing condition]

Cleared by reading TCSR when OVF = 1, then

writing 0 to OVF

When polling CVF when the interval timer interrupt

has been prohibited, OVF = 1 status should be read

two or more times.

6 WT/IT 0 R/W Timer Mode Select

Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog

timer or interval timer.

0: Interval timer mode

1: Watchdog timer mode

5 TME 0 R/W Timer Enable

When this bit is set to 1, TCNT starts counting.

When this bit is cleared, TCNT stops counting and

is initialized to H'00.

4, 3 — All 1 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be

modified.

CKS2

CKS1

CKS0

R/W

Clock Select 0 to 2

Selects the clock source to be input to TCNT. The

overflow frequency for φ = 16 MHz is enclosed in

parentheses. The overflow period is the time from

when TCNT starts counting up from H'00 until

overflow occurs.

000: Clock φ/2 (frequency: 32.0 μs)

001: Clock φ/64 (frequency: 1.0 ms)

010: Clock φ/128 (frequency: 2.0 ms)

011: Clock φ/512 (frequency: 8.2 ms)

100: Clock φ/2048 (frequency: 32.8 ms)

101: Clock φ/8192 (frequency: 131.1 ms)

110: Clock φ/32768 (frequency: 524.3 ms)

111: Clock φ/131072 (frequency: 2.1 s)

Note: * The write value should always be 0 to clear this flag.

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 342 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

10.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)

RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the generation of the internal reset

signal when TCNT overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal. RSTCSR is initialized

to H'1F by a reset signal from the RES pin, and not by the WDT internal reset signal caused by

overflows.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 WOVF 0 R/(W)*1 Watchdog Overflow Flag

This bit is set when TCNT overflows in watchdog

timer mode. This bit cannot be set in interval timer

mode, and the write value should always be 0.

[Setting condition]

Set when TCNT overflows (changed from H'FF to

H'00) in watchdog timer mode

[Clearing condition]

Cleared by reading RSTCSR when WOVF = 1, and

then writing 0 to WOVF

6 RSTE 0 R/W Reset Enable

Specifies whether or not a reset signal is generated

in the chip if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer

operation.

0: Reset signal is not generated even if TCNT

overflows

(Though this LSI is not reset, TCNT and TCSR in

WDT are reset)

1: Reset signal is generated if TCNT overflows

5 RSTS 0 R/W Reset Select

Selects the type of internal reset generated if TCNT

overflows during watchdog timer operation.

0: Power-on reset*2

1: Manual reset*3

4 to 0

—

All 1

—

Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be

modified.

Notes: 1. The write value should always be 0 to clear this flag.

2. Bear in mind that the USB register is not initialized by a power-on reset trigged by the

WDT. For details, see section 14.8.8, Reset.

3. Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 343 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

10.3 Operation

10.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode

To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT bit in TCSR and the TME bit to 1.

TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating normally. Software must prevent TCNT

overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally be writing H'00) before overflows occurs.

When the RSTE bit of the RSTCSR is set to 1, and if the TCNT overflows, an internal reset signal

for this LSI is issued. In this case, select power-on reset or manual reset* by setting the RSTS bit

of the RSTCSR to 0.

If a reset caused by a signal input to the RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a

WDT overflow, the RES pin reset has priority and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0. The

internal reset signal is output for 518 states.

When the TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode, the WOVF bit of the RSTCSR is set to 1. If

the RSTE bit of the RSTCSR has been set to 1, an internal reset signal for the entire LSI is

generated at TCNT overflow.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

TCNT value

H'00 Time

H'FF

WT/IT = 1

TME = 1 H'00 written

to TCNT WT/IT = 1

TME = 1 H'00 written

to TCNT

518 states (WDT0)

Internal reset signal*

WT/IT:

TME:

Legend:

Overflow

WOVF = 1

Timer mode select bit

Timer enabl bit

Note: * With WDT0, the internal reset signal is generated only when the RSTE bit is set to 1.

Internal reset

generated

Figure 10.2 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 344 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

10.3.2 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF)

With WDT, the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is set to 1 if TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode. If

TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit in RSTCSR is set to 1, an internal reset signal is generated

for the entire chip. This timing is illustrated in figure 10.3.

TCNT H'FF H'00

Overflow signal

(internal signal)

Internal reset

signal

WOVF

518 states (WDT0)

Figure 10.3 Timing of WOVF Setting

10.3.3 Interval Timer Mode

To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear bit WT/IT in TCSR to 0 and set bit TME to 1. When

the interval timer is operating, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time the

TCNT overflows. Therefore, an interrupt can be generated at intervals.

TCNT count

H'00 Tim

H'FF

WT/IT = 0

TME = 1 WOVI

Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow

WOVI: Interval interrupt request generation

Legend:

WOVI WOVI WOVI

Figure 10.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 345 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

10.3.4 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)

The OVF flag is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the same time, an

interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 10.5.

TCNT H'FF H'00

Overflow signal

(internal signal)

OVF

Figure 10.5 Timing of OVF Setting

10.4 Interrupts

During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).

The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be

cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine.

Table 10.1 WDT Interrupt Source

Name Interrupt Source Interrupt Flag

WOVI TCNT overflow WOVF

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 346 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

10.5 Usage Notes

10.5.1 Notes on Register Access

The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being

more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given

below.

Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction.

They cannot be written to with byte transfer instructions. Figure 10.6 shows the format of data

written to TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. For a write to

TCNT, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the

write data. For a write to TCSR, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'A5 and the

lower byte must contain the write data. This transfers the write data from the lower byte to TCNT

or TCSR.

TCNT write

TCSR write

Address: H'FF74

H'5A Write data

15 8 7 0

H'A5 Write data

15 8 7 0

Figure 10.6 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR

Writing to RSTCSR: RSTCSR must be written to by a word transfer to address H'FF76. It cannot

be written to with byte instructions. Figure 10.7 shows the format of data written to RSTCSR. The

method of writing 0 to the WOVF bit differs from that for writing to the RSTE and RSTS bits.

To write 0 to the WOVF bit, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'A5 and the lower

byte must contain H'00. This clears the WOVF bit to 0, but has no effect on the RSTE and RSTS

bits. To write to the RSTE and RSTS bits, the upper byte must contain H'5A and the lower byte

must contain the write data. This writes the values in bits 6 and 5 of the lower byte into the RSTE

and RSTS bits, but has no effect on the WOVF bit.

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 347 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Writing 0 to WOVF bit

Write to RSTE, RSTS bits

Address: H'FF76

H'A5 H'00

15 8 7 0

H'5A Write data

15 8 7 0

Figure 10.7 Format of Data Written to RSTCSR (Example of WDT0)

Reading from TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR are read by using the

same method as for the general registers. TCSR, TCNT, and RSTCSR are allocated in addresses

H'FF74, H'FF75, and H'FF77 respectively.

10.5.2 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment

If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write

takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 10.8 shows this operation.

ddress

Internal write

signal

TCNT input

clock

TCNT NM

T1T2

TCNT write cycle

Counter write data

Figure 10.8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment

Section 10 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 348 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

10.5.3 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0

If bits CKS0 to CKS2 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in

the incrementation. Software must be used to stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to

0) before changing the value of bits CKS0 to CKS2.

10.5.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode

If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer while the WDT is operating, errors

could occur in the incrementation. Software must be used to stop the watchdog timer (by clearing

the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode.

10.5.5 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode

This LSI is not reset internally if TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 during

watchdog timer operation, however TCNT and TCSR of the WDT are reset.

TCNT, TCSR, or RSTCR cannot be written to for 132 states following an overflow. During this

period, any attempt to read the WOVF flag is not acknowledged. Accordingly, wait 132 states after

overflow to write 0 to the WOVF flag for clearing.

10.5.6 OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode

When the OVF flag setting conflicts with the OVF flag reading in interval timer mode, writing 0 to

the OVF bit may not clear the flag even though the OVF bit has been read while it is 1. If there is a

possibility that the OVF flag setting and reading will conflict, such as when the OVF flag is polled

with the interval timer interrupt disabled, read the OVF bit while it is 1 at least twice before

writing 0 to the OVF bit to clear the flag.

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 349 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

The realtime clock (RTC) is a timer used to count time ranging from a second to a week. Figure

11.1 shows the block diagram of the RTC.

11.1 Features

• Counts seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week

• Start/stop function

• Reset function

• Readable/writable counter of seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week with BCD codes

• Periodic (seconds, minutes, hours, days, and weeks) interrupts

• 8-bit free running counter

• Selection of clock source

• 8-bit bus (3 cycle access timing) connected to the external bus

RTC register is allocated to a part of area 7 of external address (H'FFFF48 to H'FFFF4F)

PSS

32-kHz

oscillator

circuit

RTCCSR

RSECDR

RMINDR

RWKDR

Clock count

control circuit

Interrupt

control circuit Interrupt IRQ

RTCCR1

RHRDR

RTCCR2

Internal data bus

1/4

TMOW

Legend:

RTCCSR:

RSECDR:

RMINDR:

RHRDR:

RWKDR:

RTCCR1:

RTCCR2:

PSS:

Clock source select register

Second date register

Minute date register

Hour date register

Day-of-week date register

RTC control register 1

RTC control register 2

Prescaler S

Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of RTC

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 350 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.2 Input/Output Pin

Table 11.1 shows the RTC input/output pin.

Table 11.1 Pin Configuration

Name Abbreviation I/O Function

Clock output TMOW Output RTC divided clock output

11.3 Register Descriptions

The RTC has the following registers.

• Second data register (RSECDR)

• Minute data register (RMINDR)

• Hour data register (RHRDR)

• Day-of-week data register (RWKDR)

• RTC control register 1 (RTCCR1)

• RTC control register 2 (RTCCR2)

• Clock source select register (RTCCSR)

• Extended module stop register (EXMDLSTP)

11.3.1 Second Data Register (RSECDR)

RSECDR counts the BCD-coded second value. This register is initialized to H'00 by a STBY input

or the RST bit in RTCCR1, but not initialized by a RES input. The setting range is decimal 00 to

59. For more information on reading seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week, see section 11.4.2,

Time Data Reading Procedure.

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 351 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value*R/W Description

7 BSY — R RTC Busy

This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating)

the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data

registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute,

hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted.

SC12

SC11

SC10

—

R/W

Counting Ten’s Position of Seconds

Counts on 0 to 5 for 60-second counting.

SC03

SC02

SC01

SC00

—

R/W

Counting One’s Position of Seconds

Counts on 0 to 9 once per second. When a carry is

generated, 1 is added to the ten’s position.

Note: * Initial value after RES.

11.3.2 Minute Data Register (RMINDR)

RMINDR counts the BCD-coded minute value on the carry generated once per minute by the

RSECDR counting. This register is initialized to H'00 a STBY input or the RST bit in RTCCR1,

but not initialized by a RES input. The setting range is decimal 00 to 59.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value*R/W Description

7 BSY — R RTC Busy

This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating)

the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data

registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute,

hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted.

MN12

MN11

MN10

—

R/W

Counting Ten’s Position of Minutes

Counts on 0 to 5 for 60-minute counting.

MN03

MN02

MN01

MN00

—

R/W

Counting One’s Position of Minutes

Counts on 0 to 9 once per minute. When a carry is

generated, 1 is added to the ten’s position.

Note: * Initial value after RES.

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 352 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.3.3 Hour Data Register (RHRDR)

RHRDR counts the BCD-coded hour value on the carry generated once per hour by RMINDR.

This register is initialized to H'00 by a STBY input or the RST bit in RTCCR1, but not initialized

by a RES input. The setting range is either decimal 0 to 11 or 0 to 23 by the selection of the 12/24

bit in RTCCR1.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value*R/W Description

7 BSY — R RTC Busy

This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating)

the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data

registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute,

hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted.

6 — 0 — Reserved

This bit is always read as 0.

HR11

HR10

—

R/W

Counting Ten’s Position of Hours

Counts on 0 to 2 for ten’s position of hours.

HR03

HR02

HR01

HR00

—

R/W

Counting One’s Position of Hours

Counts on 0 to 9 once per hour. When a carry is

generated, 1 is added to the ten’s position.

Note: * Initial value after RES.

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 353 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.3.4 Day-of-Week Data Register (RWKDR)

RWKDR counts the BCD-coded day-of-week value on the carry generated once per day by

RHRDR. This register is initialized to H'00 by a STBY input or the RST bit in RTCCR1, but not

initialized by a RES input. The setting range is decimal 0 to 6 using bits WK2 to WK0.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value*R/W Description

7 BSY — R RTC Busy

This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating)

the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data

registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute,

hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted.

6 to

— All 0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

WK2

WK1

WK0

—

R/W

Day-of-Week Counting

Day-of-week is indicated with a binary code.

000: Sunday

001: Monday

010: Tuesday

011: Wednesday

100: Thursday

101: Friday

110: Saturday

111: Reserved (Setting prohibited)

Note: * Initial value after RES.

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 354 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.3.5 RTC Control Register 1 (RTCCR1)

RTCCR1 controls start/stop and reset of the clock timer. Bits 7 to 5 of this register are initialized

to H'00 by a STBY input or the RST bit in RTCCR1, but not initialized by a RES input. For the

definition of time expression, see figure 11.2.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value*R/W Description

7 RUN — R/W RTC Operation Start

0: Stops RTC and free running counter operation

1: Starts RTC and free running counter operation

6 12/24 — R/W Operating Mode

0: RTC operates in 12-hour mode. RHRDR counts on 0

to 11.

1: RTC operates in 24-hour mode. RHRDR counts on 0

to 23.

5 PM — R/W A.M./P.M.

0: Indicates a.m. when RTC is in the 12-hour mode.

1: Indicates p.m. when RTC is in the 12-hour mode.

4 RST 0 R/W Reset

0: Normal operation

1: Resets registers and control circuits except RTCCSR

and this bit. Clear this bit to 0 after having been set to 1.

3 to

— All 0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

Note: * Initial value after RES.

24-hour count 01234567891011121314151617

12-hour count 0

24-hour count

12-hour count

0 (Morning) 1 (Afternoon)

Noon

1234567891011012345

18 19 20 21 22 23 0

61 (Afternoon) 0

78910110

Figure 11.2 Definition of Time Expression

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 355 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.3.6 RTC Control Register 2 (RTCCR2)

RTCCR2 controls RTC periodic interrupts of weeks, days, hours, minutes, and seconds. This

RES input. Enabling interrupts of weeks, days, hours, minutes, and seconds sets the IRRTA flag to

1 in the interrupt flag register 1 (IRR1) when an interrupt occurs. It also controls an overflow

interrupt of a free running counter when RTC operates as a free running counter.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value*R/W Description

7, 6 — All 0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

5 FOIE — R/W Free Running Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable

0: Disables an overflow interrupt

1: Enables an overflow interrupt

4 WKIE — R/W Week Periodic Interrupt Enable

0: Disables a week periodic interrupt

1: Enables a week periodic interrupt

3 DYIE — R/W Day Periodic Interrupt Enable

0: Disables a day periodic interrupt

1: Enables a day periodic interrupt

2 HRIE — R/W Hour Periodic Interrupt Enable

0: Disables an hour periodic interrupt

1: Enables an hour periodic interrupt

1 MNIE — R/W Minute Periodic Interrupt Enable

0: Disables a minute periodic interrupt

1: Enables a minute periodic interrupt

0 SEIE — R/W Second Periodic Interrupt Enable

0: Disables a second periodic interrupt

1: Enables a second periodic interrupt

Note: * Initial value after RES.

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 356 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.3.7 Clock Source Select Register (RTCCSR)

RTCCSR selects clock source. This register is initialized to H'08 by a STBY input or RES input. A

free running counter controls start/stop of counter operation by the RUN bit in RTCCR1. When a

clock other than 32.768 MHz is selected, the RTC is disabled and operates as an 8-bit free running

counter. An interrupt can be generated by setting 1 to the FOIE bit in RTCCR2 and enabling an

overflow interrupt of the free running counter. A clock in which the system clock is divided by 32,

16, 8, or 4 is output in high-speed mode, medium-speed mode, sleep mode, subactive mode, or

subsleep mode.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 — 0 — Reserved

This bit is always read as 0.

RCS6

RCS5

R/W

Clock Output Selection

Selects a clock output from the TMOW pin when the

TMOWE bit in UCTLR is set to 1.

00: φ/4

01: φ/8

10: φ/16

11: φ/32

4 — 0 — Reserved

This bit is always read as 0.

RCS3

RCS2

RCS1

RCS0

R/W

Clock Source Selection

0000: φ/8⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation

0001: φ/32⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation

0010: φ/128⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation

0011: φ/256⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation

0100: φ/512⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation

0101: φ/2048⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation

0110: φ/4096⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation

0111: φ/8192⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation

1000: 32.768 kHz⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅RTC operation

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 357 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.3.8 Extended Module Stop Register (EXMDLSTP)

EXMDLSTP controls the clock supply of the RTC and USB.

Note: When reading pin states using the port D register (PORTD), after accessing EXMDLSTP

(address range: H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F), you must perform a dummy read to the external

address space (such as H'FFEF00 to H'FF7FF) outside the range H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F

before reading PORTD.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Module

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

These bits are always read as undefined values.

These bits should not to be modified.

1 RTCSTOP 0 R/W RTC Module Stop

0: RTC module stop cancelled

1: RTC module stop

0 USBSTOP1 0 R/W USB Module Stop

0: USB module stop partly cancelled

1: USB module completely stop

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 358 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.4 Operation

11.4.1 Initial Settings of Registers after Power-On and Resetting Procedure

The RTC registers that store second, minute, hour, day-of week, operating mode, and A.M./P.M.

data are not reset by an STBY input. Therefore, all registers must be set to their initial values after

power-on and STBY input. Figure 11.3 shows the initial setting and resetting procedures of the

RTC. Once the register setting are made, the RTC provides an accurate time as long as power is

supplied regardless of a RES input.

RST in RTCCR1=1

RST in RTCCR1=0

Set RSECDR, RMINDR,

RHRDR, RWKDR,

12/24 in RTCCR1, and PM

RUN in RTCCR1=1

Clock count controller is reset.

Second, minute, hour, day-of-week,

operating mode, and a.m/p.m are set.

RTC operation is started.

Figure 11.3 Initial Setting Procedure

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 359 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

When the seconds, minutes, hours, or day-of-week datum is updated while time data is being read,

the data obtained may not be correct, and so the time data must be read again. Figure 11.4 shows

an example in which correct data is not obtained. In this example, since only RSECDR is read

after data update, about 1-minute inconsistency occurs.

To avoid reading in this timing, the following processing must be performed.

1. Check the setting of the BSY bit, and when the BSY bit changes from 1 to 0, read from the

second, minute, hour, and day-of-week registers. When about 62.5 ms is passed after the BSY

bit is set to 1, the registers are updated, and the BSY bit is cleared to 0.

2. Making use of interrupts, read from the second, minute, hour, and day-of week registers after

the IRQ5F flag in ISR is set to 1 and the BSY bit is confirmed to be 0.

3. Read from the second, minute, hour, and day-of week registers twice in a row, and if there is

no change in the read data, the read data is used.

Before update RWKDR = H'03, RHDDR = H'13, RMINDR = H'46, RSECDR = H'59

BSY bit = 0

(1) Day-of-week data register read H'03

(2) Hour data register read H'13

(3) Minute data register read H'46

BSY bit -> 1 (under data update)

After update RWKDR = H'03, RHDDR = H'13, RMINDR = H'47, RSECDR = H'00

BSY bit -> 0

(4) Second data register read H'00

Processing flow

Figure 11.4 Example: Reading of Inaccurate Time Data

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 360 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

11.5 Interrupt Source

The RTC interrupt sources are listed in table 11.2. There are five kinds of RTC interrupts: week

interrupts, day interrupts, hour interrupts, minute interrupts, and second interrupts.

When using an interrupt, initiate the RTC last after other registers (include ISCRH and IER of

interrupt controller) are set. Do not set multiple interrupt enable bits in RTCCR2 simultaneously

to 1.

When an interrupt request of the RTC occurs, the IRQ5F flag in ISR is set to 1. When clearing the

flag, write 0 after reading the flag = 1.

Figure 11.5 shows the initializing setting procedure in using the RTC interrupt and figure 11.6

shows an example of the RTC interrupt handling routine.

Table 11.2 Interrupt Source

Interrupt Name Interrupt Source Interrupt Enable Bit

Overflow interrupt Occurs when the free running counter is

overflown.

FOIE

Week periodic interrupt Occurs every week when the day-of-week

date register value becomes 0.

WKIE

Day periodic interrupt Occurs every day when the day-of-week date

DYIE

Hour periodic interrupt Occurs every hour when the hour date

HRIE

Minute periodic interrupt Occurs every minute when the minute date

MNIE

Second periodic interrupt Occurs every second when the second date

SEIE

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 361 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Write 0 to bit 5 in ISR register

Set RTC register

Write 1 to bit 5 in IER

RUN in RTCCR1 = 1

Set IRQ5SCB = 0 and

IRQ5SCA = 1 in

ISCRH register

Read ISR register

Set the falling edge of IRQ

IRQ5 is enabled

Clear the IRQ5F flag

Figure 11.5 Initializing Procedure in Using RTC Interrupt

Write 0 to bit 5 in ISR register

Interrupt handling

RTE

Read ISR register Clear the IRQ5F flag

Figure 11.6 Example of RTC Interrupt Handling Routine

11.6 Operating State in Each Mode

Table 11.3 shows the operating state in each mode when the RTC is set for clock operation and

free running timer operation. The clock operation is performed continuously even in low power

mode. Therefore, when the clock operation is unnecessary, cancel it by EXMDLSTP.

Section 11 Realtime Clock (RTC)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 362 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 11.3 Operating State in Each Mode

Function

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed

Sleep

Module

Stop

Watch

Subactive

Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hard-ware

Standby

Clock operation Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Halted

(Retained)

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Halted

(Reset)

Free running

timer operation

Operating Operating Operating Halted

(Retained)

Halted

(Retained)

Halted

(Retained)

Halted

(Retained)

Halted

(Retained)

Halted

(Reset)

11.7 Usage Notes

(1) Notes on Using the Emulator

In the E6000 emulator the RTC module is mounted on an external extended board. Since it must

be accessed as an external module, the limitations listed below apply. These limitations do not

apply to the E10A or to product chips.

• RTC operation is not supported in the H8S/2218 Group's mode 7 (single-chip mode).

• When using the RTC module in the H8S/2218 Group's mode 6 (on-chip ROM-enabled mode)

or the H8S/2212 Group's mode 7 (single-chip mode), A7 to A0 are input pins in the initial

status. Therefore, A7 to A0 must be set as output pins by setting PC7DDR to PC0DDR to H'FF

before accessing the RTC module.

• The above setting is not necessary when using the RTC module in the H8S/2218 Group's

modes 4 and 5 (on-chip ROM-disabled mode) because A7 to A0 are output pins.

(2) Bus Interface

The bus interface of the module conforms to the bus specifications for external area 7.

Consequently, before accessing the RTC module, area 7 must be specified as having an 8-bit bus

width and 3-state access using the bus controller register.

(3) Method for Reading Pin States Using the Port D Register (PORTD)

First access EXMDLSTP or the RTC register (address range: H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F). Then, you

must perform a dummy read to the external address space (such as H'FFEF00 to H'FF7FF) outside

the range H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F before reading PORTD.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 363 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

This LSI has two independent serial communication interface (SCI) channels. The SCI can handle

both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. Asynchronous serial data

communication can be carried out using standard asynchronous communication chips such as a

Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or an Asynchronous Communication

Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between

processors (multiprocessor communication function). The SCI also supports the smart card (IC

card) interface based on ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as an enhanced asynchronous

communication function.

12.1 Features

• Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode

• Full-duplex communication capability

The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to

be executed simultaneously.

Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous

transmission and continuous reception of serial data.

On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected

External clock can be selected as a transfer clock source (except for in Smart Card interface

mode).

• Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer (except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data)

• Four interrupt sources

Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive error — that can issue

requests.

The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive data full interrupts can be used to activate the

direct memory access controller (DMAC).

• Module stop mode can be set

Asynchronous Mode

• Data length: 7 or 8 bits

• Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits

• Parity: Even, odd, or none

• Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors

• Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in the case of a

framing error

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 364 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Average transfer rate generator (SCI_0):

921.569 kbps, 720 kbps, 460.784 kbps, or 115.196 kbps can be selected at 16 MHz

921.053 kbps, 720 kbps, 460.526 kbps, or 115.132 kbps can be selected at 24 MHz

• A transfer rate clock can be input from the TPU (SCI_0)

• Communication between multiple processors is supported

Clocked Synchronous Mode

• Data length: 8 bits

• Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected

• SCI select function (SCI_0): TxD0 = high-impedance and SCK0 = fixed high-level input can

selected when IRQ7 = 1)

• Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous

communication function

Smart Card Interface

• An error signal can be automatically transmitted on detection of a parity error during reception

• Data can be automatically re-transmitted on detection of a error signal during transmission

• Both direct convention and inverse convention are supported

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 365 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.1.1 Block Diagram

Figure 12.1 shows the block diagram of the SCI_0. Figure 12.2 shows the block diagram of the

SCI_2.

RxD0

TxD0

PG1/IRQ7

C/A

CKE1

SSE

SCK0

Clock

External clock

TEI

TXI

RXI

ERI

RSR:

RDR:

TSR:

TDR:

SMR:

Receive shift register

Receive data register

Transmit shift register

Transmit data register

Serial mode register

SCR:

SSR:

SCMR:

BRR:

SEMRA_0:

SEMRB_0:

Serial control register

Serial status register

Smart card mode register

Bit rate register

Serial extended mode register A_0

Serial extended mode register B_0

SCMR

SSR

SCR

SMR

SEMRA_0

SEMRB_0

control

transmission

and reception

Baud rate

generator

Average transfer

rate generator

10.667 MHz

· 115.152 kbps

· 460.606 kbps

16 MHz

· 115.196 kbps

· 460.784 kbps

· 720 kbps

· 921.569 kbps

24 MHz

· 115.132 kbps

· 460.526 kbps

· 720 kbps

· 921.053 kbps

BRR

TPU

TIOCC0

TIOCA1

TIOCA0

TIOCA2

Module data bus

RDR

TSRRSR

Parity generation

Legend:

TDR

SCI transfer

clock generator

in TPU

Parity

check

Internal data bus

Bus interface

φ/4

φ/16

φ/64

Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of SCI_0

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 366 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

RxD

TxD

SCK

Clock

External clock

φ/4

φ/16

φ/64

TEI

TXI

RXI

ERI

RSR:

RDR:

TSR:

TDR:

SMR:

SCR:

SSR:

SCMR:

BRR:

Receive shift register

Receive data register

Transmit shift register

Transmit data register

Serial mode register

Serial control register

Serial status register

Smart card register

Bit rate register

SCMR

SSR

SCR

SMR

control

transmission

and reception

Baud rate

generator

BRR

Module data bus

RDR

TSRRSR

Detecting parity

Parity check

Legend:

TDR

Internal data bus

Bus interface

Figure 12.2 Block Diagram of SCI_2

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 367 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 12.1 shows the serial pins for each SCI channel.

Table 12.1 Pin Configuration

Channel Pin Name* I/O Function

SCK0 I/O SCI_0 clock input/output

RxD0 Input SCI_0 receive data input

TxD0 Output SCI_0 transmit data output

2 SCK2 I/O SCI_2 clock input/output

RxD2 Input SCI_2 receive data input

TxD2 Output SCI_2 transmit data output

Note: * Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the channel

designation.

12.3 Register Descriptions

The SCI has the following registers for each channel. Some bits in the serial mode register (SMR),

serial status register (SSR), and serial control register (SCR) have different functions in different

modes⎯normal serial communication interface mode and smart card interface mode; therefore,

the bits are described separately for each mode in the corresponding register sections.

• Receive shift register (RSR)

• Receive data register (RDR)

• Transmit data register (TDR)

• Transmit shift register (TSR)

• Serial mode register (SMR)

• Serial control register (SCR)

• Serial status register (SSR)

• Smart card mode register (SCMR)

• Serial extended mode register A_0 (SEMRA_0) (only for channel 0)

• Serial extended mode register B_0 (SEMRB_0) (only for channel 0)

• Bit rate register (BRR)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 368 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)

RSR is a shift register that is used to receive serial data input to the RxD pin and convert it into

parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically.

RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.

12.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)

RDR is an 8-bit register that stores received data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial

data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR, where it is stored. After this, RSR is

receive-enabled. As RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive

operations are possible. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR only

once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby

mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, or module stop mode.

12.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR)

TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for transmission. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty,

it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-buffered

structure of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit data has

already been written to TDR during serial transmission, the SCI transfers the written data to TSR

to continue transmission. Although TDR can be read from or written to by the CPU at all times, to

achieve reliable serial transmission, write transmit data to TDR only once after confirming that the

TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch

mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, or module stop mode.

12.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)

TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first

transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then sends the data to the TxD pin. TSR cannot be

directly accessed by the CPU.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 369 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)

SMR is used to set the SCI's serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source.

Some bits in SMR have different functions in normal mode and smart card interface mode.

• Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 C/A 0 R/W Communication Mode

0: Asynchronous mode

1: Clocked synchronous mode

6 CHR 0 R/W Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode)

0: Selects 8 bits as the data length

1: Selects 7 bits as the data length. LSB-first is fixed

and the MSB of TDR is not transmitted in

transmission

In clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8

bits is used.

5 PE 0 R/W Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode)

When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to

transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is

checked in reception. For a multiprocessor format, parity

bit addition and checking are not performed regardless

of the PE bit setting.

4 O/E 0 R/W Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in

asynchronous mode)

0: Selects even parity

1: Selects odd parity

3 STOP 0 R/W Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode)

Selects the stop bit length in transmission.

0: 1 stop bit

1: 2 stop bits

In reception, only the first stop bit is checked. If the

second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the

next transmit character.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 370 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

2 MP 0 R/W Multiprocessor Mode (enabled only in asynchronous

mode)

When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor

communication function is enabled. The PE bit and O/E

bit settings are invalid in multiprocessor mode. For

details, see section 12.5, Multi Processor

Communication Function.

CKS1

CKS0

R/W

Clock Select 0 and 1:

These bits select the clock source for the baud rate

generator.

00: φ clock (n = 0)

01: φ/4 clock (n = 1)

10: φ/16 clock (n = 2)

11: φ/64 clock (n = 3)

For the relationship between the bit rate register setting

and the baud rate, see section 12.3.11, Bit Rate Register

(BRR). n is the decimal representation of the value of n

in BRR (see section 12.3.11, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 371 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

0 GSM Mode

Setting this bit to 1 allows GSM mode operation. In GSM

mode, the TEND set timing is put forward to 11.0 etu

from the start and the clock output control function is

appended. For details, see section 12.7.9, Clock Output

Control.

0: Normal smart card interface mode operation

(initial value)

(1) The TEND flag is generated 12.5 etu (11.5 etu in the

block transfer mode) after the beginning of the start

bit.

(2) Clock output on/off control only.

7 GM

R/W

1: GSM mode operation in smart card interface mode

(1) The TEND flag is generated 11.0 etu after the

beginning of the start bit.

(2) In addition to clock output on/off control, high/how

fixed control is supported (set using SCR).

6 BLK 0 R/W Setting this bit to 1 allows block transfer mode operation.

For details, see section 12.7.4, Block Transfer Mode.

0: Normal smart card interface mode operation

(initial value)

(1) Error signal transmission, detection, and automatic

data retransmission are performed.

(2) The TXI interrupt is generated by the TEND flag.

(3) The TEND flag is set 12.5 etu (11.0 etu in the GSM

mode) after transmission starts.

1: Operation in block transfer mode

(1) Error signal transmission, detection, and automatic

data retransmission are not performed.

(2) The TXI interrupt is generated by the TDRE flag.

(3) The TEND flag is set 11.5 etu (11.0 etu in the GSM

mode) after transmission starts.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 372 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

5 PE 0 R/W Parity Enable

When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to

transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is

checked in reception. Set this bit to 1 in smart card

interface mode.

4 O/E 0 R/W Parity Mode (valid only when the PE bit is 1)

0: Selects even parity

1: Selects odd parity

For details on the usage of this bit in smart card interface

mode, see section 12.7.2, Data Format (Except for Block

Transfer Mode).

BCP1

BCP0

R/W

Basic Clock Pulse 1 and 0

These bits select the number of basic clock cycles in a 1-

bit data transfer time in smart card interface mode.

00: 32 clock cycles (S = 32)

01: 64 clock cycles (S = 64)

10: 372 clock cycles (S = 372)

11: 256 clock cycles (S = 256)

For details, see section 12.7.5, Receive Data Sampling

Timing and Reception Margin. S is described in section

12.3.11, Bit Rate Register (BRR).

CKS1

CKS0

R/W

Clock Select 1 and 0

These bits select the clock source for the baud rate

generator.

00: φ clock (n = 0)

01: φ/4 clock (n = 1)

10: φ/16 clock (n = 2)

11: φ/64 clock (n = 3)

For the relation between the bit rate register setting and

the baud rate, see section 12.3.11, Bit Rate Register

(BRR). n is the decimal display of the value of n in BRR

(see section 12.3.11, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 373 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)

SCR is a register that enables or disables SCI transfer operations and interrupt requests, and is also

used to selection of the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section

12.9, Interrupts. Some bits in SCR have different functions in normal mode and smart card

interface mode.

• Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 TIE 0 R/W Transmit Interrupt Enable

When this bit is set to 1, the TXI interrupt request is

enabled.

TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by

reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then

clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0.

6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable

When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests

are enabled.

RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be

performed by reading 1 from the RDRF flag, or the FER,

PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or

clearing the RIE bit to 0.

5 TE 0 R/W Transmit Enable

When this bit s set to 1, transmission is enabled.

In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit

data is written to TDR and the TDRE flag in SSR is

cleared to 0. SMR setting must be performed to decide

the transfer format before setting the TE bit to 1. The

TDRE flag in SSR is fixed at 1 if transmission is disabled

by clearing this bit to 0.

4 RE 0 R/W Receive Enable

When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled.

Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is

detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is

detected in clocked synchronous mode. SMR setting

must be performed to decide the transfer format before

setting the RE bit to 1.

Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER,

PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 374 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

3 MPIE 0 R/W Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the

MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode)

When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the

multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the

RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR is

prohibited. On receiving data in which the multiprocessor

bit is 1, this bit is automatically cleared and normal

reception is resumed. For details, refer to section 12.5,

Multiprocessor Communication Function.

When receive data including MPB = 0 is received,

receive data transfer from RSR to RDR, receive error

detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER

flags in SSR, is not performed. When receive data

including MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR is set

to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and

generation of RXI and ERI interrupts (when the TIE and

RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag

setting is enabled.

2 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable

This bit is set to 1, TEI interrupt request is enabled. TEI

cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the

TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the

TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0.

CKE1

CKE0

R/W

Clock Enable 0 and 1

Selects the clock source and SCK pin function.

Asynchronous mode

00: Internal baud rate generator

SCK pin functions as I/O port

01: Internal baud rate generator

Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit

rate from the SCK pin.

1×: External clock

Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate

from the SCK pin.

Clocked synchronous mode

0×: Internal clock (SCK pin functions as clock output)

1×: External clock (SCK pin functions as clock input)

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 375 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 TIE 0 R/W Transmit Interrupt Enable

When this bit is set to 1, TXI interrupt request is enabled.

TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by

reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to

0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0.

6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable

When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests

are enabled.

RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be

performed by reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or

ORER flag in SSR, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing

the RIE bit to 0.

5 TE 0 R/W Transmit Enable

When this bit s set to 1, transmission is enabled.

In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit

data is written to TDR and the TDRE flag in SSR is

cleared to 0.

SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer

format before setting the TE bit to 1. When this bit is

cleared to 0, the transmission operation is disabled, and

the TDRE flag is fixed at 1.

4 RE 0 R/W Receive Enable

When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled.

Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is

detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is

detected in clocked synchronous mode.

SMR setting must be performed to decide the reception

format before setting the RE bit to 1.

Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF,

FER,PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 376 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

3 MPIE 0 R/W Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP

bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode)

Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode.

When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive

data transfer from RSR to RDR, receive error detection,

and setting of the RERF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR,

are not performed.

When receive data including MPB = 1 is received, the MPB

bit in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0

automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts

(when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER

and ORER flag setting are enabled.

2 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable

Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode.

TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the

TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the

TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0.

CKE1

CKE0

R/W Clock Enable 0 and 1

Enables or disables clock output from the SCK pin. The

clock output can be dynamically switched in GSM mode.

For details, refer to section 12.7.9, Clock Output Control.

When the GM bit in SMR is 0:

00: Output disabled (SCK pin can be used as an I/O port

pin)

01: Clock output

1×: Reserved

When the GM bit in SMR is 1:

00: Output fixed low

01: Clock output

10: Output fixed high

11: Clock output

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 377 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)

SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot be

written to flags TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared. Some bits in SSR

have different functions in normal mode and smart card interface mode.

• Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 TDRE 1 R/(W)*1 Transmit Data Register Empty

Displays whether TDR contains transmit data.

[Setting conditions]

• When the TE bit in SCR is 0

• When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data

can be written to TDR

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1*2

• When the DMAC is activated by a TXI interrupt

request and writes data to TDR

6 RDRF 0 R/(W)*1 Receive Data Register Full

Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.

[Setting condition]

When serial reception ends normally and receive data is

transferred from RSR to RDR

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1*2

• When the DMAC is activated by an RXI interrupt and

transferred data from RDR

RDR and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their

previous values when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

The RDRF flag is not affected and retains their previous

values when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 378 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

5 ORER 0 R/(W)*1 Overrun Error

[Setting condition]

• When the next serial reception is completed while

RDRF = 1

The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained

in RDR, and the data received subsequently is lost.

Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be

continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In clocked

synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be

continued, either.

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1*2

The ORER flag is not affected and retains its

previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to

4 FER 0 R/(W)*1 Framing Error

[Setting condition]

• When the stop bit is 0

In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked

for a value of 0; the second stop bits not checked. If

a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred

to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also,

subsequent serial reception cannot be continued

while the FER flag is set to 1. In clocked

synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be

continued, either.

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1*2

The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous

state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 379 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

3 PER 0 R/(W)*1 Parity Error

[Setting condition]

• When a parity error is detected during reception

If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred

to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also,

subsequent serial reception cannot be continued

while the PER flag is set to 1. In clocked

synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be

continued, either.

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1*2

The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous

state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

2 TEND 1 R Transmit End

[Setting conditions]

• When the TE bit in SCR is 0

• When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-

byte serial transmit character

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1

• When the DMAC is activated by a TXI interrupt and

writes data to TDR

1 MPB 0 R Multiprocessor Bit

MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data.

When the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 its previous state

is retained. This bit retains its previous state when the

RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer

MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the

transmit data.

Note: 1. The write value should always be 0 to clear the flag.

2. To clear the flag by the CPU on the HD6432210S, reread the flag after writing 0 to it.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 380 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 TDRE 1 R/(W)*1Transmit Data Register Empty

Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data.

[Setting conditions]

• When the TE bit in SCR is 0

• When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data

can be written to TDR

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1*2

• When the DMAC is activated by a TXI interrupt

request and writes data to TDR

6 RDRF 0 R/(W)*1Receive Data Register Full

Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.

[Setting condition]

When serial reception ends normally and receive data is

transferred from RSR to RDR

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1*2

• When the DMAC is activated by an RXI interrupt and

transferred data from RDR

The RDRF flag is not affected and retains their previous

values when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF

flag is still set to 1, an overrun error will occur and the

receive data will be lost.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 381 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

5 ORER 0 R/(W)*1Overrun Error

Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception,

causing abnormal termination.

[Setting condition]

• When the next serial reception is completed while

RDRF = 1

The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained

in RDR, and the data received subsequently is lost.

Also, subsequent serial cannot be continued while the

ORER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode,

serial transmission cannot be continued, either.

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1*2

The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous

state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

4 ERS 0 R/(W)*1Error Signal Status

Indicates that the status of an error, signal 1 returned from

the reception side at reception

[Setting condition]

• When the low level of the error signal is sampled

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to ERS after reading ERS = 1*2

The ERS flag is not affected and retains its previous

state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 382 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

3 PER 0 R/(W)*1Parity Error

Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception

using parity addition in asynchronous mode, causing

abnormal termination.

[Setting condition]

• When a parity error is detected during reception

If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred

to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent

serial reception cannot be continued while the PER

flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial

transmission cannot be continued, either.

[Clearing condition]

• When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1*2

The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous

state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.

2 TEND 1 R Transmit End

This bit is set to 1 when no error signal has been sent

back from the receiving end and the next transmit data is

ready to be transferred to TDR.

[Setting conditions]

• When the TE bit in SCR is 0 and the ERS bit is also 0

• When the ERS bit is 0 and the TDRE bit is 1 after the

specified interval following transmission of 1-byte data.

The timing of bit setting differs according to the register

setting as follows:

When GM = 0 and BLK = 0, 12.5 etu after transmission

starts

When GM = 0 and BLK = 1, 11.5 etu after transmission

starts

When GM = 1 and BLK = 0, 11.0 etu after transmission

starts

When GM = 1 and BLK = 1, 11.0 etu after transmission

starts

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1

• When the DMAC is activated by a TXI interrupt and

transfers transmission data to TDR

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 383 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

1 MPB 0 R Multiprocessor Bit

This bit is not used in Smart Card interface mode.

0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer

Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode.

Note: 1. The write value should always be 0 to clear the flag.

2. To clear the flag by the CPU on the HD6432210S, reread the flag after writing 0 to it.

12.3.8 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)

SCMR is a register that selects the transfer format. In this LSI, Smart Card interface mode cannot

be specified.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 4 — All 1 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 1.

3 DIR 0 R/W Data Transfer Direction

Selects the serial/parallel conversion format.

0: LSB-first in transfer

1: MSB-first in transfer

The bit setting is valid only when the transfer data format

is 8 bits.

2 INV 0 R/W Data Invert

Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit

does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. To invert

the parity bit, invert the O/E bit in SMR.

0: TDR contents are transmitted as they are. Receive

data is stored as it is in RDR

1: TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted.

Receive data is stored in inverted form in RDR

1 — 1 — Reserved

This bit is always read as 1.

0 SMIF 0 R/W Smart Card Interface Mode Select

When this bit is set to 1, smart card interface mode is

selected.

0: Normal asynchronous or clocked synchronous mode

1: Smart card interface mode

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 384 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.3.9 Serial Extended Mode Register A_0 (SEMRA_0)

SEMRA_0 extends the functions of SCI_0. SEMR0 enables selection of the SCI_0 select function

in synchronous mode, base clock setting in asynchronous mode, and also clock source selection

and automatic transfer rate setting. Figure 12.3 shows an example of the internal base clock when

an average transfer rate is selected and figure 12.4 shows as example of the setting when the TPU

clock input is selected.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 SSE 0 R/W SCI_0 Select Enable

Allows selection of the SCI0 select function when an

external clock is input in synchronous mode.

The SSE setting is valid when external clock input is used

(CKE1 = 1 in SCR) in synchronous mode (C/A = 1 in SMR).

0: SCI_0 select function disabled

1: SCI_0 select function enabled

When the SCI_0 select function is enabled, if 1 is input to

the PG1/IRQ7 pin, TxD0 output goes to the high-impedance

state, SCK0 input is fixed high.

TCS2

TCS1

TCS0

R/W

TPU Clock Select

When the TPU clock is input (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'0100) as

the clock source in asynchronous mode, serial transfer

clock is generated depending on the combination of the

TPU clock.

Base Clock Clock Enable TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC

000 TIOCA1 TIOCA2 Base clock written

in the left column

Pin input Pin input

001 TIOCA0 | TIOCC0 TIOCA1 Pin input Base clock written

in the left column

Pin input

010 TIOCA0 TIOCA1 & TIOCA2 Pin input Base clock written

in the left column

Pin input

011 TIOCA0 | TIOCC0 TIOCA1 & TIOCA2 Pin input Base clock written

in the left column

Pin input

1×× Reserved (Setting prohibited)

Legend:

&: AND (logical multiplication)

I : OR (logical addition)

Note: The functions of bits 6 to 4 are not supported by the

E6000 emulator. Figure 12.4 shows the setting

examples.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 385 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

3 ABCS 0 R/W Asynchronous Base Clock Select

Selects the 1-bit-interval base clock in asynchronous mode.

The ABCS setting is valid in asynchronous mode (C/A = 0

in SMR).

0: SCI_0 operates on base clock with frequency of 16

times transfer rate

1: SCI_0 operates on base clock with frequency of 8 times

transfer rate

ACS2

ACS1

ACS0

R/W

Asynchronous Clock Source Select 2 to 0

These bits select the clock source in asynchronous mode

depending on the combination with the bit 7 (ACS3) in

SEMRB_0 (serial extended mode register B_0). When an

average transfer rate is selected, the base clock is set

automatically regardless of the ABCS value. Note that

average transfer rates support only 10.667 MHz, 16 MHz,

and 24 MHz, and not support other operating frequencies.

Set ACS3 to ACS0 when inputting the external clock (the

CKE1 bit in the SCR register is 1) in asynchronous mode

(the C/A bit in the SMR register is 0). Figures 12.3 and 12.4

show the setting examples.

ACS 3210

0000: External clock input

0001: 115.152 kbps average transfer rate (for φ =

10.667 MHz only) is selected (SCI_0 operates

on base clock with frequency of 16 times

transfer rate)

0010: 460.606 kbps average transfer rate (for φ =

10.667 MHz only) is selected (SCI_0 operates

on base clock with frequency of eight times

transfer rate)

0011: 921.569 kbps average transfer rate (for φ = 16

MHz only) is selected (SCI_0 operates on base

clock with frequency of eight times transfer rate)

0100: TPU clock input

The signal generated by TIOCA0, TIOCC0,

TIOCA1, and TIOCA2, which are the compare

match outputs for TPU_0 to TPU_2 or PWM

outputs, is used as a base clock. Note that

IRQ0 and IRQ1 cannot be used since TIOCA1

and TIOCA2 are used as outputs.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 386 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

ACS2

ACS1

ACS0

R/W

0101: 115.196 kbps average transfer rate (for φ = 16 MHz

only) is selected (SCI_0 operates on base clock with

frequency of 16 times transfer rate)

0110: 460.784 kbps average transfer rate (for φ = 16 MHz

only) is selected (SCI_0 operates on base clock with

frequency of eight times transfer rate)

0111: 720 kbps average transfer rate (for φ = 16 MHz only)

is selected (SCI_0 operates on base clock with

frequency of eight times transfer rate)

1000: 115.132 kbps average transfer rate (for φ = 24 MHz

only) is selected* (SCI_0 operates on base clock

with frequency of 16 times transfer rate)

1001: 460.526 kbps average transfer rate (for φ = 24 MHz

only) is selected* (SCI_0 operates on base clock

with frequency of 16 times transfer rate)

1010: 720 kbps average transfer rate (for φ = 24 MHz only)

is selected* (SCI_0 operates on base clock with

frequency of eight times transfer rate)

1011: 921.053 kbps average transfer rate (for φ = 24 MHz

only) is selected* (SCI_0 operates on base clock

with frequency of eight times transfer rate)

11××: Reserved (Setting prohibited)

Note: * The average transfer rate select functions for 24 MHz only (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'10XX) are

not supported by the E6000 emulator.

12.3.10 Serial Extended Mode Register B_0 (SEMRB_0)

SEMRB_0 enables clock source selection with the combination of SEMRA_0, automatic transfer

rate setting, and control of port 1 pins (P16, P14, P12, and P10) at the transfer clock generation by

TPU.

Note: SEMRB_0 is not supported by the E6000 emulator.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 387 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 ACS3 0 R/W Asynchronous Clock Source Select

Selects the clock source in asynchronous mode

depending on the combination with the ACS2 to ACS0

(bits 2 to 0 in SEMRA_0). For details, see section 12.3.9,

Serial Extended Mode Register A_0 (SEMRA_0).

6 to

— Undefined — Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

3 TIOCA2E 1 R/W TIOCA2 Output Enable

Controls the TIOCA2 output on the P16 pin.

When the TIOCA2 in TPU is output to generate the

transfer clock, P16 is used as other function pin by

setting this bit to 0.

0: Disables output of TIOCA2 in TPU

1: Enables output of TIOCA2 in TPU

2 TIOCA1E 1 R/W TIOCA1 Output Enable

Controls the TIOCA1 output on the P14 pin.

When the TIOCA1 in TPU is output to generate the

transfer clock, P14 is used as other function pin by

setting this bit to 0.

0: Disables output of TIOCA1 in TPU

1: Enables output TIOCA1 in TPU

1 TIOCC0E 1 R/W TIOCC0 Output Enable

Controls the TIOCC0 output on the P12 pin.

When the TIOCC0 in TPU is output to generate the

transfer clock, P12 is used as other function pin by

setting this bit to 0.

0: Disables output of TIOCC0 in TPU

1: Enables output of TIOCC0 in TPU

0 TIOCA0E 1 R/W TIOCA0 Output Enable

Controls the TIOCA0 output on the P10 pin.

When the TIOCA0 in TPU is output to generate the

transfer clock, P10 is used as other function pin by

setting this bit to 0.

0: Disables output of TIOCA0 in TPU

1: Enables output of TIOCA0 in TPU

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 388 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

1234567891011

123 45 67 8

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2322 24 25 26 27 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 1 2 3 428 29

5.333 MHz

3.6848 MHz

123

4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021 2322

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

24 25 26 27 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 1 2 3 428 29

2.667 MHz

1.8424 MHz

Base clock

10.667 MHz/2 = 5.333 MHz

5.333 MHz × (38/55)

= 3.6848 MHz

(Average) 1 bit = base clock × 8*

Base clock with 460.606-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'0010)

Average transfer rate = 3.6848 MHz/8 = 460.606 kbps

Average error with 460.6 kbps = -0.043%

1 bit = Base clock × 16*

Base clock

10.667 MHz/4= 2.667 MHz

2.667 MHz × (38/55)

= 1.8424 MHz

(Average)

When φ = 10.667 MHz

Base clock with 115.152-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'0001)

Average transfer rate = 1.8424 MHz/16 = 115.152 kbps

Average error with 115.2 kbps = -0.043%

Note: * The lengh of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.

Figure 12.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (1)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 389 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12345678910

123 45 678

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2322 2425 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223242534

8 MHz

7.3725 MHz

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16

18 19 20 21 2322 24 25 26 27 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 828 29

8 MHz

7.3725 MHz

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

12345678

18 19 20 21 2322 24 25 26 27 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 828 29

5.76 MHz

123

2 MHz

1.8431 MHz

456789

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16

18 19 20 21 2322 24 25 26 27 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 828 29

Base clock

16 MHz/2 = 8 MHz

8 MHz × (18/25)

= 5.76 MHz

(Average)

Base clock with 720-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'0111)

Average transfer rate = 5.76 MHz/8 = 720 kbps

Average error with 720 kbps = ±0%

Base clock

16 MHz/2 = 8 MHz

8 MHz × (47/51)

= 7.3725 MHz

(Average)

Base clock with 921.569-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'0011)

Average transfer rate = 7.3725 MHz/8 = 921.569 kbps

Average error with 921.6 kbps = -0.003%

Note: * The lengh of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.

Base clock

16 MHz/2 = 8 MHz

8 MHz × (47/51)

= 7.3725 MHz

(Average) 1 bit = base clock × 16*

1 bit = base clock × 8*

Base clock with 460.784-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'0110)

Average transfer rate = 7.3725 MHz/16 = 460.784 kbps

Average error with 460.8 kbps = -0.004%

1 bit = base clock × 16*

Base clock

16 MHz/8 = 2 MHz

2 MHz × (47/51)

= 1.8431 MHz

(Average)

When φ = 16 MHz

Base clock with 115.196-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'0101)

Average transfer rate = 1.8431 MHz/16 = 115.196 kbps

Average error with 115.2 kbps = -0.004%

Figure 12.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (2)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 390 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

123456789101112131415 16 17 18 19 20 21 2322 2425 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 242534

12 MHz

5.76 MHz

123

3 MHz

1.8421 MHz

456789101112131415 16 17

18 19 20 21 2322 2425 26

23 456789101112 1413 15 16

27 30 31 32 33 3435 36 37 38 39 4041424344 4546474849505152535455 56 57 1 228 29

123

12 MHz

7.3684 MHz

456789101112131415 16 17

18 19 20 21 2322 2425 26

23 456789101112 1413 15 16

27 30 31 32 33 3435 36 37 38 39 4041424344 4546474849505152535455 56 57 1 228 29

123

12 MHz

7.3684 MHz

456789101112131415 16 17

18 19 20 21 2322 2425 26

23 45678

12345678

27 30 31 32 33 3435 36 37 38 39 4041424344 4546474849505152535455 56 57 1 228 29

Base clock

24 MHz/2 = 12 MHz

12 MHz × (12/25)

= 5.76 MHz

(Average)

Base clock with 720-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'1010)

Average transfer rate = 5.76 MHz/8= 720 kbps

Average error with 720 kbps = ±0%

Base clock

24 MHz/2 = 12 MHz

12 MHz × (35/57)

= 7.3684 MHz

(Average)

Base clock with 921.053-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'1011)

Average transfer rate = 7.3684 MHz/8= 921.053 kbps

Average error with 921.1 kbps = -0.059%

Note: * The lengh of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.

Base clock

24 MHz/2 = 12 MHz

12 MHz × (35/57)

= 7.3684 MHz

(Average) 1 bit = base clock × 16*

1 bit = base clock × 8*

Base clock with 460.526-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'1001)

Average transfer rate = 7.3684 MHz/16 = 460.526 kbps

Average error with 460.6kbps = -0.059%

1 bit = base clock × 16*

Base clock

24 MHz/8 = 3 MHz

3 MHz × (35/57)

= 1.8421 MHz

(Average)

When φ = 24 MHz

Base clock with 115.132-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to ACS0 = B'1000)

Average transfer rate =1.8421 MHz/16 = 115.132 kbps

Average error with 115.2 kbps = -0.0059%

Figure 12.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (3)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 391 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

123

4 MHz

3 MHz

Example for TPU clock generation for 187.5 kbps average transfer rate when φ = 16 MHz (TCS2 to TCS0 = B'000)

(1) 4-MHz base clock provided by TPU_1 is multiplied by 3/4 by TPU_2 to generate 3-MHz base clock

(2) By making 1 bit = 16 base clocks, the average transfer will be 3 MHz/16 = 187.5 kbps

TPU and SCI settings

ase clock

IOCA1output

4 MHz

lock enable

IOCA2 output

CK0

ase clock

4 MHz × 3/4

3 MHz (Average)

1 bit = Base clock × 16*

Average transfer rate = 3 MHz/16 = 187.5 kbps

Note: * The lengh of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.

41234123412 3341234123412

123 123 123 12 33 123 123 12

123 456 789 1011 512 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4

• TCR_1 = H'20 [TCNT_1 cleared by TGRA_1 compare match, TCNT_1 incremented at rising edge of φ/1]

• TCR_2 = H'2C [TCNT_2 cleared by TGRA_2 compare match, TCNT_2 incremented at falling edge of TCLKA

• TMDR_1 = TMDR_2 = H'C2 [PWM mode 1]

• TIOR_1 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA1 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_1 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_1 compare match]

• TIOR_2 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA2 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_2 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_2 compare match]

• TCNT_1 = TCNT_2 = H'0000

• TGRA_1 = H'0003, TGRB_1 = H'0001

• TGRA_2 = H'0003, TGRB_2 = H'0001

• SCR_0 = H'03 (external clock)

• SEMRA_0 = H'04 (TCS2 to TCS0 = B'000, ABCS = 0, ACS2 to ACS0 = B'100)

• SEMRB_0 = H'00 (ACS3 = 0)

Clock enable

Base clock

TPU

TIOCA2

TIOCA1

TIOCC0

TIOCA0

TCLKA

TCLKB

SCI_0

SCK0

Figure 12.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TPU Clock Is Input (1)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 392 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.6 MHz

9 MHz

Example for TPU clock generation for 562.5 kbps average transfer rate when φ = 24 MHz (TCS2 to TCS0 = B'001)

(1) 9.6-MHz base clock provided by TPU_0 is multiplied by 15/16 by TPU_1 to generate 9-MHz base clock

(2) By making 1 bit = 16 base clocks, the average transfer will be 9 MHz/16 = 562.5 kbps

TPU and SCI settings

TIOCA0 output

= 4.8 MHz

TIOCC0 output

= 4.8 MHz

SCK0

Base clock

= 9.6 MHz × 15/16

= 9 MHz (Average)

1 bit = Base clock × 16*

Average transfer rate = 9 MHz/16 = 562.5 kbps

Note: * The length of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.

12 563

Base clock

(TIOCA0 + TIOCC0) output

= 9.6 MHz

Clock enable

TIOCA1 output

4781112910 1314 1 215 16 3 4 7 856 910 131411 12 15 16 3 412 56 91078 11

12 5634 78 1112910 1314 1 215 3 4 7 856 910 131411 12 15 3 412 56 91078 11

12 5634 78 1112910 1314 16115 2 3 6 74 5 8 9 12 1310 11 14 1 215 16 3 4 7 856 9

• TCR_0 = H'20 [TCNT_0 cleared by TGRA_0 compare match, TCNT_0 incremented at rising edge of φ/1]

• TCR_1 = H'2D [TCNT_1 cleared by TGRA_1 compare match, TCNT_1 incremented at falling edge of TCLKB

• TMDR_0 = TMDR_1 = H'C2 [PWM mode 1]

• TIORH_0 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA0 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_0 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_0 compare match]

• TIORL_0 = H'21 [0 as TIOCC0 initial output, 0 output on TGRC_0 compare match, 1 output on TGRD_0 compare match]

• TIOR_1 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA1 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_1 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_1 compare match]

• TCNT_0 = TCNT_1 = H'0000

• TGRA_0 = H'0004, TGRB_0 = H'0002, TGRC_0 = H'0001, TGRD_0 = H'0000

• TGRA_1 = H'000F, TGRB_1 = H'0000

• SCR_0 = H'03 (external clock)

• SEMRA_0 = H'14 (TCS2 to TCS0 = B'001, ABCS = 0, ACS2 to ACS0 = B'100)

• SEMRB_0 = H'00 (ACS3 = 0)

TPU

TIOCA2 Clock enable

Base clock

TIOCA1

TIOCC0

TIOCA0

TCLKA

TCLKB

SCI_0

SCK0

>CK

Figure 12.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TPU Clock Is Input (2)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 393 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

25 1 2

6 MHz

5.52 MHz

Example for TPU clock generation for 345 kbps average transfer rate when φ = 24 MHz (TCS2 to TCS0 = B'010)

(1) 6-MHz base clock provided by TPU_0 is multiplied by 23/25 by TPU_1 and TPU_2 to generate 5.52-MHz base clock

(2) By making 1 bit = 16 base clocks, the average transfer will be 5.52 MHz/16 = 345 kbps

TPU and SCI settings

Base clock

TIOCA0 (TPU_0) output

= 6 MHz

TIOCA1(TPU_1) output

SCK0

Base clock

= 6 MHz × 23/25

= 5.52 MHz (Average)

1 bit = Base clock × 16*

Average transfer rate = 5.52 MHz/16 = 345 kbps

Note: * The length of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.

345678910 212223242511 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 22 23 24 2511 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

12345678910 21222311 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 124 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 22 2311 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

12345678910 56711 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 8 9 10 15 1611 12 13 14 15 16 1 12 13 142 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

TIOCA2(TPU_2) output

Clock enable

(TIOCA1×TIOCA2) output

• TCR_0 = H'20 [TCNT_0 cleared by TGRA_0 compare match, TCNT_0 incremented at rising edge of φ/1]

• TCR_1 = H'2D [TCNT_1 cleared by TGRA_1 compare match, TCNT_1 incremented at falling edge of TCLKB]

• TCR_2 = H'2D [TCNT_2 cleared by TGRA_2 compare match, TCNT_2 incremented at falling edge of TCLKB

• TMDR_0 = TMDR_1 = TMDR_2 = H'C2 [PWM mode 1]

• TIORH_0 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA0 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_0 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_0 compare match]

• TIOR_1 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA1 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_1 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_1 compare match]

• TIOR_2 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA2 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_2 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_2 compare match]

• TCNT_0 = TCNT_1 = H'0000, TCNT_2 = H'000C

• TGRA_0 = H'0003, TGRB_0 = H'0001

• TGRA_1 = H'0018, TGRB_1 = H'0000

• TGRA_2 = H'0018, TGRB_2 = H'0000

• SCR_0 = H'03 (external clock)

• SEMRA_0 = H'24 (TCS2 to TCS0 = B'010, ABCS = 0, ACS2 to ACS0 = B'100)

• SEMRB_0 = H'00 (ACS3 = 0)

TPU

TIOCA2 Clock enable

Base clock

TIOCA1

TIOCC0

TIOCA0

TCLKA

TCLKB

SCI_0

SCK0

>CK

Figure 12.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TPU Clock Is Input (3)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 394 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

9.6 MHz

8.832 MHz

Example for TPU clock generation for 552 kbps average transfer rate when φ = 24 MHz (TCS2 to TCS0 = B'011)

(1) 9.6-MHz base clock provided by TPU_0 is multiplied by 23/25 by TPU_1 and TPU_2 to generate 8.832-MHz base clock

(2) By making 1 bit = 16 base clocks, the average transfer will be 8.832 MHz/16 = 552 kbps

TPU and SCI settings

TIOCA0 output

= 4.8 MHz

TIOCC0 output

= 4.8 MHz

SCK0

Base clock

= 9.6 MHz × 23/25

= 8.832 MHz (Average)

1 bit = Base clock × 16*

Average transfer rate = 8.832 MHz/16 = 552 kbps

Note: * The length of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.

12 563

Base clock

(TIOCA0 + TIOCC0) output

= 9.6 MHz

TIOCA1 output

4781112910 1314 171815 16 19 20 23 2421 22 25 1 4 52 3 6 7 10 118 9 12 13 16 1714 15 18

12 563 4 7 8 11 12910 1314 161715 18 19 22 2320 21 4 5213 6 101187 9 12 13 16 1714 15

12 563 4 7 8 11 12910 1314 16115 2 3 6 74 5 11 129810 13 121514 16 3 4 7 856

TIOCA2 output

Clock enable

(TIOCA1×TIOCA2) output

• TCR_0 = H'20 [TCNT_0 cleared by TGRA_0 compare match, TCNT_0 incremented at rising edge of φ/1]

• TCR_1 = H'2D [TCNT_1 cleared by TGRA_1 compare match, TCNT_1 incremented at falling edge of TCLKB]

• TCR_2 = H'2D [TCNT_2 cleared by TGRA_2 compare match, TCNT_2 incremented at falling edge of TCLKB

• TMDR_0 = TMDR_1 = TMDR_2 = H'C2 [PWM mode 1]

• TIORH_0 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA0 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_0 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_0 compare match]

• TIORL_0 = H'21 [0 as TIOCC0 initial output, 0 output on TGRC_0 compare match, 1 output on TGRD_0 compare match]

• TIOR_1 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA1 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_1 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_1 compare match]

• TIOR_2 = H'21 [0 as TIOCA2 initial output, 0 output on TGRA_2 compare match, 1 output on TGRB_2 compare match]

• TCNT_0 = TCNT_1 = H'0000, TCNT_2 = H'000C

• TGRA_0 = H'0004, TGRB_0 = H'0002, TGRC_0 = H'0001, TGRD_0 = H'0000

• TGRA_1 = H'0018, TGRB_1 = H'0000

• TGRA_2 = H'0018, TGRB_2 = H'0000

• SCR_0 = H'03 (external clock)

• SEMRA_0 = H'34 (TCS2 to TCS0 = B'011, ABCS = 0, ACS2 to ACS0 = B'100)

• SEMRB_0 = H'00 (ACS3 = 0)

TPU

TIOCA2 Clock enable

Base clock

TIOCA1

TIOCC0

TIOCA0

TCLKA

TCLKB

SCI_0

SCK0

>CK

Figure 12.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TPU Clock Is Input (4)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 395 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.3.11 Bit Rate Register (BRR)

BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. As the SCI performs baud rate generator control

independently for each channel, different bit rates can be set for each channel. Table 12.2 shows

the relationships between the N setting in BRR and bit rate B for normal asynchronous mode,

clocked synchronous mode, and Smart Card interface mode. The initial value of BRR is H'FF, and

it can be read from or written to by the CPU at all times.

Table 12.2 Relationships between the N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B

Mode ABCS Bit Rate Error

B = 64 × 2

2n-1

× (N + 1)

φ × 10

Error (%) = – 1 × 100

B × 64 × 2

2n-1

× (N + 1)

φ × 10

Asynchronous

mode

B = 32 × 2

2n-1

× (N + 1)

φ × 10

Error (%) = – 1 × 100

B × 32 × 22n-1 × (N + 1)

φ × 106

Clocked

synchronous

mode

B = 8 × 2

2n-1

× (N + 1)

φ × 10

⎯

Smart Card

interface mode

B = S × 2

2n+1

× (N + 1)

φ × 10

Error (%) = – 1 × 100

B × S × 2

2n+1

× (N + 1)

φ × 10

Legend:

B: Bit rate (bps)

N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)

φ: Operating frequency (MHz)

n, S: Determined by the SMR settings shown in the following tables.

×: Don’t care

SMR Setting SMR Setting

CKS1 CKS0 Clock Source n BCP1 BCP0 S

0 0 φ 0 0 0 32

0 1 φ/4 1 0 1 64

1 0 φ/16 2 1 0 372

1 1 φ/64 3 1 1 256

Table 12.3 shows sample N settings in BRR in normal asynchronous mode. Table 12.4 shows the

maximum bit rate for each frequency in normal asynchronous mode. Table 12.6 shows sample N

settings in BRR in clocked synchronous mode. Table 12.8 shows sample N settings in BRR in

Smart Card interface mode. In Smart Card interface mode, S (the number of basic clock periods in

a 1-bit transfer interval) can be selected. For details, see section 12.7.5, Receive Data Sampling

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 396 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Timing and Reception Margin. Tables 12.5 and 12.7 show the maximum bit rates with external

clock input.

When the ABCS bit in SCI_0’s serial extended mode register A_0 (SEMRA_0) is set to 1 in

asynchronous mode, the maximum bit rates are twice those shown in table 12.3.

Table 12.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode)

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

2 2.097152 2.4576 3

Bit Rate

(bps) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)

110 1 141 0.03 1 148 –0.04 1 174 –0.26 1 212 0.03

150 1 103 0.16 1 108 0.21 1 127 0.00 1 155 0.16

300 0 207 0.16 0 217 0.21 0 255 0.00 1 77 0.16

600 0 103 0.16 0 108 0.21 0 127 0.00 0 155 0.16

1200 0 51 0.16 0 54 –0.70 0 63 0.00 0 77 0.16

2400 0 25 0.16 0 26 1.14 0 31 0.00 0 38 0.16

4800 0 12 0.16 0 13 –2.48 0 15 0.00 0 19 –2.34

9600 — — — 0 6 –2.48 0 7 0.00 0 9 –2.34

19200 — — — — — — 0 3 0.00 0 4 –2.34

31250 0 1 0.00 — — — — — — 0 2 0.00

38400 — — — — — — 0 1 0.00 — — —

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 397 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

3.6864 4 4.9152 5

Bit Rate

(bps) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)

110 2 64 0.70 2 70 0.03 2 86 0.31 2 88 –0.25

150 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16

300 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16

600 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16

1200 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16

2400 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16

4800 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 31 0.00 0 32 –1.36

9600 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73

19200 0 5 0.00 — — — 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.73

31250 — — — 0 3 0.00 0 4 –1.70 0 4 0.00

38400 0 2 0.00 — — — 0 3 0.00 0 3 1.73

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

6 6.144 7.3728 8

Bit Rate

(bps) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)

110 2 106 –0.44 2 108 0.08 2 130 –0.07 2 141 0.03

150 2 77 0.16 2 79 0.00 2 95 0.00 2 103 0.16

300 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16

600 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16

1200 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16

2400 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16

4800 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16

9600 0 19 –2.34 0 19 0.00 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16

19200 0 9 –2.34 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16

31250 0 5 0.00 0 5 2.40 — — — 0 7 0.00

38400 0 4 –2.34 0 4 0.00 0 5 0.00 — — —

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 398 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

9.8304 10 12 12.288

Bit Rate

(bps) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)

110 2 174 –0.26 2 177 –0.25 2 212 0.03 2 217 0.08

150 2 127 0.00 2 129 0.16 2 155 0.16 2 159 0.00

300 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 2 77 0.16 2 79 0.00

600 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00

1200 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00

2400 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00

4800 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00

9600 0 31 0.00 0 32 –1.36 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00

19200 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 0 19 –2.34 0 19 0.00

31250 0 9 –1.70 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 11 2.40

38400 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.73 0 9 –2.34 0 9 0.00

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

14 14.7456 16 17.2032

Bit Rate

(bps) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)

110 2 248 –0.17 3 64 0.70 3 70 0.03 3 75 0.48

150 2 181 0.16 2 191 0.00 2 207 0.16 2 223 0.00

300 2 90 0.16 2 95 0.00 2 103 0.16 2 111 0.00

600 1 181 0.16 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 223 0.00

1200 1 90 0.16 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 111 0.00

2400 0 181 0.16 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 223 0.00

4800 0 90 0.16 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 111 0.00

9600 0 45 –0.93 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 55 0.00

19200 0 22 –0.93 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 27 0.00

31250 0 13 0.00 0 14 –1.70 0 15 0.00 0 16 1.20

38400 – – – 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 13 0.00

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 399 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

18 19.6608 20 24

Bit Rate

(bps) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)

110 3 79 –0.12 3 86 0.31 3 88 –0.25 3 106 –0.44

150 2 233 0.16 2 255 0.00 3 64 0.16 3 77 0.16

300 2 116 0.16 2 127 0.00 2 129 0.16 2 155 0.16

600 1 233 0.16 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 2 77 0.16

1200 1 116 0.16 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 1 155 0.16

2400 0 233 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 1 77 0.16

4800 0 116 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 0 155 0.16

9600 0 58 –0.69 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 0 77 0.16

19200 0 28 1.02 0 31 0.00 0 32 –1.36 0 38 0.16

31250 0 17 0.00 0 19 –1.70 0 19 0.00 0 23 0.00

38400 0 14 –2.34 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 0 19 –2.34

Note: This table shows bit rates when the ABCS bit in SEMRA_0 is cleared to 0.

When the ABCS bit in SEMR0 is set to 1, the bit rates are twice those shown in this table.

In this LSI, operating frequency φ must be 6 MHz or greater.

Table 12.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)

Maximum Bit Rate

(kbps)

Maximum Bit Rate

(kbps)

φ (MHz) ABCS = 0 ABCS = 1 n N φ (MHz) ABCS = 0 ABCS = 1 n N

2 62.5 125.0 0 0 9.8304 307.2 614.4 0 0

2.097152 65.536 131.027 0 0 10 312.5 625.0 0 0

2.4576 76.8 153.6 0 0 12 375.0 750.0 0 0

3 93.75 187.5 0 0 12.288 384.0 768.0 0 0

3.6864 115.2 230.4 0 0 14 437.5 875.0 0 0

4 125.0 250.0 0 0 14.7456 460.8 921.6 0 0

4.9152 153.6 307.2 0 0 16 500.0 1000.0 0 0

5 156.25 312.5 0 0 17.2032 537.6 1075.2 0 0

6 187.5 375.0 0 0 18 562.5 1125.0 0 0

6.144 192.0 384.0 0 0 19.6608 614.4 1228.8 0 0

7.3728 230.4 460.8 0 0 20 625.0 1250.0 0 0

8 250.0 500.0 0 0 24 750.0 1500.0 0 0

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 400 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 12.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)

Maximum Bit Rate

(kbps)

Maximum Bit Rate

(kbps)

φ (MHz)

External

Input

Clock

(MHz) ABCS = 0 ABCS = 1 φ (MHz)

External

Input

Clock

(MHz) ABCS = 0 ABCS = 1

2 0.5000 31.25 62.5 9.8304 2.4576 153.6 307.2

2.097152 0.5243 327.68 65.536 10 2.5000 156.25 312.5

2.4576 0.6144 38.4 76.8 12 3.0000 187.5 375.0

3 0.7500 46.875 93.75 12.288 3.0720 192.0 384.0

3.6864 0.9216 57.6 115.2 14 3.5000 218.75 437.0

4 1.0000 62.5 125.0 14.7456 3.6864 230.4 460.8

4.9152 1.2288 76.8 153.6 16 4.0000 250.0 500.0

5 1.2500 78.125 156.25 17.2032 4.3008 268.8 537.6

6 1.5000 93.75 187.5 18 4.5000 281.25 562.5

6.144 1.5360 96.0 192.0 19.6608 4.9152 307.2 614.4

7.3728 1.8432 115.2 230.4 20 5.0000 312.5 625.0

8 2.0000 125.0 250.0 24 6.0000 375.0 750.0

Note: In this LSI, operating frequency φ must be 6 MHz or greater.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 401 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 12.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

2 4 6 8 10 16 20 24

Bit Rate

(bps) n N n N n N n N n N n N n N n N

110 3 70 — —

250 2 124 2 249 3 124 — — 3 249

500 1 249 2 124 2 249 — — 3 124 — — — —

1 k 1 124 1 249 2 124 — — 2 249 — — — —

2.5 k 0 199 1 99 1 149 1 199 1 249 2 99 2 124 2 149

5 k 0 99 0 199 1 74 1 99 1 124 1 199 1 249 2 74

10 k 0 49 0 99 0 149 0 199 0 249 1 99 1 124 1 149

25 k 0 19 0 39 0 59 0 79 0 99 0 159 0 199 0 239

50 k 0 9 0 19 0 29 0 39 0 49 0 79 0 99 0 119

100 k 0 4 0 9 0 14 0 19 0 24 0 39 0 49 0 59

250 k 0 1 0 3 0 5 0 7 0 9 0 15 0 19 0 23

500 k 0 0* 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 7 0 9 0 11

1 M 0 0* 0 1 0 3 0 4 0 5

2 M 0 0* 0 1 0 2

2.5 M 0 0* 0 1

4 M 0 0*

5 M 0 0*

6 M 0 0*

Legend:

Blank: Cannot be set.

—: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error.

*: Continuous transfer is not possible.

Table 12.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

φ (MHz)

External Input

Clock (MHz)

Maximum Bit

Rate (Mbps) φ (MHz)

External Input

Clock (MHz)

Maximum Bit

Rate (Mbps)

2 0.333 0.333 14 2.333 2.333

4 0.667 0.667 16 2.667 2.667

6 1.000 1.000 18 3.000 3.000

8 1.333 1.333 20 3.333 3.333

10 1.667 1.667 24 4.000 4.000

12 2.000 2.000

Note: In this LSI, operating frequency φ must be 6 MHz or greater.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 402 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 12.8 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates

(Smart Card Interface Mode, when n = 0 and S = 372)

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

5.00 7.00 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00

Bit Rate

(bps) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%)

6720 0 0.01 1 30.00 1 28.57 1 0.01 1 7.14 2 13.33

9600 0 30.00 0 1.99 0 0.00 1 30.00 1 25.00 1 8.99

Operating Frequency φ (MHz)

14.2848 16.00 18.00 20.00 24.00

Bit Rate

(bps) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%) N

Error

(%)

6720 2 4.76 2 6.67 3 0.01 3 0.01 4 3.99

9600 1 0.00 1 12.01 2 15.99 2 6.66 2 12.01

Table 12.9 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode)

Maximum Bit Rate (bps)

φ (MHz) S = 32 S = 64 S = 256 S = 372 n N

5.00 78125 39063 9766 6720 0 0

6.00 93750 46875 11719 8065 0 0

7.00 109375 54688 13672 9409 0 0

7.1424 111600 55800 13950 9600 0 0

10.00 156250 78125 19531 13441 0 0

10.7136 167400 83700 20925 14400 0 0

13.00 203125 101563 25391 17473 0 0

14.2848 223200 111600 27900 19200 0 0

16.00 250000 125000 31250 21505 0 0

18.00 281250 140625 35156 24194 0 0

20.00 312500 156250 39063 26882 0 0

24.00 375000 187500 46875 32258 0 0

Note: In this LSI, operating frequency φ must be 6 MHz or greater.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 403 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode

Figure 12.5 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists

of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and

finally stop bits (high level). In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is

usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the transmission line. When the

transmission line goes to the space state (low level), the SCI recognizes a start bit and starts serial

communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-

duplex. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so data can be

read from or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer.

LSB

Start

bit

MSB

Idle state

(mark state)

Stop bit

Transmit/receive data

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1

1 1

Serial

data Parity

bit

1 bit 1 or

2 bits

7 or 8 bits 1 bit,

or none

One unit of transfer data (character or frame)

Figure 12.5 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 404 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.4.1 Data Transfer Format

Table 12.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12

transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting. For details on the multiprocessor

bit, refer to section 12.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function.

Table 12.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)

S 8-bit data STOP

S 7-bit data STOP

S 8-bit data STOP STOP

S 8-bit data P STOP

S 7-bit data STOPP

S 8-bit data MPB STOP

S 8-bit data MPB STOPSTOP

S 7-bit data STOPMPB

S 7-bit data STOPMPB STOP

S 7-bit data STOPSTOP

SMR Settings 123456789101112

Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length

STOPS 8-bit data P STOP

S 7-bit data STOPP STOP

CHR PE MP STOP

0000

0001

0100

0101

1000

1001

1100

1101

0–10

0–11

1–10

1–11

Legend:

S: Start bit

STOP: Stop bit

P: Parity bit

MPB: Multiprocessor bit

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 405 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode

In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer

rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and

performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th

pulse of the basic clock as shown in Figure 12.6. Thus, the reception margin in asynchronous

mode is given by formula (1) below.

M = | (0.5 – ) – (L – 0.5) F – (1+ F) | × 100 [%] ... Formula (1)

| D – 0.5 |

Where M: Reception margin

N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16 if ABCS = 0, N = 8 if ABCS = 1)

D: Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0)

L: Frame length (L = 9 to 12)

F: Absolute value of clock rate deviation

Assuming values of F (absolute value of clock rate deviation) = 0, D (clock duty) = 0.5, and N

(ratio of bit rate to clock) = 16 in formula (1), the reception margin can be given by the formula.

M = {0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)} × 100 [%] = 46.875%

However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed for in

system design.

Internal basic

clock

16 clocks *

8 clocks *

Receive data

(RxD)

Synchronization

sampling timing

Start bit D0 D1

Data sampling

timing

15 0 7 15 007

Note: * In this example the value of the ABCS bit in SEMRA_0 is 0. When ABCS is set to 1, the basic clock frequency

is eight times the bit rate and the receive data is sampled at the fourth rising edge of the basic clock.

Figure 12.6 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 406 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Note: * Figure 12.6 shows an example when the ABCS bit of SEMRA_0 is cleared to 0. When

ABCS is set to 1, the clock frequency of basic clock is 8 times the bit rate and the

receive data is sampled at the rising edge of the 4th pulse of the basic clock.

12.4.3 Clock

Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at

the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI's serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in

SMR and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the

clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When an external clock is selected, the basic

clock of average transfer rate can be selected according to the ACS2 to ACS0 bit setting of

SEMR_0.

When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin by

setting CKE1 = 0 and CKE0 = 1. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit

rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as

shown in figure 12.7.

1 frame

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 11

SCK

TxD

Figure 12.7 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase

(Asynchronous Mode)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 407 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode)

Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then

initialize the SCI as described in a sample flowchart in figure 12.8. When the operating mode, or

transfer format, is changed for example, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the

change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1.

Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and

ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in asynchronous mode, the

clock must be supplied even during initialization.

Wait

Start initialization

Set data transfer format in

SMR, SCMR, and SEMRA_0

[1]

Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR

(TE, RE bits 0)

Yes

Set value in BRR

Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0

[2]

[3]

Set TE and RE* bits in

SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,

and MPIE bits

Note: * Perform this set operation with the RxD pin in the 1 state. If the RE bit is set to 1 with the RxD pin

in the 0 state, it may be misinterpreted as a start bit.

[4]

1-bit interval elapsed?

[1] Set the clock selection in SCR.

Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and

MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0.

When the clock is selected in

asynchronous mode, it is output

immediately after SCR settings are

made.

[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR,

SCMR, and SEMRA_0.

[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit

rate to BRR. Not necessary if an

external clock or average transfer rate

clock by ACS2 to ACS0 is used.

[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the

TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set

the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits.

Setting the TE and RE bits enables use

of the TxD and RxD pins.

Figure 12.8 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 408 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)

Figure 12.9 shows an example of operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In

transmission, the SCI operates as described below.

1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. If the flag is cleared to 0, the SCI recognizes that

data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.

2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts

transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI)

is generated. Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes next

transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed.

3. Data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order: start bit, transmit data, parity bit or

multiprocessor bit (may be omitted depending on the format), and stop bit.

4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.

5. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then

serial transmission of the next frame is started.

6. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the "mark

state" is entered, in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI

interrupt request is generated.

TDRE

TEND

1 frame

D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1

1 1

DataStart

bit Parity

bit Stop

bit Start

bit Data Parity

bit Stop

bit

TXI interrupt

request generated Data written to TDR and

TDRE flag cleared to 0 in

TXI interrupt service routine TEI interrupt

request generated

Idle state

(mark state)

TXI interrupt

request generated

Figure 12.9 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)

Figure 12.10 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 409 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

<End>

[1]

Yes

Initialization

Start transmission

Read TDRE flag in SSR [2]

Write transmit data to TDR

and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0

Yes

Read TEND flag in SSR

[3]

Yes

[4]

Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1

Clear TE bit in SCR to 0

TDRE = 1

All data transmitted?

TEND = 1

Break output?

[1] SCI initialization:

The TxD pin is automatically designated

as the transmit data output pin.

After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame of 1s

is output, and transmission is enabled.

[2] SCI status check and transmit data write:

Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag

is set to 1, then write transmit data to

TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.

[3] Serial transmission continuation

procedure:

To continue serial transmission, read 1

from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing

is possible, then write data to TDR, and

then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking

and clearing of the TDRE flag is

automatic when the DMAC is activated

by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI)

request, and data is written to TDR.

[4] Break output at the end of serial

transmission:

To output a break in serial transmission,

set DDR for the port corresponding to the

TxD pin to 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the

TE bit in SCR to 0.

Figure 12.10 Sample Serial Data Transmission Flowchart

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 410 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)

Figure 12.11 shows an example of operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial

reception, the SCI operates as described below.

1. The SCI monitors the communication line. If a start bit is detected, the SCI performs internal

synchronization, receives receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit.

2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag

is still set to 1), the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an

ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag

remains to be set to 1.

3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to

RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated.

4. If a framing error is detected (when the stop bit is 0), the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive

data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt

request is generated.

5. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is

transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is

generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive

data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has been completed.

RDRF

FER

1 frame

D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 0

1 1

DataStart

bit Parity

bit Stop

bit Start

bit Data Parity

bit Stop

bit

ERI interrupt request

generated by framing

error

Idle state

(mark state)

RDR data read and RDRF

flag cleared to 0 in RXI

interrupt service routine

RXI interrupt

request

generated

Figure 12.11 Example of SCI Operation in Reception

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)

Table 12.11 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive error

is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving data.

Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER,

FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 12.12 shows a sample flow chart

for serial data reception.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 411 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 12.11 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling

SSR Status Flag

RDRF* ORER FER PER Receive Data Receive Error Type

1 1 0 0 Lost Overrun error

0 0 1 0 Transferred to RDR Framing error

0 0 0 1 Transferred to RDR Parity error

1 1 1 0 Lost Overrun error + framing error

1 1 0 1 Lost Overrun error + parity error

0 0 1 1 Transferred to RDR Framing error + parity error

1 1 1 1 Lost Overrun error + framing error +

parity error

Note: * The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception.

Yes

<End>

[1]

Initialization

Start reception

[2]

Yes

Read RDRF flag in SSR [4]

[5]

Clear RE bit in SCR to 0

Read ORER, PER, and

FER flags in SSR

Error processing

(Continued on next page)

[3]

Read receive data in RDR, and

clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0

Yes

PER ∨ FER ∨ ORER = 1

RDRF = 1

All data received?

[1] SCI initialization:

The RxD pin is automatically designated as

the receive data input pin.

[2] [3] Receive error processing and break

detection:

If a receive error occurs, read the ORER,

PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the

error. After performing the appropriate error

processing, ensure that the ORER, PER, and

FER flags are all cleared to 0. Reception

cannot be resumed if any of these flags are

set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a

break can be detected by reading the value

of the input port corresponding to the RxD

pin.

[4] SCI status check and receive data read:

Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1, then

read the receive data in RDR and clear the

RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag

from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI

interrupt.

[5] Serial reception continuation procedure:

To continue serial reception, before the end

bit for the current frame is received, reading

the RDRF flag and RDR, and clearing the

RDRF flag to 0 should be finished. The

RDRF flag is cleared automatically when

DMAC is activated by a reception complete

interrupt (RXI) and the RDR value is read.

Figure 12.12 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (1)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 412 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

<End>

[3]

Error processing

Parity error processing

Yes

Clear ORER, PER, and

FER flags in SSR to 0

Yes

Framing error processing

Yes

Overrun error processing

ORER = 1

FER = 1

Break?

PER = 1

Clear RE bit in SCR to 0

Figure 12.12 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (2)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 413 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function

Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer between a number of

processors sharing communication lines by asynchronous serial communication using the

multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When

multiprocessor communication is performed, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID

code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles; an ID transmission cycle

that specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to

differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the

multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle; if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the

cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 12.13 shows an example of inter-processor

communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code of

the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1

multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.

When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its

own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID do not

match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received.

The SCI uses the MPIE bit in SCR to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1,

transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags,

RDRF, FER, and ORER to 1, are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On

reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1 and the

MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to

1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated.

When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is rendered invalid. All other bit

settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor

communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 414 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Transmitting

station

Receiving

station A Receiving

station B Receiving

station C Receiving

station D

(ID = 01) (ID = 02) (ID = 03) (ID = 04)

Serial transmission line

Serial

data

ID transmission cycle =

receiving station

specification

Data transmission cycle =

Data transmission to

receiving station specified by ID

(MPB = 1) (MPB = 0)

H'01 H'AA

Legend:

MPB: Multiprocessor bit

Figure 12.13 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format

(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 415 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission

Figure 12.14 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID

transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission

cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI operations are the same

as those in asynchronous mode.

<End>

[1]

Yes

Initialization

Start transmission

Read TDRE flag in SSR [2]

Write transmit data to TDR and

set MPBT bit in SSR

Yes

Read TEND flag in SSR

[3]

Yes

[4]

Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1

Clear TE bit in SCR to 0

TDRE = 1

All data transmitted?

TEND = 1

Break output?

Clear TDRE flag to 0

[1] SCI initialization:

The TxD pin is automatically

designated as the transmit data

output pin.

After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame of

1s is output, and transmission is

enabled.

[2] SCI status check and transmit data

write:

Read SSR and check that the TDRE

flag is set to 1, then write transmit

data to TDR. Set the MPBT bit in

SSR to 0 or 1. Finally, clear the

TDRE flag to 0.

[3] Serial transmission continuation

procedure:

To continue serial transmission, be

sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to

confirm that writing is possible, then

write data to TDR, and then clear the

TDRE flag to 0. Checking and

clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic

when the DMAC is activated by a

transmit data empty interrupt (TXI)

request, and data is written to TDR.

[4] Break output at the end of serial

transmission:

To output a break in serial

transmission, set the port DDR to 1,

clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in

SCR to 0.

Figure 12.14 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission Flowchart

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 416 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception

Figure 12.16 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in

SCR is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. On receiving data

with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is

generated at this time. All other SCI operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure

12.15 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception.

MPIE

RDR

value

0D0 D1 D7 1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0 1

Data (ID1)Start

bit MPB Stop

bit Start

bit Data (Data1) MPB Stop

bit

Data (ID2)Start

bit Stop

bit Start

bit Data (Data2) Stop

bit

RXI interrupt

request

(multiprocessor

interrupt)

generated

Idle state

(mark state)

RDRF

RDR data read

and RDRF flag

cleared to 0 in

RXI interrupt

service routine

If not this station’s ID,

MPIE bit is set to 1

again

RXI interrupt request is

not generated, and RDR

retains its state

ID1

(a) Data does not match station’s ID

MPIE

RDR

value

0D0 D1 D7 1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0 1

MPB MPB

RXI interrupt

request

(multiprocessor

interrupt)

generated

Idle state

(mark state)

RDRF

RDR data read and

RDRF flag cleared

to 0 in RXI interrupt

service routine

Matches this station’s ID,

so reception continues, and

data is received in RXI

interrupt service routine

MPIE bit set to 1

again

ID2

(b) Data matches station’s ID

Data2ID1

MPIE = 0

Figure 12.15 Example of SCI Operation in Reception

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 417 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Yes

<End>

[1]

Initialization

Start reception

Yes

[4]

Clear RE bit in SCR to 0

Error processing

(Continued on

next page)

[5]

Yes

FER∨ORER = 1

RDRF = 1

All data received?

Read MPIE bit in SCR [2]

Read ORER and FER flags in SSR

Read RDRF flag in SSR [3]

Read receive data in RDR

Yes

This station’s ID?

Read ORER and FER flags in SSR

Yes

Read RDRF flag in SSR

Yes

FER ∨ ORER = 1

Read receive data in RDR

RDRF = 1

[1] SCI initialization:

The RxD pin is automatically designated as

the receive data input pin.

[2] ID reception cycle:

Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1.

[3] SCI status check, ID reception and

comparison:

Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is

set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR

and compare it with this station’s ID.

If the data is not this station’s ID, set the MPIE

bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF flag to 0.

If the data is this station’s ID, clear the RDRF

flag to 0.

[4] SCI status check and data reception:

Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is

set to 1, then read the data in RDR.

[5] Receive error processing and break detection:

If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and

FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After

performing the appropriate error processing,

ensure that the ORER and FER flags are all

cleared to 0.

Reception cannot be resumed if either of

these flags is set to 1.

In the case of a framing error, a break can be

detected by reading the RxD pin value.

Figure 12.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Flowchart (1)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 418 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

<End>

Error processing

Yes

Clear ORER, PER, and

FER flags in SSR to 0

Yes

Framing error processing

Overrun error processing

ORER = 1

FER = 1

Break?

Clear RE bit in SCR to 0

[5]

Figure 12.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Flowchart (2)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 419 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode

Figure 12.17 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked

synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received synchronous with clock pulses. In clocked

synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of

the serial clock to the next. In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronous

with the rising edge of the serial clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the

MSB state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI,

the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication through the

use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered

structure, so data can be read from or written during transmission or reception, enabling

continuous data transfer.

Don't care Don't car

One unit of transfer data (character or frame)

Bit 0

Serial data

Synchronization

clock

Bit 1 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5

LSB MSB

Bit 2 Bit 6 Bit 7

Note: * High except in continuous transfer

Figure 12.17 Data Format in Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First)

12.6.1 Clock

Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external

synchronization clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of CKE0 and

CKE1 bits in SCR. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from

the SCK pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no

transfer is performed the clock is fixed high.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 420 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Before transmitting and receiving data, the TE and RE bits in SCR should be cleared to 0, then the

SCI should be initialized as described in a sample flowchart in figure 12.18. When the operating

mode, or transfer format, is changed for example, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before

making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag

is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER,

FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR.

Wait

Start initialization

Set data transfer format in

SMR and SCMR

Yes

Set value in BRR

Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0

[2]

[3]

Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and

set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits [4]

1-bit interval elapsed?

Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR

(TE, RE bits 0) [1]

[1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to

clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE and

RE, to 0.

[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and

SCMR.

[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to

BRR. Not necessary if an external clock is

used.

[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE

bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.

Also set the RIE, TIE TEIE, and MPIE bits.

Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD

and RxD pins to be used.

Note: In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared

to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously.

Figure 12.18 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 421 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Figure 12.19 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode.

In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.

1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if the flag is 0, the SCI recognizes that data has

been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.

2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts

transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt

(TXI) is generated. Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine

writes the next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been

completed.

3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock mode

has been specified, and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock has

been specified.

4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).

5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission

of the next frame is started.

6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TDRE flag maintains the

output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request

is generated. The SCK pin is fixed high.

Figure 12.20 shows a sample flow chart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is

cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or PER) is set to 1.

Make sure that the receive error flags are cleared to 0 before starting transmission. Note that

clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 422 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Transfer direction

Bit 0

Serial data

Synchronization

clock

1 frame

TDRE

TEND

Data written to TDR and

TDRE flag cleared to 0 in

TXI interrupt service

routine

TXI interrupt request

generated

Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7

TXI interrupt request

generated TEI interrupt request

generated

Figure 12.19 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 423 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

<End>

[1]

Yes

Initialization

Start transmission

Read TDRE flag in SSR [2]

Write transmit data to TDR and

clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0

Yes

Read TEND flag in SSR

[3]

Clear TE bit in SCR to 0

TDRE = 1

All data transmitted?

TEND = 1

[1] SCI initialization:

The TxD pin is automatically designated as

the transmit data output pin.

[2] SCI status check and transmit data write:

Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is

set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR

and clear the TDRE flag to 0.

[3] Serial transmission continuation procedure:

To continue serial transmission, be sure to

read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that

writing is possible, then write data to TDR,

and then clear the TDRE flag to 0.

Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is

automatic when the DMAC is activated by a

transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request

and data is written to TDR.

Figure 12.20 Sample Serial Data Transmission Flowchart

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 424 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Figure 12.21 shows an example of SCI operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In

serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.

1. The SCI performs internal initialization synchronous with a synchronous clock input or output,

starts receiving data, and stores the received data in RSR.

2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag

in SSR is still set to 1), the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this

time, an ERI interrupt request is generated, receive data is not transferred to RDR, and the

RDRF flag remains to be set to 1.

3. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is

transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is

generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive

data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished.

Bit 7

Serial data

Synchronization

clock

1 frame

RDRF

ORER

ERI interrupt request

generated by overrun

error

RXI interrupt request

generated

RDR data read and

RDRF flag cleared to 0

in RXI interrupt service

routine

RXI interrupt

request

generated

Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7

Figure 12.21 Example of SCI Operation in Reception

Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER,

FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 12.22 shows a sample flow chart

for serial data reception.

When the internal clock is selected during reception, the synchronization clock will be output until

an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared. To receive data in frame units, a dummy data of

one frame must be transmitted simultaneously.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 425 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Yes

<End>

[1]

Initialization

Start reception

[2]

Yes

Read RDRF flag in SSR [4]

[5]

Clear RE bit in SCR to 0

Error processing

(Continued below)

[3]

Read receive data in RDR, and

clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0

Yes

ORER = 1

RDRF = 1

All data received?

Read ORER flag in SSR

<End>

Error processing

Overrun error processing

Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0

[3]

[1] SCI initialization:

The RxD pin is automatically designated as

the receive data input pin.

[2] [3] Receive error processing:

If a receive error occurs, read the ORER

flag in SSR, and after performing the

appropriate error processing, clear the

ORER flag to 0. Transfer cannot be

resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1.

[4] SCI status check and receive data read:

Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is

set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR

and clear the RDRF flag to 0.

Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can

also be identified by an RXI interrupt.

[5] Serial reception continuation procedure:

To continue serial reception, before the

MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received,

reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and

clearing the RDRF flag to 0 should be

finished. The RDRF flag is cleared

automatically when the DMAC is activated

by a receive data full interrupt (RXI) request

and the RDR value is read.

Figure 12.22 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart

12.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception

(Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Figure 12.23 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations.

The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive

operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after

checking that the SCI has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear

TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive

mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished

reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (ORER, FER,

and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 426 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Yes

<End>

[1]

Initialization

Start transmission/reception

[5]

Error processing

[3]

Read receive data in RDR, and

clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0

Yes

ORER = 1

All data received?

[2]

Read TDRE flag in SSR

Yes

TDRE = 1

Write transmit data to TDR and

clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0

Yes

RDRF = 1

Read ORER flag in SSR

[4]

Read RDRF flag in SSR

Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0

[1] SCI initialization:

The TxD pin is designated as the

transmit data output pin, and the RxD pin

is designated as the receive data input

pin, enabling simultaneous transmit and

receive operations.

[2] SCI status check and transmit data write:

Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag

is set to 1, then write transmit data to

TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.

Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1

can also be identified by a TXI interrupt.

[3] Receive error processing:

If a receive error occurs, read the ORER

flag in SSR, and after performing the

appropriate error processing, clear the

ORER flag to 0. Transmission/reception

cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is

set to 1.

[4] SCI status check and receive data read:

Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag

is set to 1, then read the receive data in

RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0.

Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1

can also be identified by an RXI

interrupt.

[5] Serial transmission/reception

continuation procedure:

To continue serial transmission/

reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the

current frame is received, finish reading

the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and

clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Also,

before the MSB (bit 7) of the current

frame is transmitted, read 1 from the

TDRE flag to confirm that writing is

possible. Then write data to TDR and

clear the TDRE flag to 0.

Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag

is automatic when the DMAC is activated

by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI)

request and data is written to TDR.

Also, the RDRF flag is cleared

automatically when the DMAC is

activated by a receive data full interrupt

(RXI) request and the RDR value is

read.

Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous

transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to 0,

then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously.

Figure 12.23 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Data Transmit and

Receive Operations

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 427 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.7 Operation in Smart Card Interface

The SCI supports an IC card (Smart Card) interface that conforms to ISO/IEC 7816-3

(Identification Card) as a serial communication interface extension function. Switching between

the normal serial communication interface and the Smart Card interface mode is carried out by

means of a register setting.

12.7.1 Pin Connection Example

Figure 12.24 shows an example of connection with the Smart Card. In communication with an IC

card, as both transmission and reception are carried out on a single data transmission line, the TxD

pin and RxD pin should be connected to the LSI pin. The data transmission line should be pulled

up to the VCC power supply with a resistor. If an IC card is not connected, and the TE and RE bits

are both set to 1, closed transmission/reception is possible, enabling self-diagnosis to be carried

out. When the clock generated on the Smart Card interface is used by an IC card, the SCK pin

output is input to the CLK pin of the IC card. This LSI port output is used as the reset signal.

TxD

RxD

This LSI

I/O

Connected equipment

IC card

Data line

Clock line

Reset line

CLK

RST

SCK

Px (port)

Figure 12.24 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 428 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.7.2 Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode)

Figure 12.25 shows the transfer data format in Smart Card interface mode.

• One frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit in asynchronous mode.

• In transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (Elementary time unit: the time for transfer of

one bit) is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame.

• If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for one etu

period, 10.5 etu after the start bit.

• If an error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is retransmitted automatically

after a delay of 2 etu or longer.

Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp

When there is no parity error

Transmitting station output

Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp

When a parity error occurs

Transmitting station output

Receiving station

output

Start bit

Data bits

Parity bit

Error signal

Legend:

DS:

D0 to D7:

Dp:

DE:

Figure 12.25 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format

Data transfer with other types of IC cards (direct convention and inverse convention) are

performed as described in the following.

AZZAZZ ZZAA(Z) (Z) State

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp

Figure 12.26 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0)

With the direction convention type IC and the above sample start character, the logic 1 level

corresponds to state Z and the logic 0 level to state A, and transfer is performed in LSB-first order.

The start character data above is H'3B. For the direct convention type, clear the SDIR and SINV

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 429 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

bits in SCMR to 0. According to Smart Card regulations, clear the O/E bit in SMR to 0 to select

even parity mode.

AZZAAA ZAAA(Z) (Z) State

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Dp

Figure 12.27 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1)

With the inverse convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state A and the logic 0 level to

state Z, and transfer is performed in MSB-first order. The start character data for the above is

H'3F. For the inverse convention type, set the SDIR and SINV bits in SCMR to 1. According to

Smart Card regulations, even parity mode is the logic 0 level of the parity bit, and corresponds to

state Z. In this LSI, the SINV bit inverts only data bits D0 to D7. Therefore, set the O/E bit in

SMR to 1 to invert the parity bit for both transmission and reception.

12.7.3 Clock

As a transmit/receive clock, only an internal clock which is generated by an on-chip baud rate

generator can be used. When clock output is selected by setting CKE0 to 1, a clock with a

frequency S times the bit rate is output from the SCK pin.

Note: Symbol S is the value of S described in section 12.3.11, Bit Rate Register (BRR).

12.7.4 Block Transfer Mode

Operation in block transfer mode is the same as that in the normal Smart Card interface mode,

except for the following points.

• In reception, though the parity check is performed, no error signal is output even if an error is

detected. However, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and must be cleared before receiving the

parity bit of the next frame.

• In transmission, a guard time of at least 1 etu is left between the end of the parity bit and the

start of the next frame.

• In transmission, because retransmission is not performed, the TEND flag is set to 1, 11.5 etu

after transmission start.

• As with the normal Smart Card interface, the ERS flag indicates the error signal status, but

since error signal transfer is not performed, this flag is always cleared to 0.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 430 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.7.5 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin

In Smart Card interface mode an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can

only be used as a transmission/reception clock. In this mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock

with a frequency of 32, 64, 372, or 256 times the transfer rate (fixed to 16 times in normal

asynchronous mode) as determined by bits BCP1 and BCP0. In reception, the SCI samples the

falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. As shown

in figure 12.28, by sampling receive data at the rising-edge of the 16th, 32nd, 186th, or 128th pulse

of the basic clock, data can be latched at the middle of the bit. The reception margin is given by the

following formula.

M = | (0.5 – ) – (L – 0.5) F – (1+ F) | × 100 [%]

| D – 0.5 |

Where M: Reception margin (%)

N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 32, 64, 372, and 256)

D: Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0)

L: Frame length (L = 10)

F: Absolute value of clock frequency deviation

Assuming values of F = 0, D = 0.5 and N = 372 in the above formula, the reception margin

formula is as follows.

M = (0.5 – 1/2 × 372) × 100%

= 49.866%

Internal

basic clock

372 clocks

186 clocks

Receive data

(RxD)

Synchronization

sampling timing

D0 D1

Data sampling

timing

185 371 0

371

185 0

Start bit

Figure 12.28 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode

(Using Clock of 372 Times the Transfer Rate)

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 431 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.7.6 Initialization

Before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the SCI as described below. Initialization is also

necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa.

1. Clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0.

2. Clear the error flags ERS, PER, and ORER in SSR to 0.

3. Set the GM, BLK, O/E, BCP0, BCP1, CKS0, CKS1 bits in SMR. Set the PE bit to 1.

4. Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits in SCMR.

When the SMIF bit is set to 1, the TxD and RxD pins are both switched from ports to SCI pins,

and are placed in the high-impedance state.

5. Set the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR.

6. Set the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, and TEIE bits to 0.

If the CKE0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the SCK pin.

7. Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR. Do not set the TE

bit and RE bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis.

To switch from receive mode to transmit mode, after checking that the SCI has finished reception,

initialize the SCI, and set RE to 0 and TE to 1. Whether SCI has finished reception or not can be

checked with the RDRF, PER, or ORER flags. To switch from transmit mode to receive mode,

after checking that the SCI has finished transmission, initialize the SCI, and set TE to 0 and RE to

1. Whether SCI has finished transmission or not can be checked with the TEND flag.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 432 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.7.7 Serial Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode)

As data transmission in Smart Card interface mode involves error signal sampling and

retransmission processing, the operations are different from those in normal serial communication

interface mode (except for block transfer mode). Figure 12.29 illustrates the retransfer operation

when the SCI is in transmit mode.

1. If an error signal is sent back from the receiving end after transmission of one frame is

complete, the ERS bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an ERI

interrupt request is generated. The ERS bit in SSR should be cleared to 0 by the time the next

parity bit is sampled.

2. The TEND bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error signal indicating an abnormality

is received. Data is retransferred from TDR to TSR, and retransmitted automatically.

3. If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, the ERS bit in SSR is not set.

Transmission of one frame, including a retransfer, is judged to have been completed, and the

TEND bit in SSR is set to 1. If the TIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, a TXI interrupt

request is generated. Writing transmit data to TDR transfers the next transmit data.

Figure 12.31 shows a flowchart for transmission. A sequence of transmit operations can be

performed automatically by specifying the DMAC to be activated with a TXI interrupt source. In a

transmit operation, the TDRE flag is set to 1 at the same time as the TEND flag in SSR is set, and

a TXI interrupt will be generated if the TIE bit in SCR has been set to 1. If the TXI request is

designated beforehand as a DMAC activation source, the DMAC will be activated by the TXI

request, and transfer of the transmit data will be carried out. The TDRE and TEND flags are

automatically cleared to 0 when data is transferred by the DMAC. In the event of an error, the SCI

retransmits the same data automatically. During this period, the TEND flag remains cleared to 0

and the DMAC is not activated. Therefore, the SCI and DMAC will automatically transmit the

specified number of bytes in the event of an error, including retransmission. However, the ERS

flag is not cleared automatically when an error occurs, and so the RIE bit should be set to 1

beforehand so that an ERI request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will

be cleared. When using the DMAC for data transmission or reception, always make DMAC

settings and enable the DMAC before making SCI settings. For details on DMAC settings, see

section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC).

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 433 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp (DE) Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4Ds

Transfer

frame n + 1

Retransferred framenth transfer frame

TDRE

TEND

FER/ERS

Transfer to TSR from TDR Transfer to TSR from TDR Transfer to TSR

from TDR

Figure 12.29 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode

The timing for setting the TEND flag depends on the value of the GM bit in SMR. The TEND flag

set timing is shown in figure 12.30.

Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 DpI/O data

12.5 etu

TXI

(TEND interrupt)

11.0 etu

Guard

time

When GM = 0

When GM = 1

Start bit

Data bits

Parity bit

Error signal

Legend:

Ds:

D0 to D7:

Dp:

DE:

Figure 12.30 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 434 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Initialization

Yes

Clear TE bit to 0

Start transmission

Start

Yes

End

Write data to TDR,

and clear TDRE flag

in SSR to 0

Error processing

TEND = 1?

All data transmitted ?

TEND = 1?

ERS = 0?

Figure 12.31 Example of Transmission Processing Flow

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 435 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.7.8 Serial Data Reception (Except for Block Transfer Mode)

Data reception in Smart Card interface mode uses the same operation procedure as for normal

serial communication interface mode. Figure 12.32 illustrates the retransfer operation when the

SCI is in receive mode.

1. If an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is automatically

set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. The PER

bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next parity bit is sampled.

2. The RDRF bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error has occurred.

3. If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is not set to 1,

the receive operation is judged to have been completed normally, and the RDRF flag in SSR is

automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an RXI interrupt request is

generated.

Figure 12.33 shows a flowchart for reception. A sequence of receive operations can be performed

automatically by specifying the DMAC to be activated using an RXI interrupt source. In a receive

operation, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1. If the RXI

request is designated beforehand as a DMAC activation source, the DMAC will be activated by the

RXI request, and the receive data will be transferred. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically

when data is transferred by the DMAC. If an error occurs in receive mode and the ORER or PER

flag is set to 1, a transfer error interrupt (ERI) request will be generated. Hence, so the error flag

must be cleared to 0. In the event of an error, the DMAC is not activated and receive data is

skipped. Therefore, receive data is transferred for only the specified number of bytes in the event

of an error. Even when a parity error occurs in receive mode and the PER flag is set to 1, the data

that has been received is transferred to RDR and can be read from there.

Note: For details on receive operations in block transfer mode, refer to section 12.4, Operation in

Asynchronous Mode.

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp

(DE)

Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4Ds

Transfer

frame n + 1

Retransferred framenth transfer frame

RDRF

PER

Figure 12.32 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 436 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Initialization

Read RDR and clear

RDRF flag in SSR to 0

Clear RE bit to 0

Start reception

Start

Error processing

Yes

ORER = 0 and

PER = 0

RDRF = 1?

All data received?

Yes

Figure 12.33 Example of Reception Processing Flow

12.7.9 Clock Output Control

When the GM bit in SMR is set to 1, the clock output level can be fixed with bits CKE0 and CKE1

in SCR. At this time, the minimum clock pulse width can be made the specified width. Figure

12.34 shows the timing for fixing the clock output level. In this example, GM is set to 1, CKE1 is

cleared to 0, and the CKE0 bit is controlled.

Specified pulse width

SCK

CKE0

Specified pulse width

Figure 12.34 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 437 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

When turning on the power or switching between Smart Card interface mode and software standby

mode, the following procedures should be followed in order to maintain the clock duty.

Powering On: To secure clock duty from power-on, the following switching procedure should be

followed.

1. The initial state is port input and high impedance. Use a pull-up resistor or pull-down

resistor to fix the potential.

2. Fix the SCK pin to the specified output level with the CKE1 bit in SCR.

3. Set SMR and SCMR, and switch to smart card mode operation.

4. Set the CKE0 bit in SCR to 1 to start clock output.

When changing from smart card interface mode to software standby mode:

1. Set the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) corresponding to the SCK pin

to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode.

2. Write 0 to the TE bit and RE bit in the serial control register (SCR) to halt transmit/receive

operation. At the same time, set the CKE1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in

software standby mode.

3. Write 0 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to halt the clock.

4. Wait for one serial clock period.

During this interval, clock output is fixed at the specified level, with the duty preserved.

5. Make the transition to the software standby state.

When returning to smart card interface mode from software standby mode:

1. Exit the software standby state.

2. Write 1 to the CKE0 bit in SCR and output the clock. Signal generation is started with the

normal duty.

Software

standby

Normal operation Normal operation

Figure 12.35 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 438 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.8 SCI Select Function (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

The SCI_0 supports the SCI select function which allows clock synchronous communication

between master LSI and one of multiple slave LSI. Figure 12.36 shows an example of

communication using the SCI select function. Figure 12.37 shows the operation.

The master LSI can communicate with slave LSI_A by bringing SEL_A and SEL_B signals low

and high, respectively. In this case, the TxD0_B pin of the slave LSI_B is brought high-

impedance state and the internal SCK0_A signal is fixed high. This halts the communication

operation of slave LSI_B. The master LSI can communicate with slave LSI_B by bringing the

SEL_A and SEL_B signals high and low, respectively.

The slave LSI detects the selection by receiving the low level input from the IRQ7 pin and

immediately executes data transmission/reception processing.

Note: The selection signals (SEL_A and SEL_B) of the LSI must be switched while the serial

clock (M_SCK) is high after the end bit of the transmit data has been send. Note that one

selection signal can be brought low at the same time.

Interrupt

controller

TSR0_ARSR0_A

Transmission/

reception

control

Slave LSI_A (This LSI)Master LSI

SCK0_A

SCK0_B

C/A = CKE1 = SSE = 1

Slave LSI_B (This LSI)

SEL_A IRQ7_A

IRQ7_BSEL_B

M_TxD RxD0_A

TxD0_A

RxD0_B

TxD0_B

SCK0

M_RxD

M_SCK

Figure 12.36 Example of Communication Using the SCI Select Function

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 439 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

M_SCK

[Master LSI]

[Slave LSI_A]

Communication between master LSI

and slave LSI_A Communication between master LSI

and slave LSI_B

M_TxD

M_RxD

SEL_A

SEL_B

IRQ7_A

(SEL_A)

[Slave LSI_B]

IRQ7_B

(SEL_B)

D0 D1 D7

SCK0_A

RSR0_A

TxD0_A

SCK0_B

RSR0_B

TxD0_B

Hi-Z

Hi-Z Hi-Z

D0 D6 D7

Period of M_SCK = high

Fixed high level

Hi-Z

Figure 12.37 Example of Communication Using the SCI Select Function

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 440 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.9 Interrupts

12.9.1 Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode

Table 12.12 shows the interrupt sources in normal serial communication interface mode. A

different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, and individual interrupt sources can

be enabled or disabled using the enable bits in SCR.

When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag

in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt can activate the DMAC to

perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data is transferred by the

DMAC.

When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER,

PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt

request can activate the DMAC to transfer data. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when

data is transferred by the DMAC.

A TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 and the TEIE bit is set to 1. If a TEI

interrupt and a TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt has priority for

acceptance. However, if the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared simultaneously by the TXI

interrupt routine, the SCI cannot branch to the TEI interrupt routine later.

Table 12.12 SCI Interrupt Sources

Channel Name Interrupt Source Interrupt Flag DMAC Activation Priority*

ERI0 Receive Error ORER, FER, PER Not possible High

RXI0 Receive Data Full RDRF Possible

TXI0 Transmit Data Empty TDRE Possible

TEI0 Transmission End TEND Not possible

2 ERI2 Receive Error ORER, FER, PER Not possible

RXI2 Receive Data Full RDRF Not possible

TXI2 Transmit Data Empty TDRE Not possible

TEI2 Transmission End TEND Not possible Low

Note: * This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priorities

can be changed by the interrupt controller.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 441 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.9.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode

Table 12.13 shows the interrupt sources in Smart Card interface mode. The transmit end interrupt

(TEI) request cannot be used in this mode.

Note: In case of block transfer mode, see section 12.9.1, Interrupts in Normal Serial

Communication Interface Mode.

Table 12.13 Interrupt Sources in Smart Card Interface Mode

Channel

Name

Interrupt Source

Interrupt Flag

DMAC

Activation

Priority*

ERI0 Receive Error, detection ORER, PER, ERS Not possible High

RXI0 Receive Data Full RDRF Possible

TXI0 Transmit Data Empty TEND Possible

2 ERI2 Receive Error, detection ORER, PER, ERS Not possible

RXI2 Receive Data Full RDRF Not possible

TXI2 Transmit Data Empty TEND Not possible Low

Note: * Indicates the initial state immediately after a reset.

Priorities in channels can be changed by the interrupt controller.

12.10 Usage Notes

12.10.1 Module Stop Mode Setting

SCI operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting

is for SCI operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For

details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.

12.10.2 Break Detection and Processing (Asynchronous Mode Only)

When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value

directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, setting the FER flag, and possibly

the PER flag. Note that as the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if

the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 442 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.10.3 Mark State and Break Detection (Asynchronous Mode Only)

When TE is 0, the TxD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are

determined by DR and DDR. This can be used to set the TxD pin to mark state (high level) or send

a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state until TE

is set to 1, set both DDR and DR to 1. As TE is cleared to 0 at this point, the TxD pin becomes an

I/O port, and 1 is output from the TxD pin. To send a break during serial transmission, first set

PCR to 1 and PDR to 0, and then clear TE to 0. When TE is cleared to 0, the transmitter is

initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is

output from the TxD pin.

12.10.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)

Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if

the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting

transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared

to 0.

12.10.5 Restrictions on Use of DMAC

• When an external clock source is used as the serial clock, the transmit clock should not be

input until at least 5 φ clock cycles after TDR is updated by the DMAC. Misoperation may

occur if the transmit clock is input within 4 φ clocks after TDR is updated. (figure 12.38)

• When RDR is read by the DMAC, be sure to set the activation source to the relevant SCI

reception end interrupt (RXI).

LSB

Serial data

SCK

D1 D3 D4 D5D2 D6 D7

Note: When operating on an external clock, set t>4 clocks.

TDRE

Figure 12.38 Example of Clocked Synchronous Transmission by DMAC

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 443 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.10.6 Operation in Case of Mode Transition

• Transmission

Operation should be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a module

stop mode, software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition.

TSR, TDR, and SSR are reset. The output pin states in module stop mode, software standby

mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode depend on the port settings, and

becomes high-level output after the relevant mode is cleared. If a transition is made during

transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined. When transmitting without

changing the transmit mode after the relevant mode is cleared, transmission can be started by

setting TE to 1 again, and performing the following sequence:

SSR read -> TDR write -> TDRE clearance. To transmit with a different transmit mode after

clearing the relevant mode, the procedure must be started again from initialization. Figure

12.39 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during transmission. Port pin states are

shown in figures 12.40 and 12.41.

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 444 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Read TEND flag in SSR

TE= 0

Transition to software

standby mode, etc.

Exit from software

standby mode, etc.

Change

operating mode? No

All data

transmitted?

TEND = 1

Yes

[1]

[3]

[2]

TE = 1Initialization

Data being transmitted is interrupted.

After exiting software standby

mode, etc., normal CPU transmission

is possible by setting TE to 1, reading

SSR, writing TDR, and clearing TDRE

to 0.

If TIE and TEIE are set to 1, clear

them to 0 in the same way.

Includes module stop mode, watch mode,

subactive mode, and subsleep mode.

[1]

[2]

[3]

Figure 12.39 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission

SCK output pin

TE bit

TxD output pin Port input/output High outputPort input/output High output Start Stop

Start of transmission End of

transmission

Port input/output

SCI TxD output Port SCI TxD

output

Port

Transition

to software

standby

Exit from

software

standby

Figure 12.40 Port Pin State of Asynchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 445 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TE bit

SCK output pin

TxD output pin Port input/output High output

Final TxD

bit retention

Port input/output

PortPort SCI TxD output SCI TxD

output

High output*

Port input/output

Start of transmission End of

transmission

Transition

to software

standby

Exit from

software

standby

Note: * Initialized by the software standby.

Figure 12.41 Port Pin State of Synchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 446 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Reception

Receive operation should be stopped (by clearing RE to 0) before making a module stop mode,

software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition. RSR, RDR,

and SSR are reset. If a transition is made without stopping operation, the data being received

will be invalid.

To continue receiving without changing the reception mode after the relevant mode is cleared,

set RE to 1 before starting reception. To receive with a different receive mode, the procedure

must be started again from initialization.

Figure 12.42 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception.

RE = 0

Transition to software

standby mode, etc.

Read receive data in RDR

Read RDRF flag in SSR

Exit from software

standby mode, etc.

Change

operating mode? No

RDRF = 1

Yes

No [1]

[2]

RE = 1Initialization

Receive data being received becomes invalid.

Includes module stop mode, watch mode,

subactive mode, and subsleep mode.

[1]

[2]

Figure 12.42 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 447 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

12.10.7 Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function:

When switching the SCK pin function to the output port function (high-level output) by making

the following settings while DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1

(synchronous mode), low-level output occurs for one half-cycle.

1. End of serial data transmission

2. TE bit = 0

3. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output

4. Occurrence of low-level output (see figure 12.43)

Bit 7Bit 6

1. End of transmission 4. Low-level output

3.C/A= 0

2.TE= 0

Half-cycle low-level output

SCK/port

Data

C/A

CKE1

CKE0

Figure 12.43 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function

Section 12 Serial Communication Interface

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 448 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Sample Procedure for Avoiding Low-Level Output: As this sample procedure temporarily

places the SCK pin in the input state, the SCK/port pin should be pulled up beforehand with an

external circuit.

With DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1, make the following

settings in the order shown.

1. End of serial data transmission

2. TE bit = 0

3. CKE1 bit = 1

4. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output

5. CKE1 bit = 0

Bit 7Bit 6

1. End of transmission

3.CKE1= 1 5.CKE1= 0

4.C/A= 0

2.TE= 0

High-level output

SCK/port

Data

C/A

CKE1

CKE0

Figure 12.44 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function

(Example of Preventing Low-Level Output)

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 449 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

The HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and HD64F2217CU incorporate a boundary

scan function, which is a serial I/O interface based on the JTAG (Joint Test Action Group,

IEEEStd.1149.1 and IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture). Figure

13.1 shows the block diagram of the boundary scan function.

13.1 Features

• Five test signals

⎯ TCK, TDI, TDO, TMS, TRST

• Six test modes supported

⎯ BYAPASS, SAMPLE/PRELOAD, EXTEST, CLAMP, HIGHZ, IDCODE

• Boundary scan function cannot be performed on the following pins.

⎯ Power supply pins: VCC, VSS, Vref, PLLVCC, PLLVSS, DrVCC, DrVSS

⎯ Clock signals: EXTAL, XTAL, OSC2, OSC1

⎯ Analog signals: P40 to P43, P96, P97, USD+, USD-

⎯ Boundary scan signals: TCK, TDI, TDO, TMS, TRST

⎯ H-UDI control signal: EMLE

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 450 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

IDCODE

BSCANR

(Boundary scan cell chain)

TDO

MUX

TCK

TMS

TRST

Legend:

BSCANR:

IDCODE:

BYPASS:

INSTR:

TAP:

Boundary scan register

IDCODE register

BYPASS register

Instruction register

Test access port

TDI

BYPASS

INSTR

TAP controller

MUX

Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Boundary Scan Function

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 451 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

13.2 Pin Configuration

Table 13.1 shows the I/O pins used in the boundary scan function.

Table 13.1 Pin Configuration

Pin Name I/O Function

TMS Input Test Mode Select

Controls the TAP controller which is a 16-state Finite State

Machine.

The TMS input value at the rising edge of TCK determines the

status transition direction on the TAP controller.

The TMS is fixed high when the boundary scan function is not

used.

The protocol is based on JTAG standard (IEEE Std.1149.1).

This pin has a pull-up resistor.

TCK Input Test Clock

A clock signal for the boundary scan function.

When the boundary scan function is used, input a clock of

50% duty to this pin.

This pin has a pull-up resistor.

TDI Input Test Data Input

A data input signal for the boundary scan function.

Data input from the TDI is latched at the rising edge of TCK.

TDI is fixed high when the boundary scan function is not used.

This pin has a pull-up register.

TDO Output Test Data Output

A data output signal for the boundary scan function. Data

output from the TDO changes at the falling edge of TCK. The

output driver of the TDO is driven only when it is necessary

only in Shift-IR or Shift-DR states, and is brought to the high-

impedance state when not necessary.

TRST Input Test Reset

Asynchronously resets the TAP controller when TRST is

brought low.

The user must apply power-on reset signal specific to the

boundary scan function when the power is supplied. (For

details on signal design, refer to section 13.5, Usage Notes.)

This pin has a pull-up resister.

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 452 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

13.3 Register Descriptions

The boundary scan function has the following registers. These registers cannot be accessed by the

CPU.

• Instruction register (INSTR)

• IDCODE register (IDCODE)

• BYPASS register (BYPASS)

• Boundary scan register (BSCANR)

13.3.1 Instruction Register (INSTR)

INSTR is a 3-bit register. At initialization, this register is specified to IDCODE mode. When

TRST is pulled low, or when the TAP controller is in the Test-Logic-Reset state, INSTR is

initialized. INSTR can be written by the serial data input from the TDI. If more than three bits of

instruction is input from the TDI, INSTR stores the last three bits of serial data.

If a command reserved in INSTR is used, the correct operation cannot be guaranteed.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

2 TI2 1 —

1 TI1 0 —

Test Instruction Bits

Instruction configuration is shown in table 13.2.

0 TI0 1 —

Table 13.2 Instruction Configuration

Bit 2 Bit1 Bit 0

TI2 TI1 TI0 Instruction

0 0 0 EXTEST

0 0 1 SAMPLE/PRELOAD

0 1 0 CLAMP

0 1 1 HIGHZ

1 0 0 Reserved

1 0 1 IDCODE (initial value)

1 1 0 Reserved

1 1 1 BYPASS

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 453 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

EXTEST: The EXTEST instruction is used to test external circuits when this LSI is installed on

the print circuit board. If this instruction is executed, output pins are used to output test data

(specified by the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction) from the boundary scan register to the print

circuit board, and input pins are used to input test results.

SAMPLE/PRELOAD: The SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction is used to input data from the LSI

internal circuits to the boundary scan register, output data from scan path, and reload the data to

the scan path. While this instruction is executed, input signals are directly input to the LSI and

output signals are also directly output to the external circuits. The LSI system circuit is not

affected by this instruction.

In SAMPLE operation, the boundary scan register latches the snap shot of data transferred from

input pins to internal circuit or data transferred from internal circuit to output pins. The latched

data is read from the scan path. The scan register latches the snap data at the rising edge of the

TCK in Capture-DR state. The scan register latches snap shot without affecting the LSI normal

operation.

In PRELOAD operation, initial value is written from the scan path to the parallel output latch of

the boundary scan register prior to the EXTEST instruction execution. If the EXTEST is executed

without executing this RELOAD operation, undefined values are output from the beginning to the

end (transfer to the output latch) of the EXTEST sequence. (In EXTEST instruction, output

parallel latches are always output to the output pins.)

CLAMP: When the CLAMP instruction is selected output pins output the boundary scan register

value which was specified by the SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction in advance. While the CLAMP

instruction is selected, the status of boundary scan register is maintained regardless of the TAP

controller state. BYPASS is connected between TDI and TDO, the same operation as BYPASS

instruction can be achieved.

HIGHZ: When the HIGHZ instruction is selected, all outputs enter high-impedance state. While

this instruction is selected, the status of boundary scan register is maintained regardless of the TAP

controller state. BYPASS resistor is connected between TDI and TDO, the same operation as

BYPASS instruction can be achieved.

IDCODE: When the IDCODE instruction is selected, IDCODE register value is output to the

TDO in Shift-DR state of TAP controller. In this case, IDCODE register value is output from the

LSB. During this instruction execution, test circuit does not affect the system circuit. INSTR is

initialized by the IDCODE instruction in Test-Logic-Reset state of TAP controller.

BYPASS: The BYPASS instruction is a standard instruction necessary to operate bypass register.

The BYPASS instruction improves the serial data transfer speed by bypassing the scan path.

During this instruction execution, test circuit does not affect the system circuit.

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 454 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

13.3.2 IDCODE Register (IDCODE)

IDCODE register is a 32-bit register. If INSTR is set to IDCODE mode, IDCODE is connected

between TDI and TDO. The HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU and HD64F2217CU

output fixed codes H'002A200F from the TDO. Serial data cannot be written to IDCODE register

through TDI. Table 13.3 shows the IDCODE register configuration.

Table 13.3 IDCODE Register Configuration

Bits 31 to 28 27 to 12 11 to 1 0

HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU and

HD64F2217CU codes

0000 0000 0010 1010 0010 0000 0000 111 1

Contents Version

(4 bits)

Part No.

(16 bits)

Product No.

(11 bits)

Fixed code

(1 bit)

13.3.3 BYPASS Register (BYPASS)

BYPASS is a 1-bit register. If INSTR is specified to BYPASS mode, CLAMP mode, or HIGHZ

mode, BYPASS is connected between TDI and TDO.

13.3.4 Boundary Scan Register (BSCANR)

BSCAN is a 199-bit shift register assigned on the pins to control input/output pins.

The I/O pins consists of three bits (IN, Control, OUT), input pins 1 bit (IN), and output pins 1 bit

(OUT) of shift registers. The boundary scan test based on the JTAG standard can be performed by

using instructions listed in table 13.2. Table 13.4 shows the correspondence between the LSI pins

and boundary scan registers. (In table 13.4, Control indicates the high active pin. By specifying

Control to high, the pin is driven by OUT. ) Figure 13.2 shows the boundary scan register

configuration example.

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 455 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

I/O pin

Control

OUT

TDI pin

TDO pin

Figure 13.2 Boundary Scan Register Configuration

Table 13.4 Correspondence between LSI Pins and Boundary Scan Register

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

Pin No.

BP-112

BP-112V

Pin No. Pin Name I/O Bit Name

From TDI

89 A6 PF7/φ IN 198

Control 197

OUT 196

91 D6 PF6/AS IN 195

Control 194

OUT 193

92 A5 PF5/RD IN 192

Control 191

OUT 190

93 B5 PF4/HWR IN 189

Control 188

OUT 187

94 C5 PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 IN 186

Control 185

OUT 184

95 A4 PF2/WAIT IN 183

Control 182

OUT 181

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 456 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

Pin No.

BP-112

BP-112V

Pin No. Pin Name I/O Bit Name

96 D5 PF1/BACK IN 180

Control 179

OUT 178

97 B4 PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 IN 177

Control 176

OUT 175

98 A3 PA3/A19/SCK2 IN 174

Control 173

OUT 172

99 C4 PA2/A18/RxD2 IN 171

Control 170

OUT 169

100 B3 PA1/A17/TxD2 IN 168

Control 167

OUT 166

1 B2 PA0/A16 IN 165

Control 164

OUT 163

2 B1 P10/TIOCA0/A20 IN 162

Control 161

OUT 160

3 D4 P11/TIOCB0/A21 IN 159

Control 158

OUT 157

4 C2 P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 IN 156

Control 155

OUT 154

5 C1 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 IN 153

Control 152

OUT 151

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 457 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

Pin No.

BP-112

BP-112V

Pin No. Pin Name I/O Bit Name

6 D3 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 IN 150

Control 149

OUT 148

7 D2 P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC IN 147

Control 146

OUT 145

8 D1 P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 IN 144

Control 143

OUT 142

9 E4 P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD IN 141

Control 140

OUT 139

10 E3 PC0/A0 IN 138

Control 137

OUT 136

11 E1 PC1/A1 IN 135

Control 134

OUT 133

12 E2 PC2/A2 IN 132

Control 131

OUT 130

13 F3 PC3/A3 IN 129

Control 128

OUT 127

14 F1 MD0 IN 126

15 F2 MD1 IN 125

16 F4 MD2 IN 124

17 G1 PC4/A4 IN 123

Control 122

OUT 121

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 458 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

Pin No.

BP-112

BP-112V

Pin No. Pin Name I/O Bit Name

18 G2 PC5/A5 IN 120

Control 119

OUT 118

19 G3 PC6/A6 IN 117

Control 116

OUT 115

20 H1 PC7/A7 IN 114

Control 113

OUT 112

21 G4 USPND/TMOW OUT 111

22 H2 P30/TxD0 IN 110

Control 109

OUT 108

23 J1 P31/RxD0 IN 107

Control 106

OUT 105

24 H3 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 IN 104

Control 103

OUT 102

25 J2 PG1/CS3/IRQ7 IN 101

Control 100

OUT 99

26 K2 PG2/CS2 IN 98

Control 97

OUT 96

27 L2 PG3/CS1 IN 95

Control 94

OUT 93

28 H4 PG4/CS0 IN 92

Control 91

OUT 90

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 459 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

Pin No.

BP-112

BP-112V

Pin No. Pin Name I/O Bit Name

29 K3 VBUS IN 89

30 L3 P36 IN 88

Control 87

OUT 86

37 K5 PB0/A8 IN 85

Control 84

OUT 83

38 J6 PB1/A9 IN 82

Control 81

OUT 80

39 L6 PB2/A10 IN 79

Control 78

OUT 77

40 K6 PB3/A11 IN 76

Control 75

OUT 74

47 L9 UBPM IN 73

49 K9 PB4/A12 IN 72

Control 71

OUT 70

50 L10 PB5/A13 IN 69

Control 68

OUT 67

51 K10 PB6/A14 IN 66

Control 65

OUT 64

52 K11 PB7/A15 IN 63

Control 62

OUT 61

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 460 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

Pin No.

BP-112

BP-112V

Pin No. Pin Name I/O Bit Name

55 H9 P74/MRES IN 60

Control 59

OUT 58

56 H10 P71/CS5 IN 57

Control 56

OUT 55

57 H11 STBY IN 54

58 G8 RES IN 53

63 F11 P70/CS4 IN 52

Control 51

OUT 50

64 F10 PE0/D0 IN 49

Control 48

OUT 47

65 F8 PE1/D1 IN 46

Control 45

OUT 44

66 E11 PE2/D2 IN 43

Control 42

OUT 41

67 E10 PE3/D3 IN 40

Control 39

OUT 38

68 E9 PE4/D4 IN 37

Control 36

OUT 35

69 D11 PE5/D5 IN 34

Control 33

OUT 32

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 461 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

Pin No.

BP-112

BP-112V

Pin No. Pin Name I/O Bit Name

70 E8 PE6/D6 IN 31

Control 30

OUT 29

71 D10 PE7/D7 IN 28

Control 27

OUT 26

72 C11 PD0/D8 IN 25

Control 24

OUT 23

73 D9 PD1/D9 IN 22

Control 21

OUT 20

74 C10 PD2/D10 IN 19

Control 18

OUT 17

75 B11 PD3/D11 IN 16

Control 15

OUT 14

76 B10 PD4/D12 IN 13

Control 12

OUT 11

77 A10 PD5/D13 IN 10

Control 9

OUT 8

78 D8 PD6/D14 IN 7

Control 6

OUT 5

79 B9 PD7/D15 IN 4

Control 3

OUT 2

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 462 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

TFP-100G

TFP-100GV

Pin No.

BP-112

BP-112V

Pin No. Pin Name I/O Bit Name

80 A9 FWE IN 1

81 C8 NMI IN 0

to TDO

13.4 Boundary Scan Function Operation

13.4.1 TAP Controller

Figure 13.3 shows the TAP controller status transition diagram, based on the JTAG standard.

Test-Logic-Reset

Run-Test/Idle

Select-DR

Capture-DR

Shift-DR

Exit1-DR

Update-DR

Pause-DR

Exit2-DR

Select-IR

Capture-IR

Shift-IR

Exit1-IR

Update-IR

Pause-IR

Exit2-IR

Figure 13.3 TAP Controller Status Transition

Note: The transition condition is the TMS value at the rising edge of TCK. The TDI value is

sampled at the rising edge of the TCK and shifted at the falling edge of the TCK. The

TDO value changes at the falling edge of the TCK. In addition, TDO is high-impedance

state in a state other than Shift-DR or Shift-IR state. If TRST is 0, Test-Logic-Reset state

is entered asynchronously with the TCK.

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 463 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

13.5 Usage Notes

1. When using the boundary scan function, clear TRST to 0 at power-on and after the tRESW time

has elapsed set TRST to 1 and set TCK, TMS, and TDI appropriately. During normal operation

when the boundary scan function is not used, set TCK, TMS, and TDI to Hi-Z, clear TRST to 0

at power-on, and after the tRESW time has elapsed set TRST to 1 or to Hi-Z. These pins are

pulled up internally, so care must be taken in standby mode because breakthrough current flow

can occur if there is a potential difference between the pin input voltage value when set to 1

and the power supply voltage Vcc.

2. The following must be noted on the power-on reset signal applied to the TRST pin.

• Reset signal must be applied at power-on.

• TRST must be separated in order not to affect the system operation.

• TRST must be separated from the system circuitry in order not to affect the system

operation.

• System circuitry must also be separated from the TRST in order not to affect TRST

operation as shown in figure 13.4.

Board edge pin

System

reset

TRST

RES

LSI

Power-on

reset circuit

Figure 13.4 Recommended Reset Signal Design

3. TCK clock speed should be slower than system clock frequency.

4. In serial communication, data is input or output from the LSB as shown in figure 13.5.

Boundary scan register

Bit n

Bit n - 1

Bit 1

Bit 0

TDI

TDO

Figure 13.5 Serial Data Input/Output

Section 13 Boundary Scan Function

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 464 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5. If a pin with pull-up function is SAMPLEed with pull-up function enabled, the corresponding

IN register is set to 1. In this case, the corresponding Control register must be cleared to 0.

6. If a pin with open-drain function is SAMPLEed while its open-drain function is enabled and

while the corresponding OUT register is set to 1, the corresponding Control register is cleared

to 0 (the pin status is Hi-Z). If the pin is SAMPLEed while the corresponding OUT register is

cleared to 0, the corresponding Control register is set to 1 (the pin status is 0).

7. If EXTEST, CLAMP, or HIGHZ state is entered, this LSI enters guarded mode such as

hardware standby mode (RES = STBY = 0). Before entering normal operating mode from

EXTEST, CLAMP, or HIGHZ state, specify RES, STBY, FWE, and MD2 to MD0 pin to the

designated mode.

8. The EMLE pin must be cleared to 0. When the pin is set to 1, this chip functions as High-

performance user debugging interface (H-UDI).

EMLE Pin Chip State

0 Normal operation, boundary scan function

1 High-performance user debugging interface (H-UDI)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 465 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

This LSI incorporates a USB function module complying with USB standard version 1.1. Figure

14.1 shows the block diagram of the USB.

14.1 Features

• USB standard version 2.0 full speed mode (12 Mbps) support

• Bus-powered mode or self-powered mode is selectable via the USB specific pin (UBPM)

• On-chip PLL circuit to generate the USB operation clock (24 MHz × 2 = 48 MHz, 16 MHz × 3

= 48 MHz)

• On-chip bus transceiver

• Standard commands are processed automatically by hardware

⎯ Only Set_Descriptor, Get_Descriptor, Class/VendorCommand, and SynchFrame

commands should be processed by software

• Current Configuration value can be checked by Set_Configuration interrupt

• Three transfer modes supported (Control, Bulk, Interrupt)

• Configuration of four endpoints; EP0, EP1, EP2, and EP3

Configuration 1 Interface0 Alternate 0

Total 456-byte FIFO incorporated

EP0s (Control_setup transfer, FIFO 8 bytes)

EP0i (Control_in transfer, FIFO 64 bytes)

EP0o (Control_out tranfer, FIFO 64 bytes)

EP1 (Bulk_in transfer, FIFO 64 bytes × 2 [dual-buffer confifugraion])

EP2 (Bulk_out transfer, FIFO 64 bytes × 2 [dual-buffer confifugraion])

EP3 (Interrup_in transfer, FIFO 64 bytes)

• 16 kinds of interrupts

⎯ Suspend/resume interrupt source can be assigned for IRQ6

⎯ Each interrupt source except the suspend/resume interrupt source can be assigned for

EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1 via registers

• DMA transfer interface

⎯ DMA transfer is enabled for the Bulk transfer data of EP1 and EP2

• 8-bit bus (3 cycle access timing) connected to the external bus interface

⎯ Internal registers are addressed to a part of area 6 of external address (H'C00000 to

H'DFFFFF)

⎯ Address H'C00100 to H'DFFFFF is for USB reserved area and thus access prohibited.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 466 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Note: In this section, power-down mode represents watch, subactive, subsleep, and software

standby modes.

Registers

456-byte FIFO

EP3

UDC synchronization

circuit

Interface

[Connection/disconnection]

[Internal bus]

[Main clock]

[Interrupt request signal]

[DMA transfer request signal]

[Power mode selection]

Peripheral data bus

Peripheral address bus

Peripheral bus control

signal

EXIRQ0, EXIRQ1

DREQ0, DREQ1

IRQ6

(12MHz)

(48MHz)

VBUS

UBPM

UDC core

PLL

curcuit

UDC:

EP0s:

EP0i:

EP0o:

USB Device Controller

Endpoint 0 setup FIFO

Endpoint 0 In FIFO

Endpoint 0 Out FIFO

EP1:

EP2:

EP3:

End Point 1 FIFO

End Point 2 FIFO

End Point 3 FIFO

Legend:

EP0o

EP1EP0s

EP2EP0i

USB

On-chip

transceiver [Data]

[Power supply]

DrVSS

DrVCC

USPND

USD+

USD-

D+

D-

Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of USB

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 467 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 14.1 shows the USB pin configuration.

Table 14.1 Pin Configuration

Pin Name I/O Function

USD+

USD-

I/O I/O pin for USB data

DrVCC Input USB internal transceiver power supply pin

DrVSS Input USB internal transceiver ground pin

VBUS Input USB cable connection/disconnection detection signal pin

UBPM Input USB bus-powered/self-powered mode set pin

When USB is used in bus-powered mode, UBPM must be fixed low.

When USB is used in self-powered mode, UBPM must be fixed high.

USPND Output USB suspend output pin

When USB enters the suspend state, USPND is set to high.

14.3 Register Descriptions

The USB has the following registers.

• USB control register (UCTLR)

• USB DMAC transfer request register (UDMAR)

• USB device resume register (UDRR)

• USB trigger register 0 (UTRG0)

• USB FIFO clear register 0 (UFCLR0)

• USB endpoint stall register 0 (UESTL0)

• USB endpoint stall register 1 (UESTL1)

• USB endpoint data register 0s (UEDR0s) [for Setup data reception]

• USB endpoint data register 0i (UEDR0i) [for Control_in data transmission]

• USB endpoint data register 0o (UEDR0o) [for Control_out data reception]

• USB endpoint data register 3 (UEDR3) [for Interrupt_in data transmission]

• USB endpoint data register 1 (UEDR1) [for Bulk_in data transmission]

• USB endpoint data register 2 (UEDR2) [for Bulk_out data reception]

• USB endpoint receive data size register 0o (UESZ0o) [for Control _out data reception]

• USB endpoint receive data size register 2 (UESZ2) [for Bulk_out data reception]

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 468 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• USB interrupt flag register 0 (UIFR0)

• USB interrupt flag register 1 (UIFR1)

• USB interrupt flag register 3 (UIFR3)

• USB interrupt enable register 0 (UIER0)

• USB interrupt enable register 1 (UIER1)

• USB interrupt enable register 3 (UIER3)

• USB interrupt select register 0 (UISR0)

• USB interrupt select register 1 (UISR1)

• USB interrupt select register 3 (UISR3)

• USB data status register (UDSR)

• USB Configuration value register (UCVR)

• USB test register 0 (UTSTR0)

• USB test register 1 (UTSTR1)

• USB test registers 2 and A to F (UTSTR2, UTSTRA to UTSTRF)

• Module stop control register B (MSTPCRB)

• Extended module stop register (EXMDLSTP)

14.3.1 USB Control Register (UCTLR)

UCTLR is used to select the USB operation clock and control the USB module internal reset.

UCTLR can be read from or written to even when the USB module stop 2 bit (MSTPB0) in

MSTPCRB is 1. For details on UCTLR setting procedure, refer to section 14.5, Communication

Operation.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 — 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

6 TMOWE 0 R/W TMOW Pin Enable

0: The USPND/TMOW pin outputs USPND of USB.

1: The USPND/TMOW pin outputs TMOW of RTC.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 469 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

UCKS3

UCKS2

UCKS1

UCKS0

0 R/W USB Operation Clock Select 3 to 0

These bits control the on-chip PLL, which generates

the USB operation clock (48 MHz). When UCKS3 to

UCKS0 are 0000, the PLL circuit stops and thus the

USB operation clock must be selected according to

the clock source.

The on-chip PLL circuit starts operating after the USB

module stop 2 bit has been cancelled. In addition, the

USB operation clock is supplied to the UDC core after

the USB operating clock stabilization time has been

passed. The completion timing of the USB operating

clock stabilization time can be detected by the

CK48READY flag in UIFR3.

UCKS0 to UCKS3 muse be written while the USB

module stop 2 bit (MSTPB0) is 1.

0000: USB operation clock stops (PLL stops)

0001: Reserved

001×: Reserved

010×: Reserved

0110: Uses a clock (48 MHz) generated by doubling

the 24-MHz main oscillation by the PLL.

0111: Uses a clock (48 MHz) generated by tripling the

16-MHz main oscillation by the PLL.

1×××: Reserved

The USB operating clock stabilization time is 2 ms.

Legend:

×: Don't care

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 470 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

1 UIFRST 1 R/W USB Interface Software Reset

Controls USB module internal reset. When the

UIFRST bit is set to 1, the USB internal modules other

than UCTLR, UIER3, and the CK48READY bit in

UIFR3 are all reset. At initialization, the UIFRST bit

must be cleared to 0 after the USB operating clock (48

MHz) stabilization time has passed following the

clearing of the USB module stop 2 bit.

0: Sets the USB internal modules to the operating

state. (At initialization, this bit must be cleared after

the USB operating clock stabilization time has

passed.)

1: Sets the USB internal modules other than UCTLR,

UIER3, and the CK48READY bit in UIFR3 to the

reset state.

If the UIFRST bit is set to 1 after it is cleared to 0, the

UDCRST bit should also be set to 1 simultaneously.

0 UDCRST 1 R/W UDC Core Software Reset

Controls reset of the UDC core in the USB module.

When the UDCRST bit is set to 1, the UDC core is

reset and the USB bus synchronization operation

stops. At initialization, UDCRST must be cleared to 0

after D+ pull-up by the port (P36) control following the

clearing of the UIFRST bit. In the suspend state, to

maintain the internal state of the UDC core, enter

power-down mode after setting the USB module stop

2 bit with the UDCRST bit to be maintained to 0. After

VBUS disconnection detection, UDCRST must be set

to 1.

0: Sets the UDC core in the USB module to operating

state. (At initialization, UDCRST must be cleared

to 0 after D+ pull-up by the port control following

the clearing of the UIFRST bit.)

1: Sets the UDC core in the USB module to reset

state. (In the suspend state, UDCRST must not be

set to 1; after VBUS disconnection detection,

UDCRST must be set to 1.)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 471 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.2 USB DMAC Transfer Request Register (UDMAR)

UDMAR is set when data transfer by means of a USB request of the on-chip DMAC is performed

for data registers UEDR1 and UEDR2 corresponding to EP1 and EP2 respectively used for Bulk

transfer. For the DMAC transfer, set DREQ0 and DREQ1 separately. If DREQ0 and DREQ1

usage overlaps, the USB cannot operate correctly. For details on DMAC transfer, refer to section

14.6, DMA Transfer Specifications.

Note: As the DREQ signal is not used in the data transfer by auto request of the on-chip DMAC,

set UDMAR to H'00.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 4 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

EP2T1

EP2T0

0 R/W EP2 DMAC Transfer Request Select 1, 0

00: Does not request EP2 DMAC transfer

01: Reserved

10: Requests EP2 DMAC transfer by DREQ0

11: Requests EP2 DMAC transfer by DREQ1

EP1T1

EP1T0

0 R/W EP1 DMAC Transfer Request Select 1, 0

00: Does not request EP1 DMAC transfer

01: Reserved

10: Requests EP1 DMAC transfer by DREQ0

11: Requests EP1 DMAC transfer by DREQ1

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 472 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.3 USB Device Resume Register (UDRR)

UDRR indicates the enabled or disabled state of remote wakeup by the host, and executes the

remote wakeup of the USB modules in the suspend state.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 2 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

1 RWUPs 0 R Remote Wakeup Status

Indicates the enabled or disabled state of remote

wakeup by the host. This bit is a status bit and cannot

be written to. If the remote wakeup from the host is

disabled by Device_Remote_Wakeup through the

Set_Feature/Clear _Feature request, this bit is cleared

to 0. If the remote wakeup is enabled, this bit is set to

0: Remote wakeup disabled state

1: Remote wakeup enabled state

0 DVR 0 W Device Resume

Cancels the suspend state (executes the remote

wakeup). This bit can be written to 1 and is always

read as 0. Before executing the remote wakeup,

power-down mode or USB module stop mode must be

cancelled to provide a clock for the USB module.

0: Performs no operation

1: Cancels the suspend state (executes the remote

wakeup)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 473 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.4 USB Trigger Register 0 (UTRG0)

UTRG0 is a one-shot register to generate triggers to the FIFO for each endpoint EP0 to EP3. For

details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7, 6 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

5 EP2RDFN 0 W EP2 Read Complete

0: Performs no operation.

1: Writes 1 to this bit after reading data for EP2 OUT

FIFO. EP2 has a dual-FIFO configuration. This

trigger is generated to the currently effective FIFO.

4 EP1PKTE 0 W EP1 Packet Enable

0: Performs no operation.

1: Generates a trigger to enable the transmission to

EP1 IN FIFO. EP1 has a dual-FIFO configuration.

This trigger is generated to the currently effective

FIFO.

3 EP3PKTE 0 W EP3 Packet Enable

0: Performs no operation.

1: Generates a trigger to enable the transmission to

EP3 IN FIFO.

2 EP0oRDFN 0 W EP0o Read Complete

0: Performs no operation.

1: Writes 1 to this bit after reading data for EP0o OUT

FIFO. This trigger enables EP0o to receive the

next packet.

1 EP0iPKTE 0 W EP0i Packet Enable

0: Performs no operation.

1: Generates a trigger to enable the transmission to

EP0i IN FIFO.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 474 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

0 EP0sRDFN 0 W EP0s Read Complete

0: Performs no operation. A NAK handshake is

returned in response to transmit/receive requests in

the data stage until 1 is written to this bit.

1: Writes 1 to this bit after reading data for EP0s

command FIFO. After receiving the setup command,

this trigger enables the next packet in the data stage

to be received by EP0i and EP0o. EP0s can always

be overwritten and receive data regardless of this

trigger.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 475 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.5 USB FIFO Clear Register 0 (UFCLR0)

UFCLR0 is a one-shot register used to clear the FIFO for each endpoint EP0 to EP3. Writing 1 to a

bit clears the data in the corresponding FIFO.

For IN FIFO, writing 1 to a bit in UFCLR0 clears the data for which the corresponding PKTE bit

in UTRG0 is not set to 1 after data write, or data that is validated by setting the corresponding

PKTE bit in UTRG0.

For OUT FIFO, writing 1 to a bit in UFCLR0 clears data that has not been fixed during reception

or received data for which the corresponding RDFN bit is not set to 1. Accordingly, care must be

taken not to clear data that is currently being received or transmitted. EP1 and EP2, having a dual-

FIFO configuration, are cleared by entire FIFOs. Note that this trigger does not clear the

corresponding interrupt flag. For details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-

Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7, 6 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

5 EP2CLR 0 W EP2 Clear*

0: Performs no operation.

1: Clears EP2 OUT FIFO.

4 EP1CLR 0 W EP1 Clear

0: Performs no operation.

1: Clears EP1 IN FIFO.

3 EP3CLR 0 W EP3 Clear

0: Performs no operation.

1: Clears EP3 IN FIFO.

2 EP0oCLR 0 W EP0o Clear

0: Performs no operation.

1: Clears EP0o OUT FIFO.

1 EP0iCLR 0 W EP0i Clear

0: Performs no operation.

1: Clears EP0i IN FIFO.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 476 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

0 — 0 R Reserved

This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

Note:* When DMA writes are enabled (EP2T1 set to 1 and EP2T0 set to 0 or 1 in UDMAR), it is not

possible to clear the data in the FIFO by writing 1 to EP2CLR. To clear the data in the FIFO,

disable DMA transfers (clear EP2T1 and EP2T0 in UDMAR to 0) and then write 1 to

EP2CLR.

14.3.6 USB Endpoint Stall Register 0 (UESTL0)

UESTL0 is used to forcibly stall each endpoint EP0 to EP3. When the bit is set to 1, the

corresponding endpoint returns a stall handshake to the host, following from the next transfer.

The stall bit for endpoint 0 is cleared automatically on reception of 8-byte command data for

which decoding is performed by the function, and thus the EP0STL bit is cleared to 0. When the

SetupTS flag in UIFR0 is set to 1, a write of 1 to the EP0STL bit is ignored. For details, refer to

section 14.5.9, Stall Operations.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7, 6 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

5 EP2STL 0 R/W EP2 Stall

0: Cancels the EP2 stall state.

1: Sets the EP2 stall state.

4 EP1STL 0 R/W EP1 Stall

0: Cancels the EP1 stall state.

1: Sets the EP1 stall state.

3 EP3STL 0 R/W EP3 Stall

0: Cancels the EP3 stall state.

1: Sets the EP3 stall state.

2, 1 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

0 EP0STL 0 R/W EP0 Stall

0: Cancels the EP0 stall state.

1: Sets the EP0 stall state.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 477 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.7 USB Endpoint Stall Register 1 (UESTL1)

UESTL1 is used to control stall cancellation mode for all endpoints.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 SCME 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

6 to

— All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

14.3.8 USB Endpoint Data Register 0s (UEDR0s)

UEDR0s stores the setup command for endpoint 0 (for Control_out transfer). UEDR0s stores 8-

byte command data sent from the host in setup stage.

For details on the USB operation when data for the next setup stage is received while data in

UEDR0s is being read, refer to section 14.8, Usage Notes.

UEDR0s is a byte register to which 4-byte address area is assigned. Accordingly, UEDR0s allows

the user to read 2-byte or 4-byte data continuously by word transfer or longword transfer.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 0 D7 to D0 — R These bits store the setup command for Control_out

transfer

14.3.9 USB Endpoint Data Register 0i (UEDR0i)

UEDR0i is a data register for endpoint 0 (for Control_in transfer). UEDR0i stores data to be sent

to the host. The number of data items to be written continuously must be the maximum packet size

or less.

UEDR0i is a byte register to which 4-byte address area is assigned. Accordingly, UEDR0i allows

the user to write 2-byte or 4-byte data continuously by word transfer or longword transfer. For

details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 0 D7 to D0 All 0 W These bits store data for Control_in transfer

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 478 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.10 USB Endpoint Data Register 0o (UEDR0o)

UEDR0o is a data register for endpoint 0 (for Control_out transfer). UEDR0o stores data received

from the host. The number of data items to be read must be the number of bytes specified by

UESZ0o.

When 1 byte is read from UEDR0o, UESZ0o is decremented by1.

UEDR0o is a byte register to which 4-byte address area is assigned. Accordingly, UEDR0o allows

the user to read 2-byte or 4-byte data continuously by word transfer or longword transfer.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 0 D7 to D0 — R These bits store data for Control_out transfer

14.3.11 USB Endpoint Data Register 3 (UEDR3)

UEDR3 is a data register for endpoint 3 (for Interrupt_in transfer). UEDR3 stores data to be sent to

the host. The number of data items to be written continuously must be the maximum packet size or

less.

UEDR3 is a byte register to which 4-byte address area is assigned. Accordingly, UEDR3 allows

the user to write 2-byte or 4-byte data continuously by word transfer or longword transfer. For

details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 0 D7 to D0 All 0 W These bits store data for Interrupt_in transfer

14.3.12 USB Endpoint Data Register 1 (UEDR1)

UEDR1 is a data register for endpoint 1 (for Bulk_in transfer). UEDR1 stores data to be sent to the

host. The number of data items to be written continuously must be the maximum packet size or

less.

UEDR1 is a byte register to which 4-byte address area is assigned. Accordingly, UEDR1 allows

the user to write 2-byte or 4-byte data continuously by word transfer or longword transfer. For

details, see section 2.9.4, Accessing Registers Containing Write-Only Bits.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 0 D7 to D0 All 0 W These bits store data for Bulk_in transfer

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 479 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.13 USB Endpoint Data Register 2 (UEDR2)

UEDR2 is a data register for endpoint 2 (for Bulk_out transfer). UEDR2 stores data received from

the host. The number of data items to be read must be the number of bytes specified by UESZ2.

When 1 byte is read from UEDR2, UESZ2 is decremented by1.

UEDR2 is a byte register to which 4-byte address area is assigned. Accordingly, UEDR2 allows

the user to read 2-byte or 4-byte data continuously by word transfer or longword transfer.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 0 D7 to D0 — R These bits store data for Bulk_out transfer

14.3.14 USB Endpoint Receive Data Size Register 0o (UESZ0o)

UESZ0o is a receive data size register for endpoint 0 (for Control_out transfer). UESZ0o indicates

the number of bytes of data to be received from the host.

Note that UESZ0o is decremented by 1 every time when 1 byte is read from UEDR0o.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 — — R Reserved

6 to 0 D6 to D0 — R These bits indicate the size of data to be received in

Control_out transfer

14.3.15 USB Endpoint Receive Data Size Register 2 (UESZ2)

UESZ2 is a receive data size register for endpoint 2 (for Bulk_out transfer). UESZ2 indicates the

number of bytes of data to be received from the host.

Note that UESZ2 is decremented by 1 every time when 1 byte is read from UEDR2.

The FIFO for endpoint 2 (for Bulk_out transfer) has a dual-FIFO configuration. The data size

indicated by this register refers to the currently selected FIFO.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 — — R Reserved

6 to 0 D6 to D0 — R These bits indicate the size of data to be received in

Bulk_out transfer

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 480 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.16 USB Interrupt Flag Register 0 (UIFR0)

UIFR0 is an interrupt flag register indicating the setup command reception, EP0 and EP3

transmission/reception, and bus reset state. If the corresponding bit is set to 1, the corresponding

EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1 interrupt is requested to the CPU. A bit in this register can be cleared by

writing 0 to it. Writing 1 to a bit is invalid and causes no operation. Consequently, to clear a flag,

write 0 to the corresponding bit and 1 to all the other bits. (For example, write H'DF to clear bit 5.)

The bit-clear instruction is a read/modify/write instruction, so if a new flag is set between the read

and write operations, there is a danger that it may be cleared erroneously. Therefore, do not use the

bit-clear instruction to clear bits in this interrupt flag resister.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 481 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 BRST 0 R/(W)* Bus Reset

Set to 1 when the bus reset signal is detected on the

USB bus. The corresponding interrupt output is

EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

Note that BRST is also set to 1 if D+ is not pulled-up

during USB cable connection.

6 — 0 R Reserved

This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

5 EP3TR 0 R/(W)* EP3 Transfer Request

Set to 1 if there is no valid data in the FIFO when an IN

token is sent from the host to EP3. The corresponding

interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

4 EP3TS 0 R/(W)* EP3 Transmit Complete

Set to 1 if the data written in EP3 is transmitted to the

host normally and the ACK handshake is returned. The

corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

3 EP0oTS 0 R/(W)* EP0o Receive Complete

Set to 1 if EP0o receives data from the host normally

and returns the ACK handshake to the host. The

corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

2 EP0iTR 0 R/(W)* EP0i Transfer Request

Set to 1 if there is no valid data in the FIFO when an

IN token is sent from the host to EP0i. The

corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

1 EP0iTS 0 R/(W)* EP0i Transmit Complete

Set to 1 if the data written in EP0i is transmitted to the

host normally and the ACK handshake is returned.

The corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1.

0 SetupTS 0 R/(W)* Setup Command Receive Complete

Set to 1 if EP0s normally receives 8-byte command

data to be decoded by the function from the host and

returns the ACK handshake to the host. The

corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

Note:* The write value should always be 0 to clear this flag.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 482 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.17 USB Interrupt Flag Register 1 (UIFR1)

UIFR1 is an interrupt flag register indicating the EP1 and EP2 status. If the corresponding bit is set

to 1, the corresponding EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1 interrupt is requested to the CPU. EP1TR flags can

be cleared by writing 0 to them. Writing 1 to them is invalid and causes no operation.

Consequently, to clear a flag, write 0 to the corresponding bit and 1 to all the other bits. (For

example, write H'FD to clear bit 1.) The bit-clear instruction is a read/modify/write instruction, so

if a new flag is set between the read and write operations, there is a danger that it may be cleared

erroneously. Therefore, do not use the bit-clear instruction to clear bits in this interrupt flag

resister. However, EP1EMPTY, EP2READY, and EP1ALLEMPTYs are status bits to indicate the

EP1, EP2, and FIFO state respectively, and cannot be cleared.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 4 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

3 EP1ALL

EMPTYs

1 R EP1 FIFO All Empty Status

EP1 FIFO has a dual-FIFO configuration. This bit is set

to 1 if there is no valid data in both FIFOs. This

corresponds to the negative-electrode signal for the

EP1DE bit in UDSR.

An interrupt cannot be required by EP1ALLEMPTY.

2 EP2READY 0 R EP2 Data Ready

EP2 FIFO has a dual-FIFO configuration. This bit is set

to 1 if there is valid data at least in either of FIFOs.

This bit is cleared to 0 if there is no valid data in both

FIFOs. This bit is a status bit and cannot be cleared.

The corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1.

1 EP1TR 0 R/(W)* EP1 Transfer Request

Set to 1 if there is no valid data in both FIFOs when an

IN token is sent from the host to EP1. The

corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

0 EP1EMPTY 1 R EP1 FIFO Empty

EP1 FIFO has a dual-FIFO configuration. This bit is set

to 1 if there is no valid data at least in either of FIFOs.

This bit is cleared to 0 if there is valid data in both

FIFOs. This bit is a status bit and cannot be cleared.

The corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1.

Note:* The write value should always be 0 to clear this flag.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 483 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.18 USB Interrupt Flag Register 3 (UIFR3)

UIFR3 is an interrupt flag register indicating the USB status. If the corresponding bit is set to 1,

the corresponding EXIRQ0, EXIRQ1, or IRQ6 interrupt is requested to the CPU. VBUSi, SPRSi,

SETC, SOF, and CK48READY flags can be cleared by writing 0 to them. Writing 1 to them is

invalid and causes no operation. Consequently, to clear a flag, write 0 to the corresponding bit and

1 to all the other bits. (For example, write H'DF to clear bit 5.) The bit-clear instruction is a

read/modify/write instruction, so if a new flag is set between the read and write operations, there is

a danger that it may be cleared erroneously. Therefore, do not use the bit-clear instruction to clear

bits in this interrupt flag resister. VBUSs and SPRSs are status bits and cannot be cleared.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 CK48READY 0 R/(W)* USB Operating Clock (48 MHz) Stabilization Detection

Set to 1 when the USB operating clock (48 MHz)

stabilization time has been automatically counted after

USB module stop mode cancellation. The

corresponding interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

CK48READY can also operate in the USB interface

software reset state (the UIFRST bit in UCTLR is set

to 1).

Refer to the UCKS3 to UCKS0 bits in section 14.3.1,

USB Control Register (UCTLR).

6 SOF 0 R/(W)* Start of Frame Packet Detection

Set to 1 if the Start of Frame (SOF) packet is

detected. The corresponding interrupt output is

EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

5 SETC 0 R/(W)* Set_Configuration Command Detection

Set to 1 if the Set_Configuration command is

detected. The corresponding interrupt output is

EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

4 — 0 R Reserved

This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.

3 SPRSs 0 R Suspend/Resume Status

SPRSs indicates the suspend/resume status.

However, an interrupt cannot be requested by SPRSs.

0: Indicates that the bus is in the normal state.

1: Indicates that the bus is in the suspend state.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 484 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

2 SPRSi 0 R/(W)* Suspend/Resume Interrupt

Set to 1 if a transition from normal state to suspend

state or suspend state to normal state has occurred.

The corresponding interrupt output is IRQ6. This bit

can be used to cancel power-down mode at resuming.

1 VBUSs 0 R VBUS Status

VBUSs is a status bit to indicate the VBUS state by

the USB cable connection or disconnection. However,

an interrupt cannot be requested by VBUSs.

0: Indicates that the VBUS (USB cable) bus is

disconnected.

1: Indicates that the VBUS (USB cable) bus is

connected.

0 VBUSi 0 R/(W)* VBUS Interrupt

Set to 1 if a VBUS state changes by the USB cable

connection or disconnection. The corresponding

interrupt output is EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1.

Note:* The write value should always be 0 to clear this flag.

14.3.19 USB Interrupt Enable Register 0 (UIER0)

UIER0 enables the interrupt request indicated in the interrupt flag register 0 (UIFR0). When an

interrupt flag is set while the corresponding bit in UIER0 is set to 1, an interrupt is requested by

asserting the corresponding EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1. Either EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1 must be selected by

the interrupt select register 0 (UISR0).

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 BRSTE 0 R/W Enables the BRST interrupt.

6 — 0 R Reserved

This bit is always read as 0.

5 EP3TRE 0 R/W Enables the EP3TR interrupt.

4 EP3TSE 0 R/W Enables the EP3TS interrupt.

3 EP0oTSE 0 R/W Enables the EP0oTS interrupt.

2 EP0iTRE 0 R/W Enables the EP0iTR interrupt.

1 EP0iTSE 0 R/W Enables the EP0iTS interrupt.

0 SetupTSE 0 R/W Enables the SetupTS interrupt.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 485 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.20 USB Interrupt Enable Register 1 (UIER1)

UIER1 enables the interrupt request indicated in the interrupt flag register 1 (UIFR1). When an

interrupt flag is set while the corresponding bit in UIER1 is set to 1, an interrupt is requested by

asserting the corresponding EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1. Either EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1 must be selected by

the interrupt select register 1 (UISR1).

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 4 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

3 — 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

2 EP2READYE 0 R/W Enables the EP2READY interrupt.

1 EP1TRE 0 R/W Enables the EP1TR interrupt.

0 EP1EMPTYE 0 R/W Enables the EP1EMPTYE interrupt.

14.3.21 USB Interrupt Enable Register 3 (UIER3)

UIER3 enables the interrupt request indicated in the interrupt flag register 3 (UIFR3). This register

is readable/writable while the USB module stop 2 bit (MSTPB0) in MSTPCRB is 1.

When an interrupt flag is set while the corresponding bit in UIER3 is set to 1, an interrupt is

requested by asserting the corresponding EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1. Either EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1 must

be selected by the interrupt select register 3 (UISR3). Note, however, that the SPRSiE bit is an

interrupt enable bit specific to the IRQ6 pin and cannot be selected by UISR3.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 CK48READYE 1 R/W Enables the CK48READY interrupt.

6 SOFE 0 R/W Enables the SOF interrupt.

5 SETCE 0 R/W Enables the SETC interrupt.

4, 3 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

2 SPRSiE 0 R/W Enables the SPRSi interrupt. (only for IRQ6)

1 — 0 R Reserved

This bit is always read as 0.

0 VBUSiE 0 R/W Enables the VBUSi interrupt.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 486 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.22 USB Interrupt Select Register 0 (UISR0)

UISR0 sets EXIRQ to output interrupt request indicated in the interrupt flag register 0 (UIFR0).

When a bit in UIER0 corresponding to the UISR0 bit is cleared to 0, an interrupt request is output

from EXIRQ0. When a bit in UIER0 corresponding to the UISR0 bit is set to 1, an interrupt

request is output from EXIRQ1.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 BRSTS 0 R/W Selects the BRST interrupt.

6 — 0 R Reserved

This bit is always read as 0.

5 EP3TRS 0 R/W Selects the EP3TR interrupt.

4 EP3TSS 0 R/W Selects the EP3TS interrupt

3 EP0oTSS 0 R/W Selects the EP0oTS interrupt.

2 EP0iTRS 0 R/W Selects the EP0iTR interrupt.

1 EP0iTSS 0 R/W Selects the EP0iTS interrupt.

0 SetupTSS 0 R/W Selects the SetupTS interrupt.

14.3.23 USB Interrupt Select Register 1 (UISR1)

UISR1 sets EXIRQ to output interrupt request indicated in the interrupt flag register 1 (UIFR1).

When a bit in UIER1 corresponding to the UISR1 bit is cleared to 0, an interrupt request is output

from EXIRQ0. When a bit in UIER1 corresponding to the UISR1 bit is set to 1, an interrupt

request is output from EXIRQ1.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 4 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

3 — 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

2 EP2READYS 0 R/W Selects the EP2READY interrupt.

1 EP1TRS 0 R/W Selects the EP1TR interrupt.

0 EP1EMPTYS 0 R/W Selects the EP1EMPTY interrupt.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 487 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.24 USB Interrupt Select Register 3 (UISR3)

UISR3 sets EXIRQ to output interrupt request indicated in the interrupt flag register 3 (UIFR3).

When a bit in UIER3 corresponding to the UISR3 bit is cleared to 0, an interrupt request is output

from EXIRQ0. When a bit in UIER3 corresponding to the UISR3 bit is set to 1, an interrupt

request is output from EXIRQ1.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 CK48READYS 0 R/W Selects the CK48READY interrupt.

6 SOFS 0 R/W Selects the SOF interrupt.

5 SETCS 0 R/W Selects the SETC interrupt.

4 to 1 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

0 VBUSiS 0 R/W Selects the VBUSi interrupt.

14.3.25 USB Data Status Register (UDSR)

UDSR indicates whether the IN FIFO data registers (EP1, and EP3) contain valid data or not. A bit

in USDR is set when data written to the corresponding IN FIFO becomes valid after the

corresponding PKTE bit in UTRG is set to 1. A bit in USDR is cleared when all valid data is sent

to the host. For EP1, having a dual-FIFO configuration, the corresponding bit in USDR is cleared

to 0 and FIFO becomes empty.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 488 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 3 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

2 EP1DE 0 R EP1 Data Enable

0: Indicates that the EP1 contains no valid data.

1: Indicates that the EP1 contains valid data.

EP1DE corresponds to the negative-electrode

signal for EP1ALLEMPTYs in UIFR1.

1 EP3DE 0 R EP3 Data Enable

0: Indicates that the EP3 contains no valid data.

1: Indicates that the EP3 contains valid data.

0 EP0iDE 0 R EP0i Data Enable

0: Indicates that the EP0i contains no valid data.

1: Indicates that the EP0i contains valid data.

14.3.26 USB Configuration Value Register (UCVR)

UCVR stores the Configuration value when the Set_Configuration command is received from the

host.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7, 6 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

5 CNFV0 0 R Configuration Value 0

Stores the Configuration value when the

Set_Configuration command is received. CNFV0 is

modified when the SETC bit in UIFR3 is set to 1.

4 to 0 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 489 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.27 USB Test Register 0 (UTSTR0)

UTSTR0 controls the on-chip transceiver output signals. Setting the PTSTE bit to 1 after setting

UIFRST and UDCRST in UCTLR to 0 specifies the transceiver output signals (USD+ and USD-)

arbitrarily. Table 14.2 shows the relationship between UTSTR0 setting and pin output.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 PTSTE 0 R/W Pin Test Enable

Enables the test control for the on-chip transceiver

output pins (USD+ and USD-) and USPND pin.

6 to 4 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

SUSPEND

FSE0

VPO

R/W

On-Chip Transceiver Output Signal Setting

SUSPEND: Sets the USPND pin signal of the on-chip

transceiver.

OE: Sets the output enable (OE) signal of the

on-chip transceiver.

FSE0: Sets the single-ended 0 (FSE0) signal of

the on-chip transceiver.

VPO: Sets the USD+ (VPO) signal of the on-

chip transceiver.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 490 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 14.2 Relationship between UTSTR0 Setting and Pin Output

UCTLR/

TMOWE PTSTE SUSPEND

USPND/

TMOW VBUS PTSTE OE FSE0 VPO USD+ USD-

1 × × — 0 × × × × Hi-Z Hi-Z

0 0 × — 1 0 × × × — —

0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 0 1 × 0 0

1 1 1 × × Hi-Z Hi-Z

Legend:

×: Don’t care

—: Cannot be controlled. Indicates state in normal operation according to the USB operation and

port settings.

14.3.28 USB Test Register 1 (UTSTR1)

UTSTR1 allows the USB control pin and on-chip transceiver input signals to be monitored. Table

14.3 shows the relationship between pin input and UTSTR1 monitoring value.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

VBUS

UBPM

—*

On-Chip Transceiver Input Signal Monitor

VBUS: Monitors the VBUS pin.

UBPM: Monitors the UBPM pin.

5 to 3 — All 0 R Reserved

These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be

modified.

RCV

—*

On-Chip Transceiver Input Signal Monitor

RCV: Monitors the differential input level (RCV)

signal of the on-chip transceiver.

VP: Monitors the USD+ (VP) signal of the on-chip

transceiver.

VM: Monitors the USD- (VM) signal of the on-chip

transceiver.

Note: * Determined by the state of pins. VBUS, UBPM, USD+, USD-

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 491 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 14.3 Relationship between Pin Input and UTSTR1 Monitoring Value

Pin Input

UTSTR1 Monitoring

Value

Pin Input

UTSTR1 Monitoring Value

VBUS UBPM VBUS UBPM

UTSTR0/

PTSTE

UTSTR0/

SUSPEND VBUS USD+ USD- RCV VP VM

0/1 × 0/1 × × × 0 × × 0 0 0

× 0/1 × 0/1 0 × 1 0 0 × 0 0

0 × 1 0 1 0 0 1

0 × 1 1 0 1 1 0

0 × 1 1 1 × 1 1

1 0 1 0 0 × 0 0

1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0

1 0 1 1 1 × 1 1

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

Legend:

×: Don’t care

0/1: Combination for pin input = UTSTR1 monitoring value.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 492 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.29 USB Test Registers 2 and A to F (UTSTR2, UTSTRA to UTSTRF)

UTSTR2 and UTSRTA to UTSRTF are test registers and cannot be written to.

14.3.30 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

MSTPB7

MSTPB6

MSTPB5

MSTPB4

MSTPB3

MSTPB2

MSTPB1

R/W Module Stop

For details, refer to section 20.1.3, Module Stop

Control Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC).

0 MSTPB0 1 R/W USB Module Stop 2

0: Cancels the stop state of the USB module

completely.

A clock is provided for the USB module completely.

Before clearing this bit, make sure to clear the

USBSTOP1 bit in EXMDLSTP. After this bit has

been cleared, the internal PLL circuit starts

operation. Registers in the USB module must be

accessed after the USB operating clock stabilization

time (the CK48READY bit in UIFR3 is set to 1) has

passed.

1: Places the USB module partly in the stop state.

The internal PLL circuit and the most of the clocks in

the USB module stop operation. However, register

values in the USB module are maintained.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 493 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.3.31 Extended Module Stop Register (EXMDLSTP)

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 2 — Undefined — Reserved

These bits are always read as an undefined value and

cannot be modified.

1 RTCSTOP 0 R/W RTC Module Stop

0: Cancels the RTC module stop.

1: Sets the RTC module stop.

0 USBSTOP1 0 R/W USB Module Stop 1

0: Cancels the stop state of the USB module partly.

A clock is provided for the USB module partly. After

this bit has been cleared, only the UCTLR and

UIER3 registers in the USB module can be

accessed. To access the other registers, clear the

MSTPB0 bit in MSTPCRB to 0.

1: Places the USB module completely in the stop state.

The clocks in the USB module stop operation

completely. However, register values in the USB

module are maintained.

Notes: 1. For details on USB module stop mode cancellation procedure, refer to section 14.5,

Communication Operation.

2. When reading pin states using the port D register (PORTD), after accessing

EXMDLSTP (address range: H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F), you must perform a dummy read

to the external address space (such as H'FFEF00 to H'FF7FF) outside the range

H'FFFF40 to H'FFFF5F before reading PORTD.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 494 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.4 Interrupt Sources

This module has three interrupt signals. Table 14.4 shows the interrupt sources and their

corresponding interrupt request signals. The EXIRQ interrupt signals are activated at low level.

The EXIRQ interrupt requests can only be detected at low level (specified as level sensitive). The

suspend/resume interrupt request IRQ6 must be specified to be detected at the falling edge (falling-

edge sensitive) by the interrupt controller register.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 495 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 14.4 Interrupt Sources

Bit

Transfer

Mode

Interrupt

Source

Description

Interrupt

Request

Signal

DMAC

Activation by

USB

Request*5

UIFR0 0 Control transfer

(EP0)

SetupTS*1 Setup command

receive complete

EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

1 EP0iTS*1 EP0i transfer complete EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

2 EP0iTR*1 EP0i transfer request EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

3 EP0oTS*1 EP0o receive

complete

EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

4 Interrupt_in transfer

(EP3)

EP3TS EP3 transfer complete EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

5 EP3TR EP3 transfer request EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

6 — Reserved — — —

7 (Status) BRST Bus reset EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

UIFR1 0 Bulk_in transfer

(EP1)

EP1EMPTY EP1 FIFO empty EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

DREQ0 or

DREQ1*2

1 EP1TR EP1 transfer request EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

2 Bulk_out transfer

(EP2)

EP2READY EP2 data ready EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

DREQ0 or

DREQ1*3

3 Bulk_in transfer

(EP1)

(EP1ALLEMPTYs) EP1 FIFO all empty

status

× ×

4 — Reserved — — —

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 496 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit

Transfer

Mode

Interrupt

Source

Description

Interrupt

Request

Signal

DMAC

Activation by

USB

Request*5

UIFR3 0 ⎯

(Status)

VBUSi VBUS interrupt EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

1 (VBUSs) VBUS status × ×

2 SPRSi Suspend/resume

interrupt

IRQ6 *4 ×

3 (SPRSs) Suspend/resume

status

× ×

4 Reserved ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

5 SETC Set_Configuration

detection

EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

6 SOF Start of Frame packet

detection

EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

7 CK48READY USB operating clock

stabilization detection

EXIRQ0 or

EXIRQ1

Notes: 1. EP0 interrupts must be assigned to the same interrupt request signal.

2. An EP1 DMA transfer by a USB request is specified by the EP1T1 and EP1T0 bits in

UDMAR.

3. An EP2 DMA transfer by a USB request is specified by the EP2T1 and EP2T0 bits in

UDMAR.

4. The suspend/resume interrupt request IRQ6 must be specified to be detected at the

falling edge (IRQ6SCB and IRQ6SCA in ISCRH = 01) by the interrupt controller register.

5. The DREQ signal is not used for auto-request. The CPU can activate the DMAC using

any flags and interrupts.

• EXIRQ0 signal

The EXIRQ0 signal requests interrupt sources for which the corresponding bits in interrupt

select registers 0 to 3 (UISR0 to UISR3) are cleared to 0. The EXIRQ0 is driven low if a

corresponding bit in the interrupt flag register is set to 1.

• EXIRQ1 signal

The EXIRQ1 signal requests interrupt sources for which the corresponding bits in interrupt

select registers 0 to 3 (UISR0 to UISR3) are cleared to 0. The EXIRQ1 is driven low if a

corresponding bit in the interrupt flag register is set to 1.

• IRQ6 signal

The IRQ6 signal is specific to the suspend/resume interrupt request. The falling edge of the

IRQ6 signal is output at the transition from the suspend state or from the resume state.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 497 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5 Communication Operation

14.5.1 Initialization

The USB must be initialized as described in the flowchart in figure 14.2.

Cancel power-on reset

USB function Firmware

Yes

Set each interrupt

Start USB operationg clock

oscillation.

USB

operating clock

stabilization time has

passed?

Cancel USB module stop 2

(Clear MSTPB0 in

MSTPCRB to 0)

Clear CK48READY in UIFR3 to 0

USB module stop 2

(Write to 1 MSTPB0 in MSTPCRB)

Wait for USB cable

connection

Yes

(Bus powered)

(Self powered)

To USB cable

connecting procedure

Enter power-down mode

(If necessary)

Set each interrupt

Wait for USB operating

clock stabilization

USB interface operation OK

USB operating clock stabilization

detection interrupt occurs. Cancel USB interface reset

(Clear UIFRST in UCTLR to 0)

Self powered?

System needs to

enter power-down

mode?

Cancel USB module stop 1

(Clear USBSTP1 in

EXMDLSTP to 0)

Select USB operating clock

(Write 1 to UCKS3 to UCKS0

in UCTLR)

To 14.5.2 (1)

EXIRQ0

Note: Before entering power-down mode, set USB module stop 2 by setting the MSTPB0 bit in MSTPCRB to 1.

Figure 14.2 USB Initialization

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 498 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5.2 USB Cable Connection/Disconnection

(1) USB Cable Connection (When USB module stop or power-down mode is not used)

If the USB cable enters the connection state from the disconnection state in an application (self

powered) where USB module stop or power-down mode is not used, perform the operation as

shown in figure 14.3. In bus-powered mode, perform the operation according to note 2 in

figure 14.3.

Connect the USB cable

USB function Firmware

Receive bus reset from the host

Bus reset interrupt occurs.

A VBUS interrupt occurs

Check if VBUSs in UIFR3

is set to 1

Enable D+ pull-up

by port 36 (P36)

Check the USB cable

connection state

Initialize the firmware

Yes

Wait for a setup interrupt

Cancel UDC core reset

(Clear UDCRST in UCTLR to 0)

Clear all FIFOs

Clear VBUSi in UIFR3

System ready?

Set USB module operation

EXIRQx

Notes: 1. VBUS interrupts in the USB module cannot be detected in power-down mode or

in the USB module stop state.

2. In bus-powered mode, power is applied after the USB cable has been connected.

Accordingly, immediately after completing the power-on reset, initialization (14.5.1), clearing all FIFOs,

and system preparation, enable the D+ pull-up by the port 36 (P36) and cancel the UDC core reset state.

from 14.5.1

After completing the bus-

powered mode initialization

Figure 14.3 USB Cable Connection

(When USB Module Stop or Power-Down Mode Is not Used)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 499 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(2) USB Cable Connection (When USB module stop or power-down mode is used)

If the USB cable enters the connection state from the disconnection state in an application (self

powered) where USB module stop or power-down mode is used, perform the operation as

shown in figure 14.4.

Connect the USB cable

USB function Firmware

Yes

Receive bus reset from the host

A bus reset interrupt occurs

Start USB operating

clock oscillation

USB operating

clock stabilization time has

passed?

Cancel USB module stop 2

Clear MSTPB0 in MSTPCRB to 0

Check by using the

port function in IRQx

Clear CK48READY in UIFR3

to 0

Enable D+ pull-up by

port 36 (P36)

Initialize the firmware

Wait for setup interrupt

Yes

Cancel UDC core reset

(Clear UDCRST in UCTLR to 0)

Clear all FIFOs

Wait for USB operating clock

stabilization

A USB operating clock

stabilization detection

interrupt occurs.

System ready?

Power-down mode?

USB module

stopped?

Start USB module

operation

EXIRQx

External interrupt IRQx*

Note: A VBUS interrupts in the USB module cannot be detected in power-down mode or in the USB module stop state.

Accordingly, in an application (self powered) where power-down mode or USB module stop is used,VBUS

interrupts of the USB must be detected via the external interrupt pin IRQx.

In this case, the IRQx pin must be specified as both-edge sensitive. When IRQx is used, VBUS interrupts in the

USB module need not to be used.

Check the USB

cable connection

state

Figure 14.4 USB Cable Connection

(When USB Module Stop or Power-Down Mode Is Used)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 500 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(3) USB Cable Disconnection (When USB module stop or power-down mode is not used)

If the USB cable enters the disconnection state from the connection state in an application (self

powered) where USB module stop or power-down mode is not used, perform the operation as

shown in figure 14.5. In bus-powered mode, the power is automatically turned off when the

USB cable is disconnected and the following processing is not required.

Disconnect the USB cable

VBUS interrupt occurs

USB function Firmware

Reset the UDC core

Clear VBUSi in UIFR3 to 0

Check if VBUSs in UIFR3

is cleared to 0

Cancel D + pull-up by

port 36 (P36)

Wait for USB cable connection

Reset the UDC core

Write UDCRST in UCTLR to 1

EXIRQx

Note: VBUS interrupts in the USB module cannot be detected in power-down mode

or in the USB module stop state.

Figure 14.5 USB Cable Disconnection

(When USB Module Stop or Power-Down Mode Is not Used)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 501 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(4) USB Cable Disconnection (When USB module stop or power-down mode is used)

If the USB cable enters the disconnection state from the connection state in an application (self

powered) where USB module stop or power-down mode is used, perform the operation as

shown in figure 14.6.

Disconnect the USB cable

USB function Firmware

Yes

Enable D+ pull-up

by port 36 (P36)

Enter power-down mode

(only if necessary)

Wait for USB

cable connection

Yes

Stop USB module

Write MSTPB0 in MSTPCRB to 1

Reset UDC core

Write UDCRST in UCTRL to 1

Reset UDC core

System needs to

enter power-down

mode?

EXIRQx

External interrupt IRQx*

Notes: VBUS interrupts in the USB module cannot be detected in power-down mode or in the USB

module stop state. Accordingly, in an application (self powered) where power-down mode or

USB module stop is used , VBUS interrupts of the USB must bedetected via the external

interrupt pin IRQx. In this case, the IRQx pin must be specified as both edge sensitive.

When IRQx is used, VBUS interrupts in the USB module need not to be used.

Before entering power-down mode, make sure to set USB module stop2 (the MSTPB0 bit of

MSTPCRB = 1).

Check the USB cable

disconnection state

Start USB operating

clock oscillation

USB operating

clock stabilization time

has passed?

USB operating clock

stabilization detection

interrupt occurs.

Powe-down mode ?

USB module

stopped?

Cancel USB module stop 2

Clear MSTPB0 in MSTPCRB to 0

Wait for USB operating clock

stabilization

Check connections by using

the port function of IRQx

Clear CK48READY in UIFR3 to 0

Figure 14.6 USB Cable Disconnection

(When USB Module Stop or Power-Down Mode Is Used)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 502 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5.3 Suspend and Resume Operations

(1) Suspend and Resume Operations

Figures 14.7 and 14.8 are flowcharts of the suspend and resume operations. If the USB bus

enters the suspend state from a non-suspend state, or if it enters a non-suspend state from the

suspend state due to a resume signal from up-stream, perform the operations shown below.

USB function Firmware

USB cable connected

A bus idle of 3 ms or

more occurs

A suspend/resume

interrupt occurs

Suspend state

A resume interrupt is

generated from up-stream

A suspend/resume

interrupt occurs

Enable SPRSi and

IRQ6 interrupts

(Set SPRSiE in UIER3 to 1)

(Set IRQ6E in IER to 1)

Initialize standby

enable flag

(Clear standby enable

flag to 0)

Run user program

In one of the power-down

modes

Mask all interrupts

(Manipulate bit I using

LDC instruction, etc.)

Enable IRQ6 interrupt

(Set IRQ6E in IER to 1)

Unmask all interrupts

(Clear bit I using LDC

instruction, etc.)

Transition to one

of the power-down modes

(Execute SLEEP

instruction)

Suspend interrupt

processing

(see figure 14.8)

IRQ6

Suspend/resume interrupt

processing

Main process

Yes

Standby enable

flag = 0?

Resume interrupt

processing

(see figure 14.8)

Standby enable

flag = 1?

Notes: 1. The standby enable flag is a software flag for controlling transition to the

standby state (one of the power-down modes). There is no such hardware flag.

2. Interrupts should be masked from when the IRQ6 interrupt is received until the

SLEEP instruction is executed. Finally, unmask the interrupts using the LDC

instruction or the like and execute the SLEEP instruction immediately afterward.

Figure 14.7 Example Flowchart of Suspend and Resume Operations

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 503 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(2) Suspend and Resume Interrupt Processing

Figure 14.8 is a flowchart of suspend and resume interrupt processing.

USB function Firmware

Resume interrupt

processing

USB operating clock stabilization

detection interrupt processing

Suspend interrupt

processing

Start USB operating

clock oscillation

A USB operating clock

stabilization detection

interrupt occurs

Clear USB module

stop 2 mode

(Clear MSTPB0

in MSTPCRB to 0)

Clear resume flag

(Clear SPRSi in UIFR3

to 0)

Clear USB operating clock

stabilization detection flag

(Clear CK48READY

in UIFR3 to 0)

Resume main process

Prohibit IRQ6

(Clear IRQ6E in IER to 0)

Clear suspend flag

(Clear SPRSi in UIFR3

to 0)

Confirm that

remote-wakeup is

prohibited

Confirm that

remote-wakeup is enabled

Enable USB module

stop mode

(Set MSTPB0

in MSTPCRB to 1)

Set standby enable

flag to 1

Clear standby enable

flag to 0

Wait for USB operating

clock stabilization

Suspend

state confirmed?

(SPRSs in UIFR3 =

1?)

Suspend

state confirmed?

(SPRSs in UIFR3 =

1?)

Remote-

wakeup enabled?

(RWUPs in UDRR

= 1)

USB operating

clock stabilization time

has passed?

Yes

EXIRQx

Standby enable

flag = 0?

Suspend

state confirmed?

(SPRSs in UIFR3 =

1?)

IRQ6

Notes: 1. The standby enable flag is a software flag for controlling transition to the standby state (one of the power-down modes). There is no such

hardware flag.

2. Interrupts should be masked from when the IRQ6 interrupt is received until the SLEEP instruction is executed. Finally, unmask the interrupts

using the LDC instruction or the like and execute the SLEEP instruction immediately afterward.

3. The remote-wakeup function cannot be used unless it is enabled by the host. Accordingly, the remote-wakeup function cannot be used

unless it is enabled by the host. Accordingly, make sure to check RWUPs in UDRR before using the remote-wakeup function. However, it is

not necessary to confirm that the remote-wakeup function is enabled by the host if the application does not make use of this function.

4. When resuming using the remote wakeup function, the USB module stop state must already be cleared.

5. Return to the main process and wait for the USB operating clock stabilization detection interrupt. When resuming by means of remote-

wakeup the USB operating clock has already stabilized, so this step is not necessary.

Enable IRQ6 interrupt

(Set IRQ6E in IER to 1)

Clear suspend flag

(Clear SPRSi in UIFR3

to 0)

Figure 14.8 Example Flowchart of Suspend and Resume Interrupt Processing

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 504 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(3) Suspend and Remote-Wakeup Operations

Figures 14.9 and 14.10 are flowcharts of the suspend and remote-wakeup operations. If the

USB bus enters a non-suspend state from the suspend state due to a remote-wakeup signal from

this function, perform the operations shown below.

USB function Firmware

USB cable connected

A bus idle of 3 ms or

more occurs

A suspend/resume

interrupt occurs

Suspend state

Output resume signal

to USB bus

A suspend/resume

interrupt occurs

Enable SPRSi and

IRQ6 interrupts

(Set SPRSiE in UIER3 to 1)

(Set IRQ6E in IER to 1)

Initialize standby

enable flag

(Clear standby enable

flag to 0)

Run user program

In one of the power-down

modes

Mask all interrupts

(Manipulate bit I using

LDC instruction, etc.)

Enable IRQ6 interrupt

(Set IRQ6E in IER to 1)

Unmask all interrupts

(Clear bit I using LDC

instruction, etc.)

Transition to one

of the power-down modes

(Execute SLEEP

instruction)

Suspend interrupt

processing

(see figure 14.8)

IRQ6

NMI or IRQx

IRQ6

Suspend/remote-wakeup

interrupt processing

Main process

Yes

Standby enable

flag = 0?

Remote-wakeup

interrupt processing

(see figure 14.10)

Standby enable

flag = 1?

Notes: 1. The standby enable flag is a software flag for controlling transition to the standby

state (one of the power-down modes). There is no such hardware flag.

2. Interrupts should be masked from when the IRQ6 interrupt is received until the

SLEEP instruction is executed. Finally, unmask the interrupts using the LDC

instruction or the like and execute the SLEEP instruction immediately afterward.

Remote-

wakeup

Figure 14.9 Example Flowchart of Suspend and Remote-Wakeup Operations

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 505 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(4) Remote-Wakeup Interrupt Processing

Figure 14.10 is a flowchart of remote-wakeup interrupt processing.

USB function Firmware

Remote-wakeup

interrupt processing

USB operating clock stabilization

detection interrupt processing

Start USB operating

clock oscillation

Output resume signal

to USB bus

A suspend/resume

interrupt occurs

A USB operating clock

stabilization detection

interrupt occurs

Wait for resume signal

from up-stream

Clear USB operating clock

stabilization detection flag

(Clear CK48READY

in UIFR3 to 0)

Execute remote-wakeup

(Set DVR in UDRR to 1)

Resume interrupt

processing

(see figure 14.8)

Clear USB module

stop mode

(Clear SPRSi in UIFR3

to 0)

Wait for USB operating

clock stabilization

Resume main process

USB operating

clock stabilization time

has passed?

Yes

EXIRQx

IRQ6

No Is remote-

wakeup enabled

by host?

NMI or IRQx

Remote-

wakeup

Figure 14.10 Example Flowchart of Remote-Wakeup Interrupt Processing

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 506 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5.4 Control Transfer

The control transfer consists of three stages; setup, data (sometimes omitted), and status, as shown

in figure 14.11. The data stage consists of multiple bus transactions. Figures 14.12 to 14.16 show

operation flows in each stage.

Control-in

Setup stage Data stage Status stage

Control-out

No data

SETUP (0)

DATA0

SETUP (0)

DATA0

SETUP (0)

DATA0

IN (1)

DATA1

OUT (1)

DATA1

IN (0)

DATA0

OUT (0)

. . .

DATA0

IN (0/1)

DATA0/1

OUT (0/1)

DATA0/1

OUT (1)

DATA1

IN (1)

DATA1

IN (1)

DATA1

Figure 14.11 Control Transfer Stage Configuration

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 507 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(1) Setup Stage

USB function Firmware

Receive SETUP token

Receive 8-byte command

data in UEDR0s

To data stage

Set setup command

recive complete flag

(SetupTS in UIFR0 = 1)

Automatic

processing by

this module

Clear SetupTS flag

(SetupTS in UIFR0 = 0)

Clear EP0i FIFO (EP0iCLR in UFCLR = 1)

Clear EP0o FIFO (EP0oCLR in UFCLR = 1)

Read 8-byte data from UEDR0s

Decode command data

Determine data stage direction*

Write 1 to EP0s read complete bit

(EP0sRDFN in UTRG0 = 1)

To control-in

data stage To control-out

data stage

Command

to be processed by

firmware?

EXIRQx

Yes

Notes: 1. In the setup stage, the firmware first analyzes the command data that is sent from the host and

required to be processed by the firmware, and determines subsequent processing.

(For example, the data stage direction.)

2. When the transfer direction is control-out, the EP0i transfer request interrupt that is required in the

status stage should be enabled. When the transfer direction is control-in, this interrupt is not

required and must be disabled.

Figure 14.12 Setup Stage Operation

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 508 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(2) Data Stage (Control-In)

The firmware first analyzes the command data that is sent from the host in the setup stage, and

determines the subsequent data stage direction. If the result of command data analysis is that

the data stage is in-transfer, one packet of data to be sent to the host is written to the FIFO. If

there is more data to be sent, this data is written to the FIFO after the data written first has been

sent to the host (EP0iTS in UIFR0 is set to 1).

The end of the data stage is identified when the host transmits an OUT token and the status

stage is entered.

USB function Firmware

Receive IN token

Transmit data to host

Set EP0i transmit

complete flag

(EP0iTS in UIFR0 = 1)

From setup stage

Write data to USB endpoint

data register 0i (UEDR0i)

Write 1 to EP0i packet

enable bit

(EP0iPKTE in UTRG0 = 1)

Clear EP0i transmit

complete flag

(EP0iTS in UIFR0 = 0)

Write 1 to EP0i packet

enable bit

(EP0iPKTE in UTRG0 = 1)

Write data to USB endpoint

data register 0i (UEDR0i)

1 written

to EP0sRDFN

in UTRG0?

Valid data

in EP0i FIFO?

NAK

Yes

ACK

EXIRQx

Note: If the size of the data transmitted by the function is smaller than the data size requested by the host,

the function indicates the end of the data stage by returnning to the host a packet shorter than the

maximum packet size. If the size of the data transmitted by the function is an integral multiple of the

maximum packet size, the function indicates the end of the data stage by transmitting a zero-length

packet.

Figure 14.13 Data Stage Operation (Control-In)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 509 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(3) Data Stage (Control-Out)

The firmware first analyzes the command data that is sent from the host in the setup stage, and

determines the subsequent data stage direction. If the result of command data analysis is that

the data stage is out-transfer, data from the host is waited for, and after data is received

(EP0oTS in UIFR0 is set to 1), data is read from the FIFO. Next, the firmware writes 1 to the

EP0o read complete bit, empties the receive FIFO, and waits for reception of the next data.

The end of the data stage is identified when the host transmits an IN token and the status stage

is entered.

USB function Firmware

Receive OUT token

Receive data from host

Receive OUT token

Set EP0o receive

complete flag

(EP0oTS in UIFR0 = 1)

Clear EP0o receive

complete flag

(EP0oTS in UIFR0 = 0)

Read data from USB endpoint

receive data size register 0o

(UESZ0o)

Write 1 to EP0o read

complete bit

(EP0oRDFN in UTRG0 = 1)

Read data from USB endpoint

data register 0o (UEDR0o)

1 written

to EP0sRDFN

in UTRG0?

1 written

to EP0oRDFN

in UTRG0?

NAK

ACK

Yes

EXIRQx

Figure 14.14 Data Stage Operation (Control-Out)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 510 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(4) Status Stage (Control-In)

The control-in status stage starts with an OUT token from the host. The firmware receives 0-

byte data from the host, and ends control transfer.

USB function Firmware

OUT token reception

0-byte reception from host

End of control transfer

Set EP0o reception

complete flag

(UIFR0/EP0oTS = 1)

Clear EP0o reception

complete flag

(UIFR0/EP0oTS = 0)

Write 1 to EP0o read

complete bit

(UTRG0/EP0oRDFN = 1)

End of control transfer

ACK

EXIRQx

Figure 14.15 Status Stage Operation (Control-In)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 511 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(5) Status Stage (Control-Out)

The control-out status stage starts with an IN token from the host. When an IN-token is

received at the start of the status stage, there is not yet any data in the EP0i FIFO, and so an

EP0i transfer request interrupt is generated. The firmware recognizes from this interrupt that

the status stage has started. Next, in order to transmit 0-byte data to the host, 1 is written to the

EP0i packet enable bit but no data is written to the EP0i FIFO. As a result, the next IN token

causes 0-byte data to be transmitted to the host, and control transfer ends.

After the firmware has finished all processing relating to the data stage, 1 should be written to

the EP0i packet enable bit.

USB function Firmware

Receive IN token

Transfer 0-byte data to host

End of control transfer

Set EP0i transmit

complete flag

(EP0iTS in UIFR0 = 1)

Clear EP0i transfer

request flag

(EP0iTR in UIFR0 = 0)

Write 1 to EP0i packet

enable bit

(EP0iPKTE in UTRG0 = 1)

Write 0 to EP0i transfer

request interrupt enable bit

(EP0iTRE in UIER0 = 0)

Clear EP0i transmit

complete flag

(EP0iTS in UIFR0 = 0)

End of control transfer

Valid data

in EP0i FIFO?

ACK

Yes

NAK

EXIRQx

Figure 14.16 Status Stage Operation (Control-Out)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 512 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5.5 Interrupt-In Transfer (Endpoint 3)

USB function Firmware

Receive IN token

Transmit data to host

Set EP3 transmit

complete flag

(EP3TS in UIFR0 = 1)

Write data to USB endpoint

data register 3 (UEDR3)

Write 1 to EP3 packet

enable bit

(EP3PKTE in UTRG0 = 1)

Clear EP3 transmit

complete flag

(EP3TS in UIFR0 = 0)

Write data to USB endpoint

data register3 (UEDR3)

Write 1 to EP3 packet

enable bit

(EP3PKTE in UTRG0 = 1)

Valid data

in EP3 FIFO?

Is there

transmit data

to host?

Is there

transmit data

to host?

Yes

NAK

ACK

Note: This flowchart shows just one example of interrupt-in transfer processing. Other possibilities include an

operation flow in which, if there is data to be transmited, the EP3DE bit UDSR is referred to confirm that the

FIFO is empty, and then data is written to the FIFO.

EXIRQx

Figure 14.17 EP3 Interrupt-In Transfer Operation

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 513 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5.6 Bulk-In Transfer (Dual FIFOs) (Endpoint 1)

EP1 has two 64-byte FIFOs, but the user can transmit data and write transmit data without being

aware of this dual-FIFO configuration. However, one data write should be performed for one

FIFO. For example, even if both FIFOs are empty, it is not possible to perform EP1PKTE at one

time after consecutively writing 128 bytes of data. EP1PKTE must be performed for each 64- byte

write.

When transmitting data to the host by bulk-in transfer, first enable the EP1 FIFO empty interrupt

by writing 1 to EP1EMPTYE in UIER1. At first, both EP1 FIFOs are empty, and so an EP1 FIFO

empty interrupt is generated immediately. The data to be transmitted is written to the data register

using this interrupt. After the first transmit data write for one FIFO, the other FIFO is empty, and

so the next transmit data can be written to the other FIFO immediately. When both FIFOs are full,

EP1EMPTY is cleared to 0. If at least one FIFO is empty, UIFR1/EP1EMPTY is set to 1. When

ACK is returned from the host after data transmission is completed, the FIFO used in the data

transmission becomes empty. If the other FIFO contains valid transmit data at this time,

transmission can be continued.

When transmission of all data has been completed, write 0 to UIER1/EP1EMPTYE and disable

EXIRQ0 or EXIRQ1 interrupt requests.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 514 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

USB function Firmware

Receive IN token

Transmit data to host Write 1 to EP1 FIFO

empty enable

(EP1EMPTYE in UIER1 = 1)

UIFR1/EP1EMPTY interrupt

USB endpoint data register 1

(write one packet of data

to UEDR1)

Write 1 to EP1 packet enable bit

(EP1PKTE in UTRG0 = 1)

Write 0 to EP1 FIFO empty

interrupt enable bit

(EP1EMPTYE in UIER1 = 0)

Set EP1 FIFO empty status

(EP1EMPTY in UIFR1 = 1)

Valid data

in EP1 FIFO? NAK

ACK

Yes Yes

Yes

Clear EP1 FIFO empty status

(EP1EMPTY in UIFR1 = 0)

Space

in EP1 FIFO?

Yes EXIRQx

Is there

data to be transmitted

to host?

Is there

data to be transmitted

in host?

Figure 14.18 EP1 Bulk-In Transfer Operation

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 515 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5.7 Bulk-Out Transfer (Dual FIFOs) (Endpoint 2)

EP2 has two 64-byte FIFOs, but the user can receive data and read receive data without being

aware of this dual-FIFO configuration.

When one FIFO is full after reception is completed, the UIFR1/EP2READY bit is set. After the

first receive operation into one of the FIFOs when both FIFOs are empty, the other FIFO is empty,

and so the next packet can be received immediately. When both FIFOs are full, NAK is returned to

the host automatically. When reading of the receive data is completed following data reception, 1

is written to the UTRG0/EP2RDFN bit. This operation empties the FIFO that has just been read,

and makes it ready to receive the next packet.

USB function Firmware

Receive OUT token

Receive data from host

Set EP2 data ready status

(EP2READY in UIFR1 = 1)

Clear EP2 data ready status

(EP2READY in UIFR1 = 0)

Read USB endpoint receive

data size register 2 (UESZ2)

Read data from USB endpoint

data register 2 (UEDR2)

Write 1 to EP2o read

complete bit

(EP2RDFN in UTRG0 = 1)

Space

in EP2 FIFO? No

Yes

Both

EP2 FIFOs empty? No

Yes

NAK

ACK

EXIRQx

EXIRQI

Figure 14.19 EP2 Bulk-Out Transfer Operation

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 516 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5.8 Processing of USB Standard Commands and Class/Vendor Commands

(1) Processing of Commands Transmitted by Control Transfer

A command transmitted from the host by control transfer may require decoding and execution

of command processing by the firmware. Whether or not command decoding is required by the

firmware is indicated in table 14.5 below.

Table 14.5 Command Decoding by Firmware

Decoding not Necessary by Firmware Decoding Necessary by Firmware

Clear Feature

Get Configuration

Get Interface

Get Status

Set Address

Set Configuration

Set Feature

Set Interface

Get Descriptor

Synch Frame

Set Descriptor

Class/Vendor command

If decoding is not necessary by the firmware, command decoding and data stage and status

stage processing are performed automatically. No processing is necessary by the user. An

interrupt is not generated in this case.

If decoding is necessary by the firmware, the USB function module stores the command in the

EP0s FIFO. After normal reception is completed, the SetupTS flag in UIER0 is set and an

interrupt request is generated from the EXIRQx pin. In the interrupt routine, eight bytes of data

must be read from the EP0s data register (UEDR0s) and decoded by the firmware. The

necessary data stage and status stage processing should then be carried out according to the

result of the decoding operation.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 517 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.5.9 Stall Operations

(1) Overview

This section describes stall operations in the USB function module. There are two cases in

which the USB function module stall function is used:

Α. When the firmware forcibly stalls an endpoint for some reason

Β. When a stall is performed automatically within the USB function module due to a USB

specification violation.

The USB function module has internal status bits that hold the status (stall or non-stall) of each

endpoint. When a transaction is sent from the host, the module refers these internal status bits

and determines whether to return a stall to the host. These bits cannot be cleared by the

firmware; they must be cleared with a Clear Feature command from the host. However, the

internal status bit for EP0 is cleared automatically at the reception of the setup command.

(2) Forcible Stall by Firmware

The firmware uses the UESTL register to issue a stall request for the USB function module.

When the firmware wishes to stall a specific endpoint, it sets the corresponding EPnSTL bit (1-

1 in figure 14.20). The internal status bits are not changed at this time.

When a transaction is sent from the host for the endpoint for which the EPnSTL bit was set, the

USB function module refers the internal status bit, and if this is not set, refers the

corresponding EPnSTL bit (1-2 in figure 14.20). If the corresponding EPnSTL bit is not set, the

internal status bit is not changed and the transaction is accepted. If the corresponding EPnSTL

bit is set, the USB function module sets the internal status bit and returns a stall handshake to

the host (1-3 in figure 14.20).

Once an internal status bit is set, it remains set until cleared by a Clear Feature command from

the host, without regarding to EPnSTL. Even after a bit is cleared by the Clear Feature

command (3-1 in figure 14.20), the USB function module continues to return a stall handshake

while the EPnSTL bit is set, since the internal status bit is set each time a transaction is

executed for the corresponding endpoint (1-2 in figure 14.20). To clear a stall, therefore, it is

necessary for the corresponding EPnSTL bit to be cleared by the firmware, and also for the

internal status bit to be cleared with a Clear Feature command (2-1 to 2-3 in figure 14.20).

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 518 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(1) Transition from normal operation to stall

(1-1)

Transaction request

USB

Reference

USB function module

(1-2)

Stall handshake Stall

To (2-1) or (3-1)

To (1-3)

Normal status restored

(1-3)

(2) When Clear Feature is sent after EPnSTL has been cleared

(2-1)

Stall handshake

Transaction request

(2-2)

Clear Feature command

(2-3)

(3) When Clear Feature is sent before EPnSTL is cleared to 0

(3-1)

1. Set EPnSTL to 1 by

firmware

1. Receive IN/OUT

token from the host

2. Refer to EPnSTL

1. Transmit stall

handshake

1. Clear internal status

bit to 0

1. Clear internal status

bit to 0

2. No change in

EPnSTL bit

1. SCME is set to 0

2. EPnSTL is set to 1

3. Set internal status

bit to 1

4. Transmit stall

handshake

1. Clear EPnSTL to 0

by firmware

2. Receive IN/OUT

token from the host

3. Internal status bit

has been set to 1

4. EPnSTL is not

referred to

5. No change in

internal status bit

To (1-2)

Internal status bit

0EPnSTL

0 → 1

Internal status bit

0EPnSTL

Internal status bit

0 → 1EPnSTL

1 (SCME = 0)

Internal status bit

1EPnSTL

1 → 0

Internal status bit

1EPnSTL

Internal status bit

1 → 0EPnSTL

Internal status bit

1 → 0EPnSTL

Figure 14.20 Forcible Stall by Firmware

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 519 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(3) Automatic Stall by USB Function Module

When a stall setting is made with the Set Feature command, when the information of this

module differs from that returned to the host by the Get Descriptor, or in the event of a USB

specification violation, the USB function module automatically sets the internal status bit for

the corresponding endpoint without regarding to EPnSTL, and returns a stall handshake (1-1 in

figure 14.21).

Once an internal status bit is set, it remains set until cleared by a Clear Feature command from

the host, without regarding to EPnSTL. After a bit is cleared by the Clear Feature command,

EPnSTL is referred (3-1 in figure 14.21). The USB function module continues to return a stall

handshake while the internal status bit is set, since the internal status bit is set even if a

transaction is executed for the corresponding endpoint (2-1 and 2-2 in figure 14.21). To clear a

stall, therefore, the internal status bit must be cleared with a Clear Feature command (3-1 in

figure 14.21). If set by the firmware, EPnSTL should also be cleared (2-1 in figure 14.21).

(1) Transition from normal operation to stall

(2) When transaction is performed whill internal status bit is set

Stall handshake

Transaction request

Stall handshake

(2-2)

Clear Feature command

(3) When Clear Feature is sent before transaction is performed

(3-1)

1. In case of USB

specification violation,

USB function module

stalls endpoint

automatically.

1. Transmit stall

handshake

1. Clear the internal

status bit to 0

2. No change in

EPnSTL bit

1. Receive IN/OUT

token from the host

2. Internal status bit has

been set to 1

3. EPnSTL is not

referred to

4. No change internal

status bit

Normal status restored

Internal status bit

0 → 1 EPnSTL

Internal status bit

1EPnSTL

Internal status bit

1EPnSTL

Internal status bit

1 → 0 EPnSTL

Stall status maintained

USB function module

To (2-1) or (3-1)

(1-1)

(2-1)

Figure 14.21 Automatic Stall by USB Function Module

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 520 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.6 DMA Transfer Specifications

Two methods of USB request and auto request are available for the DMA transfer of USB data.

14.6.1 DMAC Transfer by USB Request

(1) Overview

Only normal mode in full address mode (cycle steal mode) supports the transfer by a USB request

of the on-chip DMAC. Endpoints that can be transferred by the on-chip DMAC are EP1 and EP2

in Bulk transfer (corresponding registers are UEDR1 and UEDR2). In DMA transfer, the USB

module must be accessed as an external device in area 6. The USB module cannot be accessed as a

device with external ACK (single-address transfer cannot be performed). 0-byte data transfer to

EP2 is ignored even if the DMA transfer is enabled by setting the EP2T1 bit in UDMAR to 1.

(2) On-Chip DMAC Settings

The on-chip DMAC must be specified as follows: A USB request (DREQ signal is used), activated

by low-level input, byte size, full-address mode transfer, and the DTA bit in DMABCR = 1. After

completing the DMA transfer of specified times, the DMAC automatically stops. Note, however,

that the USB module keeps the DREQ signal low while data to be transferred by the on-chip

DMAC remains regardless of the DMAC status.

(3) EP1 DMA Transfer

The EP1T1 bit in UDMAR enables the DMA transfer. The EP1T0 bit in UDMAR specifies the

DREQ signal to be used by the DMA transfer. When 1 is written to the EP1T1 bit, the DREQ

signal is driven low if at least one of EP1 data FIFOs is empty; the DREQ signal is driven high if

both EP1 data FIFOs are full.

(a) EP1PKTE in UTRG0

When DMA transfer is performed on EP1 transmit data, the USB module automatically performs

the same processing as writing 1 to EP1PKTE if one data FIFO (64 bytes) becomes full.

Accordingly, to transfer data of integral multiples of 64 bytes, the user needs not to write 1 to

EP1PKTE. To transfer data of less than 64 bytes, the user must write 1 to EP1PKTE using the

DMA transfer end interrupt of the on-chip DMAC. If the user writes 1 to EP1PKTE in cases other

than the case when data of less than 64 bytes is transferred, excess transfer occurs and correct

operation cannot be guaranteed.

Figure 14.22 shows an example for transmitting 150 bytes of data from EP1 to the host. In this

case, internal processing as the same as writing 1 to EP1PKTE is automatically performed twice.

This kind of internal processing is performed when the currently selected data FIFO becomes full.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 521 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Accordingly, this processing is automatically performed only when 64-byte data is sent. This

processing is not performed automatically when data less than 64 bytes is sent.

(b) EP1 DMA transfer procedure

1. Set the bits EP1T1 and EP1T0 in UDMAR.

2. Set DMAC (specifies the number of transfers in DMAC to transmit 150 bytes of data).

3. Activate DMAC.

4. Perform DMA transfer.

5. Write 1 to the EP1PKTE bit in UTRG0 by a DMA transfer end interrupt.

64 bytes 64 bytes 22 bytes

EP1PKTE

(Automatically

performed)

EP1PKTE

(Automatically

performed)

EP1PKTE is

not performed

Executed by DMA transfe

end interrupt (user)

Figure 14.22 EP1PKTE Operation in UTRG0

(4) EP2 DMA Transfer

The EP2T1 bit in UDMAR enables the DMA transfer. The EP2T0 bit in the UDMAR specifies the

DREQ signal to be used by the DMA transfer. When 1 is written to the EP2T1 bit, the DREQ

signal is driven low if at least one of EP2 data FIFOs is full (ready state); the DREQ signal is

driven high if both EP2 data FIFOs are empty when all receive data items are read.

(a) EP2RDFN in UTRG0

When DMA transfer is performed on EP2 receive data, do not write 1 to EP2RDFN after one data

FIFO (64 bytes) has been read. In data transfer other than DMA transfer, the next data cannot be

read after one data FIFO (64 bytes) has been read unless 1 is written to EP2RDFN. While in DMA

transfer, the USB module automatically performs the same processing as writing 1 to EP2RDFN if

the currently selected data FIFO becomes empty. Accordingly, in DMA transfer, the user needs

not to write 1 to EP2RDFN. If the user writes 1 to EP2RDFN in DMA transfer, excess transfer

occurs and correct operation cannot be guaranteed.

Figure 14.23 shows an example of EP2 receiving 150 bytes of data from the host. In this case,

internal processing as the same as writing 1 to EP2RDFN is automatically performed three times.

This kind of internal processing is performed when the currently selected data FIFO becomes

empty. Accordingly, this processing is automatically performed both when 64-byte data is sent and

when data less than 64 bytes is sent.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 522 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(b) EP2 DMA transfer procedure

Perform DMAC transfer in 1 packet units. After setting the EP2READY flag, check the size of

data received from the host and then set the data size as the number of DMAC transfers.

1. Set the bits EP2T1 and EP2T0 in UDMAR.

2. Wait for the EP2READY flag in UIFR1 to be set.

3. Set DMAC.

Read the value in UESZ2 and specifies the size of received data (not more than 64 bytes) as the

number of transfers.

4. Activate DMAC.

5. Perform DMA transfer (not more than 64 bytes).

6. Wait for DMA transfer end.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6.

EP2RDFN

(Automatically

performed)

EP2RDFN

(Automatically

performed)

EP2RDFN

(Automaticall

performed)

64 bytes 64 bytes 22 bytes

Figure 14.23 EP2RDFN Operation in UTRG0

14.6.2 DMA Transfer by Auto-Request

(1) Overview

Burst mode transfer or ycle steal transfer can be selected for the on-chip DMAC auto-request

transfer. Endpoints that can be transferred by the on-chip DMAC are all registers (UEDR0s,

UEDR0i, UEDR0o, UEDR1, UEDR2, UEDR3). Confirm flags and interrupts corresponding to

each data register before activating the DMA. As UDMAR is not used in auto-request mode, set

UDMAR to H'00.

(2) On-Chip DMAC Settings

The on-chip DMAC must be specified as follows: Auto-request, byte size, full-address mode

transfer, and number of transfers equal to or less than the maximum packet size of the data

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 523 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(3) EP0, EP1, or EP3 DMA Transfer

(a) EPnPKTE Bits of UTRG0 (n = 0i, 1, or 3)

Note that 1 is not automatically written to EPnPKTE in case of auto-request transfer. Always write

1 to EPnPKTE by the CPU. The following example shows when 150-byte data is transmitted from

EP1 to the host. In this case, 1 should be written to EP2PKTE three times as shown in figure

14.24.

(b) EP1 DMA Transfer Procedure

The DMAC transfer unit should be one packet. Therefore, set the number of transfers so that it is

equal to or less than the maximum packet size of each endpoint.

1. Confirm that UIFR1/EP1EMPTY flag is 1.

2. DMAC settings for EP1 data transfer (such as auto-request and address setting).

3. Set the number of transfers for 64 bytes (the maximum packet size or less) in the DMAC.

4. Activate the DMAC (write 1 to DTE after reading DTE as 0).

5. DMA transfer.

6. Write 1 to the UTRG0/EP1PKTE bit after the DMA transfer is completed.

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 above.

8. Confirm that UIFR1/EP1EMPTY flag is 1.

9. Set the number of transfer for 22 bytes in the DMAC.

10. Activate the DMAC (write 1 to DTE after reading DTE as 0).

11. DMA transfer.

12. Write 1 to the UTRG0/EP1PKTE bit after the DMA transfer is completed.

Write 1 to

EP1PKTE

Write 1 to

EP1PKTE

Write 1 to

EP1PKTE

64 bytes 64 bytes 22 bytes

Figure 14.24 EP1PKTE Operation in UTRG0 (Auto-Request)

(4) EP0o or EP2 DMA Transfer

(a) EPnRDFN Bits of UTRG0 (n = 0o or 2)

Note that 1 is not automatically written to EPnRDFN in case of auto-request transfer. Always write

1 to EPnRDFN by the CPU. The following example shows when EP2 receives 150-byte data from

the host. In this case, 1 should be written to EP2RDFN three times as shown in figure 14.25.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 524 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(b) EP2 DMA Transfer Procedure

The DMAC transfer unit should be one packet. Therefore, set the number of transfers so that it is

equal to or less than the maximum packet size of each endpoint.

1. Wait for the UIFR1/EP2READY flag to be set.

2. DMAC settings for EP2 data transfer (such as auto-request and address setting). Read value of

UESZ2 and specify number of transfers to match size of received data (64 bytes or less).

3. Activate the DMAC (write 1 to DTE after reading DTE as 0).

4. DMA transfer (transfer of 64 bytes or less).

5. Write 1 to the UTRG0/EP2RDFN bit after the DMA transfer is completed.

6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 above.

Write 1 to

EP2RDFN

Write 1 to

EP2RDFN

Write 1 to

EP2RDFN

64 bytes 64 bytes 22 bytes

Figure 14.25 EP2RDFN Operation in UTRG0 (Auto-Request)

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 525 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.7 USB External Circuit Example

Figures 14.26 and 14.27 show the USB external circuit examples of this LIS.

Regulator 0: Bus-powered mode

Internal transceiver

VCC

1.5 kΩ

DrVCC

(3.3 V)

VCC

(3.3 V)

VBUS

(5 V)

USD+ USD-

D+ D-

DrVSS

GND

UBPMVBUS

VCC

(3.3 V)

24 Ω24 Ω

VSS

USB connector

USB

Step-down to the operating voltage VCC (3.3 V) of this LSI.

To protect the LSI, voltage applicable IC such as HD74LV-A series must be used

even when the system power is turned off.

Prevent the VBUS pin from being affected by noise while USB is in communication.

Pull-up

control external

circuit for

full speed

Notes:

P36

Figure 14.26 USB External Circuit in Bus-Powered Mode

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 526 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

1: Self-powered mode

Internal transceiver

P36

1.5 kΩ

DrVCC

(3.3 V)

3.3V

VBUS

(5 V)

USD+ USD-

D+ D-

24 Ω24 Ω

DrVSS

GND

UBPMVBUS

VCC

(3.3 V)IRQx

VCC

VSS

USB connector

*2*3

USB

To protect the LSI, voltage applicable IC such as HD74LV-A series must be used

even when the system power is turned off.

To cancel power-down mode by detecting the USB cable connection, theVBUS

signal must be connected to the IRQx pin. Note that power-down mode

state cannot be canceled by the USB interrupt EXIRQx.

Prevent the VBUS pin from being affected by noise while USB is in communication.

Pull-up control

external circuit

for full speed

Notes:

VCC *1

Figure 14.27 USB External Circuit in Self-Powered Mode

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 527 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.8 Usage Notes

14.8.1 Emulator Usage Notes

1. If UEDR0o and UEDR2 are displayed using the I/O register window function, or the like, the

EP0o FIFO or EP2 FIFO read pointer will not operate properly, preventing UEDR0o, UESZ0o,

UEDR2, and UESZ2 from being read correctly. Therefore, UEDR0o and UEDR2 should not

be displayed.

2. In the E6000, since the USB module is mounted on the external extended board and accessed

as an external module, there are some limitations as shown below. These limitations do not

apply to the E10A or to product chips.

• USB operation is not supported in the H8S/2218 Group’s mode 7 (single-chip mode).

• When using the USB module in the H8S/2218 Group’s mode 6 (on-chip ROM-enabled mode)

or the H8S/2212 Group’s mode 7 (single-chip mode), CS6 and A9 to A0 are input pins in the

initial status. Therefore, CS6 and A9 to A0 must be set as output pins (= B'0010) by setting

P72DDR to 1, AE3 to AE0 to B'0010, and PC7DDR to PC0DDR to H'FF before accessing the

USB module.

• When using the USB module in the H8S/2218 Group’s modes 4 and 5 (on-chip ROM-disabled

mode), CS6 and A9 to A8 must be set as output pins by setting P72DDR to 1 and AE3 to AE0

to B'0010.

14.8.2 Bus Interface

The USB module’s interface is based on the bus specifications of external area 6. Accordingly,

before accessing the USB module, area 6 must be specified as having an 8-bit bus width and 3-

state access using the bus controller register.

Address H'C00100 to H'DFFFFF is for USB reserved area and thus access prohibited.

14.8.3 Operating Frequency

The main clock of this LSI must be 24 MHz or 16 MHz. This 24-MHz main clock, used as base

clock, is doubled in the on-chip PLL circuit or this 16-MHz main clock, also used as base clock, is

tripled in the on-chip PLL circuit, to generate the 48-MHz USB operating clock. Since the USB

module does not support medium-speed mode, sleep mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and

subsleep mode, make sure to use full-speed mode.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 528 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.8.4 Setup Data Reception

The following must be noted for the EP0s FIFO used to receive 8-byte setup data. The USB is

designed to always receive setup commands. Accordingly, write from the UDC has higher priority

than read from the LSI. If the reception of the next setup command starts while the LSI is reading

data after completing reception, this data read from the LSI is forcibly cancelled and the next setup

command write starts. After the next setup command write, data read from the LSI is thus

undefined. Read operation is forcibly disabled because data cannot be guaranteed if DP-RAM used

as FIFO accesses the same address for write and read.

14.8.5 FIFO Clear

If the USB cable is disconnected during communication, old data may be contained in the FIFO.

Accordingly, FIFOs must be cleared immediately after USB cable connection. In addition, after

bus reset, all FIFOs must also be cleared. Note, however, that FIFOs that are currently used for

data transfer to or from the host must not be cleared.

14.8.6 IRQ6 Interrupt

A suspend/resume interrupt requested by IRQ6 must be specified as falling-edge sensitive.

14.8.7 Data Register Overread or Overwrite

When the CPU reads or writes to data registers, the following must be noted:

• Transmit data registers (UEDR0i, UEDR3, UEDR1)

Data to be written to the transmit data registers must be within the maximum packet size. For

the transmit data register of EP1 having a dual-FIFO configuration, data to be written at any

time must be within the maximum packet size. In this case, after a data write, the FIFO is

switched to the other FIFO, enabling an further data write, when the PKTE bit in UTRG0 is set

to 1. Accordingly, data of size corresponding to two FIFOs must not be written to the transmit

data registers at a time.

• Receive data registers (UEDR0o, UEDR2)

Receive data registers must not read a data size that is greater than the effective size of the read

data item. In other words, receive data registers must not read data with data size larger than

that specified by the receive data size register. For the receive data register of EP2 having a

dual-FIFO configuration, data to be read at any time must be within the maximum packet size.

In this case, after reading the currently selected FIFO, set the RDFN bit in UTRG to 1. This

switches the FIFO to the other FIFO and updates the receive data size, enabling the next data

read. In addition, if there is no receive data in a FIFO, data must not be read. Otherwise, the

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 529 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

pointer that controls the internal module FIFO is updated and correct operation cannot be

guaranteed.

14.8.8 Reset

⎯ The manual reset during USB communication operations must not be executed, since the

LSI may stop with the state of USD+ and USD- pins maintained.

This USB module uses synchronous reset for some registers. The reset state of these registers

must be cancelled after the clock oscillation stabilization time has passed. At initialization,

reset must be cancelled using the following procedure:

1. Cancel the USB module stop 1: Clear the USBSTOP1 bit in EXMDLSTP to 0.

2. Select the USB operating clock: Write 1 to the UCKS3 to UCKS0 bits in UCTLR.

3. Cancel the USB module stop 2: Clear the MSTPB0 bit in MSTPCRB to 0.

4. Wait for the USB operating clock stabilization: Wait until the CK48READY bit in UIFR3

is set to 1.

5. Cancel the USB interface reset state: Clear the UIFRST bit in UCTLR to 0.

6. Cancel the UDC core reset state: Clear the UDCRST bit in UCTLR to 0.

For details, see the flowcharts in section 14.5.1, Initialization and section 14.5.2, USB Cable

Connection/Disconnection.

⎯ The USB registers are not initialized when the watchdog timer (WDT) triggers a power-on

reset. Therefore, the USB may not operate properly after a power-on reset is triggered by

the WDT due to CPU runaway or a similar cause. (If a power-on reset is triggered by input

of a power-on reset signal from the RES pin, the USB registers are initialized and there is

no problem.) Consequently, an initialization routine should be used to write the initial

values listed below to the following three registers, thereby ensuring that all the USB

registers are properly initialized, immediately following a reset.

UCTLR = H'03, UIER3 = H'80, UIFR3 = H'00

14.8.9 EP0 Interrupt Sources Assignment

EP0 interrupt sources assigned to bits 3 to 0 in UIFR0 must be assigned to the same interrupt

signal (EXIRQx) by setting UISR0. There are no other restrictions on interrupt sources.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 530 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.8.10 Level Shifter for VBUS and IRQx Pins

The VBUS and IRQx pins of this USB module must be connected to the USB connector’s VBUS

pin via a level shifter. This is because the USB module has a circuit that operates by detecting

USB cable connection or disconnection.

Even if the power of the device incorporating this USB module is turned off, 5-V power is applied

to the USB connector’s VBUS pin while the USB cable is connected to the device set. To protect

the LSI from destruction, use a level shifter such as the HD74LV-A Series, which allows voltage

application to the pin even when the power is off.

14.8.11 USB Endpoint Data Read and Write

To write data to an USB endpoint data register (UEDR0i, UEDR1, or UEDR3) on the transmit side

using a CPU word or longword transfer instruction, the size of data to be written must be smaller

than the size of data that is to be transmitted.

For example, when 7-byte data is transferred to the host, 8-byte data is sent to the host if data is

written twice by the longword transfer instructions or if data is written four times by the word

transfer instructions. To write 7-byte data correctly, data must be written once by a longword

transfer instruction, once by a word transfer instruction, and once by a byte transfer instruction, or

data must be written three times by a word transfer instruction and once by a byte transfer

instruction.

To read data from the USB endpoint data register (UEDR0o or UEDR2) on the receive side, the

correct size of data must be read. In this case, the data size is specified by the USB endpoint

receive size register (UESZ0o or UESZ2).

To execute DMA transfer on data in the USB endpoint data register using the on-chip DMAC,

byte transfer musts be used. In word transfer, odd-byte data cannot be transferred. Word transfer is

thus disabled.

14.8.12 Restrictions on Entering and Canceling Power-Down Mode

Before entering the power-down mode, set the USB module stop 2 state. The UDC core must not

be reset.

To access the USB module after canceling power-down mode, cancel the USB module stop 2 state

and wait for the USB operating clock (48 MHz) stabilization time.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 531 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(21)

(22)

(19)

(20)

(23)

(24)

Specify IRQ6 to falling edge sensitive

(Set IRQ6E in IER to 1)

(Write IRQ6SCB and IRQ6SCA

in ISCRH to 01

Cancel USB module stop2 mode

(Clear MSTPB0 in MSTPCRB to 0)

Enter USB module stop 2 state

(Stop MSTPB0 in MSTPCRB to 1)

USB communication operations can be

restarted by using various USB registers

Clear SPRSi in UIFR3 to 0

Mask all interrupts with LDC instruction, etc.*

Set IRQ6E in IER to 1*

Unmask all interrupts with LDC instruction, etc.*

Enter power-down mode*

(Execute SLEEP instruction)

IRQ6 = Low (falling edge output)

Set IRQ6F in ISR to 1

Set SPRSi and SPRSs in UIFR3 to 1

Confirm SPRSs in UIFR3 as 1

Clear IRQ6E in IER to 0*

Clear SPRSi in UIFR3 to 0

Detect USB bus suspend state

USPND pin = High

Procedure to enter power-down mode Procedure to cancel power-down mode

Detect USB bus resume

USPND pin = Low

All USB module internal clocks stop

USB module intenal clock operation starts

Wait 2 ms for USB operation clock

to stabilize

(Wait for CK48READY in UIFR3 is set to 1)

All LSI internal clocks stop

IRQ6 = High

Cancel power-down mode

Wait for system clock stabilization time

(For external clok: 16 states min.)

(For crystal oscillator clock: 4 ms min.)

Enter active mode

(LSI internal clock starts oscillation)

IRQ6 = Low (falling edge output)

Set IRQ6F in ISR to 1

Set SPRSi of UIFR3 to 1

Clear SPRSs of UIFR3 to 0

Set CK48READY in UIFR3 to 1

(USB operating clock stabilized)

Detect SOF packet

Set SOF of UIFR3 to 1

: Indicates operations to be done

by firmware.

Guide to Flowchart Figures

: Indicates operations to be

automatically done by hardware

in this LSI.

Note: * Interrupts should be masked from when the IRQ6 interrupt is received until the SLEEP instruction is executed.

Finally, unmask the interrupts using the LDC instruction or the like and execute the SLEEP instruction immediately

afterward.

Figure 14.28 Flowchart

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 532 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

Power-down

mode 4 ms

wait for

oscillator

to stabilize

2 ms wait

for USB

operation

clock

to stabilize

USB module stop state

USB operation

resumes

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(21)

(22)

(23)

USB bus state

IRQ6

ISR/IRQ6F

UIFR3/SPRSi

USPND

UIFR3/SPRSs

UIFR3/SOF

USB module

stop

power-down mode

System clock

Normal Suspend SOF

USB internal

clock

UIFR3/

CK48READY

CLK48

(48MHz)

USB operating

clock (48MHz)

(14)

(19)

(20)

(24)

Resume → Normal

Figure 14.29 Timing Chart

14.8.13 USB External Circuit Example

The USB external circuit examples are used for reference only. In actual board design, carefully

check the system operation.

In addition, the USB external circuit examples cannot guarantee the correct system operation. The

user must individually take measures against external surges or ESD noise by incorporating

protective diodes or other components if necessary.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 533 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

14.8.14 Pin Processing when USB Not Used

Pin processing should be performed as follows.

DrVCC = VCC, DrVSS = 0 V, USD+ = USD− = USPND = open state, VBUS = UBPM = 0 V

14.8.15 Notes on TR Interrupt

Note the following when using the transfer request interrupt (TR interrupt) for IN transfer to EP0i,

EP1, or EP3.

The TR interrupt flag is set if the FIFO for the target EP has no data when the IN token is sent

from the USB host. However, at the timing shown in figure 14.30, multiple TR interrupts occur

successively. Take appropriate measures against malfunction in such a case.

Note: This module determines whether to return NAK if the FIFO of the target EP has no data

when receiving the IN token, but the TR interrupt flag is set only after a NAK handshake

is sent. If the next IN token is sent before PKTE of UTRG0 is written to, the TR interrupt

flag is set again.

CPU

Host IN token IN token IN token

Sets TR flag

(Sets the flag again)

Sets TR flag

Determines whether

to return NAK Transmits data

TR interrupt routine

Clear

TR flag Writes

transmit data UTRG0/

PKTE

TR interrupt routine

USB NAK

Determines whether

to return NAK

NAK ACK

Figure 14.30 TR Interrupt Flag Set Timing

14.8.16 Clearing the FIFO when DMA Transfer Is Enabled

When DMA transfer is enabled (EP2T1 = 1 and EP2T0 = 0 or 1 in UDMAR) at endpoint 2, it is

not possible to clear OUTFIFO in EP2. It is necessary to disable DMA transfer (EP2T1 = 0 and

EP2T0 = 0 in UDMAR) before clearing the FIFO.

Section 14 Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 534 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 535 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 15 A/D Converter

This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to six

analog input channels to be selected. The block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure

15.1.

15.1 Features

• 10-bit resolution

• Six input channels

• Conversion time: 8.1 µs per channel (at 16-MHz operation), 10.7 µs per channel (at 24-MHz

operation), 21.8 µs per channel (at 6-MHz operation)

• Two operating modes

⎯ Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion

⎯ Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels

• Four data registers

⎯ Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel

• Sample and hold function

• Three methods conversion start

⎯ Software

⎯ Timer (TPU) conversion start trigger

⎯ External trigger signal (ADTRG)

• Interrupt request

⎯ An A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) can be generated

• Module stop mode can be set

• Settable analog conversion voltage range

Analog conversion voltage range settable using the reference voltage pin (Vref) as the

reference voltage

DCMS34A_000120011200

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 536 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Module data bus

Bus interface

Multiplexer

Control circuit

Internal data bus

AN0

AN1

AN2

AN3

AN14

AN15

Legend:

ADCR: A/D control register

ADCSR: A/D control/status register

ADDRA: A/D data register A

ADDRB: A/D data register B

ADDRC: A/D data register C

ADDRD: A/D data register D

ADTRG Time conversion start trigger from TPU

ADI interrupt signal

Successive

approximation register

Sample and

hold circuit

Comparator

φ/2

φ/4

φ/8

φ/16

10 bit D/A

Off during A/D conversion standby

On during A/D conversion

Vref

VCC

VSS

Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 537 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 15.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. The AN0 to AN3 and AN14 to

AN15 pins are analog input pins. The VCC and VSS pins are the power supply pins for the

analog block in the A/D converter. The Vref pin is the reference voltage pin for the A/D

conversion.

Table 15.1 Pin Configuration

Pin Name Symbol I/O Function

Power supply pin VCC Input Analog block power supply and reference voltage

(also used for digital block)

Ground pin VSS Input Analog block ground and reference voltage

(also used for digital block)

Reference voltage pin Vref Input Reference voltage pin for A/D conversion

Analog input pin 0 AN0 Input

Analog input pin 1 AN1 Input

Analog input pin 2 AN2 Input

Analog input pin 3 AN3 Input

Analog input pin 14 AN14 Input

Analog input pin 15 AN15 Input

Analog input pins

A/D external trigger

input pin

ADTRG Input External trigger input pin for starting A/D

conversion

15.3 Register Descriptions

The A/D converter has the following registers.

• A/D data register A (ADDRA)

• A/D data register B (ADDRB)

• A/D data register C (ADDRC)

• A/D data register D (ADDRD)

• A/D control/status register (ADCSR)

• A/D control register (ADCR)

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 538 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)

There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers; ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of

A/D conversion. The ADDR registers, which store a conversion result for each channel, are

shown in table 15.2.

The converted 10-bit data is stored in bits 6 to 15. The lower 6 bits are always read as 0.

The data bus between the CPU and the A/D converter is 8 bits wide. The upper byte can be read

directly from the CPU, however the lower byte should be read via a temporary register. The

temporary register contents are transferred from the ADDR when the upper byte data is read.

When reading the ADDR, read the upper byte before the lower byte, or read in word unit. The

initial value of the ADDR is H'0000.

Table 15.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers

Analog Input Channel A/D Data Register to Be Stored the Results of A/D Conversion

AN0 ADDRA

AN1 ADDRB

AN2, AN14 ADDRC

AN3, AN15 ADDRD

15.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)

ADCSR controls A/D conversion operations.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 ADF 0 R/(W)*A/D End Flag

A status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion.

[Setting conditions]

• When A/D conversion ends in single mode

• When A/D conversion ends on all channels

specified in scan mode

[Clearing conditions]

• When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1

• When DMAC is activated by an ADI interrupt and

ADDR is read

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 539 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

6 ADIE 0 R/W A/D Interrupt Enable

A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request enabled

when 1 is set.

5 ADST 0 R/W A/D Start

Clearing this bit to 0 stops A/D conversion, and the A/D

converter enters the wait state.

Setting this bit to 1 starts A/D conversion. It can be set to

1 by software, the timer conversion start trigger, and the

A/D external trigger (ADTRG). In single mode, this bit is

cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the

specified channel is complete. In scan mode, conversion

continues sequentially on the specified channels until

this bit is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, a transition to

standby mode, or module stop mode.

4 SCAN 0 R/W Scan Mode

Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D

conversion operating mode.

0: Single mode

1: Scan mode

CH3

CH2

CH1

CH0

R/W

Channel Select 3 to 0

Select analog input channels.

When SCAN = 0 When SCAN = 1

0000: AN0 0000: AN0

0001: AN1 0001: AN0 to AN1

0010: AN2 0010: AN0 to AN2

0011: AN3 0011: AN0 to AN3

01××: Setting prohibited 01xx: Setting prohibited

10××: Setting prohibited 1xxx: Setting prohibited

11××: Setting prohibited

1110: AN14

1111: AN15

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Note: * The write value should always be 0 to clear this flag.

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 540 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)

The ADCR enables A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

TRGS1

TRGS0

R/W

Timer Trigger Select 1 and 0

Enables the start of A/D conversion by a trigger signal.

Only set bits TRGS1 and TRGS0 while conversion is

stopped (ADST = 0).

00: A/D conversion start by software

01: A/D conversion start by TPU

10: Setting prohibited

11: A/D conversion start by external trigger pin

(ADTRG)

5, 4 — All 1 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 cannot be modified.

CKS1

CKS0

R/W

Clock Select 1 and 0

These bits specify the A/D conversion time. The

conversion time should be changed only when ADST =

00: Conversion time = 530 states (Max.)

01: Conversion time = 266 states (Max.)

10: Conversion time = 134 states (Max.)

11: Conversion time = 68 states (Max.)

The conversion time setting should exceed the

conversion time shown in section 22.6, A/D Converter

Characteristics.

1, 0 — All 1 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 1, and only 1 should be

written to them.

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 541 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.4 Interface to Bus Master

ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers. As the data bus to the bus master is 8 bits wide, the bus

master accesses to the upper byte of the registers directly while to the lower byte of the registers

via the temporary register (TEMP).

Data in ADDR is read in the following way: When the upper-byte data is read, the upper-byte data

will be transferred to the CPU and the lower-byte data will be transferred to TEMP. Then, when

the lower-byte data is read, the lower-byte data will be transferred to the CPU.

When data in ADDR is read, the data should be read from the upper byte and lower byte in the

order. When only the upper-byte data is read, the data is guaranteed. However, when only the

lower-byte data is read, the data is not guaranteed.

Figure 15.2 shows data flow when accessing to ADDR.

TEMP

(H'40)

ADDRnL

(H'40)

ADDRnH

(H'AA)

TEMP

(H'40)

ADDRnL

(H'40)

ADDRnH

(H'AA)

Read the upper byte

Read the lower byte

(n = A to D

)

(n = A to D

)

Module data bus

Bus interface

Bus master

(H'40)

Bus master

(H'AA)

Figure 15.2 Access to ADDR (When Reading H'AA40)

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 542 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.5 Operation

The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two

operating modes; single mode and scan mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input

channel, in order to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the bit ADST to 0 in ADCSR. The

ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or analog input channel is changed.

15.5.1 Single Mode

In single mode, A/D conversion is to be performed only once on the specified single channel. The

operations are as follows.

1. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit is set to 1, according to software or external

trigger input.

2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the corresponding A/D data

3. On completion of conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at

this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated.

4. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D conversion ends, the ADST

bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the wait state.

ADIE

ADST

ADF

State of channel 0 (AN0)

A/D

conversion

starts

ADDRA

ADDRB

ADDRC

ADDRD

State of channel 1 (AN1)

State of channel 2 (AN2)

State of channel 3 (AN3)

Note:

Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.

Set

Clear

A/D conversion result 1

A/D conversion

A/D conversion result 2

Read conversion result*

Idle

Idle Idle

A/D conversion

Set

Figure 15.3 A/D Conversion Timing (Single-Chip Mode, Channel 1 Selected)

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 543 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.5.2 Scan Mode

In scan mode, A/D conversion is to be performed sequentially on the specified channels (four

channels maximum). The operations are as follows.

1. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, TPU or external trigger input, A/D conversion

starts on the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH3 and CH2 = 00, AN4 when CH3 and

CH2 = 01, or AN8 when CH3 and CH2 = 10).

2. When A/D conversion for each channel is completed, the result is sequentially transferred to

the A/D data register corresponding to each channel.

3. When conversion of all the selected channels is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1. If the

ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends.

Conversion of the first channel in the group starts again.

4. Steps 2 to 3 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is

cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops.

ADST

ADF

ADDRA

ADDRB

ADDRC

ADDRD

State of

channel 0 (AN0)

State of

channel 1 (AN1)

State of

channel 2 (AN2)

State of

channel 3 (AN3)

Set*

1 Clear*

Idle

Notes: 1. Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.

2. Data currently being converted is ignored.

Clear*

Idle

A/D conversion time

Continuous A/D conversion execution

A/D conversion 1

Idle Idle

Idle

Transfer

A/D conversion 4

A/D conversion result 1

A/D conversion result 2

A/D conversion result 3

A/D conversion result 4

Idle

A/D conversion 5

A/D conversion 3

A/D conversion 2

Figure 15.4 A/D Conversion Timing (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected)

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 544 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.5.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time

The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog

input when the A/D conversion start delay time (tD) has passed after the ADST bit is set to 1, then

starts conversion. Figure 15.5 shows the A/D conversion timing. Tables 15.3 and 15.4 show the

A/D conversion time.

As indicated in figure 15.5, the A/D conversion time (tCONV) includes tD and the input sampling

time (tSPL). The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The

total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 15.4.

In scan mode, the values given in table 15.4 apply to the first conversion time. The values given in

table 15.3 apply to the second and subsequent conversions.

(1)

(2)

SPL

CONV

ddress

Write signal

Input sampling

timing

Legend:

(1): ADCSR write cycle

(2): ADCSR address

: A/D conversion start delay

SPL

: Input sampling time

CONV

A/D conversion time

Figure 15.5 A/D Conversion Timing

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 545 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 15.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)

CKS1 = 0 CKS1 = 1

CKS0 = 0 CKS0 = 1 CKS0 = 0 CKS0 = 1

Item

Symbol Min. Typ. Max. Min. Typ. Max. Min. Typ. Max. Min. Typ. Max.

A/D conversion start

delay

tD 18 — 33 10 — 17 6 — 9 4 — 5

Input sampling time tSPL — 127 — — 63 — — 31 — — 15 —

A/D conversion time tCONV 515 — 530 259 — 266 131 — 134 67 — 68

Note: All values represent the number of states.

Table 15.4 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode)

CKS1 CKS0 Conversion Time (State)

0 512 (Fixed) 0

1 256 (Fixed)

1 0 128 (Fixed)

1 64 (Fixed)

15.5.4 External Trigger Input Timing

A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS0 and TRGS1 bits are set to 11 in

ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG pin sets

the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan

modes, are the same as when the bit ADST has been set to 1 by software. Figure 15.6 shows the

timing.

ADTRG

Internal trigger signal

DST A/D conversion

Figure 15.6 External Trigger Input Timing

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 546 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.6 Interrupts

The A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion.

Setting the ADIE bit to 1 enables ADI interrupt requests while the bit ADF in ADCSR is set to 1

after A/D conversion is completed. The DMAC can be activated by an ADI interrupt.

Table 15.5 A/D Converter Interrupt Source

Name Interrupt Source Interrupt Source Flag DMAC Activation

ADI A/D conversion completed ADF Possible

15.7 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions

This LSI’s A/D conversion precision definitions are given below.

• Resolution

The number of A/D converter digital output codes

• Quantization error

The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 15.7).

• Offset error

The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic

when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'000) to

B'0000000001 (H'001) (see figure 15.8).

• Full-scale error

The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic

when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3FE) to B'1111111111 (H'3FF) (see

figure 15.8).

• Nonlinearity error

The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between zero voltage and full-

scale voltage. Does not include offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error (see figure

15.8).

• Absolute precision

The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, full-

scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 547 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

111

110

101

100

011

010

001

000 1

1024 2

1024 1022

1024 1023

1024 FS

Quantization error

Digital output

Ideal A/D conversion

characteristic

Analog

input voltage

Figure 15.7 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (1)

Digital output

Ideal A/D conversion

characteristic

Nonlinearity

error

Analog

input voltage

Offset error

Actual A/D conversion

characteristic

Full-scale error

Figure 15.8 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (2)

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 548 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.8 Usage Notes

15.8.1 Module Stop Mode Setting

Operation of the A/D converter can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register.

The initial setting is for operation of the A/D converter to be halted. Register access is enabled by

clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.

15.8.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance

This LSI's analog input is designed such that conversion precision is guaranteed for an input signal

for which the signal source impedance is 5 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable the

A/D converter’s sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time;

if the sensor output impedance exceeds 5 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not be

possible to guarantee A/D conversion precision. However, for A/D conversion in single mode with

a large capacitance provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal

input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, as a low-pass

filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large

differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/Ωs or greater) (see figure 15.9). When converting a high-speed

analog signal, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted.

15.8.3 Influences on Absolute Precision

Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely

affect absolute precision. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND such as

AVSS.

Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the

mounting board (i.e., acting as antennas).

20 pF

10 kΩ

15 pF

Sensor output

impedance

to 5 kΩ

This LSI

Low-pass

filter C

to 0.1 μF

Sensor input

A/D converter

equivalent circuit

Figure 15.9 Example of Analog Input Circuit

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 549 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

15.8.4 Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pin Settings

If the conditions below are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely affected.

• Analog input voltage range

The voltage applied to analog input pin ANn during A/D conversion should be in the range

VSS ≤ ANn ≤ Vref.

• Vref input range

The analog reference voltage input at the Vref pin set is the range Vref ≤ Vcc.

15.8.5 Notes on Board Design

Careful consideration is required in board design for noise countermeasures and in order to prevent

damage due to abnormal voltage, such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN3

or AN14 to AN15) and analog reference voltage pin (Vref).

Table 15.6 Analog Pin Specifications

Item Min. Max. Unit

Analog input capacitance — 20 pF

Permissible signal source impedance — 5* kΩ

Note: * Vcc = 2.7 to 3.6 V

20 pF

ANn

Note: Values are reference values.

10 kΩ

To A/D converte

Figure 15.10 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit

Section 15 A/D Converter

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 550 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 16 RAM

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 551 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 16 RAM

The HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, and HD64F2218CU have 12 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static

RAM. The HD6432217, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, and HD64F2211CU have 8 kbytes of on-

chip high-speed static RAM. The HD6432210 and HD6432210S have 4 kbytes of on-chip high-

speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling one-state

access by the CPU to both byte data and word data.

The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAM enable bit (RAME) in the

system control register (SYSCR). For details on SYSCR, refer to section 3.2.2, System Control

Product Class ROM Type RAM Size RAM Address

HD64F2218

HD64F2218U

HD64F2218CU

Flash memory Version 12 kbytes H'FFC000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

H8S/2218

Group

HD64F2217CU

HD6432217 Masked ROM Version 8 kbytes H'FFD000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

H8S/2212

Group

HDF64F2212

HDF64F2212U

HDF64F2212CU

Flash memory Version 12 kbytes H'FFC000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

HD64F2211

HD64F2211U

HD64F2211CU

8 kbytes H'FFD000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

HD64F2210CU

HD6432211 Masked ROM Version 8 kbytes H'FFD000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

HD6432210

HD6432210S

4 kbytes H'FFE000 to H'FFEFBF

H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF

Section 16 RAM

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 552 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 553 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

The features of the on-chip flash memory are summarized below. The block diagram of the flash

memory is shown in figure 17.1.

17.1 Features

• Size:

Product Class ROM Size ROM Address

H8S/2218 Group HD64F2218, HD64F2218U

HD64F2218CU

128 kbytes H'000000 to H'01FFFF

(Modes 6 and 7)

HD64F2217CU 64 kbytes H'000000 to H'00FFFF

(Modes 6 and 7)

H8S/2212 Group HD64F2212, HD64F2212U

HD64F2212CU

128 kbytes H'000000 to H'01FFFF

(Mode 7)

HD64F2211, HD64F2211U

HD64F2211CU

64 kbytes H'000000 to H'00FFFF

(Mode 7)

HD64F2210CU 32 kbytes H'000000 to H'007FFF

(Mode 7)

• Programming/erase methods

⎯ The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block

units. The flash memory is configured as follows: 32 kbytes × 2 blocks, 28 kbytes × 1

block, 16 kbytes × 8 blocks, 8 kbytes × 1 block, and 1 kbyte × 4 blocks. To erase the entire

flash memory, each block must be erased in turn.

• Reprogramming capability

⎯ Flash memory can be reprogrammed a minimum of 100 times.

• Two flash memory operating modes

⎯ Boot mode

SCI boot mode: HD64F2218, HD64F2212, and HD64F2211

USB boot mode: HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU, HD64F2217CU, HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU

⎯ User program mode

On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode in which the boot program built

into the chip is started for erase or programming of the entire flash memory. In normal user

program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 554 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Automatic bit rate adjustment

⎯ With data transfer in SCI boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to

match the transfer bit rate of the host.

• Programming/erasing protection

⎯ Sets hardware protection, software protection, and error protection against flash memory

programming/erasing.

• Programmer mode

⎯ Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM

programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode.

• Flash memory emulation in RAM

⎯ Flash memory programming can be emulated in real time by overlapping a part of RAM

onto flash memory.

Module bus

Bus interface/controller

Flash memory*

(128 kbytes)

Operating

mode

FLMCR2

Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)

Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)

FWE pin

Mode pins

(MD2 to MD0)

PF3, PF0, P16, P14

EBR1

EBR2

RAMER

FLMCR1

Flash memory control register 1

Flash memory control register 2

Erase block register 1

Erase block register 2

RAM emulation register

Legend:

FLMCR1:

FLMCR2:

EBR1:

EBR2:

RAMER:

Note: * 128 kbytes in the HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU, HD64F2212, HD64F2212U and HD64F2212CU;

64 kbytes in the HD64F2217CU, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U and HD64F2211CU.

32 kbytes in the HD64F2210CU

H'000000

H'000002 H'000001

H'000003

H'01FFFE H'01FFFF

Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 555 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.2 Mode Transitions

When the mode pins and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, this

LSI enters an operating mode as shown in figure 17.2. In user mode, flash memory can be read but

not programmed or erased. The boot and user program modes are provided as modes to write and

erase the flash memory.

The differences between boot mode and user program mode are shown in table 17.1. Boot mode

and user program mode operations are shown in figures 17.3 and 17.4, respectively.

SCI, USB

boot mode

On-board programming mode

User

program mode

User mode

(on-chip ROM

enabled)

Reset state

Programmer

mode

RES = 0

FWE = 1 FWE = 0

Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is

not accessing the flash memory.

1. RAM emulation possible

2. MD2 to MD0 = 000, PF3, PF0, P16, P14 = 1100

RES = 0

MD2 to 0 = 01x,

FWE = 1

RES = 0

MD2 to 0 = 11x,

FWE = 0

MD2 to 0 = 11x,

FWE = 1

Figure 17.2 Flash Memory State Transitions

Table 17.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode

SCI, USB Boot Mode User Program Mode User Mode

Total erase Yes Yes No

Block erase No Yes No

Programming control

program*

Program/program-verify Erase/erase-verify

Program/program-verify

Emulation

—

Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 556 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Flash memory

This LSI

RAM

Host

Programming control

program

Application program

(old version)

New application

program

Flash memory

This LSI

RAM

Host

Application program

(old version)

Boot program area

New application

program

Flash memory

This LSI

RAM

Host

Flash memory

preprogramming

erase

Boot program

New application

program

Flash memory

This LSI

Program execution stat

RAM

Host

New application

program

Boot program

Programming control

program

1. Initial state

The old program version or data remains written

in the flash memory. The user should prepare the

programming control program and new

application program beforehand in the host.

2. Programming control program transfer

When boot mode is entered, the boot program in

this LSI (originally incorporated in the chip) is

started and the programming control program in

the host is transferred to RAM via SCI or USB

communication. The boot program required for

flash memory erasing is automatically transferred

to the RAM boot program area.

3. Flash memory initialization

The erase program in the boot program area (in

RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is

initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, total flash

memory erasure is performed, without regard to

blocks.

4. Writing new application program

The programming control program transferred

from the host to RAM is executed, and the new

application program in the host is written into the

flash memory.

Programming control

program

Boot programBoot program

Boot program area Boot program area

Programming control

program

SCI

or USB

SCI

or USB SCI

or USB

SCI

or USB

Figure 17.3 Boot Mode (Sample)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 557 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Flash memory

This LSI

RAM

Host

Programming/

erase control program

Boot program

New application

program

Flash memory

This LSI

RAM

Host

New application

program

Flash memory

This LSI

RAM

Host

Flash memory

erase

Boot program

New application

program

Flash memory

This LSI

Program execution stat

RAM

Host

Boot program

FWE assessment

program

Application program

(old version)

New application

program

1. Initial state

The FWE assessment program that confirms that

user program mode has been entered, and the

program that will transfer the programming/erase

control program from flash memory to on-chip

RAM should be written into the flash memory by

the user beforehand. The programming/erase

control program should be prepared in the host

or in the flash memory.

2. Programming/erase control program transfer

When user program mode is entered, user

software confirms this fact, executes transfer

program in the flash memory, and transfers the

programming/erase control program to RAM.

3. Flash memory initialization

The programming/erase program in RAM is

executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to

H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units,

but not in byte units.

4. Writing new application program

Next, the new application program in the host is

written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do

not write to unerased blocks.

Programming/

erase control program

Programming/

erase control program

Programming/

erase control program

Transfer program

Application program

(old version)

Transfer program

FWE assessment

program

FWE assessment

program

Transfer program

FWE assessment

program

Transfer program

SCI

or USB

SCI

or USB

SCI

or USB

SCI

or USB

Figure 17.4 User Program Mode (Sample)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 558 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.3 Block Configuration

Figure 17.5 shows the block configuration of 128-kbyte flash memory in the HD64F2218,

HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU, HD64F2212, HD64F2212U and HD64F2212CU. The thick lines

indicate erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses.

The flash memory is divided into one kbyte (four blocks), 28 kbytes (one block), 16 kbytes (one

block), eight kbytes (two blocks), and 32 kbytes (two blocks). Erasing is performed in these

divided units. Programming is performed in 128-byte units starting from an address whose lower

eight bits are H'00 or H'80.

EB0

EB1

EB2

EB3

EB4

EB7

EB8

EB9

EB6

EB5

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Programming unit: 128 bytes

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

28 kbytes

Erase unit

16 kbytes

Erase unit

8 kbytes

Erase unit

8 kbytes

Erase unit

32 kbytes

Erase unit

32 kbytes

Programming unit: 128 bytes

H'000000 H'000001 H'000002 H'00007F

H'0003FF

H'00047F

H'00087F

H'000C7F

H'00107F

H'007FFF

H'00807F

H'00BFFF

H'0007FF

H'000BFF

H'000FFF

H'01FFFF

H'00C07F

H'00DFFF

H'00E07F

H'00FFFF

H'01007F

H'017FFF

H'01807F

H'000400 H'000401 H'000402

H'000800 H'000801 H'000802

H'000C00 H'000C01 H'000C02

H'001000 H'001001 H'001002

H'008000 H'008001 H'008002

H'00C000 H'00C001 H'00C002

H'00E000 H'00E001 H'00E002

H'010000 H'010001 H'010002

H'018000 H'018001 H'018002

H'000380 H'000381 H'000382

H'000780 H'000781 H'000782

H'000B80 H'000B81 H'000B82

H'000F80 H'000F81 H'000F82

H'007F80 H'007F81 H'007F82

H'017F80 H'017F81 H'017F82

H'01FF80 H'01FF81 H'01FF82

H'00BF80 H'00BF81 H'00BF82

H'00DF80 H'00DF81 H'00DF82

H'00FF80 H'00FF81 H'00FF82

Figure 17.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration

(HD64F2218, HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU, HD64F2212, HD64F2212U, HD64F2212CU)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 559 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 17.6 shows the block configuration of 64-kbyte flash memory in the HD64F2217CU,

HD64F2211, HD64F2211U and HD64F2211CU. The thick lines indicate erasing units, the

narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The flash memory is

divided into one kbyte (four blocks), 28 kbytes (one block), and 16 kbytes (one block), eight

kbytes (two blocks). Erasing is performed in these divided units. Programming is performed in

128-byte units starting from an address whose lower eight bits are H'00 or H'80.

EB0

EB1

EB2

EB3

EB4

EB7

EB6

EB5

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Programming unit: 128 bytes

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

28 kbytes

Erase unit

16 kbytes

Erase unit

8 kbytes

Erase unit

8 kbytes

Programming unit: 128 bytes

H'000000 H'000001 H'000002 H'00007F

H'0003FF

H'00047F

H'00087F

H'000C7F

H'00107F

H'007FFF

H'00807F

H'00BFFF

H'0007FF

H'000BFF

H'000FFF

H'00C07F

H'00DFFF

H'00E07F

H'00FFFF

H'000400 H'000401 H'000402

H'000800 H'000801 H'000802

H'000C00 H'000C01 H'000C02

H'001000 H'001001 H'001002

H'008000 H'008001 H'008002

H'00C000 H'00C001 H'00C002

H'00E000 H'00E001 H'00E002

H'000380 H'000381 H'000382

H'000780 H'000781 H'000782

H'000B80 H'000B81 H'000B82

H'000F80 H'000F81 H'000F82

H'007F80 H'007F81 H'007F82

H'00BF80 H'00BF81 H'00BF82

H'00DF80 H'00DF81 H'00DF82

H'00FF80 H'00FF81 H'00FF82

Figure 17.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration

(HD64F2217CU, HD64F2211, HD64F2211U, HD64F2211CU)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 560 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 17.7 shows the block configuration of the 32 Kbyte flash memory in the HD64F2210CU.

The thick lines indicate erase blocks, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values

in the boxes are addresses. The flash memory is divided into units one Kbyte (four blocks) or 28

Kbytes (one block) in size, and erasing is performed in these units. Programming is performed in

128-byte units starting from an address whose lower eight bits are H'00 or H'80.

EB0

EB1

EB2

EB3

EB4

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Programming unit: 128 bytes

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

28 kbytes

Programming unit: 128 bytes

H'000000 H'000001 H'000002 H'00007F

H'0003FF

H'00047F

H'00087F

H'000C7F

H'00107F

H'007FFF

H'0007FF

H'000BFF

H'000FFF

H'000400 H'000401 H'000402

H'000800 H'000801 H'000802

H'000C00 H'000C01 H'000C02

H'001000 H'001001 H'001002

H'000380 H'000381 H'000382

H'000780 H'000781 H'000782

H'000B80 H'000B81 H'000B82

H'000F80 H'000F81 H'000F82

H'007F80 H'007F81 H'007F82

Figure 17.7 Flash Memory Block Configuration

(HD64F2210CU)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 561 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.4 Input/Output Pins

The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 17.2.

Table 17.2 Pin Configuration

Pin Name I/O Function

RES Input Reset All

FWE Input Flash program/erase protection by hardware

MD2, MD1, MD0 Input Sets this LSI's operating mode

PF3, PF0, P16,

P14

Input Sets this LSI's operating mode in programmer

mode

EMLE Input Emulator enable

TxD2 Output Serial transmit data output

RxD2 Input Serial receive data input

HD64F2218,

HD64F2212,

HD64F2211

USD+, USD− Input/output USB data input/output

VBUS Input USB cable connect/cut detect

UBPM Input USB bus power mode/self power mode select

HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU,

HD64F2217CU,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211U

USPND Output USB suspend output

P36 (PUPD+) Output D+ pull-up control

17.5 Register Descriptions

The flash memory has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states

during each processing, refer to section 21, List of Registers.

• Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1)

• Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2)

• Erase block register 1 (EBR1)

• Erase block register 2 (EBR2)

• RAM emulation register (RAMER)

• Serial control register X ( SCRX)

The masked ROM version is not equipped with the above registers. Attempting to read them with

produce an undetermined value, and writing to them is invalid.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 562 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)

FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory transit to program mode, program-verify

mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 17.8, Flash

Memory Programming/Erasing.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 FWE —* R Flash Write Enable

Reflects the input level at the FWE pin. It is set to 1

when a low level is input to the FWE pin, and cleared to

0 when a high level is input.

6 SWE1 0 R/W Software Write Enable

When this bit is set to 1, flash memory

programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is

cleared to 0, other FLMCR1 register bits and all EBR1,

EBR2 bits cannot be set.

[Setting condition]

When FWE = 1

5 ESU1 0 R/W Erase Setup

When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory transits to the

erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase

setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting

the E1 bit in FLMCR1.

[Setting condition]

When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1

4 PSU1 0 R/W Program Setup

When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory transits to the

program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the

program setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before

setting the P1 bit in FLMCR1.

[Setting condition]

When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1

3 EV1 0 R/W Erase-Verify

When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory transits to

erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-verify

mode is cancelled.

[Setting condition]

When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 563 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

2 PV1 0 R/W Program-Verify

When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory transits to

program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, program-

verify mode is cancelled.

[Setting condition]

When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1

1 E1 0 R/W Erase

When this bit is set to 1 while the SWE1 and ESU1 bits

are 1, the flash memory transits to erase mode. When it

is cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled.

[Setting condition]

When FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and ESU1 = 1

0 P1 0 R/W Program

When this bit is set to 1 while the SWE1 and PSU1 bits

are 1, the flash memory transits to program mode.

When it is cleared to 0, program mode is cancelled.

[Setting condition]

When FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and PSU1 = 1

Note: * Set according to the FWE pin state.

17.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)

FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. FLMCR2 is a

read-only register, and should not be written to.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 FLER 0 R Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation

on flash memory (programming or erasing). When

FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-

protection state.

See section 17.9.3, Error Protection, for details.

6 to 0 — All 0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 564 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)

EBR1 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE1

bit in FLMCR is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, as this will cause all the bits in EBR1

and EBR2 to be automatically cleared to 0.

Bit

Name

Initial

Value R/W Description

7 EB7 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 8 kbytes of EB7 (H'00E000 to H'00FFFF)

are to be erased.

6 EB6 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 8 kbytes of EB6 (H'00C000 to H'00DFFF)

are to be erased.

5 EB5 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 16 kbytes of EB5 (H'008000 to H'00BFFF)

are to be erased.

4 EB4 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 28 kbytes of EB4 (H'001000 to H'007FFF)

are to be erased.

3 EB3 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB3 (H'000C00 to H'000FFF) is

to be erased.

2 EB2 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB2 (H'000800 to H'000BFF) is

to be erased.

1 EB1 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB1 (H'000400 to H'0007FF) is

to be erased.

0 EB0 0 R/W When this bit is set to 4, 1 kbyte of EB0 (H'000000 to H'0003FF) is

to be erased.

17.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)

EBR2 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR2 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE1

bit in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, as this will cause all the bits in EBR1

and EBR2 to be automatically cleared to 0.

Note: These registers are reserved on the HD64F2211 and HD64F2211U. Only H'00 should be

written to them.

Bit

Name

Initial

Value R/W Description

7 to 2 — All 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

1 EB9 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 32 kbytes of EB9 (H'018000 to H'01FFFF)

are to be erased.

0 EB8 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 32 kbytes of EB8 (H'010000 to H'017FFF)

are to be erased.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 565 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)

RAMER specifies the area of flash memory to be overlapped with part of RAM when emulating

real-time flash memory programming. RAMER settings should be made in user mode or user

program mode. To ensure correct operation of the emulation function, the ROM for which RAM

emulation is performed should not be accessed immediately after this register has been modified.

Normal execution of an access immediately after register modification is not guaranteed. For

details, refer to section 17.7, Flash Memory Emulation in RAM.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 4 — All 0 R/W Reserved

These bits always read as 0. The write value should

always be 0.

3 RAMS 0 R/W RAM Select

Specifies selection or non-selection of flash memory

emulation in RAM. When RAMS = 1, the flash memory

is overlapped with part of RAM, and all flash memory

block are program/erase-protected.

RAM2

RAM1

RAM0

R/W

Flash Memory Area Selection

When the RAMS bit is set to 1, selects one of the

following flash memory areas to overlap the RAM area.

The areas correspond with 1-kbyte erase blocks.

000: H'000000 to H'0003FF (EB0)

001: H'000400 to H'0007FF (EB1)

010: H'000800 to H'000BFF (EB2)

011: H'000C00 to H'000FFF (EB3)

100: Setting prohibited

101: Setting prohibited

110: Setting prohibited

111: Setting prohibited

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 566 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.5.6 Serial Control Register X (SCRX)

SCRX performs register access control.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 4 — All 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

3 FLSHE 0 R/W Flash Memory Control Register Enable:

Controls CPU access to the flash memory control

registers (FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2).

Setting the FLSHE bit to 1 enables read/write access to

the flash memory control registers. If FLSHE is cleared

to 0, the flash memory control registers are deselected.

In this case, the flash memory control register contents

are retained.

0: Flash control registers deselected in area H'FFFFA8

to H'FFFFAC

1: Flash control registers selected in area H'FFFFA8 to

H'FFFFAC

2 to 0 — All 0 R/W Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 567 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.6 On-Board Programming Modes

When pins are set to on-board programming mode and a reset-start is executed, a transition is

made to the on-board programming state in which program/erase/verify operations can be

performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode

and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table

17.3. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 17.2.

Table 17.3 Setting On-Board Programming Modes

Mode EMLE FWE MD2 MD1 MD0

SCI boot mode

(HD64F2218,

HD64F2212,

HD64F2211)

Advanced: single-chip mode 0 1 0 1 ×

Advanced: single-chip mode

24 MHz system clock

0 1 0 1 0 USB boot mode

(HD64F2218U,

HD64F2218CU,

HD64F2217CU,

HD64F2212U,

HD64F2212CU,

HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU,

HD64F2210CU)

Advanced: single-chip mode

16 MHz system clock

0 1 0 1 1

User program mode Advanced: on-chip ROM

extended mode

(MCU operating mode 6)

0 1 1 1 0

Advanced: Single-chip mode

(MCU operating mode 7)

0 1 1 1 1

17.6.1 SCI Boot Mode (HD64F2218, HD64F2212, and HD64F2211)

When a reset-start is executed after the LSI's pins have been set to boot mode, the boot program

built into the LSI is started and the programming control program prepared in the host is serially

transmitted to the LSI via the SCI. In the LSI, the programming control program received via the

SCI is written into the programming control program area in on-chip RAM. After the transfer is

completed, control branches to the start address of the programming control program area and the

programming control program execution state is entered (flash memory programming is

performed). The system configuration in boot mode is shown in Figure 17.8.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 568 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

RxD2

TxD2

SCI_2

This LSI

Flash memory

Write data reception

01×

Note: * Mode pin and FWE pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (t

MDS

= 200ns)

with respect to the reset release timing.

Legend:

× : Don’t care

FWE

MD2 to MD0*

Verify data transmission

Host

On-chip RAM

0 EMLE

Figure 17.8 System Configuration in SCI Boot Mode

Table 17.4 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming

control program.

1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in

the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the

description in section 17.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. In boot mode, if any data has

been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all flash memory blocks are

erased. Boot mode is for use in enforced exit when user program mode is unavailable, such as

the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program activated in user program

mode is accidentally erased.

2. The SCI_2 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data,

1 stop bit, and no parity.

3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous

SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then

calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI_2 bit rate to match that

of the host. The reset should end with the RxD pin high. The RxD and TxD pins should be

pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset ends, it takes approximately 100 states

before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period.

4. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of

bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has

been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could not be

performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host’s transfer bit

rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of

the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host’s transfer bit rate and system

clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 17.5.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 569 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area (four kbytes) is used by the boot program. The

area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host is 8 kbytes

(H'FFC000 to H'FFDFFF) in the HD64F2218 and HD64F2212 and 4 kbytes (H'FFD000 to

H'FFDFFF) in the HD64F2211. The boot program area cannot be used until the execution

state in boot mode switches to the programming control program.

6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations

by the SCI_2 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value

remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of

write data or verify data with the host. The TxD pin is high. The contents of the CPU general

registers are undefined immediately after branching to the programming control program.

These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the programming control program, since

the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc.

7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset* after driving the reset pin low, waiting at

least 20 states, and then setting the FWE pin and the mode (MD) pins. Boot mode is also

cleared when a WDT overflow occurs.

8. Do not change the MD pin input levels in boot mode. If the mode pin input levels are changed

(for example, from low to high) during a reset, the state of ports with multiplexed address

functions and bus control output pins (AS, RD, WR) will change according to the change in

the microcomputer’s operating mode . Therefore, care must be taken to make pin settings to

prevent these pins from becoming output signal pins during a reset, or to prevent collision with

signals outside the microcomputer.

9. All interrupts are disabled during programming or erasing of the flash memory.

Note:* Mode pin and FWE pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 200

ns) with respect to the reset release timing.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 570 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 17.4 Boot Mode Operation

Item Host Operation LSI Operation

Branches to boot program at reset-

start

Continuously transmits data H'00

at specified bit rate

Measures low-level period of

receive data H'00

Calculates bit rate and sets it in

BRR of SCI_2

Bit rate adjustment

Transmits data H'55 when data

H'00 is received error-free

Transmits data H'00 to host as

adjustment end indication

Transmits data H'AA to host when

data H'55 is received

Transmits number of

bytes (N) of programming

control program

Transmits number of bytes (N) of

programming control program to

be transferred as 2-byte data (low-

order byte following high-order

byte)

Echobacks the 2-byte data received

as verification data

Transmits 1-byte of

programming control

program (repeated for N

times)

Transmits 1-byte of programming

control program

Echobacks received data to host

and also transfers it to RAM

Flash memory erase Checks flash memory data, erases

all flash memory blocks in case of

written data existing, and transmits

data H'AA to host. (If erase could

not be done, transmits data H'FF to

host and aborts operation)

Programming control

program execution

Branches to programming control

program transferred to on-chip RAM

and starts execution

Table 17.5 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate Is

Possible

Host Bit Rate System Clock Frequency Range of LSI

19,200 bps 8 to 24 MHz

9,600 bps 6 to 24 MHz

4,800 bps 6 to 24 MHz

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 571 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.6.2 USB Boot Mode (HD64F2218U, HD64F2212U, and HD64F2211U)

• Features

⎯ Selection of bus-powered mode or self-powered mode

⎯ Supports the USB operating clock generation by 16 MHz system clock with PLL3

multiplication (FWE = 1, MD2 to MD0 = 011) or 24 MHz system clock with PLL2

multiplication (FWE = 1, MD2 to MD0 = 010)

⎯ D+ pull up control connection supported for P36 pin only

⎯ See table 17.6 for enumeration information

Table 17.6 Enumeration Information

USB Standard Ver.1.1

Transfer modes Control (in, out), Bulk (in, out)

Maximum power Self power mode (UBPM pin = 1) 100 mA

Bus power mode (UBPM pin = 0) 500 mA

Endpoint configuration

EP0 Control (in, out) 64 byte

Configuration 1

Interface Number 0

Alte

ate Setting 0

EP1 Bulk (in) 64 bytes

EP2 Bulk (out) 64 bytes

• Notes on USB Boot Mode Execution

⎯ Specify 16 MHz or 24 MHz system clock and the FWE and MD2 to MD0 pins correctly.

⎯ Use the P36 pin for D+ pull-up control connection.

⎯ To ensure stable power supply during flash memory programming/erasing, do not use cable

connection via a bus powered HUB.

⎯ Note in particular that, in the worst case, the LSI may be permanently damaged if the USB

cable is detached during flash memory programming/erasing.

⎯ A transition is not made to power-down modes even if the USB bus enters suspend mode

when in bus power mode.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 572 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Overview

When a reset start preformed after the pins of this LSI have been set to boot mode, a boot

program incorporated in the microcomputer beforehand is activated, and the prepared

programming control program is transmitted sequentially to the host using the USB. With this

LSI, the programming control program received by the USB is written to a programming

control program area in on-chip RAM. After transfer is completed, control branches to the start

address of the programming control program area, and the programming control program

execution state is established (flash memory programming is performed). Figure 17.9 shows a

system configuration diagram when using USB boot mode.

Note: * FWE pin and mode pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 200ns) when a reset is released.

Legend:

×: Don’t care

UBPM

VBUS

1: Self power setting

0: Bus power setting

Data transmission/reception

This LSI

Flash memory

P36

1.5kΩ

Host or

self-powerd HUB

On-chip RAM

System clock:

16 MHz or 24MHz

FWE*

MD2 to MD0*

EMLE

01×EXTAL

XTAL

D+

D-

USD+

USD-

USB

Figure 17.9 System Configuration Diagram when Using USB Boot Mode

Table 17.7 shows operations from reset release in USB boot mode until processing branches to

the programming control program.

1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in

the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the

description in section 17.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. In boot mode, if any data has

been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all flash memory blocks are

erased. Boot mode is for use in enforced exit when user program mode is unavailable, such a

the first time on-board programming control program, or performed, or if the program

activated in user program mode is accidentally erased.

2. When the boot program is activated, enumeration with respect to the host is carried out.

Enumeration information is shown in table 17.6. When enumeration is completed, transmit a

single H'55 byte from the host. If reception has not been preformed normally, restart boot mode

by means of a reset.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 573 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

3. Set the frequency for transmission from the host as a numeric value in units of MHz × 100 (ex:

16.00 MHz → H'0640, 24.00 MHz → H'0960).

4. In boot mode, the 4-kbyte on-chip RAM area H'FFE000 to H'FFEFBF is used by the boot

program. The programming control program is transferred from the host stored in the 8-kbyte

area H'FFC000 to H'FFDFFF in the HD64F2218U, HD64F2218CU, HD64F2212U, and

HD64F2212CU and the 4-kbyte area H'FFD000 to H'FFDFFF in the HD64F2211U,

HD64F2211CU and HD64F2210CU. The boot program area cannot be used until program

execution switches to the programming control program. Also note that the boot program

remains in RAM even after control passes to the programming control program.

5. When a branch is made to the programming control program, the USB remains connected and

can be used immediately for transmission/reception of write data or verify data between the

programming control program and the host. The contents of CPU general registers are

undefined after a branch to the programming control program. Note, in particular, that since the

stack pointer is used implicitly in subroutine calls ad the like, it should be initialized at the start

of the programming control program.

6. Boot mode is by means of a reset. Drive the reset pin low, wait for the elapse of at least 20

states, then set the FWE pin and mode pins to release the reset.* Boot mode is also exited in

the event of a WDT overflow reset.

7. Do not change the input level of the mode pins while in boot mode. In the input level of a

mode pin is changed (from low to high) during a reset, the states of ports with a dual function

as address output s, and bus control output signals (AS, RD, WR), will change due to switching

of the operating mode. Either make pin settings so that these pins do not become output signal

pins during a reset, or take precautions to prevent collisions with external signals.

8. Interrupt cannot be used during flash memory programming or erasing.

Note: * FWE pin and mode pin input must satisfy the mode programming set up time (tMDS =

200 ns) when a reset is released.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 574 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 17.7 USB Boot Mode Operation

Item Host Operation Operation of this LSI

Branches to boot program

after reset start

Start of USB boot mode Transmits one H'55 byte on

completion of USB enumeration

Transmits one H'AA byte to

host on reception of H'55

Transfer clock information Transmits frequency (2 bytes),

number of multiplication

Classification (1 byte), multiplication

ratio (1 byte)

With 16 MHz system clock, H'0640,

H'01, H'01 are transmitted

With 24 MHz system clock, H'0960,

H'01, H'01 are transmitted

If received data are within

respective ranges, transmits

H'AA to host

If any received data is out-of-

ranges, transmits H'FF to host

and halts operation

Transfer number of bytes

(N) of programming control

program

Performs 2-byte transfer number of

bytes (N) of programming control

program

If received number of bytes is

within ranges, transmits H'AA

to host

If received number of bytes is

out-of- ranges, transmits H'FF

to host and halts operation

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 575 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Item Host Operation Operation of this LSI

Transfer of programming

control program and sum

value

Transmits programming control

program in N-byte divisions.

Transfers received data to on-

chip RAM

Transmits sum value (two's

complement of sum total of

programming control program

(1 byte))

Calculates sum total of

received sum value and 1 byte

units of programming control

program transferred to on-chip

RAM

If sum is 0, transmits H'AA to

host

If sum is not 0, transmits H'FF

to host halts operation

Memory erase Starts total erase of flash

memory

Transmits total erase status

command (H'3A)

Transmits H'11 to host if total

erase processing is being

executed when total erase

status command is received

Transmits H'06 to host if total

erase of all blocks has been

completed when total erase

status command is received

Retransmits total erase status

command (H'3A) when H'11 is

received

If erase cannot be performed

when total erase status

command is received,

transmits H'EE to host and

halts operation

Execution of programming

control program

Branches to programming

control program transferred to

on-chip RAM and starts

execution.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 576 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.6.3 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode

On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user

program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching

conditions and provide on-board FWE control and supply of programming data, and storing a

program/erase control program in part of the program area as necessary. The flash memory must

contain the user program/erase control program or a program which provides the user

program/erase control program from external memory. Because the flash memory itself cannot be

read during programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip

RAM, as like in boot mode. Figure 17.10 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in

user program mode. Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the

description in section 17.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.

Yes

Program/erase?

Transfer user program /erase

control program to RAM

Branch to user program/erase

control in RAM

Execute user program/erase

control pogram (flash memory rewrite)

Branch to flash memory

application program

Branch to flash memory

application program

MD2 to MD0 = 110,111 Reset start

Figure 17.10 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 577 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.7 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM

Making a setting in the RAM emulation register (RAMER) enables part of RAM to be overlapped

onto the flash memory area so that data to be written to flash memory can be emulated in RAM in

real time. Emulation can be performed in user mode or user program mode. Figure 17.11 shows

an example of emulation of real-time flash memory programming.

1. Set RAMER to overlap part of RAM onto the area for which real-time programming is

required.

2. Emulation is performed using the overlapping RAM.

3. After the program data has been confirmed, the RAMS bit is cleared, thus releasing RAM

overlap.

4. The data written in the overlapping RAM is written into the flash memory space (EB0).

Start of emulation program

Set RAMER

Write tuning data to overlap

RAM

Execute application program

Tuning OK?

Clear RAMER

Write to flash memory

emulation block

End of emulation program

Yes

Figure 17.11 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 578 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

An example in which flash memory block area EB0 is overlapped is shown in Figure 17.12.

1. The RAM area to be overlapped is fixed at a 1-kbyte area in the range of H'FFD000 to

H'FFD3FF.

2. The flash memory area to overlap is selected by RAMER from a 1-kbyte area among one of

the EB0 to EB3 blocks.

3. The overlapped RAM area can be accessed from both the flash memory addresses and RAM

addresses.

4. When the RAMS bit in RAMER is set to 1, program/erase protection is enabled for all flash

memory blocks (emulation protection). In this state, setting the P1 or E1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1

does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode.

5. A RAM area cannot be erased by execution of software in accordance with the erase algorithm.

6. Block area EB0 contains the vector table. When performing RAM emulation, the vector table

is needed in the overlap RAM.

(EB0)

(EB2)

(EB1)

(EB0)

(EB2)

Flash memory Flash memory

On-chip RAM

(1-kbyte shadow)

On-chip RAM

(4 kbytes)

On-chip RAM

(1 kbyte)

On-chip RAM

(7 kbytes - 64 bytes)

On-chip RAM (64 bytes)

On-chip RAM

(4 kbytes)

On-chip RAM

(1 kbyte)

On-chip RAM

(7 kbytes - 64 bytes)

On-chip RAM (64 bytes)

Flash memory

Normal memory map RAM overlap memory map

H'000000

H'000400

H'000800

H'000C00

H'FFD000

H'FFFFFF

H'FFFFC0

H'FFD400

H'FFEFBF

H'FFD3FF

H'FFC000

Figure 17.12 Example of RAM Overlap Operation

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 579 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.8 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing

A software method, using the CPU, is employed to program and erase flash memory in the on-

board programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 setting, the flash memory operates in one

of the following four modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify

mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control

program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform

programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in

accordance with the descriptions in section 17.8.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 17.8.2,

Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively.

17.8.1 Program/Program-Verify

When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown

in Figure 17.13 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this

flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the

chip to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability.

1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which

programming has already been performed.

2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be

performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the

extra addresses.

3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: a 128-byte programming data area, a 128-

byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform

reprogramming data computation and additional programming data computation according to

Figure 17.13.

4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or

additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte

data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory

destination area must be H'00 or H'80.

5. The time during which the P1 bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Figure 17.13 shows the

allowable programming times.

6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc.

An overflow cycle of approximately (y + z1 + α + β) μs is allowed.

7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 1 bit

is B'0. Verify data can be read in words from the address to which a dummy write was

performed.

8. The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence to the same bit is

(N1 + N2).

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 580 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Write pulse application subroutine

Subroutine Write Pulse

End Sub

Set PSU1 bit in FLMCR1

WDT enable

Disable WDT

Note: 7. Write Pulse Width

Wait (y)

µs

Set P1 bit in FLMCR1

Wait (z0), (z1), or (z2)

µs

Clear P1 bit in FLMCR1

Wait (α)

µs

Clear PSU1 bit in FLMCR1

Wait (β)

µs

Original Data

(D)

Verify Data

(V)

Reprogram Data

(X)

Comments

Programming completed

Still in erased state; no action

Programming incomplete;

reprogram

RAM

Program data storage

area (128 bytes)

Reprogram data storage

area (128 bytes)

Additional-programming

data storage area

(128 bytes)

Reprogram Data Computation Table

Reprogram Data

(X')

Verify Data

(V)

Additional-

Programming Data

(Y)

000

Comments

Additional programming

to be executed

Additional programming

not to be executed

Additional programming

not to be executed

Additional programming

not to be executed

100

Additional-Programming Data Computation Table

Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00 or H'80.

A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.

2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.

3. Reprogram data is determined by the operation shown in the table below (comparison between the data stored in the program data area and the verify data). Bits for

which the reprogram data is 0 are programmed in the next reprogramming loop. Therefore, even bits for which programming has been completed will be subjected to

programming once again if the result of the subsequent verify operation is NG.

4. A 128-byte area for storing program data, a 128-byte area for storing reprogram data, and a 128-byte area for storing additional data must be provided in RAM.

The contents of the reprogram data area and additional data area are modified as programming proceeds.

5. A write pulse of z0 or z1 is applied according to the progress of the programming operation. See note 7 for details of the pulse widths. When writing of additional-

programming data is executed, a z2 write pulse should be applied. Reprogram data X' means reprogram data when the write pulse is applied.

6. x, y, z0, z1, z2, α, β, γ, ε, η, θ, N1, and N2 are shown in section 22.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.

START

End of programming

Set SWE1 bit in FLMCR1

Start of programming

Wait (x)

µs

n = 1

m = 0

No No

Yes

Wait (γ)

µs

Wait (ε)

µs

Wait (η)

µs

Apply

Write pulse Z0

µs

or Z1

µs

Sub-Routine-Call

Set PV1 bit in FLMCR1

H'FF dummy write to verify address

Read verify data

Write data =

verify data?

Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area

Reprogram data computation

Transfer additional-programming data to

additional-programming data area

Additional-programming data computation

Clear PV1 bit in FLMCR1

Clear SWE1 bit in FLMCR1

m = 1

Reprogram

See Note 7 for pulse width

m = 0 ?

Increment address

Programming failure

Yes

Clear SWE1 bit in FLMCR1

Wait (θ)

µs

Yes

≥

Yes

N1 ≥

n ?

Wait (θ)

µs

n ≥ (N1 + N2)?

n ← n + 1

Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram

data area consecutively to flash memory

Store 128-byte program data in program

data area and reprogram data area

Apply Write Pulse (Additional programming) z2μs

Sub-Routine-Call

128-byte

data verification completed?

Successively write 128-byte data from additional-

programming data area in RAM to flash memory

Perform programming in the erased state.

Do not perform additional programming

on previously programmed addresses.

P1 bit set time (µs)

1z2

N1-1

N1+1

N1+2

N1+3

N1+N2-1

N1+N2-2

N1+N2

Number of Writes n Program Re -program

Figure 17.13 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 581 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify

When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in Figure 17.14 should be

followed.

1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary.

2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block

3. The time during which the E1 bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time.

4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc.

An overflow cycle of approximately (y+z+α+β) ms is allowed.

5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 1 bit

is B'0. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was

performed.

6. If the read data is unerased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence as

before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify sequence is N.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 582 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Start

Set EBR1 (2)

Enable WDT

Disable WDT

Read verify data

Increment address Verify data = all 1s?

Last address of block?

All erase block erased?

Set block start address as verify address

H'FF dummy write to verify address

Set SWE1 bit in FLMCR1

n = 1

Set ESU1 bit in FLMCR1

Set E1 bit in FLMCR1 Start erasing

Halt erasing

Wait (x) μs

Wait (y) μs

Clear E1 bit in FLMCR1

Set EV1 bit in FLMCR1

Wait (z) μs

Clear ESU1 bit in FLMCR1

Wait (

) μs

Wait (β) μs

Wait (γ) μs

Clear EV1 bit in FLMCR1

n ← n + 1

Wait (η) μs

Clear SWE1 bit in FLMCR1

Wait (θ) μs

Clear EV1 bit in FLMCR1

n ≥ (N)?

Wait (η) μs

Clear SWE1 bit in FLMCR1

Wait (θ) μs

Erase failure

End of erasing

Wait (ε) μs

Yes

Notes: 1.

Pre-write (clearing data in the block to be erased to 0) isn not required.

x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η, θ, and N are shown in section 22.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.

Veryfy data is read in 16 bits.

Only 1 bit in the EBR register must be set. Two or more bits in EBR cannot be set.

Erasure is performed in block units. To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased sequentially.

Figure 17.14 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 583 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.9 Program/Erase Protection

There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software

protection, and error protection.

17.9.1 Hardware Protection

Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly

disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset or standby mode. Flash memory control

and erase block register 2 (EBR2) are initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not

entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of

a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC

Characteristics section.

17.9.2 Software Protection

Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks

by clearing the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P1 or E1

bit in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase

block register 1 (EBR1), and erase block register 2 (EBR2), erase protection can be set for

individual blocks. When EBR1 and EBR2 are set to H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks.

17.9.3 Error Protection

In error protection, an error is detected when the CPU's runaway occurs during flash memory

programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase

algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation

prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.

When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER

bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered.

Setting Conditions of FLER Bit (Erase Protection)

• When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing

(including vector read and instruction fetch)

• Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing

• When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing

• When the CPU releases the bus mastership to the DMAC during programming/erasing

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 584 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1 and EBR2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode

is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-

entered by re-setting the P1 or E1 bit. However, PV1 and EV1 bit setting is enabled, and a

transition can be made to verify mode.

17.10 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory

All interrupts, including NMI interrupt is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or

erased (when the P1 or E1 bit is set in FLMCR1), and while the boot program is executing in boot

mode*1, to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this:

1. Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or

erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured.

2. In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would

not be read correctly*2 , possibly resulting in CPU runaway.

3. If interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the

normal boot mode sequence.

Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the CPU until the programming

control program has completed programming.

2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons:

• If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P1 or E1 bit is

set in FLMCR1), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will

be returned).

• If the interrupt entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, interrupt

exception handling will not be executed correctly.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 585 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.11 Programmer Mode

In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can perform programming/erasing via a socket

adapter, just like for a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the Renesas

Technology 128-kbyte or 64-kbyte flash memory on-chip MCU device type. Memory map in

programmer mode is shown in Figure 17.15.

MCU mode

On-chip ROM space

128 kbytes

Programmer mode

H'000000 H'00000

H'01FFFF H'1FFFF

MCU mode

On-chip ROM space

64 kbytes

Programmer mode

H'000000 H'0000

H'00FFFF H'FFFF

Figure 17.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 586 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.12 Power-Down States for Flash Memory

In user mode, the flash memory will operate in either of the following states:

• Normal operating mode

The flash memory can be read and written to.

• Standby mode

All flash memory circuits are halted.

• Power-down state

The flash memory can be read when part of the power supply circuit is halted and the LSI

operates by subclocks.

Table 17.8 shows the correspondence between the operating modes of this LSI and the flash

memory. When the flash memory returns to normal operation from a power-down state, a power

supply circuit stabilization period is needed. When the flash memory returns to its normal

operating state from watch mode or standby mode, bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR must be set to

provide a wait time of at least 100 μs; when returns from flash memory module stop mode, the

software wait state should be set.

Table 17.8 Flash Memory Operating States

LSI Operating State Flash Memory Operating State

Active mode Normal operating mode

Sleep mode

Watch mode

Standby mode

Flash memory module stop

mode

Standby mode

(Before entering to the normal operation mode, wait time of at least

100 µs is required.)

Subactive mode

Subsleep mode

Power-down mode (read only)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 587 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.13 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions

Precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode, the RAM emulation function, and

PROM mode are summarized below.

• Use the specified voltages and timing for programming and erasing.

Applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Use a PROM

programmer that supports the Renesas Technology microcomputer device type with on-chip

flash memory (FZTAT128V3A, FZTAT64V3A).

Do not select the HN27C4096 setting for the PROM programmer, and only use the specified

socket adapter. Failure to observe these points may result in damage to the device.

• Powering on and off

Do not apply a high level to the FWE pin until VCC has stabilized. Also, drive the FWE pin

low before turning off VCC. When applying or disconnecting VCC power, fix the FWE pin

low and place the flash memory in the hardware protection state. The power-on and power-off

timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a power failure and subsequent

recovery.

• FWE application/disconnection

FWE application should be carried out when MCU operation is in a stable condition. If MCU

operation is not stable, fix the FWE pin low and set the protection state. The following points

must be observed concerning FWE application and disconnection to prevent unintentional

programming or erasing of flash memory:

• Apply FWE when the VCC voltage has stabilized within its rated voltage range.

• In boot mode, apply and disconnect FWE during a reset.

• In user program mode, FWE can be switched between high and low level regardless of the

reset state. FWE input can also be switched during execution of a program in flash

memory.

• Do not apply FWE if program runaway has occurred.

• Disconnect FWE only when the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, P1, and E1 bits in

FLMCR1 are cleared. Make sure that the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, P1, and E1 bits

are not set by mistake when applying or disconnecting FWE.

• Do not apply a constant high level to the FWE pin.

Apply a high level to the FWE pin only when programming or erasing flash memory. A system

configuration in which a high level is constantly applied to the FWE pin should be avoided.

Also, while a high level is applied to the FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to

prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 588 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

• Use the recommended algorithm when programming and erasing flash memory.

The recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without

subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting the

P1 or E1 bit in FLMCR1, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a precaution against

program runaway, etc.

• Do not set or clear the SWE1 bit during execution of a program in flash memory.

Wait at least θ µs* after clearing the SWE1 bit before executing a program or reading data in

flash memory. When the SWE1 bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten, but access

flash memory only for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing). Also, do

not clear the SWE1 bit during programming, erasing, or verifying. Similarly, when using

emulation by RAM with a high level applied to the FWE pin, the SWE1 bit should be cleared

before executing a program or reading data in flash memory. However, read/write accesses can

be performed in the RAM area overlapping the flash memory space regardless of whether the

SWE1 bit is set or cleared.

Note: * Refer to section 22.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.

• Do not use interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased.

All interrupt requests, including NMI, should be disabled during FWE application to give

priority to program/erase operations.

• Do not perform additional programming. Erase the memory before reprogramming.

In on-board programming, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte

programming unit block. In programmer mode, too, perform only one programming operation

on a 128-byte programming unit block. Programming should be carried out with the entire

programming unit block erased.

• Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM programmer.

Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer

socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.

• Do not touch the socket adapter or chip during programming.

Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors.

• The reset state must be entered after powering on

Apply the reset signal for at least 100 µs during the oscillation setting period.

• When a reset is applied during operation, this should be done while the SWE1 pin is low.

Wait at least θ µs* after clearing the SWE1 bit before applying the reset.

Note: * Refer to section 22.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 589 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Except when switching modes, the level of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) must be fixed until

power-off by pulling the pins up or down.

See section 22.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.

Mode programming setup time tMDS (min) = 200 ns.

Period during which flash memory access is prohibited

(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*2

Period during which flash memory can be programmed

(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations

prohibited)

Notes:

FWE

OSC1

min 0 μs

min 0

MDS

MD2 to MD0*1

RES

SWE1 bit

SWE1 set SWE1 cleared

xθ

Programming/

erasing

possible

Wait time: Wait time:

Figure 17.16 Power-On/Off Timing (Boot Mode)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 590 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

SWE1 set SWE1 cleared

VCC

FWE

tOSC1 min 0 μs

MD2 to MD0*1

RES

SWE1 bit

tMDS*3

Except when switching modes, the level of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) must be fixed until

power-off by pulling the pins up or down.

See section 22.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.

Mode programming setup time tMDS (min) = 200 ns.

Period during which flash memory access is prohibited

(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*2

Period during which flash memory can be programmed

(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations

prohibited)

Notes:

Programming/

erasing

possible

Wait time: Wait time:

Figure 17.17 Power-On/Off Timing (User Program Mode)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 591 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

FWE

OSC1

min 0μs

MDS

RESW

MD2 to MD0

RES

SWE1 bit

Mode

change

Boot

mode Mode

change*

User

mode

User program mode User

mode User program

mode

SWE1 set SWE1

cleared

When entering boot mode or making a transition from boot mode to another mode, mode switching must be

carried out by means of RES input

When making a transition from boot mode to another mode, a mode programming setup time t

MDS

(min) of 200

ns is necessary with respect to RES clearance timing.

See section 22.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.

Wait time:

Period during which flash memory access is prohibited

(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*

Period during which flash memory can be programmed

(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited)

Notes:

Wait time:

Programming/

erasing possible

Wait time:

Programming/

erasing possible

Wait time:

Programming/

erasing possible

Wait time:

Programming/

erasing possible

Figure 17.18 Mode Transition Timing

(Example: Boot Mode → User Mode ↔ User Program Mode)

Section 17 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 592 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

17.14 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Masked ROM Version

The masked ROM version does not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are

provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 17.9 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT

version but not in the masked ROM version. If a register listed in table 17.9 is read in the masked

ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed on

the F-ZTAT version is switched to a masked ROM version product, it must be modified to ensure

that the registers in table 17.9 have no effect.

Table 17.9 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Masked ROM Version

Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1 H'FFA8

Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2 H'FFA9

Erase block register 1 EBR1 H'FFAA

Erase block register 2 EBR2 H'FFAB

RAM emulation register RAMER H'FEDB

Serial control register x SCRX H'FDB4

Section 18 Masked ROM

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 593 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 18 Masked ROM

This LSI incorporates a masked ROM which has the following features.

18.1 Features

• Size

Product Class ROM Size ROM Address (Modes 6 and 7)

H8S/2218 Group HD6432217 64 kbytes H'000000 to H'00FFFF

H8S/2212 Group HD6432211 64 kbytes H'000000 to H'00FFFF

HD6432210, HD6432210S 32 kbytes H'000000 to H'007FFF

• Connected to the bus master through 16-bit data bus, enabling one-state access to both byte

data and word data.

Figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip masked ROM.

Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)

Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)

H'000000

H'000002

H'000001

H'000003

H'00FFFE H'00FFFF

Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of On-Chip Masked ROM (64 kbytes)

Section 18 Masked ROM

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 594 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 595 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

This LSI has an on-chip clock pulse generator that generates the system clock (φ), the bus master

clock, and internal clocks. The clock pulse generator consists of a main clock oscillator, duty

adjustment circuit, clock select circuit, medium-speed clock divider, bus master clock selection

circuit, subclock oscillator, waveform shaping circuit, PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and USB

operating clock selection circuit. A block diagram of clock pulse generator is shown in figure

19.1.

Duty

adjustment

circuit

EXTAL

XTAL

Main

clock

oscillator

USB

operation

clock

selection circuit

OSC1

OSC2

Subclock

oscillator

Waveform

generation

circuit

Medium-

speed

clock divider

System clock

to φ pin

USB operation

clock

to USB

RTC clock

to RTC

Internal clock

to peripheral

modules

Bus master cloc

to CPU,

DMAC

USB clock

to USB

φ/2

to φ/32

SCK2 to SCK0

UCKS3 to UCKS0

SCKCR

RFCUT

48MHz

LPWRCR

UCTLR

Bus

master

clock

selection

circuit

Clock

selection

circuit φ

φ SUB

Legend:

LPWRCR: Low power control register

SCKCR: System clock control register

UCTLR: USB control register

PLL

circuit

Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator

The frequency of the main clock oscillator can be changed by software by means of settings in the

low-power control register (LPWRCR) and system clock control register (SCKCR). PLL 48-MHz

clock can be selected by software by means of setting the USB control register (UCTLR). For

details, refer to section 14, Universal Serial Bus (USB).

CPG0600B_000020020900

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 596 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

19.1 Register Descriptions

The on-chip clock pulse generator has the following registers.

• System clock control register (SCKCR)

• Low-power control register (LPWRCR)

19.1.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR)

SCKCR controls φ clock output and medium-speed mode.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 PSTOP 0 R/W φ Clock Output Disable

Controls φ output. The operation of this bit changes

depending on the operating mode. For details, see section

20.11, φ Clock Output Disabling Function.

0: φ output, fixed high, or high impedance

1: Fixed high or high impedance

6 — 0 R/W Reserved

Although this bit is readable/writable, only 0 should be

written to.

5, 4 — All 0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

3 — 0 R/W Reserved

Although this bit is readable/writable, only 0 should be

written to.

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 597 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

SCK2

SCK1

SCK0

R/W

System Clock Select 2 to 0

These bits select the bus master clock. To operate in

subactive mode or watch mode, clear the SCK2 to SCK0

bits to 0.

000: High-speed mode

001: Medium-speed clock is φ/2

010: Medium-speed clock is φ/4

011: Medium-speed clock is φ/8

100: Medium-speed clock is φ/16

101: Medium-speed clock is φ/32

11×: Setting prohibited

Legend:

×: Don’t care

19.1.2 Low Power Control Register (LPWRCR)

LPWRCR performs power-down mode control, selects sampling frequency for eliminating noise,

performs subclock oscillator control, and selects whether or not built-in feedback resistance and

duty adjustment circuit of the system clock generator used.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 DTON 0 R/W Direct Transition ON Flag

0: When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed

mode or medium-speed mode, operation shifts to sleep

mode, software standby mode, or watch mode*.

When the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive

mode, operation shifts to subsleep mode or watch mode.

1: When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed

mode or medium-speed mode, operation shifts directly to

subactive mode, or shifts to sleep mode or software

standby mode.

When the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive

mode, operation shifts directly to high-speed mode, or

shifts to subsleep mode.

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 598 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

6 LSON 0 R/W Low Speed ON Flag

0: When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed

mode or medium-speed mode, operation shifts to sleep

mode, software standby mode, or watch mode*.

When the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive

mode, operation shifts to watch mode* or shifts directly

to high-speed mode.

Operation shifts to high-speed mode when watch mode

is cancelled.

1: When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed

mode*, operation shifts to watch mode or subactive

mode*.

When the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive

mode, operation shifts to subsleep mode or watch mode.

Operation shifts to subactive mode when watch mode is

cancelled.

5 NESEL 0 R/W Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select

This bit selects the sampling frequency of the subclock

(φSUB) generated by the subclock oscillator is sampled by

the clock (φ) generated by the system clock oscillator

0: Sampling using 1/32 x φ

1: Sampling using 1/4 x φ

4 SUBSTP 0 R/W Subclock Enable

This bit enables/disables subclock generation. This bit

should be set to 1 when subclock is not used.

0: Enables subclock generation.

1: Disables subclock generation.

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 599 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

3 RFCUT 0 R/W Built-in Feedback Resistor Control

Selects whether the oscillator’s built-in feedback resistor

and duty adjustment circuit are used with external clock

input. This bit should not be accessed when a crystal

oscillator is used.

After this bit is set when using external clock input, a

transition should initially be made to software standby

mode. Switching between use and non-use of the

oscillator’s built-in feedback resistor and duty adjustment

circuit is performed when the transition is made to software

standby mode.

0: Main clock oscillator’s built-in feedback resistor and duty

adjustment circuit are used

1: Main clock oscillator’s built-in feedback resistor and duty

adjustment circuit are not used

2 ⎯ 0 R/W Reserved

This bit can be read from or written to, but the write value

should always 0.

STC1

STC0

R/W

Frequency Multiplication Factor

Specify the frequency multiplication factor of the PLL circuit

incorporated into the evaluation chip. The specified

frequency multiplication factor is valid after a transition to

software standby mode.

With this LSI, the STC1 and STC0 bits must both be set to

1. After a reset, the STC1 and STC0 bits are both cleared

to 0, and so they must be set to 1.

00: × 1

01: × 2 (Setting prohibited)

10: × 4 (Setting prohibited)

11: PLL is bypassed

Note: * When watch mode or subactive mode is entered, set high-speed mode.

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 600 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

19.2 System Clock Oscillator

Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock.

19.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator

A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure 19.2. Select the damping

resistance Rd according to table 19.1. An AT-cut parallel-resonance crystal should be used.

EXTAL

XTAL R

= C

= 10 to 22 pF

(Recommended value, including

stray capacitance of circuit board)

Figure 19.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)

Table 19.1 Damping Resistance Value

Frequency (MHz) 6 8 10 13 16 20 24

Rd (Ω) 300 200 100 0 0 0 0

Figure 19.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal resonator that has

the characteristics shown in table 19.2.

XTAL

AT-cut parallel-resonance type

EXTAL

Figure 19.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit

Table 19.2 Crystal Resonator Characteristics

Frequency (MHz) 6 8 10 13 16 20 24

RS max (Ω) 100 80 60 60 50 40 40

C0 max (pF) 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 601 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

19.2.2 Inputting External Clock

An external clock signal can be input as shown in an example in figure 19.4. If the XTAL pin is

left open, make sure that stray capacitance is no more than 10 pF. When complementary clock

input to XTAL pin, the external clock input should be fixed high in standby mode, subactive

mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode.

EXTAL

XTAL

EXTAL

XTAL

External clock input

Open

External clock input

(a) XTAL pin left open

(b) Complementary clock input at XTAL pin

Figure 19.4 External Clock Input (Examples)

Table 19.3 shows the input conditions for the external clock.

Table 19.3 External Clock Input Conditions

VCC= 2.4 to 3.6V VCC = 2.7 to 3.6V VCC = 3.0 to 3.6V

Item Symbol min max Min max min max Unit

Test

Conditions

External clock input low pulse width tEXL 65 — 25 — 15.5 — ns

External clock input high pulse width tEXH 65 — 25 — 15.5 — ns

External clock rise time tEXr — 15 — 6.25 — 5.25 ns

External clock fall time tEXf — 15 — 6.25 — 5.25 ns

Figure 19.5

Clock low pulse width level tCL 0.35 0.65 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 tcyc Figure 22.3

Clock high pulse width level tCH 0.35 0.65 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 tcyc

The external clock input conditions when the duty adjustment circuit is not used are shown in table

19.4. When the duty adjustment circuit is not used, note that the maximum operating frequency

depends on the external clock input waveform. For example, if tEXL = tEXH = 20.8 ns and tEXr = tEXf

= 5.25 ns, the maximum operating frequency becomes 19.2 MHz depending on the clcok cycle

time of 52.1 ns.

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 602 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 19.4 External Clock Input Conditions when Duty Adjustment Circuit Is not Used

Item Symbol min max Min max min max Unit

Test

Conditions

External clock input low pulse width tEXL 80 — 31.25 — 20.8 — ns Figure 19.5

External clock input high pulse width tEXH 80 — 31.25 — 20.8 — ns

External clock rise time tEXr — 15 — 6.25 — 5.25 ns

External clock fall time tEXf — 15 — 6.25 — 5.25 ns

EXH

EXL

EXr

EXf

× 0.5

EXTAL

Figure 19.5 External Clock Input Timing

19.3 Duty Adjustment Circuit

When the oscillator frequency is 5 MHz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty

cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the system clock (φ).

19.4 Medium-Speed Clock Divider

The medium-speed clock divider divides the system clock to generate φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, and φ/32.

19.5 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit

The bus master clock selection circuit selects the clock supplied to the bus master by setting the

bits SCK2 to SCK0 in SCKCR. The bus master clock can be selected from high-speed mode, or

medium-speed clocks (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, φ/32).

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 603 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

19.6 Subclock Oscillator

19.6.1 Connecting 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator

supply a clock to the subclock divider, connect a 32.768-kHz crystal resonator, as shown in figure

19.6. Figure 19.7 shows the equivalence circuit for a 32.768-kHz oscillator.

OSC1

OSC2

Note: C1 and C2 are reference values including the floating

capacitance of the board.

C2C1 = C2 = 15 pF (typ.)

Figure 19.6 Example Connection of 32.768-kHz Quartz Oscillator

OSC1 OSC2

CsLs Rs

Co = 1.5 pF (typ.)

Rs = 14 kΩ (typ.)

fw = 32.768 kHz

Type name = C001R (SEIKO EPSON)

Figure 19.7 Equivalence Circuit for 32.768-kHz Oscillator

19.6.2 Handling Pins when Subclock Not Required

If no subclock is required, connect the OSC1 pin to Vss and leave OSC2 open, as shown in figure

19.8. Set the SUBSTP bit of LPWRCR to 1. If this setting is not made, transition to power-down

mode may not complete properly in some cases.

OSC1

OSC2 Open stat

Figure 19.8 Pin Handling when Subclock Not Required

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 604 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

19.7 Subclock Waveform Generation Circuit

To eliminate noise from the subclock input to OSCI, the subclock is sampled using the dividing

clock φ. The sampling frequency is set using the NESEL bit of LPWRCR. For details, see section

19.1.2, Low Power Control Register (LPWRCR).

No sampling is performed in subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode.

19.8 PLL Circuit for USB

The PLL circuit has the function of doubling or tripling the 16-MHz or 24-MHz clock from the

main oscillator to generate the 48-MHz USB operating clock.

When the PLL circuit is used, set the UCKS3 to UCKS0 bits of UCTLR. For details, refer to

section 14, Universal Serial Bus (USB).

When the PLL circuit is not used, connect the PLVCC pin to Vcc and the PLLVSS pin to the

ground (Vss). Figure 19.9 shows examples of external circuits peripheral to the PLL.

16-MHz or

24-MHz

crystal

resonator

or external

clock

(2) PLL is not used(1) PLL is used

Note: * CB, CPB is laminated ceramic.

: 200Ω

PLLVCC

EXTAL

XTAL

PLLVSS

VCC

VSS

Vcc

CPB: 0.1μF*

CB: 0.1μF*

6- to 24-MHz

crystal

resonator

or external

clock

PLLVCC

EXTAL

XTAL

PLLVSS

VCC

VSS

Vcc

Figure 19.9 Example of PLL Circuit

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 605 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

19.9 Usage Notes

19.9.1 Note on Crystal Resonator

Since various characteristics related to the crystal resonator are closely linked to the user's board

design, thorough evaluation is necessary on the user's part, using the resonator connection

examples shown in this section as a guide. As the resonator circuit ratings will depend on the

floating capacitance of the resonator and the mounting circuit, the ratings should be determined in

consultation with the resonator manufacturer. The design must ensure that a voltage exceeding the

maximum rating is not applied to the oscillator pin.

19.9.2 Note on Board Design

When designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible to

the XTAL or OSC1 and EXTAL or OSC2 pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the

oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 19.10.

Prohibit Signal A Signal B

This LSI

EXTAL or

OSC1

XTAL or

OSC2

Figure 19.10 Note on Board Design of Oscillator Circuit

19.9.3 Note on Switchover of External Clock

When two or more external clocks (e.g. 16 MHz and 13 MHz) are used as the system clock,

switchover of the input clock should be carried out in software standby mode.

An example of an external clock switching circuit is shown in figure 19.11, and an example of the

external clock switchover timing in figure 19.12.

Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 606 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

This LSI

Ouptut port

External

interrupt

EXTAL

Request switchover of external clock

Interrupted external signal

External clock switchover signal

External clock 1

External clock 2

Control

cycle

Selector

Figure 19.11 Example of External Clock Switching Circuit

200 ns or more

(2)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Port setting (clock switchover)

Software standby mode transition

External clock switchover

External interrupt generation

(Input interrupt at least 200 ns after transition to software standby mode.)

Interrupt exception handling

(5)

SLEEP instruction

execution

Interrupt exception handling

Operation

External

clock 1

External

clock 2

(1)

Port setting

(3)

External clock

switchover

signal

EXTAL

Internal

clock φ

(4)

Wait time

External

interrupt

Active (external clock 2) Software standby mode Active (external clock 1)

Clock switchover

request

Figure 19.12 Example of External Clock Switchover Timing

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 607 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

In addition to the normal program execution state, this LSI has five power-down modes in which

operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. Low-power

operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and

so on.

This LSI's operating modes are high-speed mode and five power down modes:

1. Medium-speed mode

2. Subactive mode

3. Sleep mode

4. Subsleep mode

5. Watch mode

6. Module stop mode

7. Software standby mode

8. Hardware standby mode

1. to 5. are power-down modes. Sleep mode is CPU states, medium-speed mode is a CPU and bus

master state, subactive mode is a CPU, bus master, and on-chip peripheral function state, and

module stop mode is an internal peripheral function (including bus masters other than the CPU)

state. Some of these states can be combined.

After a reset, the LSI is in high-speed mode, flash memory, and module stop mode (other than

DMAC).

Table 20.1 and table 20.2 show the LSI internal states in each mode and the transition conditions

of power-down modes respectively. Figure 20.1 shows the diagram of mode transition.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 608 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 20.1 LSI Internal States in Each Mode

Function

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed

Sleep

Module

Stop

Watch

Subactive

Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hardware

Standby

System clock pulse generator Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted

Subclock pulse generator Function-

ing/halted

Function-

ing/halted

Function-

ing/halted

Function-

ing/halted

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing/halted

Halted

CPU Instructions Function-

ing

Medium-

speed

operation

Halted Function-

ing

Halted Subclock

operation

Halted Halted Halted

Registers Retained Retained Retained Retained Undefined

RAM Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Retained Function-

ing

Retained Retained Retained

I/O Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Retained Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Halted High

impedance

External

interrupts

NMI

IRQ0 to

IRQ4, IRQ7

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Halted

Peripheral

functions

DMAC Function-

ing

Medium-

speed

operation

Function-

ing

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(reset)

WDT Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Halted

(retained)

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(reset)

RTC Clock

operation

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Halted

(retained)

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Subclock

operation

Subclock

functioning/

halted

Halted

(reset)

Free-

running

timer

operation

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(reset)

TPU

SCI

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(reset)

A/D Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Halted

(reset) Halted

(reset)

Halted

(reset)

Halted

(reset)

Halted

(reset) Halted

(reset)

USB Function-

ing

Function-

ing

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(retained)

Halted

(reset)

PLL

circuit

Function

not

guaranteed Halted

Function not guaranteed.

Always select module stop mode.

Halted

Notes: "Halted (retained)" means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is

"operation suspended."

"Halted (reset)" means that internal register values and internal states are initialized.

In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted

(reset or retained).

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 609 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Program-halted state

Program execution state

Reset execution state

SCK2 to

SCK0 = 0 SCK2 to

SCK0 ≠ 0

SLEEP instruction

Any interrupt

SLEEP instruction

Interrupt *

SLEEP instruction

Interrupt *

LSON bit = 1

STBY pin = High

RES pin = Low

STBY pin = Low

SSBY = 0, LSON = 0

SSBY = 1,

PSS = 0, LSON = 0

RES pin = HighMRES pin = High

: Transition after exception processing

Notes:

1. NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ4, IRQ7, RTC interrupt, and USB suspend/resume interrupt

2. NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ4, IRQ7, RTC interrupt, and WDT interrupt

: Power-down

Power-on

reset state

Manual

reset state

High-speed mode

(main clock)

Hardware

standby mode

Software

standby mode

Sleep mode

(main clock)

SSBY = 1,

PSS = 1, DTON = 0

SSBY = 0,

PSS = 1, LSON = 1

Sub-speed mode

(subclock)

Watch mode

(subclock)

Medium-speed

mode

(main clock)

SLEEP Instruction

SSBY = 1, PSS = 1,

DTON = 1, LSON = 0

After the oscillation

settling time (STS2 to 0),

clock switching exception

processing

SLEEP Instruction

SSBY = 1, PSS = 1,

DTON = 1, LSON = 1

Clock switching

exception processing

Sub-active

mode

(sub clock)

SLEEP instruction

Interrupt *

LSON bit = 0

When a transition is made between modes by means of an interrupt, the transition cannot be

made on interrupt source generation alone. Ensure that interrupt handling is performed after

accepting the interrupt request.

From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the power-on reset state occurs

when RES is driven low. From any state except hardware standby mode and power-on reset, a

transition to the manual reset state occurs when MRES is driven low.

From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY is driven low.

Always select high-speed mode before making a transition to watch mode or subactive mode.

Figure 20.1 Mode Transition Diagram

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 610 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Table 20.2 Transition Conditions of Power-Down Modes

Status of Control Bit

at Transition

Pre-Transition

State SSBY PSS LSON DTON

State after Transition

Invoked by SLEEP

Command

State after Transition Back from

Power-Down Mode Invoked by

Interrupt

0 × 0 × Sleep High-speed/Medium-speed

0 × 1 × — —

1 0 0 × Software standby High-speed/Medium-speed

1 0 1 × — —

1 1 0 0 Watch High-speed

1 1 1 0 Watch Subactive

1 1 0 1 — —

High-speed/

Medium-speed

1 1 1 1 Subactive —

Subactive 0 0 × × — —

0 1 0 × — —

0 1 1 × Sub sleep Subactive

1 0 × × — —

1 1 0 0 Watch High-speed

1 1 1 0 Watch Subactive

1 1 0 1 High-speed —

1 1 1 1 — —

Legend:

×: Don’t care

—: Do not set

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 611 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.1 Register Descriptions

The registers relating to the power down mode are shown below. For details on the low power

control register (LPWRCR), refer to section 19.1.2, Low Power Control Register (LPWRCR). For

details on the system clock control register (SCKCR), refer to section 19.1.1, System Clock

Control Register (SCKCR).

• Standby control register (SBYCR)

• System clock control register (SCKCR)

• Low power control register (LPWRCR)

• Timer control/status register (TCSR_1)

• Module stop control register A (MSTPCRA)

• Module stop control register B (MSTPCRB)

• Module stop control register C (MSTPCRC)

• Extended module stop register (EXMDLSTP)

20.1.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR)

SBYCR performs software standby mode control.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 SSBY 0 R/W Software Standby

This bit specifies the transition mode after executing the

SLEEP instruction

0: Shifts to sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is

executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed

mode.

Shifts to subsleep mode when the SLEEP instruction

is executed in subactive mode.

1: Shifts to software standby mode, subactive mode, or

watch mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed

in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode.

Shifts to watch mode or high-speed mode when the

SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode.

This bit does not change when clearing software standby

mode by using external interrupts and shifting to normal

operation. 0 should be written to this bit for clearing.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 612 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

STS2

STS1

STS0

R/W

Standby Timer Select 2 to 0

These bits select the MCU wait time for clock

stabilization when cancel software standby mode, watch

mode, or subactive mode by an external interrupt. With

a crystal oscillator (tables 20.3 and 20.4), select a wait

time of tOSC2 ms (oscillation stabilization time) or more,

depending on the operating frequency. With an external

clock, there are no specific wait requirements. However,

in the F-ZTAT version a standby time of 16 wait states

cannot be used with an external clock. In this case,

select a wait time of 100 μs or more.

000: Standby time = 8192 states

001: Standby time = 16384 states

010: Standby time = 32768 states

011: Standby time = 65536 states

100: Standby time = 131072 states

101: Standby time = 262144 states

110: Standby time = 2048 states

111: Standby time = 16 states

3 OPE 1 R/W Output Port Enable

This bit selects whether address bus and bus control

signals (CS0 to CS7, AS, RD, HWR, and LWR) are

brought to high impedance state or retained in software

standby mode, watch mode, or direct transition.

0: High impedance state

1: Retained

2 to 0 —

All 0

—

Reserved

These bits are always read as 0, and cannot be

modified.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 613 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.1.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR_1)

TCSR_1 controls the operation in power-down mode transition.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

7 to 5 ⎯ All 0 ⎯ Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

4 PSS 0

R/W

Prescaler Select

0: When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-

speed mode or medium-speed mode, operation

shifts to sleep mode or software standby mode.

1: When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-

speed mode or medium-speed mode, operation

shifts to sleep mode, watch mode, or subactive

mode.

When the SLEEP instruction is executed in

subactive mode, operation shifts to subsleep

mode, watch mode, or high-speed mode

TCSR_1 differs from other registers in being more

difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to

and reading this register are given below.

Write:

TCSR_1 must be written to by a word transfer

instruction. The upper byte of the written word must

contain H′A5 and the lower byte must contain the

write data. (When the PSS bit is set to 1, the upper

byte of the written word must contain H'A510.)

Read:

TCSR_1 is read by the same procedure as for the

general registers.

3 to 0 — All 0 — Reserved

The write value should always be 0.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 614 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.1.3 Module Stop Control Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC)

MSTPCR, comprising three 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control.

Setting a bit to 1, causes the corresponding module to enter module stop mode, while clearing the

bit to 0 clears the module stop mode.

MSTPCRA

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Module

7 MSTPA7 0 R/W DMA controller (DMAC)

6 MSTPA6* 0 R/W ⎯

5 MSTPA5 1 R/W 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)

4 MSTPA4* 1 R/W ⎯

3 MSTPA3* 1 R/W ⎯

2 MSTPA2* 1 R/W ⎯

1 MSTPA1 1 R/W A/D converter

0 MSTPA0* 1 R/W ⎯

MSTPCRB

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Module

7 MSTPB7 1 R/W Serial communication interface 0 (SCI_0)

6 MSTPB6* 1 R/W ⎯

5 MSTPB5 1 R/W Serial communication interface 2 (SCI_2)

4 MSTPB4* 1 R/W ⎯

3 MSTPB3* 1 R/W ⎯

2 MSTPB2* 1 R/W ⎯

1 MSTPB1* 1 R/W ⎯

0 MSTPB0 1 R/W USB

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 615 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

MSTPCRC

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Module

7 MSTPC7* 1 R/W ⎯

6 MSTPC6* 1 R/W ⎯

5 MSTPC5* 1 R/W ⎯

4 MSTPC4* 1 R/W ⎯

3 MSTPC3* 1 R/W ⎯

2 MSTPC2* 1 R/W ⎯

1 MSTPC1 0 R/W Flash Memory (This bit is reserved in the masked

ROM version; setting is disabled.)

Note: Setting of the flash memory module stop

mode should be carried out while the

programs in the on-chip RAM and external

memory are executed. If the flash memory is

stopped with the programming in the flash

memory, the program after setting module

stop mode stops and enters to the deadlock

state.

Figure 20.2 shows the example of using

module stop mode.

0 MSTPC0* 1 R/W ⎯

Note: * MSTPA6 are readable/writable bits with an initial value of 0 and should always be written

with 1.

MSTPA4 to MSTPA2, MSTPA0, MSTPB6, MSTPB4 to MSTPB1, MSTPC7 to MSTPC2,

MSTPC0 are readable/writable bits with an initial value of 1 and should always be written

with 1.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 616 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Yes

Execute flash memory program

Branch to on-chip RAM program

Return to flash memory program

Execute flash memory program

Write 1 to flash memory module

stop bit using on-chip RAM

program

Operation in power-down mode

by entering flash memory module

stop mode

Write 0 to flash memory module

stop bit by on-chip RAM program

Program executed module

Flash memory

On-chip RAM

Flash memory

Power-down mode

setting required?

Flash memory program

execution is required?

Wait for longer than

flash memory power supply

stabilization time:

100 μs or longer

For interrupt processing, enable

RAM emulation function of EB0

area in flash memory and copy

part of vector address and

program to on-chip RAM

Figure 20.2 Example of Flash Memory Module Stop Mode Usage

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 617 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.1.4 Extended Module Stop Register (EXMDLSTP)

EXMDLSTP controls the clock supply of the RTC and USB, performs module stop mode control.

Setting a bit to 1, causes the corresponding module to enter module stop mode, while clearing the

bit to 0 clears the module stop mode.

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Module

7 to

⎯ Undefined ⎯ Reserved

Read is undefined. These bits should not to be

modified.

1 RTCSTOP 0 R/W RTC

0 USBSTOP1 0 R/W USB

20.2 Medium-Speed Mode

When the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SCKCR are set to 1, the operating mode changes to medium-

speed mode as soon as the current bus cycle ends. In medium-speed mode, the CPU operates on

the operating clock (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, or φ/32) specified by the SCK2 to SCK0 bits. The bus

masters other than the CPU (DMAC) also operate in medium-speed mode. On-chip supporting

modules other than the bus masters always operate on the high-speed clock (φ).

In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to

the bus master operating clock. For example, if φ/4 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip

memory is accessed in 4 states, and internal I/O registers in 8 states.

Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing all of bits SCK2 to SCK0 to 0. A transition is made to

high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle.

If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the LSON bit in LPWRCR are

cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt,

medium-speed mode is restored.

When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit = 1 and the LSON bit, and the PSS bit

in TCSR_1 are cleared to 0, operation shifts to the software standby mode. When software standby

mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored.

When the RES or MRES* pin is set low and medium-speed mode is cancelled, operation shifts to

the reset state. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer.

When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 618 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Figure 20.3 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

SCKCR SCKCR

φ,

supporting module clock

Bus master clock

Internal address bus

Internal write signal

Medium-speed mode

Figure 20.3 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing

20.3 Sleep Mode

20.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode

When the SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in

LPWRCR are cleared to 0, the CPU enters the sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops

but the contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Other supporting modules do not stop.

20.3.2 Exiting Sleep Mode

Sleep mode is exited by any interrupt, or signals at the RES, MRES*, or STBY pin.

• Exiting Sleep Mode by Interrupts

When an interrupt occurs, sleep mode is exited and interrupt exception processing starts. Sleep

mode is not exited if the interrupt is disabled, or interrupts other than NMI are masked by the

CPU.

• Exiting Sleep Mode by RES or MRES* Pin

Setting the RES or MRES* pin level Low selects the reset state. After the stipulated reset input

duration, driving the RES or MRES* pin High starts the CPU performing reset exception

processing.

• Exiting Sleep Mode by STBY Pin

When the STBY pin level is driven Low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 619 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.4 Software Standby Mode

20.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode

A transition is made to software standby mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed when the

SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1 and the LSON bit in LPWRCR and the PSS bit in TCSR_1 are

cleared to 0. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and oscillator all stop. However,

the contents of the CPU's internal registers, RAM data, and the states of on-chip supporting

modules other than the A/D converter, and the states of I/O ports, are retained. In this mode the

oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced.

20.4.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode

Software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI pin, IRQ7 pin, or IRQ0 to IRQ4

pins), RTC interrupt (IRQ5 signal), or USB suspend/resume interrupt (IRQ6 signal), or by means

of the RES pin, MRES pin*, or STBY pin.

• Clearing with an interrupt

When an NMI or IRQ0 to IRQ7 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and

after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, stable clocks are supplied to

the entire chip, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started.

When clearing software standby mode with an IRQ0 to IRQ7 interrupt, set the corresponding

enable bit to 1 and ensure that no interrupt with a higher priority than interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5

is generated. Software standby mode cannot be cleared if the interrupt has been masked on the

CPU side.

• Clearing with the RES or MRES* pin

When the RES or MRES* pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as

clock oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the RES or MRES* pin

must be held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES or MRES* pin goes high, the

CPU begins reset exception handling.

• Clearing with the STBY pin

When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 620 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.4.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode

Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below.

• Using a Crystal Oscillator:

Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least tOSC2 ms (the oscillation stabilization

time).

Table 20.3 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits

STS2 to STS0.

• Using an External Clock

Set bits STS2 to STS0 as any value. Usually, minimum value is recommended. A standby time

of 100 μs or longer (flash memory power supply stabilization time) should be used in the F-

ZTAT version.

Table 20.3 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings

STS2 STS1 STS0 Standby Time 24MHz 20MHz 16MHz 13MHz 10MHz 8MHz 6MHz 4MHz 2MHz Unit

0 0 0 8192 states 0.34 0.41 0.51 0.63 0.82 1.0 1.4 2.0 4.1 ms

1 16384 states 0.68 0.82 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.1 8.2

1 0 32768 states 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4

1 65536 states 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.0 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8

1 0 0 131072 states 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.1 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5

1 262144 states 10.9 13.1 16.4 20.2 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1

1 0 2048 states 0.09 0.10 0.13 0.16 0.20 0.26 0.34 0.51 1.0

1 16 states 0.67 0.80 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.0 8.0 µs

: Recommended time setting (For conditions, see tOSC2 in table 22.4.)

20.4.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example

Figure 20.4 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the

falling edge on the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge on the NMI

pin.

In this example, an NMI interrupt is accepted with the NMIEG bit in SYSCR cleared to 0 (falling

edge specification), then the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the SSBY bit is set

to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode.

Software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 621 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Oscillator

NMI

NMIEG

SSBY

NMI exception

handling

NMIEG = 1

SSBY = 1 Oscillation

stabilization

time t

OSC2

Software standby mode

(power-down mode) NMI exception

handling

SLEEP instruction

Figure 20.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example

20.5 Hardware Standby Mode

20.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode

When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode from any mode.

In hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state and stop operation, resulting in a

significant reduction in power dissipation. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip

RAM data is retained. I/O ports are set to the high-impedance state.

In order to retain on-chip RAM data, the RAME bit in SYSCR should be cleared to 0 before

driving the STBY pin low.

Do not change the state of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) while this LSI is in hardware standby

mode.

20.5.2 Clearing Hardware Standby Mode

Hardware standby mode is cleared by means of the STBY pin and the RES pin. When the STBY

pin is driven high while the RES pin is low, the reset state is set and clock oscillation is started.

Ensure that the RES pin is held low until the clock oscillator stabilizes (at least tosc1—the

oscillation stabilization time—when using a crystal oscillator). When the RES pin is subsequently

driven high, a transition is made to the program execution state via the reset exception handling

state.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 622 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.5.3 Hardware Standby Mode Timing

Figure 20.5 shows an example of hardware standby mode timing.

When the STBY pin is driven low after the RES pin has been driven low, a transition is made to

hardware standby mode. Hardware standby mode is cleared by driving the STBY pin high, waiting

for the oscillation stabilization time, then changing the RES pin from low to high.

Oscillator

RES

STBY

Oscillation

stabilization

time t

OSC1

Reset exception

handling

Figure 20.5 Hardware Standby Mode Timing (Example)

20.5.4 Hardware Standby Mode Timings

Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode:

1. To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit set to 1 in SYSCR

Drive the RES signal low at least 10 states before the STBY signal goes low, as shown in

figure 20.6. After STBY has gone low, RES has to wait for at least 0 ns before becoming high.

t2 ≥ 0 ns

t1 ≥ 10 tcyc

STBY

RES

Figure 20.6 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode

2. To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit cleared to 0 in SYSCR, or when RAM contents do

not need to be retained

RES does not have to be driven low as in the above case.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 623 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode:

Drive the RES signal low approximately 100 ns or more before STBY goes high to execute a

power-on reset.

OSC

NMIRH

t ≥100 ns

STBY

RES

NMI

Figure 20.7 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode

20.6 Module Stop Mode

Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip supporting modules.

When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of

the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating

independently.

When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module

starts operating at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules

other than the A/D converter are retained.

After reset clearance, all modules other than DMAC and flash memory are in module stop mode.

When an on-chip supporting module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is

disabled.

When a transition is made to sleep mode with all modules stopped, the bus controller and I/O ports

also stop operating, enabling current dissipation to be further reduced.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 624 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.7 Watch Mode

20.7.1 Transition to Watch Mode

CPU operation makes a transition to watch mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-

speed mode or subactive mode with SBYCR SSBY=1, LPWRCR DTON = 0, and TCSR_1

PSS = 1.

In watch mode, the CPU is stopped and peripheral modules other than RTC are also stopped. The

contents of the CPU’s internal registers, the data in internal RAM, and the statuses of the internal

peripheral modules (excluding the A/D converter) and I/O ports are retained. To make a transition

to watch mode, bits SCK2 to SCK0 in SCKCR must be set to 0.

20.7.2 Exiting Watch Mode

Watch mode is exited by any interrupt (WOVI interrupt, NMI pin, or IRQ0, to IRQ7), or signals at

the RES, MRES*, or STBY pin.

• Exiting Watch Mode by Interrupts

When an interrupt occurs, watch mode is exited and a transition is made to high-speed mode or

medium-speed mode when the LPWRCR LSON bit = 0 or to subactive mode when the LSON

bit = 1. When a transition is made to high-speed mode, a stable clock is supplied to all LSI

circuits and interrupt exception processing starts after the time set in SBYCR STS2 to STS0

has elapsed. In case of IRQ0, to IRQ7 interrupts, no transition is made from watch mode if the

corresponding enable bit/pin function switching bit has been cleared to 0, and, in the case of

interrupts from the internal peripheral modules, the interrupt enable register has been set to

disable the reception of that interrupt, or is masked by the CPU.

See section 20.4.3, Setting Oscillation Stablization Time after Clearing Software Standby

Mode, for how to set the oscillation settling time when making a transition from watch mode to

high-speed mode.

• Exiting Watch Mode by RES or MRES* pin

For exiting watch mode by the RES or MRES* pin, see section 20.4.2, Clearing Software

Standby Mode.

• Exiting Watch Mode by STBY pin

When the STBY pin level is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 625 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.8 Subsleep Mode

20.8.1 Transition to Sleep Mode

When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 0, LPWRCR LSON bit = 1,

and TCSR_1 PSS bit = 1, CPU operation shifts to subsleep mode.

In subsleep mode, the CPU is stopped. Peripheral modules other WDT and RTC are also stopped.

The contents of the CPU's internal registers, the data in internal RAM, and the statuses of the

internal peripheral modules (excluding the A/D converter) and I/O ports are retained.

20.8.2 Exiting Subsleep Mode

Subsleep mode is exited by an interrupt (interrupts from internal peripheral modules, NMI pin, or

IRQ0, to IRQ7), or signals at the RES, MRES*, or STBY pin.

• Exiting Subsleep Mode by Interrupts

When an interrupt occurs, subsleep mode is exited and interrupt exception processing starts.

In case of IRQ0, to IRQ7interrupts, subsleep mode is not cancelled if the corresponding enable

bit/pin function switching bit has been cleared to 0, and, in the case of interrupts from the

internal peripheral modules, the interrupt enable register has been set to disable the reception of

that interrupt, or is masked by the CPU.

• Exiting Subsleep Mode by RES or MRES* pin

For exiting subsleep mode by the RES or MRES* pin, see section 20.4.2, Clearing Software

Standby Mode.

• Exiting Subsleep Mode by STBY Pin

When the STBY pin level is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 626 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.9 Subactive Mode

20.9.1 Transition to Subactive Mode

When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1,

LPWRCR DTON bit = 1, LSON bit = 1, and TCSR_1 PSS bit = 1, CPU operation shifts to

subactive mode. When an interrupt occurs in watch mode, and if the LSON bit of LPWRCR is 1, a

transition is made to subactive mode. And if an interrupt occurs in subsleep mode, a transition is

made to subactive mode.

In subactive mode, the CPU operates at low speed on the subclock, and the program is executed

step by step. Peripheral modules other than WDT and RTC are also stopped.

When operating the CPU in subactive mode, the SCKCR SCK2 to SCK0 bits must be set to 0.

20.9.2 Exiting Subactive Mode

Subactive mode is exited by the SLEEP instruction or the RES, MRES*, or STBY pin.

• Exiting Subactive Mode by SLEEP Instruction

When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR DTON bit

= 0, and TCSR_1 PSS bit = 1, the CPU exits subactive mode and a transition is made to watch

mode. When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 0, LPWRCR

LSON bit = 1, and TCSR_1 PSS bit = 1, a transition is made to subsleep mode. Finally, when

the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR DTON bit = 1,

LSON bit = 0, and TCSR_1 PSS bit = 1, a direct transition is made to high-speed mode (SCK0

to SCK2 all 0).

• Exiting Subactive Mode by RES or MRES* pin

For exiting subactive mode by the RES or MRES* pin, see section 20.4.2, Clearing Software

Standby Mode.

• Exiting Subactive Mode by STBY Pin

When the STBY pin level is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.

Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2218 Group.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 627 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.10 Direct Transitions

There are three modes, high-speed, medium-speed, and subactive, in which the CPU executes

programs. When a direct transition is made, there is no interruption of program execution when

shifting between high-speed and subactive modes. Direct transitions are enabled by setting the

LPWRCR DTON bit to 1, then executing the SLEEP instruction. After a transition, direct

transition interrupt exception processing starts.

20.10.1 Direct Transitions from High-Speed Mode to Subactive Mode

Execute the SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode when the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR

LSON bit = 1, and DTON bit = 1, and TSCR_1 PSS bit = 1 to make a transition to subactive

mode.

20.10.2 Direct Transitions from Subactive Mode to High-Speed Mode

Execute the SLEEP instruction in subactive mode when the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR

LSON bit = 0, and DTON bit = 1, and TSCR_1 PSS bit = 1 to make a direct transition to high-

speed mode after the time set in SBYCR STS2 to STS0 has elapsed.

20.11 φ Clock Output Disabling Function

Output of the φ clock can be controlled by means of the PSTOP bit in SCKCR, and DDR for the

corresponding port. When the PSTOP bit is set to 1, the φ clock stops at the end of the bus cycle,

and φ output goes high. φ clock output is enabled when the PSTOP bit is cleared to 0. When DDR

for the corresponding port is cleared to 0, φ clock output is disabled and input port mode is set.

Table 20.4 shows the state of the φ pin in each processing state.

Table 20.4 φ Pin State in Each Processing State

DDR PSTOP

High-Speed Mode,

Medium-Speed Mode,

Subactive Mode

Sleep Mode, Subsleep

Mode

Software Standby

Mode, Watch Mode,

Direct Transition

Hardware Standby

Mode

0 × High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance

1 0 φ output φ output Fixed high High impedance

1 1 Fixed high Fixed high Fixed high High impedance

Legend:

×: Don’t care

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 628 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.12 Usage Notes

20.12.1 I/O Port Status

In software standby mode or watch mode, I/O port states are retained. In addition, if the OPE bit is

set to 1, the address bus and bus control signal output are retained. Therefore, there is no reduction

in current dissipation for the output current when a high-level signal is output.

20.12.2 Current Dissipation during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period

Current dissipation increases during the oscillation stabilization wait period.

20.12.3 Flash Memory Module Stop

Setting of the flash memory module stop mode should be carried out while the programs in the on-

chip RAM and external memory are executed. For details, see section 20.1.3, Module Stop Control

Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC).

20.12.4 DMAC Module Stop

Depending on the operating status of the DMAC, the MSTPA7 bit may not be set to 1. Setting of

the DMAC module stop mode should be carried out only when the DMAC is not activated.

For details, section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC).

20.12.5 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupt

• Module stop mode

Relevant interrupt operations cannot be performed in module stop mode. Consequently, if

module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to

clear the CPU interrupt source or DMAC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be

disabled before setting module stop mode.

• Subactive Mode/Watch Mode

On-chip peripheral modules (DMAC and TPU) that stop operation in subactive mode cannot

clear interrupts in subactive mode. Therefore, if subactive mode is entered when an interrupt is

requested, CPU interrupt factors cannot be cleared.

Interrupts should therefore before executing the SLEEP instruction and entering subactive or

watch mode.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 629 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

20.12.6 Entering Subactive/Watch Mode and DMAC and DTC Module Stop

To enter subactive or watch mode, set DMAC to module stop (write 1 to the MSTPA7 bit) and

reading the MSTPA7 bit as 1 before transiting mode. After transiting from subactive mode to

active mode, clear module stop.

When a DMAC activation source is generated in subactive mode, the DMAC is activated when

module stop is cleared following the transition to active mode.

20.12.7 Writing to MSTPCR

MSTPCR should only be written to by the CPU.

Section 20 Power-Down Modes

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 630 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 631 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 21 List of Registers

The register list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are

configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown

below.

1. Register Addresses (address order)

• Registers are listed from the lower allocation addresses.

• Registers are classified by functional modules.

• The access size is indicated.

2. Register Bits

• Bit configurations of the registers are described in the same order as the Register Addresses

(address order) above.

• Reserved bits are indicated by “⎯” in the bit name column.

• The bit number in the bit-name column indicates that the whole register is allocated as a

counter or for holding data.

• 16-bit or 24-bit registers are indicated from the bit on the MSB side.

3. Register States in Each Operating Mode

• Register states are described in the same order as the Register Addresses (address order) above.

• The register states described here are for the basic operating modes. If there is a specific reset

for an on-chip peripheral module, refer to the section on that on-chip peripheral module.

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 632 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

21.1 Register Addresses (Address Order)

The data bus width indicates the numbers of bits by which the register is accessed.

The number of access states indicates the number of states based on the specified reference clock.

Abbreviation

Number

of Bits

Address

Data Bus

Width

Number

of Access

States

Module

USB reserved area ⎯ ⎯ H'C00000 to

H'C0007F

⎯ ⎯ USB

USB control register UCTLR 8 H'C00080 8 3

USB test register A UTSTRA 8 H'C00081 8 3

USB DMAC transfer request register UDMAR 8 H'C00082 8 3

USB device resume register UDRR 8 H'C00083 8 3

USB trigger register 0 UTRG0 8 H'C00084 8 3

USB FIFO clear register 0 UFCLR0 8 H'C00086 8 3

USB endpoint stall register 0 UESTL0 8 H'C00088 8 3

USB endpoint stall register 1 UESTL1 8 H'C00089 8 3

USB endpoint data register 0s UEDR0s 8 H'C00090 to

H'C00093

8 3

USB endpoint data register 0i UEDR0i 8 H'C00094 to

H'C00097

8 3

USB endpoint data register 0o UEDR0o 8 H'C00098 to

H'C0009B

8 3

USB endpoint data register 3 UEDR3 8 H'C0009C to

H'C0009F

8 3

USB endpoint data register 1 UEDR1 8 H'C000A0 to

H'C000A3

8 3

USB endpoint data register 2 UEDR2 8 H'C000A4 to

H'C000A7

8 3

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 633 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Abbreviation

Number

of Bits

Address

Data Bus

Width

Number

of Access

States

Module

USB endpoint receive data size register 0o UESZ0o 8 H'C000BC 8 3

USB endpoint receive data size register 2 UESZ2 8 H'C000BD 8 3

USB interrupt flag register 0 UIFR0 8 H'C000C0 8 3

USB interrupt flag register 1 UIFR1 8 H'C000C1 8 3

USB interrupt flag register 3 UIFR3 8 H'C000C3 8 3

USB interrupt enable register 0 UIER0 8 H'C000C4 8 3

USB interrupt enable register 1 UIER1 8 H'C000C5 8 3

USB interrupt enable register 3 UIER3 8 H'C000C7 8 3

USB interrupt selection register 0 UISR0 8 H'C000C8 8 3

USB interrupt selection register 1 UISR1 8 H'C000C9 8 3

USB interrupt selection register 3 UISR3 8 H'C000CB 8 3

USB data status register UDSR 8 H'C000CC 8 3

USB configuration value register UCVR 8 H'C000CF 8 3

USB test register 0 UTSTR0 8 H'C000F0 8 3

USB test register 1 UTSTR1 8 H'C000F1 8 3

USB test register 2 UTSTR2 8 H'C000F2 8 3

USB test register B UTSTRB 8 H'C000FB 8 3

USB test register C UTSTRC 8 H'C000FC 8 3

USB test register D UTSTRD 8 H'C000FD 8 3

USB test register E UTSTRE 8 H'C000FE 8 3

USB test register F UTSTRF 8 H'C000FF 8 3

USB reserved area ⎯ ⎯ H'C00100 to

H'DFFFFF

⎯ ⎯

USB

Serial control register X SCRX 8 H’FDB4 8 2 FLASH

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 634 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Abbreviation

Number

of Bits

Address

Data Bus

Width

Number

of Access

States

Module

Standby control register SBYCR 8 H’FDE4 8 2

System control register SYSCR 8 H’FDE5 8 2

System clock control register SCKCR 8 H’FDE6 8 2

Mode control register MDCR 8 H’FDE7 8 2

Module stop control register A MSTPCRA 8 H’FDE8 8 2

Module stop control register B MSTPCRB 8 H’FDE9 8 2

Module stop control register C MSTPCRC 8 H’FDEA 8 2

SYSTEM

Pin function control register PFCR 8 H’FDEB 8 2 BSC

Low power control register LPWRCR 8 H’FDEC 8 2 SYSTEM

Clock output control register OUTCR 8 H’FDEF 8 2 PORT

Serial extended mode register A_0 SEMRA_0 8 H’FDF8 8 2

Serial extended mode register B_0 SEMRB_0 8 H’FDF9 8 2

SCI_0

IRQ sense control register H ISCRH 8 H’FE12 8 2

IRQ sense control register L ISCRL 8 H’FE13 8 2

IRQ enable register IER 8 H’FE14 8 2

IRQ status register ISR 8 H’FE15 8 2

INT

Port 1 data direction register P1DDR 8 H’FE30 8 2 PORT

Port 3 data direction register P3DDR 8 H’FE32 8 2

Port 7 data direction register P7DDR 8 H’FE36 8 2

Port A data direction register PADDR 8 H'FE39 8 2

Port B data direction register PBDDR 8 H'FE3A 8 2

Port C data direction register PCDDR 8 H'FE3B 8 2

Port D data direction register PDDDR 8 H'FE3C 8 2

Port E data direction register PEDDR 8 H'FE3D 8 2

Port F data direction register PFDDR 8 H'FE3E 8 2

Port G data direction register PGDDR 8 H'FE3F 8 2

Port A pull-up MOS control register PAPCR 8 H'FE40 8 2

Port B pull-up MOS control register PBPCR 8 H'FE41 8 2

Port C pull-up MOS control register PCPCR 8 H'FE42 8 2

Port D pull-up MOS control register PDPCR 8 H'FE43 8 2

Port E pull-up MOS control register PEPCR 8 H'FE44 8 2

Port 3 open drain control register P3ODR 8 H'FE46 8 2

Port A open drain control register PAODR 8 H'FE47 8 2

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 635 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Abbreviation

Number

of Bits

Address

Data Bus

Width

Number

of Access

States

Module

Timer start register TSTR 8 H'FEB0 16 2

Timer synchro register TSYR 8 H'FEB1 16 2

TPU

Interrupt priority register A IPRA 8 H'FEC0 8 2

Interrupt priority register B IPRB 8 H'FEC1 8 2

Interrupt priority register C IPRC 8 H'FEC2 8 2

Interrupt priority register D IPRD 8 H'FEC3 8 2

Interrupt priority register E IPRE 8 H'FEC4 8 2

Interrupt priority register F IPRF 8 H'FEC5 8 2

Interrupt priority register G IPRG 8 H'FEC6 8 2

Interrupt priority register J IPRJ 8 H'FEC9 8 2

Interrupt priority register K IPRK 8 H'FECA 8 2

Interrupt priority register M IPRM 8 H'FECC 8 2

INT

Bus width control register ABWCR 8 H'FED0 8 2

Access state control register ASTCR 8 H'FED1 8 2

Wait control register H WCRH 8 H'FED2 8 2

Wait control register L WCRL 8 H'FED3 8 2

Bus control register H BCRH 8 H'FED4 8 2

Bus control register L BCRL 8 H'FED5 8 2

BSC

RAM emulation register RAMER 8 H'FEDB 8 2 FLASH

Memory address register 0A H MAR0AH 16 H'FEE0 16 2 DMAC

Memory address register 0A L MAR0AL 16 H'FEE2 16 2

I/O address register 0A IOAR0A 16 H'FEE4 16 2

Transfer count register 0A ETCR0A 16 H'FEE6 16 2

Memory address register 0B H MAR0BH 16 H'FEE8 16 2

Memory address register 0B L MAR0BL 16 H'FEEA 16 2

I/O address register 0B IOAR0B 16 H'FEEC 16 2

Transfer count register 0B ETCR0B 16 H'FEEE 16 2

Memory address register 1A H MAR1AH 16 H'FEF0 16 2

Memory address register 1A L MAR1AL 16 H'FEF2 16 2

I/O address register 1A IOAR1A 16 H'FEF4 16 2

Transfer count register 1A ETCR1A 16 H'FEF6 16 2

Memory address register 1B H MAR1BH 16 H'FEF8 16 2

Memory address register 1B L MAR1BL 16 H'FEFA 16 2

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 636 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Abbreviation

Number

of Bits

Address

Data Bus

Width

Number

of Access

States

Module

I/O address register 1B IOAR1B 16 H'FEFC 16 2 DMAC

Transfer count register 1B ETCR1B 16 H'FEFE 16 2

Port 1 data register P1DR 8 H'FF00 8 2

Port 3 data register P3DR 8 H'FF02 8 2

Port 7 data register P7DR 8 H'FF06 8 2

Port A data register PADR 8 H'FF09 8 2

Port B data register PBDR 8 H'FF0A 8 2

Port C data register PCDR 8 H'FF0B 8 2

Port D data register PDDR 8 H'FF0C 8 2

Port E data register PEDR 8 H'FF0D 8 2

Port F data register PFDR 8 H'FF0E 8 2

Port G data register PGDR 8 H'FF0F 8 2

PORT

Timer control register_0 TCR_0 8 H'FF10 16 2

Timer mode register_0 TMDR_0 8 H'FF11 16 2

Timer I/O control register H_0 TIORH_0 8 H'FF12 16 2

Timer I/O control register L_0 TIORL_0 8 H'FF13 16 2

Timer interrupt enable register_0 TIER_0 8 H'FF14 16 2

Timer status register_0 TSR_0 8 H'FF15 16 2

Timer counter_0 TCNT_0 16 H'FF16 16 2

Timer general register A_0 TGRA_0 16 H'FF18 16 2

Timer general register B_0 TGRB_0 16 H'FF1A 16 2

Timer general register C_0 TGRC_0 16 H'FF1C 16 2

Timer general register D_0 TGRD_0 16 H'FF1E 16 2

TPU_0

Timer control register_1 TCR_1 8 H'FF20 16 2 TPU_1

Timer mode register_1 TMDR_1 8 H'FF21 16 2

Timer I/O control register _1 TIOR_1 8 H'FF22 16 2

Timer interrupt enable register _1 TIER_1 8 H'FF24 16 2

Timer status register_1 TSR_1 8 H'FF25 16 2

Timer counter_1 TCNT_1 16 H'FF26 16 2

Timer general register A_1 TGRA_1 16 H'FF28 16 2

Timer general register B_1 TGRB_1 16 H'FF2A 16 2

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 637 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Abbreviation

Number

of Bits

Address

Data Bus

Width

Number

of Access

States

Module

Timer control register_2 TCR_2 8 H'FF30 16 2

Timer mode register_2 TMDR_2 8 H'FF31 16 2

Timer I/O control register 2 TIOR_2 8 H'FF32 16 2

Timer interrupt enable register 2 TIER_2 8 H'FF34 16 2

Timer status register_2 TSR_2 8 H'FF35 16 2

Timer counter_2 TCNT_2 16 H'FF36 16 2

Timer general register A_2 TGRA_2 16 H'FF38 16 2

Timer general register B_2 TGRB_2 16 H'FF3A 16 2

TPU_2

Extended module stop register EXMDLSTP 8 H'FF40 8 2 SYSTEM

Second data register/

free running counter data register

RSECDR 8 H'FF48 8 2

Minute data register RMINDR 8 H'FF49 8 2

Hour data register RHRDR 8 H'FF4A 8 2

Day-of-week data register RWKDR 8 H'FF4B 8 2

RTC control register 1 RTCCR1 8 H'FF4C 8 2

RTC control register 2 RTCCR2 8 H'FF4D 8 2

Clock source select register RTCCSR 8 H'FF4F 8 2

RTC

DMA control register 0A DMACR0A 8 H'FF62 16 2

DMA control register 0B DMACR0B 8 H'FF63 16 2

DMA control register 1A DMACR1A 8 H’FF64 16 2

DMA control register 1B DMACR1B 8 H’FF65 16 2

DMA band control register DMABCR 16 H’FF66 16 2

DMAC

Timer control/status register TCSR 8 H'FF74 16 2 WDT

Timer counter TCNT 8 H'FF74

(write)

16 2

Timer counter TCNT 8 H'FF75

(read)

16 2

Reset control/status register RSTCSR 8 H'FF76

(write)

16 2

Reset control/status register RSTCSR 8 H'FF77

(read)

16 2

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 638 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Abbreviation

Number

of Bits

Address

Data Bus

Width

Number

of Access

States

Module

Serial mode register_0 SMR_0 8 H'FF78 8 2 SCI_0

Bit rate register_0 BRR_0 8 H'FF79 8 2

Serial control register_0 SCR_0 8 H'FF7A 8 2

Transmit data register_0 TDR_0 8 H'FF7B 8 2

Serial status register_0 SSR_0 8 H'FF7C 8 2

Receive data register_0 RDR_0 8 H'FF7D 8 2

Smart card mode register_0 SCMR_0 8 H'FF7E 8 2

Serial mode register_2 SMR_2 8 H'FF88 8 2

Bit rate register_2 BRR_2 8 H'FF89 8 2

Serial control register_2 SCR_2 8 H'FF8A 8 2

Transmit data register_2 TDR_2 8 H'FF8B 8 2

Serial status register_2 SSR_2 8 H'FF8C 8 2

Receive data register_2 RDR_2 8 H'FF8D 8 2

Smart card mode register_2 SCMR_2 8 H'FF8E 8 2

SCI_2

A/D data register AH ADDRAH 8 H'FF90 8 2

A/D data register AL ADDRAL 8 H'FF91 8 2

A/D data register BH ADDRBH 8 H'FF92 8 2

A/D data register BL ADDRBL 8 H'FF93 8 2

A/D data register CH ADDRCH 8 H'FF94 8 2

A/D data register CL ADDRCL 8 H'FF95 8 2

A/D data register DH ADDRDH 8 H'FF96 8 2

A/D data register DL ADDRDL 8 H'FF97 8 2

A/D control/status register ADCSR 8 H'FF98 8 2

A/D control register ADCR 8 H'FF99 8 2

A/D

Timer control/status register TCSR_1 8 H'FFA2 16 2 SYSTEM

Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1 8 H'FFA8 8 2 FLASH

Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2 8 H'FFA9 8 2

Erase block register 1 EBR1 8 H'FFAA 8 2

Erase block register 2 EBR2 8 H'FFAB 8 2

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 639 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Abbreviation

Number

of Bits

Address

Data Bus

Width

Number

of Access

States

Module

Port 1 register PORT1 8 H'FFB0 8 2 PORT

Port 3 register PORT3 8 H'FFB2 8 2

Port 4 register PORT4 8 H'FFB3 8 2

Port 7 register PORT7 8 H'FFB6 8 2

Port 9 register PORT9 8 H'FFB8 8 2

Port A register PORTA 8 H'FFB9 8 2

Port B register PORTB 8 H'FFBA 8 2

Port C register PORTC 8 H'FFBB 8 2

Port D register PORTD 8 H'FFBC 8 2

Port E register PORTE 8 H'FFBD 8 2

Port F register PORTF 8 H'FFBE 8 2

Port G register PORTG 8 H'FFBF 8 2

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 640 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

21.2 Register Bits

Each line covers eight bits, so 16-bit registers are shown as two lines and 32-bit registers as four

lines.

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

UCTLR ⎯ USPNDE UCKS3 UCKS2 UCKS1 UCKS0 UIFRST UDCRST USB

UTSTRA ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UDMAR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ EP2T1 EP2T0 EP1T1 EP1T0

UDRR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RWUPs DVR

UTRG0 ⎯ ⎯ EP2RDFN EP1PKTE EP3PKTE EP0oRDFN EP0iPKTE EP0sRDFN

UFCLR0 ⎯ ⎯ EP2CLR EP1CLR EP3CLR EP0oCLR EP0iCLR ⎯

UESTL0 ⎯ ⎯ EP2STL EP1STL EP3STL ⎯ ⎯ EP0STL

UESTL1 SCME ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UEDR0s D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

UEDR0i D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

UEDR0o D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

UEDR3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

UEDR1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

UEDR2 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

UESZ0o ⎯ D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

UESZ2 ⎯ D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

UIFR0 BRST ⎯ EP3TR EP3TS EP0oTS EP0iTR EP0iTS SetupTS

UIFR1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ EP1ALL

EMPTYs

EP2

READY

EP1TR EP1

EMPTY

UIFR3 CK48

READY

SOF SETC ⎯ SPRSs SPRSi VBUSs VBUSi

UIER0 BRSTE ⎯ EP3TRE EP3TSE EP0oTSE EP0iTRE EP0iTSE SetupTSE

UIER1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ EP2

READYE

EP1TRE EP1

EMPTYE

UIER3 CK48

READYE

SOFE SETCE ⎯ ⎯ SPRSiE ⎯ VBUSiE

UISR0 BRSTS ⎯ EP3TRS EP3TSS EP0oTSS EP0iTRS EP0iTSS SetupTSS

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 641 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

UISR1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ EP2

READYS

EP1TRS EP1

EMPTYS

USB

UISR3 CK48

READYS

SOFS SETCS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ VBUSiS

UDSR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ EP1DE EP3DE EP0iDE

UCVR ⎯ ⎯ CNFV0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UTSTR0 PTSTE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SUSPEND OE FSE0 VPO

UTSTR1 VBUS UBPM ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RCV VP VM

UTSTR2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UTSTRB ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UTSTRC ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UTSTRD ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UTSTRE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UTSTRF ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

SCRX ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ FLSHE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ FLASH

SBYCR SSBY STS2 STS1 STS0 OPE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SYSTEM

SYSCR ⎯ ⎯ INTM1 INTM0 NMIEG MRESE ⎯ RAME

SCKCR PSTOP ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SCK2 SCK1 SCK0

MDCR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ FWE MDS2 MDS1 MDS0

MSTPCRA MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0

MSTPCRB MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0

MSTPCRC MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0

PFCR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AE3 AE2 AE1 AE0 BSC

LPWRCR DTON LSON NESEL SUBSTP RFCUT ⎯ STC1 STC0 SYSTEM

OUTCR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PF7OUT2 PF7OUT1 PF7OUT0 PORT

SEMRA_0 SSE TCS2 TCS1 TCS0 ABCS ACS2 ACS1 ACS0 SCI_0

SEMRB_0 ACS3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ TIOCA2E TIOCA1E TIOCC0E TIOCA0E

ISCRH IRQ7SCB IRQ7SCA IRQ6SCB IRQ6SCA IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA INT

ISCRL IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA

IER IRQ7E IRQ6E IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E IRQ1E IRQ0E

ISR IRQ7F IRQ6F IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 642 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

P1DDR P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR PORT

P3DDR ⎯ P36DDR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR

P7DDR P77DDR P76DDR P75DDR P74DDR ⎯ ⎯ P71DDR P70DDR

PADDR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR

PBDDR PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR

PCDDR PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR

PDDDR PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR

PEDDR PE7DDR PE6DDR PE5DDR PE4DDR PE3DDR PE2DDR PE1DDR PE0DDR

PFDDR PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR

PGDDR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PG4DDR PG3DDR PG2DDR PG1DDR PG0DDR

PAPCR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PA3PCR PA2PCR PA1PCR PA0PCR

PBPCR PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR

PCPCR PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR

PDPCR PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR

PEPCR PE7PCR PE6PCR PE5PCR PE4PCR PE3PCR PE2PCR PE1PCR PE0PCR

P3ODR ⎯ P36ODR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ P32ODR P31ODR P30ODR

PAODR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR

TSTR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CST2 CST1 CST0 TPU

TSYR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SYNC2 SYNC1 SYNC0

IPRA ⎯ IPRA6 IPRA5 IPRA4 ⎯ IPRA2 IPRA1 IPRA0 INT

IPRB ⎯ IPRB6 IPRB5 IPRB4 ⎯ IPRB2 IPRB1 IPRB0

IPRC ⎯ IPRC6 IPRC5 IPRC4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

IPRD ⎯ IPRD6 IPRD5 IPRD4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

IPRE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IPRE2 IPRE1 IPRE0

IPRF ⎯ IPRF6 IPRF5 IPRF4 ⎯ IPRF2 IPRF1 IPRF0

IPRG ⎯ IPRG6 IPRG5 IPRG4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

IPRJ ⎯ IPRJ6 IPRJ5 IPRJ4 ⎯ IPRJ2 IPRJ1 IPRJ0

IPRK ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IPRK2 IPRK1 IPRK0

IPRM ⎯ IPRM6 IPRM5 IPRM4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 643 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

ABWCR ABW7 ABW6 ABW5 ABW4 ABW3 ABW2 ABW1 ABW0 BSC

ASTCR AST7 AST6 AST5 AST4 AST3 AST2 AST1 AST0

WCRH W71 W70 W61 W60 W51 W50 W41 W40

WCRL W31 W30 W21 W20 W11 W10 W01 W00

BCRH ICIS1 ICIS0 BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0 RMTS2 RMTS1 RMTS0

BCRL BRLE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ WAITE

RAMER ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RAMS ⎯ RAM1 RAM0 FLASH

MAR0A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DMAC

Bit 23 Bit 22 Bit 21 Bit 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bit 16

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IOAR0A Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ETCR0A Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

MAR0B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Bit 23 Bit 22 Bit 21 Bit 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bit 16

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IOAR0B Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ETCR0B Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

MAR1A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Bit 23 Bit 22 Bit 21 Bit 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bit 16

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IOAR1A Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ETCR1A Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 644 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

MAR1B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DMAC

Bit 23 Bit 22 Bit 21 Bit 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bit 16

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IOAR1B Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ETCR1B Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

P1DR P17DR P16DR P15DR P14DR P13DR P12DR P11DR P10DR PORT

P3DR ⎯ P36DR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ P32DR P31DR P30DR

P7DR P77DR P76DR P75DR P74DR ⎯ ⎯ P71DR P70DR

PADR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PA3DR PA2DR PA1DR PA0DR

PBDR PB7DR PB6DR PB5DR PB4DR PB3DR PB2DR PB1DR PB0DR

PCDR PC7DR PC6DR PC5DR PC4DR PC3DR PC2DR PC1DR PC0DR

PDDR PD7DR PD6DR PD5DR PD4DR PD3DR PD2DR PD1DR PD0DR

PEDR PE7DR PE6DR PE5DR PE4DR PE3DR PE2DR PE1DR PE0DR

PFDR PF7DR PF6DR PF5DR PF4DR PF3DR PF2DR PF1DR PF0DR

PGDR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PG4DR PG3DR PG2DR PG1DR PG0DR

TCR_0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 TPU_0

TMDR_0 ⎯ ⎯ BFB BFA MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0

TIORH_0 IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0

TIORL_0 IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0

TIER_0 TTGE ⎯ ⎯ TCIEV TGIED TGIEC TGIEB TGIEA

TSR_0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ TCFV TGFD TGFC TGFB TGFA

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TCNT_0

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TGRA_0

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

TGRB_0 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 645 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TPU_0

TGRC_0

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TGRD_0

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

TCR_1 ⎯ CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 TPU_1

TMDR_1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0

TIOR_1 IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0

TIER_1 TTGE ⎯ TCIEU TCIEV ⎯ ⎯ TGIEB TGIEA

TSR_1 TCFD ⎯ TCFU TCFV ⎯ ⎯ TGFB TGFA

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TCNT_1

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TGRA_1

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TGRB_1

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

TCR_2 ⎯ CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 TPU_2

TMDR_2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0

TIOR_2 IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0

TIER_2 TTGE ⎯ TCIEU TCIEV ⎯ ⎯ TGIEB TGIEA

TSR_2 TCFD ⎯ TCFU TCFV ⎯ ⎯ TGFB TGFA

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TCNT_2

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TGRA_2

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TGRB_2

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

EXMDLSTP ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RTCSTOP USBSTOP1 SYSTEM

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 646 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

RSECDR BSY SC12 SC11 SC10 SC03 SC02 SC01 SC00 RTC

RMINDR BSY MN12 MN11 MN10 MN03 MN02 MN01 MN00

RHRDR BSY ⎯ HR11 HR10 HR03 HR02 HR01 HR00

RWKDR BSY ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ WK2 WK1 KWK0

RTCCR1 RUN 12/24 PM RST ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

RTCCR2 ⎯ ⎯ FOIE WKIE DYIE HRIE MNIE SEIE

RTCCSR ⎯ RCS6 RCS5 ⎯ RCS3 RCS2 RCS1 RCS0

DMACR0A*1 DTSZ DTID RPE DTDIR DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 DMAC

DMACR0A*2 DTSZ SAID SAIDE BLKDIR BLKE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

DMACR0B*1 DTSZ DTID RPE DTDIR DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0

DMACR0B*2 ⎯ DAID DAIDE ⎯ DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0

DMACR1A*1 DTSZ DTID RPE DTDIR DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0

DMACR1A*2 DTSZ SAID SAIDE BLKDIR BLKE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

DMACR1B*1 DTSZ DTID RPE DTDIR DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0

DMACR1B*2 ⎯ DAID DAIDE ⎯ DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0

DMABCR*1 FAE1 FAE0 ⎯ ⎯ DTA1B DTA1A DTA0B DTA0A

DTE1B DTE1A DTE0B DTE0A DTIE1B DTIE1A DTIE0B DTIE0A

DMABCR*2 FAE1 FAE0 ⎯ ⎯ DTA1 ⎯ DTA0 ⎯

DTME1 DTE1 DTME0 DTE0 DTIE1B DTIE1A DTIE0B DTIE0A

TCSR OVF WT/IT TME ⎯ ⎯ CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 WDT

TCNT Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

RSTCSR WOVF RSTE RSTS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

SMR_0 C/A CHR PE O/E STOP MP CKS1 CKS0 SCI_0

SMR_0*3 GM BLK PE O/E BCP1 BCP0 CKS1 CKS0

BRR_0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SCR_0 TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0

TDR_0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SSR_0 TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT

SSR_0*3 TDRE RDRF ORER ERS PER TEND MPB MPBT

RDR_0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SCMR_0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SDIR SINV ⎯ SMIF

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 647 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

SMR_2 C/A CHR PE O/E STOP MP CKS1 CKS0 SCI_2

SMR_2*3 GM BLK PE O/E BCP1 BCP0 CKS1 CKS0

BRR_2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SCR_2 TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0

TDR_2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SSR_2 TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT

SSR_2*3 TDRE RDRF ORER ERS PER TEND MPB MPBT

RDR_2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SCMR_2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SDIR SINV ⎯ SMIF

ADDRAH AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 A/D

ADDRAL AD1 AD0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

ADDRBH AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2

ADDRBL AD1 AD0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

ADDRCH AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2

ADDRCL AD1 AD0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

ADDRDH AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2

ADDRDL AD1 AD0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

ADCSR ADF ADIE ADST SCAN ⎯ CH2 CH1 CH0

ADCR TRGS1 TRGS0 ⎯ ⎯ CKS1 CKS0 ⎯ ⎯

TCSR_1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PSS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SYSTEM

FLMCR1 FWE SWE1 ESU1 PSU1 EV1 PV1 E1 P1 FLASH

FLMCR2 FLER ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

EBR1 EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0

EBR2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ EB9 EB8

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 648 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Module

PORT1 P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 PORT

PORT3 ⎯ P36 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ P32 P31 P30

PORT4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ P43 P42 P41 P40

PORT7 P77 P76 P75 P74 ⎯ ⎯ P71 P70

PORT9 P97 P96 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORTA ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0

PORTB PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0

PORTC PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0

PORTD PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0

PORTE PE7 PE6 PE5 PE4 PE3 PE2 PE1 PE0

PORTF PF7 PF6 PF5 PF4 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0

PORTG ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PG4 PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0

Notes: 1. Short address mode

2. Full address mode

3. Smart card interface

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 649 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

21.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode

Name

Power-on

Reset

Manual

Reset

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed Sleep

Module

Stop Watch Subactive Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hardware

Standby Module

UCTLR Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized USB

UTSTRA Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UDMAR Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UDRR Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UTRG0 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UFCLR0 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UESTL0 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UESTL1 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UEDR0s ⎯* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UEDR0i Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UEDR0o ⎯* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UEDR3 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UEDR1 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UEDR2 ⎯* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UESZ0o ⎯* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UESZ2 ⎯* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

UIFR0 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UIFR1 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UIFR3 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UIER0 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UIER1 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UIER3 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UISR0 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UISR1 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UISR3 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UDSR Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UCVR Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 650 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Power-on

Reset

Manual

Reset

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed Sleep

Module

Stop Watch Subactive Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hardware

Standby Module

UTSTR0 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized USB

UTSTR1 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UTSTR2 Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UTSTRB Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UTSTRC Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UTSTRD Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UTSTRE Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

UTSTRF Initialized* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

SCRX Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized FLASH

SBYCR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized SYSTEM

SYSCR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

SCKCR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

MDCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

MSTPCRA Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

MSTPCRB Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

MSTPCRC Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PFCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized BSC

LPWRCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized SYSTEM

OUTCR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized PORT

SEMRA_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized SCI_0

SEMRB_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

ISCRH Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized INT

ISCRL Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IER Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

ISR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

P1DDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized PORT

P3DDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

P7DDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PADDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PBDDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PCDDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 651 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Power-on

Reset

Manual

Reset

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed Sleep

Module

Stop Watch Subactive Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hardware

Standby Module

PDDDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized PORT

PEDDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PFDDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PGDDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PAPCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PBPCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PCPCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PDPCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PEPCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

P3ODR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PAODR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TSTR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized TPU

TSYR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRA Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized INT

IPRB Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRC Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRD Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRE Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRF Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRG Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRJ Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRK Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

IPRM Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

ABWCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized BSC

ASTCR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

WCRH Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

WCRL Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

BCRH Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

BCRL Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

RAMER Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized FLASH

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 652 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Power-on

Reset

Manual

Reset

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed Sleep

Module

Stop Watch Subactive Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hardware

Standby Module

MAR0A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DMAC

IOAR0A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

ETCR0A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

MAR0B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

IOAR0B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

ETCR0B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

MAR1A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

IOAR1A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

ETCR1A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

MAR1B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

IOAR1B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

ETCR1B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

P1DR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized PORT

P3DR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

P7DR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PADR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PBDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PCDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PDDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PEDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PFDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

PGDR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TCR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized TPU_0

TMDR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TIORH_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TIORL_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TIER_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TSR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TCNT_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TGRA_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TGRB_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TGRC_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TGRD_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 653 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Power-on

Reset

Manual

Reset

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed Sleep

Module

Stop Watch Subactive Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hardware

Standby Module

TCR_1 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized TPU_1

TMDR_1 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TIOR_1 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TIER_1 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TSR_1 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TCNT_1 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TGRA_1 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TGRB_1 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TCR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized TPU_2

TMDR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TIOR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TIER_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TSR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TCNT_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TGRA_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TGRB_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

EXMDLSTP Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized SYSTEM

RSECDR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized RTC

RMINDR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

RHRDR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

RWKDR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

RTCCR1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

RTCCR2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

RTCCSR Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

DMACR0A Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized DMAC

DMACR0B Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

DMACR1A Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

DMACR1B Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

DMABCR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TCSR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized WDT

TCNT Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

RSTCSR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 654 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Power-on

Reset

Manual

Reset

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed Sleep

Module

Stop Watch Subactive Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hardware

Standby Module

SMR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized SCI_0

BRR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

SCR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TDR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

SSR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

RDR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

SCMR_0 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

SMR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized SCI_2

BRR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

SCR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

TDR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

SSR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

RDR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

SCMR_2 Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized

ADDRAH Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized A/D

ADDRAL Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

ADDRBH Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

ADDRBL Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

ADDRCH Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

ADDRCL Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

ADDRDH Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

ADDRDL Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

ADCSR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

ADCR Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

TCSR_1 Initialized Initialized

⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized SYSTEM

FLMCR1 Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized FLASH

FLMCR2 Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized

EBR1 Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized

EBR2 Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialized Initialized

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 655 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Name

Power-on

Reset

Manual

Reset

High-

Speed

Medium-

Speed Sleep

Module

Stop Watch Subactive Subsleep

Software

Standby

Hardware

Standby Module

PORT1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PORT

PORT3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORT4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORT7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORT9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORTA ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORTB ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORTC ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORTD ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORTE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORTF ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

PORTG ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Notes: ⎯ : is not initialized.

* The USB registers are no initialized by a power-on reset triggered by the WDT.

Section 21 List of Registers

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 656 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 657 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings

Table 22.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.

Table 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings

Item Symbol Value Unit

Power supply voltage VCC,

PLLVCC,

DrVCC

–0.3 to +4.3 V

Input voltage Vin –0.3 to VCC +0.3 V

Reference voltage Vref –0.3 to VCC +0.3 V

Analog input voltage VAN –0.3 to VCC +0.3 V

Operating temperature Topr Regular specifications: –20 to +75 °C

Wide-range specifications: –40 to +85* °C

Storage temperature Tstg –55 to +125 °C

Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum rating are exceeded.

Note: * The operating temperature ranges for flash memory programming/erasing are Ta = –20°C

to +75°C.

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 658 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

22.2 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range

Power supply voltage and operating frequency ranges (shaded areas) are shown in figure 22.1.

(5) When using the on-chip USB

(4) F-ZTAT versions (H8S/2218C, H8S/2212C)

(1) Mask ROM versions (except for HD6432210S)

System clock

Sub clock

System clock

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

Power ssupply voltage Vcc, PLLVcc, DrVcc (V)

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 2.4 to 3.6V

Vref = 2.4V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 MHz

Condition A:

Condition C:

Condition B:

Condition D:

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 2.7 to 3.6V

Vref = 2.7V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 16 MHz

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 3.0 to 3.6V

Vref = 3.0V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 24 MHz

Condition D: Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 3.0 to 3.6V

Vref = 3.0V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 16 to 24 MHz

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 3.0 to 3.6V

Vref = 3.0V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 24 MHz

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

(3) F-ZTAT versions (except for H8S/2218C, H8S/2212C)

System clock

Sub clock

Power ssupply voltage Vcc, PLLVcc, DrVcc (V)

Condition A:

Condition B:

Condition C:

None

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 2.7 to 3.6V

Vref = 2.7V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 16 MHz

Vcc = PLLVcc = DrVcc = 3.0 to 3.6V

Vref = 3.0V to Vcc

Vss = PLLVss = DrVss = 0V

Ta = -20 to +75 (Regular specifications)

Ta = -40 to +85 (Wide-range specifications)

f = 32.768 kHz, 6 to 24 MHz

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

System clock

Sub clock

(2) Masked ROM version (HD6432210S)

Frequency f

24 MHz

16 MHz

02.7 3.0 3.6

Power ssupply voltage Vcc, PLLVcc, DrVcc (V)

6 MHz

32.768 kHz

2.4

System clock

Sub clock

Figure 22.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 659 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

22.3 DC Characteristics

Table 22.2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 22.3 lists the permissible output currents.

Table 22.2 DC Characteristics

Condition A: VCC = PLL VCC = Dr VCC = 2.4 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 2.4 V to VCC, VSS = PLLVSS =

Dr VSS = 0 V, f = 32.768 kHz, 6 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),

Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)

Condition B: VCC = PLL VCC = Dr VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 2.7 V to VCC, VSS = PLLVSS =

Dr VSS = 0 V, f = 32.768 kHz, 6 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta = −20°C to +75°C (regular

specifications), Ta = −40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)

Condition C: VCC = PLL VCC = Dr VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to VCC, VSS = PLLVSS =

Dr VSS = 0 V, f = 32.768 kHz, 6 MHz to 24 MHz, Ta = −20°C to +75°C (regular

specifications), Ta = −40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)

Condition D: VCC = PLL VCC = Dr VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to VCC, VSS = PLLVSS =

Dr VSS = 0 V, f = 32.768 kHz, 16 MHz to 24 MHz, Ta = −20°C to +75°C (regular

specifications), Ta = −40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)

Item

Symbol

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Unit

Test

Conditions

Schmitt IRQ0 to IRQ4 V

T– V

CC × 0.2 — — V

trigger input IRQ7 V

T+ — — VCC × 0.8 V

voltage V

T+ – VT– V

CC × 0.05 — — V

Input high

voltage

RES, STBY,

NMI,

MD2 to MD0,

TRST, TCK,

TMS, TDI,

EMLE, VBUS,

UBPM, FWE*4

VIH V

CC × 0.9 — VCC + 0.3 V

EXTAL, ports

1, 3, 4, 7, 9,

and A to G

CC × 0.8 — VCC + 0.3 V

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 660 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Item

Symbol

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Unit

Test

Conditions

Input low

voltage

RES, STBY,

MD2 to MD0,

TRST, TCK,

TMS, TDI,

EMLE, VBUS,

UBPM, FWE*4

VIL –0.3 — VCC × 0.1 V

EXTAL, NMI,

ports 1, 3, 4,

7, 9, and

A to G

–0.3 — VCC × 0.2 V

All output pins VOH V

CC – 0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA Output high

voltage V

CC – 1.0 — — V IOH = –1 mA

Output low

voltage

All output pins VOL — — 0.4 V IOL = 0.8 mA

Input leakage

current

RES, VBUS,

UBPM, STBY,

NMI, EMLE,

MD2 to MD0,

FWE*4,

ports 4, 9

| Iin | — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to

VCC – 0.5 V

Three-state

leakage

current (off

state)

Ports 1, 3, 7,

and A to G

| ITSI | — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to

VCC – 0.5 V

Input pull-up

MOS current

Ports A to E

TDI, TCK,

TMS, TRST

– IP 10 — 300 µA Vin = 0 V

Input

capacitance

RES, NMI Cin — — 30 pF Vin = 0 V

f = 1 MHz

All input pins

other than

RES, NMI

— — 15 pF Ta = 25°C

Current

dissipation*1

Normal

operation

ICC*2 — 22

VCC = 3.3 V

VCC = 3.6 V

mA f = 16 MHz

(USB halts) — 31

VCC = 3.3 V

VCC = 3.6 V

mA f = 24 MHz

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 661 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

Item

Symbol

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Unit

Test

Conditions

— 30

VCC = 3.3 V

VCC = 3.6 V

mA f = 16 MHz,

When PLL3 is

used

Current

dissipation*1

Normal

operation

(USB

operates)

ICC*2

— 41

VCC = 3.3 V

VCC = 3.6 V

mA f = 24 MHz,

When PLL2 is

used

Sleep mode — 16

VCC = 3.3 V

VCC = 3.6 V

mA f = 16 MHz,

When

USB and PLL

are halted

— 22

VCC = 3.3 V

VCC = 3.6 V

mA f = 24 MHz,

When

USB and PLL

are halted

— 16

VCC = 3.3 V

— mA f = 16 MHz

(reference

value)

All modules

other than

flash memory

stopped

— 24

VCC = 3.3 V

— mA f = 24 MHz

(reference

value)

— 45 180 µA Subactive

mode

— 30*5 —

— 35 100 µA Subsleep

mode

— 20*5 —

Watch mode — 5 40 µA

Vcc = 3.3 V,

EMLE = 0

When crystal

resonator

(32.768 kHz)

is used

Standby

mode*3

— 1.0 10 µA Ta ≤ 50°C

32.768 kHz

RTC halted

EMLE = 0

— — 50 µA 50°C < Ta

32.768 kHz

RTC halted

EMLE = 0

During A/D

conversion

AlCC — 1.3 2.5 mA Vref = 3.3 V Reference

power supply

current Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA

RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 — — V

Notes: If the A/D converter is not used, the Vref pin should not be open. Even if the A/D converter

is not used, connect the Vref pin to Vcc.

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 662 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

1. Current dissipation values are for VIH min. = VCC – 0.2 V and VIL max. = 0.2 V, with all

output pins unloaded and the on-chip MOS pull-up transistors in the off state.

2. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows (Reference):

CC max. = 5 (mA) + 0.52 (mA/(MHz x V)) × VCC × f (normal operation, USB halted)

CC max. = 9 (mA) + 0.60 (mA/(MHz x V)) × VCC × f (normal operation, USB operated)

CC max. = 1 (mA) + 0.51 (mA/(MHz x V)) × VCC × f (sleep mode)

3. The values are for VRAM < VCC < 2.7 V, VIH min. = VCC × 0.9, and VIL max. = 0.3 V.

4. The FWE pin is effective only in the F-ZTAT version.

5. Reference value when setting the flash memory module stop mode is carried out while

the on-chip RAM program is executed. The value is effective in the F-ZTAT version.

Table 22.3 Permissible Output Currents

Condition A: VCC = PLL VCC = Dr VCC = 2.4 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 2.4 V to VCC, VSS = PLLVSS =

Dr VSS = 0 V, f = 32.768 kHz, 6 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),

Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)

Condition B: VCC = PLL VCC = Dr VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 2.7 V to VCC, VSS = PLLVSS =

Dr VSS = 0 V, f = 32.768 kHz, 6 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular

specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)

Condition C: VCC = PLL VCC = Dr VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to VCC, VSS = PLLVSS =

Dr VSS = 0 V, f = 32.768 kHz, 6 MHz to 24 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular

specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)

Condition D: VCC = PLL VCC = Dr VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to VCC, VSS = PLLVSS =

Dr VSS = 0 V, f = 32.768 kHz, 16 MHz to 24 MHz, Ta = −20°C to +75°C (regular

specifications), Ta = −40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)

Item Symbol Min. Typ. Max. Unit

Permissible output

low current (per pin)

All output pins IOL — — 1.0 mA

Permissible output

low current (total)

Total of all output pins ∑ IOL — — 60 mA

Permissible output

high current (per pin)

All output pins –IOH — — 1.0 mA

Permissible output

high current (total)

Total of all output pins ∑ –IOH — — 30 mA

Note: To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 22.3.

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 663 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

22.4 AC Characteristics

Figure 22.2 shows, the test conditions for the AC characteristics.

3 V

LSI output pin

C=30 pF

= 2.4 kΩ

=12 kΩ

Input/output timing measurement levels

• Low level : 1.3 V (2.4 V ≤ Vcc < 2.7 V)

: 0.8 V (2.7 V ≤ Vcc ≤ 3.6 V)

• High level : 1.3 V (2.4 V ≤ Vcc < 2.7 V

)

: 2.0 V (2.7 V ≤ Vcc ≤ 3.6 V)

Figure 22.2 Output Load Circuit

Section 22 Electrical Characteristics

Rev.7.00 Dec. 24, 2008 Page 664 of 698

REJ09B0074-0700

22.4.1 Clock Timing

Table 22.4 lists the clock timing

Table 22.4 Clock Timing